Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Reference Manual
Professional Design & Drafting Software
Chief Architect, Inc.
6500 N. Mineral Dr.
Coeur dAlene, Idaho 83815
www.chiefarchitect.com
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
19902014 by Chief Architect, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this book or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from Chief Architect,
Inc.
Chief Architect
software pursuant to a license agreement
with Open Design Alliance.
Teigha
operating system, including how to use a
mouse, open, close and save files, copy,
paste, and right-click to access contextual
menus. Help also assumes you are familiar
with Windows
terminology.
More information is available in the product
documentation in both printed and electronic
format and on Chief Architects official web
site, www.chiefarchitect.com. See
Additional Resources on page 1251.
Tool Tips
When you move the pointer over a toolbar
button or menu item, a Tool Tipdisplays,
offering a brief description of the tool. More
information displays in the Status Bar at the
bottom of the window.
Contextual Help
Online Help is a searchable menu that
provides information about all of the
tools in Chief Architect. Select Help>
Launch Help to open the programs Help
Note: The Chief Architect Viewer cannot
open files created in Chief Architect Lite. See
Chief Architect Premier vs Interiors vs Lite
on page 27.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 45 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
46
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
and explore the table of contents, browse the
Index, or Search for keywords.
The Help can also be used to provide instant
information about toolbar buttons, menu
items, and objects in your plan.
When you move the cursor over a toolbar
button or menu item, a brief summary of
that tool displays in the Status Bar. Press
the F1 key to open online Help to a page
with more information about the tool.
When an object is selected, edit handles
display. Place the cursor over an edit han-
dle and press F1 to open online Help to a
page with information about that handle.
Press the Help button in any dialog box
to open online Help to a page describing
the options in that dialog.
About Chief Architect
Select Help> About Chief Architect to
view information about your software
license, the programs version number, and
its release date. If your license has an
expiration date, it will also display here.
Contact information for Chief Architect, Inc.
is available on the More Information panel.
Chief Architect Trial Software
Chief Architect Premier X6 and Chief
Architect Interiors X6 both have Trial
versions available for free download at
www.chiefarchitect.com.
The Trial software offers the same
functionality as a purchased license with a
few limitations. Full details can be found in
the softwares Help and at
www.chiefarchitect.com.
Chief Architect strives to make our docu-
mentation as helpful as possible for all of
our customers. Please send any questions,
comments, or feedback to
documentation@chiefarchitect.com.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 46 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
47
Chapt er 2:
Fi l e Management
Chief Architect reads and edits two main
document types: .plan files and .layout files.
The complete 3D model of a structure,
surrounding terrain and any CAD data
associated with it are stored in the plan file.
Data used to create working drawings and
the links to various views or details are
stored in the layout file.
All commands related to opening, saving and
closing plans are located in theFile menu.
You can also open plans from the Startup
Options dialog. See Startup Options on
page 28.
J ust as with files created in other software
applications, you should back up your plan
and layout files externally on a regular basis
to avoid accidental loss of work.
Chapter Contents
Compatibility with Previous Versions
Organizing Your Files
Chief Architect Data
Creating a New Plan or Layout
Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files
Thumbnail Images
Auto Archive
Undo Files
Opening and Importing Files
Plan Databases
Searching for Plans
Backup Entire Plan
Closing Views and Files
Exiting Chief Architect
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 47 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
48
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Compatibility with Previous Versions
Plans and layout files produced in the
following programs can all be read by Chief
Architect X6.
Chief Architect
5.0 through X5
3D Home Architect
products, Interior Designer, and Land-
scaping and Deck Designer, Versions 9
through 2014.
Trading Spaces
Design Companion
Only the .PL1, .LA1, .plan, and .layout files
from prior versions can be opened in Chief
Architect X6. A number of steps are
recommended when migrating plans created
in an earlier program version into Chief
Architect X6. Before doing so, see Before
You Begin on page 1263.
Files that have been opened and saved in
Chief Architect X6 cannot be read by any of
the program versions listed above. To
continue to read files in the program in which
they were created, be sure to create copies of
your files before opening them in Chief
Architect X6.
Opening Chief Architect Plans
in Home Designer Programs
Plans created in Chief Architect Version 5
through X5 and Home Designer Pro Version
6 through 2014 can be opened in the latest
Home Designer programs for viewing and
annotating, but not for general editing or
drawing of architectural objects.
Plans created in Chief Architect can be set to
allow limited editability in Home Designer
programs. When this permission is enabled, a
Home Designer user can use all of their
programs drawing tools and can edit objects
in the plan that those tools can create. If an
object cannot be created in the Home
Designer program, however, it will not be
editable.
To protect some objects from being edited
when a file with editing permission is opened
in a Home Designer program, consider
locking their layers. See Locking Layers
on page 141.
Allow Editing in Select Home Designer
Products can be enabled or disabled only
when the file is opened in Chief Architect.
See General Plan Defaults Dialog on page
82.
Note: 3D Home Architect 5.0 was not devel-
oped by Chief Architect, Inc. Plans written
using 3D Home Architect 5.0 or later cannot
be read by Chief Architect software.
Chief Architect automatically archives
plans created in prior versions. See
Auto Archive on page 55.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 48 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Organizing Your Files
49
Organizing Your Files
You should keep your plan and layout files
separate from the support files needed to run
Chief Architect. To keep files organized, you
may find it helpful to create a new folder for
each project.
Chief Architect files may use imported
images, textures and other custom content
saved in their own external data files.
Consider storing copies of all external files in
the same folder as the plan and layout files
that use them so that they are easily found.
See Adding Library Content on page 799.
Here is one way to organize your files:
Create a folder in your Documents direc-
tory (My Documents in Windows XP)
called Chief Architect Plans or another
name you prefer. See Microsoft Windows
Help to learn how to create folders.
Inside this folder, make a new folder for
each client or project. Save all the files for
that client or project inside this folder,
including plan and layout files and refer-
enced external files. See Saving, Export-
ing, and Backing Up Files on page 51.
Bear in mind, though, that path names
exceeding 260 characters cannot be opened
by Chief Architect. As a result, it is a good
idea to limit the number of embedded folders
you use in your file organization method.
Once you understand the file management of
Chief Architect, you should decide on a
naming convention that suits your needs.
To specify a default Save As location
1. Select Edit> Preferences , then
select New Plans from Category list. See
New Plans Panel on page 98.
2. Under Open and Save As, click Use this
Folder. The Browse button becomes
available.
3. Browse to the folder you plan to save
your projects in. Click OK.
Chief Architect Data
When Chief Architect X6 is installed, the
program automatically creates a folder in the
user Documents directory called Chief
Architect X6 Data. This folder contains
important user-specific information saved in
the following folders and files and should not
be moved, renamed or deleted:
Archives - A folder of automatically
archived plan and layout files. See Auto
Archive on page 55.
Backdrops - A folder of custom back-
drop images. See 3D Backdrops on
page 874.
Hotkeys - A folder of hotkey assign-
ments. See Hotkeys on page 134.
It is recommended that each layout file
be saved in the same folder as the plan
file(s) associated with it. See Managing Lay-
out Links on page 1201.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 49 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
50
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Images - A folder of custom images. See
Adding Materials and Images on page
800.
lex - A folder of customized dictionaries.
See Spell Check on page 1001.
Database Libraries - A folder of user
library data. See Library Content on
page 795.
Scripts - A folder for custom Ruby
scripts. See Ruby Console on page
1247.
Templates - A folder of plan and layout
template files. See Template Files on
page 78.
Textures - A folder where you can save
image files used to create custom material
textures. See Creating Materials on
page 823.
Toolbars - A folder of customized toolbar
files. See Toolbar Customization Dia-
log on page 130.
mmaster.mat - The Master Materials List
file. See The Master List on page 1241.
sheetSizes.sheet - A list of user-created
Drawing Sheets. See Customize Sheet
Sizes Dialog on page 1166.
units.dat - A list of user-created units of
measurement. See Unit Conversions
Panel on page 99.
The name of the Chief Architect X6 Data
folder cannot be changed, but you can
specify its location on your computer in the
Preferences dialog. Its best to use a
location on your local hard drive. See
Folders Panel on page 95.
J ust as with your plan and layout files, it is a
good idea to back up your Chief Architect
X6 Data folder.
Because the Chief Architect X6 Data
contains custom user data, it is not deleted
when the program is uninstalled. See
Uninstalling Chief Architect on page 18 of
the Users Guide.
Creating a New Plan or Layout
To create a new, blank plan, select
File> New Plan.
You can also choose New Plan in the
Startup Options dialog. See Startup
Options on page 28.
By default, a new layout file will be
assigned the same name of the first
plan file sent to it, associating the layout files
with the plan files used.
New plan and layout files derive their default
settings the from currently selected template
files. See Template Files on page 78.
If the Chief Architect X6 Data folder is
renamed, moved or deleted, the pro-
gram will automatically replace it using
default information from the Chief Architect
installation folder. When this occurs, cus-
tomized user settings and custom user
library content will not be available.
Note: Only one layout file can be open at any
given time.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 50 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files
51
New, blank plans are called Untitled.plan
and new, blank layout files, Untitled.layout.
Unless these files are named and saved, they
will be lost when closed. See Saving,
Exporting, and Backing Up Files on page
51.
Units of Measurement
All plan and layout files save measurements
in either Imperial or metric units. New files
are created using one or the other, depending
on the current setting in the Preferences
dialog. When the program is first installed,
the Windows OS setting for units determines
what system is used. See New Plans Panel
on page 98.
A plan or layout files unit of measurement
must be specified before it is created and
cannot be changed later. If you normally
work in one set of units but need to create a
new file using the other, select File>
Templates> New Plan From Template
to open a new file using an appropriate
template without changing your Preferences
settings. See Opening Template Files on
page 79.
While it is recommended that you create new
plans using the type of unit that you plan to
use, you can display dimensions using any
type of unit. See Dimension Preferences
and Defaults on page 944.
Template Files
New plan and layout files are created as
copies of the current template files specified
in the Preferences dialog. See
Template Files on page 78.
Commonly used settings, defaults and other
information are included in template files.
You can customize the settings in a template
file to fit your work style and then save your
changes as a new template file. See To
create your own template plan on page 79.
If no template has been specified in the
Preferences dialog, new plans and
layouts are created using the system defaults.
System defaults cannot be modified.
Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files
Saving, exporting, and backing up your files
are three separate tasks that accomplish
different things:
Saving a plan or layout file retains your
work so that it can be later opened in
Chief Architect.
Exporting a file allows you to save certain
kinds of data in a format that can be used
by a program other than Chief Architect.
Backing up your files involves taking
steps to make sure that your valuable data
is protected and available when needed.
Whether you are saving, exporting, or
backing up your data, it is important that you
select a location on your computer for the
files you create, and also specify a short,
meaningful name that you will be able to
identify in the future.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 51 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
52
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
To save an untitled plan or layout file
1. Select File> Save to open the Save
File dialog.
2. Specify a location on your computer
where you would like to save the file.
See Organizing Your Files on page 49.
3. In the File name text field, type a name
for the file.
4. Chief Architect automatically assigns
the File of type and file extension .plan
to plan files and .layout to layout files.
5. When both the Save in location and File
name are correct, click Save.
Saving Plan and Layout Files
When you first save a new,
untitled file, you must select a
location for it on your computer and give it a
name. There are two options for saving plan
and layout files: File> Save and File> Save
As.
Both Save and Save As can be used
to save your plan and layout files; however,
they accomplish this in two different ways.
File> Save saves the current state of
your plan or layout file without changing
its name and should normally be used for
saving your work.
File> Save As opens the Save File
dialog, allowing you to save the plan or
layout file using a different name or loca-
tion on your computer.
Initially, all Open and Save As
operations go to the My Documents folder
of your computer. After that, the location last
visited is remembered and subsequent
Open or Save As commands default
to the directory last used for that operation.
This path is saved when the program exits.
The next time Chief Architect is launched,
these defaults are used.
If you prefer, you can instead specify a
directory to be used for all Open or Save
As operations in the Preferences
dialog. See New Plans Panel on page 98.
Saved Views
Any previously saved camera views and
CAD Details associated with the plan are
saved with the file.
When saving a layout, the program saves all
pages of the layout, all the links to the
various views saved in the layout, and all the
CAD objects added to the .layout file.
By default, a new layout file is assigned the
same name as the first plan file from which a
view is sent to it. It is also saved in the same
directory as the plan file. If no view has been
sent to a layout, it remains untitled until you
save it.
Although the program warns you if you
try to exit without saving, you should get
in the habit of saving plan files before exiting
the program.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 52 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files
53
Save File Dialog
The Save File dialog uses the operating
systems file save dialog format, and is also
used when exporting files. The dialog name
may vary, depending on the type of file being
saved or exported.
Choose a location on your local
computer for the file you are saving.
Any existing folders and/or files in the
current location display here.
In the File Name field, type a name for
the file. If you select an existing file
from the space above, its name will display
here automatically.
When saving a file, the program will
choose the appropriate file type from
the Save as type drop-down list. When
exporting, you may need to choose a specific
file type.
Saving Revision Files
Revisions are a common aspect of any design
project. There are a number of possible
strategies for organizing revision files:
Prepending the file name;
Appending the file name;
Saving revisions in separate folders.
To avoid confusion and potential mistakes, it
is recommended that you always give files
unique names - including revision files. If
you choose to organize your revisions by
saving them in separate folders, you should
also give each file a unique name that makes
it impossible to confuse it with another file
saved in a different folder.
1
2
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 53 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
54
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Exporting Files
Chief Architect has a number of options for
exporting and importing information out of
and your drawings. See Importing and
Exporting on page 1113.
Often, file export dialogs are simply versions
of the Save File dialog.
Similarly, file import dialogs are often
similar to the Open File dialog. See
Importing Files on page 59.
Backup Entire Plan
File> Save As is a simple way to transfer
a plan or layout to a different location on
your computer. Bear in mind, though, that
plan and layout files often reference external
data files such as imported textures, images,
and backdrops. These external files are not
affected when Save As is used.
If you transfer a plan file from one computer
to another, the program will warn you of
missing files if the external data files used by
the plan cannot be found when you open it.
Layouts are also dynamically linked to plan
files. When transferring layout files to
another computer, be aware that the plan files
are also external file references and are not
actually contained in the layout.
When transferring plans or layouts to another
computer that does not have these external
files, use the Backup Entire Plan tool.
See Backup Entire Plan on page 64.
Backing Up Your Files
It is always a good idea to create
backup copies of all your important
files on your computer.
It is strongly recommended, however, that
you never save directly:
Across a network, such as onto a server;
Onto removable media such as a USB
thumb drive, CD, or DVD;
Across the Internet.
Instead, copy your files to such locations in
Windows Explorer only after you have saved
them on your computers hard drive and
exited the program.
Similarly, you should never open files saved
in these locations. Copy the files to the local
hard drive, and then open them. See
Opening and Importing Files on page 57.
Archive folders are used by Chief Architect
to manage prior versions of your files. You
should not view these files as a substitute for
your own backup routine, and should never
save a file in an archive folder. See Auto
Archive on page 55.
When backing up your Chief Architect files,
consider backing up not only your .plan and
.layout files, but your custom user data, as
well - including library content, toolbar
configurations, and textures. This custom
data is all located in the Chief Architect Data
folder, so it can be easily backed up. See
Chief Architect Data on page 49.
You can, if you wish, create a folder inside
the Data folder for your .plan and .layout
files, as well. See Organizing Your Files on
page 49.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 54 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Thumbnail Images
55
Thumbnail Images
A thumbnail is a miniature image that helps
identify a file in the Open Plan File dialog
and in the Find Plan Wizard. Any view of a
plan or any layout page can be saved as the
thumbnail. See Searching for Plans on
page 61.
If thumbnails are enabled in the
Preferences dialog, the program
automatically creates one when you first save
a new plan or layout. You can choose to
generate small or large thumbnails. See File
Management Panel on page 93.
To create a custom thumbnail image
1. You must save the file and give it a name
before you can save a thumbnail.
2. Create the 2D or 3D view that you want
to use as a thumbnail for the current file.
3. With the desired view active, select
File> Save Plan Thumbnail .
Thumbnails are saved using the same
filename as the associated plan or layout file
with the _p.jpg file extension for plans and
_l.jpg for layouts. If a thumbnail already
exists, the program asks if you want to
overwrite the existing thumbnail.
Auto Archive
The first time a plan or layout is saved, Chief
Architect creates an Archive folder in the
Chief Architect Data folder. The Archive
folder contains Auto Save and Archive files.
The program does not create Auto Save and
Archive files for untitled plans and layouts.
In order for these to be created, a file must
have been previously saved and given a
name and save location on your computer.
Further, Archive files are only updated when
you save your work.
Auto Save and Archive files should not be
viewed as a substitute for regularly saving
your work by selecting File> Save or
pressing Ctrl +S on the keyboard, nor should
they be considered an alternative to your own
file backup routine.
Archive Files
Every time a drawing is saved, Archive files
that keep a historical archive of your plan are
automatically created or updated.
Files can be archived by hour, day or most
recent save. They are renamed according to
which archiving option is selected in the
Preferences dialog. See General
Panel on page 92.
Previous
Save
Daily
Hourly
Archive files illustrating all three archive options
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 55 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
56
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Plan, layout and related files from previous
versions of the program are automatically
moved to the archive folder when the plan is
opened and saved in Chief Architect.
Archive files are meant to be for emergency
use only. If you must access an archive file,
open it as you would any other file. See
Creating a New Plan or Layout on page 50.
As soon as the file is open, use Save As
to save this file to another location.
Legacy Archive Files
If you open a Chief Architect plan or layout
file from a previous program version and
immediately Save it (not Save As ),
the Auto Archive utility will create an
additional archive file using the original
program version format. This archive file is a
copy of the original and can still be opened in
the original program version.
If you open and Save a Chief Architect
Version 10 plan or layout file, the legacy
archive file name will be appended _v10 to
help distinguish it from other archived .plan
or .layout files of the same name, and a copy
of its archive folder will be created in the
Chief Architect X6 Archives folder.
Manage Archives
Chief Architect offers two convenient ways
to access Archive folders.
Select File> Manage Auto Archives
to open the current plans Archive folder.
Click Yes in the Archived Files dialog
when the program warns you that the
number of archive files exceeds the Auto
Archive Files value.
You can also move or delete archived files
using Windows Explorer. See your Windows
documentation for more information.
Auto Save Files
As you work, Chief Architect automatically
creates Auto Save files at regular intervals
when changes are made to a file but not
saved by selecting File> Save .
These Auto Save files are appended
_auto_save.plan or _auto_save.layout and
are saved in the Archive folder.
When you close a file normally, its Auto
Save file is retained until the next time the
file is opened - at which time the Auto Save
file is overwritten.
You can enable Auto Save and set its
frequency in the Preferences dialog. See
General Panel on page 92.
Auto save files created as a result of an
improper program shutdown are appended
_auto_save_bak.plan or
_auto_save_bak.layout.
Regardless of what archiving option you
select in the Preferences dialog, if you
do not save your work regularly, your archive
files will not be updated.
Auto Save file after normal shut-down
Auto Save file after abnormal shut-down
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 56 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Undo Files
57
If your computer shuts down accidentally,
you can recover some of your work by
opening the _auto_save_bak file.
When you reopen a file after a computer shut
down or system crash, the program will
notify you if an Auto Save file newer than
the original file is found and give you the
option to one that file.
Even with Auto Save, you should save your
work manually on a regular basis using any
of the following methods:
Click the Save button.
Select File> Save .
Press Ctrl +S on the keyboard.
Undo Files
Chief Architect stores a set number of copies
of all open plan file changes, known as undo
files. Undo files are referenced whenever
you select Edit> Undo or Edit>
Redo . See Undo and Redo on page
246.
Undo files are stored in the Undo Directory,
which can be specified in the Preferences
dialog. See Folders Panel on page 95.
By default, the Undo Directory is the
Windows Temporary Directory. When you
use Windows system cleanup features, these
files can be deleted. Because of this, you
should only use these type of utilities when
Chief Architect is not running.
The maximum number of Undo files is
specified in the Maximum Undos value in
the Preference settings. If you have Undo
enabled, be sure to define a directory on a
hard drive with enough space for these files.
When Chief Architect is closed normally,
any current Undo files are deleted.
Opening and Importing Files
Opening and importing files are often similar
tasks, but accomplish two very different
things:
Opening a file refers to opening it in the
program in which it was created. Only
plan or layout files can be opened in Chief
Architect. See Compatibility with Previ-
ous Versions on page 48.
Importing a file brings data that was cre-
ated in a different program into Chief
Architect. A number of different file types
can be imported into Chief Architect.
Select File> Open Plan to open
an existing .plan file or File>
Open Layout to open an existing .layout file
located on your computer. Chief Architect
automatically browses to either the directory
A file is auto saved only if you have
saved it previously. Auto Save does not
work for unnamed files.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 57 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
58
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
last used or to a specific directory, depending
on your current Preferences settings. See
New Plans Panel on page 98.
Open File Dialog
The Open File dialog uses the operating
systems file open dialog format, and is also
used when importing files. The dialog name
may vary, depending on the type of file being
opened or imported.
Choose the location on your local
computer for the file you are opening.
Any existing folders and/or files in the
current location display here.
In the File Name field, type the files
name. If you select the file in the space
above, its name will automatically display
here.
When opening or importing a file, the
program will usually choose the
appropriate file type from the Save as type
drop-down list. When importing, you may
need to choose a specific file type.
Plan files open to the floor that was active
when the file was last saved and closed;
layout files open to the page that was active.
Never open a file located on a server or
other computer on a network, or on a
removable storage device. Copy such files to
your local machines hard drive first, and then
open the copy.
1
2
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 58 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Plan Databases
59
Importing Files
Chief Architect has a number of options for
exporting and importing information out of
and into your drawings. Often, file import
dialogs are simply versions of the Open File
dialog. See Importing and Exporting on
page 1113.
Similarly, file export dialogs are often similar
to the Save File dialog. See Exporting
Files on page 54.
Recently Opened Files
A list of recently opened and saved plan and
layout files can be accessed by selecting
File> Open Recent Files. Select one of these
files to open it without using the Open File
dialog.
The maximum number of recent files listed
in the File menu can be changed in the
Preferences dialog. You can also
specify that the recent files list display at the
bottom of the File menu rather than in a
submenu. See File Management Panel on
page 93.
The names of recent files also display in the
Startup Options dialog. Click on the name
of a file to open it. See Startup Options on
page 28.
Plan Databases
A Plan Database is a collection of plan files
along with search information about those
files. You can create one or more Plan
Databases and share them with your clients
to help them browse through your drawings
to find plans that meet their needs.
Creating a Plan Database File
Select Tools> Plan Database>
Create Plan Database to create a new
plan database file that can be used to search
for plans using the Plan Find Wizard. The
Create Plan Database dialog opens.
Use the Database File field to name the
plan database file to be created. Click
the Browse button to save this file at the
location of your choice, as well as name it.
Specify the Plan Search Path, which is
the pathname of the folder where plans
to be included in the plan database are saved.
Any plan files in this folder will be added to
1 2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 59 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
60
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
the plan database. Click the Browse button to
navigate to a folder on your computer.
The Include Subfolders checkbox
allows you to specify whether or not the
search looks only in the Plan Search Path or
if it also searches any subfolders found.
Check Use Relative Path if you
anticipate moving the folder containing
the database and plans to another location.
As long as the database and the plans it
references remain in the same folder, that
folder can be moved to another location.
When you click OK, the program searches
for plan files and adds them to the plan
database file. The program must read each
plan and analyze it so this process may take
some time.
You can Cancel the search process at any
time. If you do, your plan database will have
incomplete information and will not contain
entries for all plans in your search folder.
When all plans have been found and added to
the plan database, the program automatically
opens the new plan database file for
modification.
Editing a Plan Database File
Once a plan database file is created, it
can be modified. Select Tools> Plan
Database> Edit Plan Database, then select
the plan database file you want to modify.
Click OK to open the Edit Plan Database
dialog. You can edit any of the information in
the plan database and add and remove plans
from the database.
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 60 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Searching for Plans
61
Plans in the Database - All plans that
currently have information stored in the
plan database are listed here.
Click Add Plan to select a plan file to add
to the plan database.
Click Remove to remove the currently
selected plan from the plan database.
Plan Information - Information about
the selected plan displays and can be
edited here. This information displays when
a plan is found and selected using the Search
for Plans tool.
The Thumbnail preview image of the
selected plan displays to the right. See
Thumbnail Images on page 55.
Select a plan Style from the drop down
list.
Click the Add Style button to add the
name of a style to the list.
Enter the Price range for this plan.
The Area is automatically calculated by
the program based on the living area of
the plan when it is added to the database.
You can enter a different value if you
wish.
The number of Bedrooms is automati-
cally calculated when a plan is added to
the database. You can enter a different
number if you wish.
The number of Baths is automatically
calculated when a plan is added to the
database. You enter a different number if
you wish.
The number of Floors is automatically
calculated when a plan is added to the
database. You can enter a different num-
ber of floors if you wish.
The selected plan files Path name dis-
plays here.
Click Select File to relink the selected
plan to a file on your computer. If a plan
file is renamed, moved, or removed from
your system, the plan database will be
unable to locate it. You must then relink
the plan database to the file or remove it
to keep the plan database information
accurate.
Click Open Plan to open the selected
plan. Opening a plan closes the Plan
Database dialog. If you have not saved
any changes you made before clicking the
Open Plan button, you are asked to do so
before you continue.
Enter a Description for the plan, if
desired.
Searching for Plans
Select Tools> Plan Database>
Search for Plans to locate an existing
plan to open theFind Plan Assistant, which
helps you search specific plan database files
and define search parameters for plans based
on parameters that you define.
At the bottom of each page, the number of
plans that match your current search
parameters displays. As you modify the
parameters, this number increases or
decreases as matching plans are found.
On any page, click the Back button to
modify any previously selected parameters.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 61 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
62
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Find Plan Assistant
The Find Plan Assistant can be used to
search for plans using stored information
about each plan, such as the style of
construction and the number of bedrooms
and other room types.
When you open the Find Plan Assistant,
choose a plan database to search. Click the
Browse button to select a plan database. You
must create a plan database before you can
use theFind Plan Assistant to locate files
you created.
House Style
Select a style of house from the drop-
down list.
Specify the maximum number of floors
that you would like.
Specify the minimum and maximum
number of bedrooms that you would
like.
The number of plans in the database
that match your search parameters thus
far displays here for reference.
Click Next to continue.
1
2
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 62 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Searching for Plans
63
House Size
Specify the minimum and maximum
number of bathrooms you would like.
Specify the minimum and maximum
number of square feet that that you
would like.
Define a price range by specifying
Minimum and Maximum prices.
The number of plans in the database
that match your search parameters thus
far displays here for reference.
Click Next to continue.
1
2
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 63 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
64
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Plan Details
Click on the name of a plan to select it
and view information about it.
Basic information about the selected
plan display here.
A preview of the selected plan displays
here.
A written description of the selected
plan provides additional details
displays here.
Click Next to continue, then click Finish to
view the selected plan.
Backup Entire Plan
Because Chief Architect plans and
layouts often contain many references
to other external files, it is necessary to copy
all the associated files to a new location
1
2
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 64 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Closing Views and Files
65
when a plan or layout is moved. You can do
this easily by selecting File> Backup Entire
Plan.
Backing up an Entire Plan is important when:
Migrating legacy files created in older
program versions.
Transferring files to another computer or
sending them to another user.
Archiving or backing up your work.
To back up a plan or layout
1. To copy all associated plan or layout
files to a new directory, select File>
Backup Entire Plan . The Backup
Entire Plan dialog opens for you to
choose what files are copied.
Choose Backup All Files to copy all
plan or layout files and all externally
referenced files such as linked plan
files, inserted picture files, metafiles,
.pdf files, and texture, image, and back-
drop, and bump map graphics files.
Choose Backup Plan Files Only to
copy all associated plan files and any
externally linked files and inserted pic-
ture files, but no graphics or texture
files. This is best used only when trans-
ferring a file to a computer that already
has the graphics files installed.
Click OK.
2. The Select the Plan Backup Folder
dialog opens next. This is a typical Save
File dialog. See Saving, Exporting, and
Backing Up Files on page 51.
3. Navigate to an empty folder on your sys-
tem and select it. With the destination
folder for the backup selected, click OK.
Returning Viewer Files
When customers review and annotate files
using the Chief Architect Viewer, they only
need to return the .plan and/or .layout files.
The associated files do not need to be
returned.
Closing Views and Files
There are several ways to close a view
window:
Select File> Close to close the active win-
dow.
Press Ctrl +W on the keyboard to close
the active window.
Click the Close button in the active
views title bar or in any views tab.
Note: Always use File>Backup Entire Plan
when sending files to a user of the Chief
Architect Viewer to make sure that they have
all associated data. See Sharing Your Files
with Clients on page 45.
You must select an empty folder for the
Backup Entire Plan feature to work. If
you select an existing folder that is not empty,
the backup is cancelled.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 65 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
66
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
A tabbed view can be closed by clicking
on its tab using the middle mouse button.
Select File> Close All to close all cur-
rently open view windows instead of just
the active window.
If a plan has only one view window open and
you try to close it, the program will prompt
you to save before closing if there are any
unsaved changes. Edited cross section/
elevation views also prompt you to save
before closing.
Exiting Chief Architect
Select File> Exit to exit the program. If you
have not saved any open plans, you are
reminded to do so. It is better to save your
work before exiting than to save on exit.
When you exit from the program using File>
Exit, all Autosave files and Undo files are
automatically deleted.
Although the program warns you if you
try to exit without saving, you should get
in the habit of saving plan files before exiting.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 66 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
67
Chapt er 3:
Pr ef er ences and
Def aul t Set t i ngs
Preferences are global settings that affect the
functionality and appearance of the Chief
Architect environment, while default settings
control what objects look like when they are
initially created. You can save time and
increase your productivity by becoming
familiar with these settings and customizing
them before you begin a new project or as
needed thereafter.
Chapter Contents
Default Settings vs Preferences
Dynamic Defaults
Set as Default
Multiple Saved Defaults
Annotation Sets
Exporting and Importing Annotation Sets
Template Files
Importing Default Settings
Reset to Defaults
General Plan Defaults Dialog
Preferences Dialog
Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog
If you use special settings regularly, it is
a good idea to save your settings in a
template plan. See To create your own tem-
plate plan on page 79.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 67 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
68
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Default Settings vs Preferences
Default and preference settings have
important effects on how the tools in Chief
Architect function. Default settings are file
specific, while Preferences are global, taking
effect regardless of what file is open.
Defaults and Preferences can be customized
to suit your needs and improve your
efficiency, so it is recommended that you
become familiar with them and learn how
you can use them to your advantage.
Default Settings
Default settings determine the initial
characteristics of objects when they
are first drawn. For example, when you place
a base cabinet in a plan, its size, materials,
front items, hardware and fill style are
determined by settings in the Base Cabinet
Defaults dialog.
Some defaults affect the structure of your
model: for example, Floor, Foundation,
Framing, and Wall defaults.
Defaults are file-specific, which means that
any changes that you make to the default
settings in one plan or layout file will have
no effect on other plans or layout files. You
can, however, import the defaults settings
saved in one plan file into another. See
Importing Default Settings on page 80.
Default settings are an important aspect of
template files, which determine the initial
settings of new plan and layout files and can
be used to save you considerable time. See
Template Files on page 78.
You can access a complete list of the various
default settings in the current plan or layout
file by selecting Edit> Default Settings
from the menu.
Click the +beside a category to expand it
and access the defaults for items related to
that category.
To open the defaults dialog associated
with an item in the list, double-click on
the line item, or click on the item and then
click the Edit button.
General CAD defaults are view-specific
and are only available in views where
CAD objects can drawn. See CAD
Defaults Dialog on page 1022.
Many defaults dialogs can also be opened by
double-clicking on a parent and/or child
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 68 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Dynamic Defaults
69
toolbar button of a tool affected by the
settings in that dialog. For example, you can:
Double-click the Cabinet Tools par-
ent button to open the Defaults Settings
dialog for Cabinet tools only;
Double-click the Base Cabinet child
button to open the Base Cabinet Defaults
dialog.
A few defaults dialogs, such as CAD and
Layer Set Defaults, do not have a parent or
child tool associated with them. You can add
optional buttons to your toolbars to quickly
access these dialogs. See To add a button to
a toolbar on page 128.
Most items have one defaults dialog that
affects all objects of that type. Manual
Dimensions and the Text, Callouts, and
Markers tools, on the other hand, support
multiple Saved Defaults. If you double-click
one of these line items, a Saved Defaults
dialog will open, allowing you to access and
manage all defaults associated with that item.
See Multiple Saved Defaults on page 70.
Preferences
Preference settings influence the
overall environment of the program,
such as what the interface looks like, how the
tools are accessed, and the basic rules
governing how objects are drawn and edited.
See Preferences Dialog on page 85.
Unlike default settings, preferences are
global, which means that any changes that
you make to them will take effect in all plan
and layout files.
To access the Preferences dialog, select
Edit> Preferences from the menu.
Region and Language Settings
There are a few formatting considerations in
Chief Architect that are set based on your
Windows
Dimensions will only generate in rooms
specified as Kitchens or Baths. See The
Automatic Dimension Tools on page
962.
Plan Check
Plan Check uses the room type and
its characteristics for basic plan checking.
For example, a closet does not need a
smoke detector but a bedroom does. See
Plan Check on page 1077.
Room Labels
A label can display in floor plan view for any
area defined as a room. There are two parts
to each room label:
The Room Name, which is similar to a
Text object and can be selected and
edited. See The Text Tools on page 983.
The room area, which is not a standard
text entry and cannot be directly edited.
You can assign a custom Room Name, move
a room label or even delete it without
affecting the Room Type. See Room Types
on page 321.
Room Label Defaults
The initial settings that control the
size, font, color and other aspects of
room label appearance are controlled in the
Room Label Defaults dialog. See Room
Label Defaults on page 316.
Custom Room Labels
The Room Names that display in room labels
are often based on the Room Types assigned
in the Room Specification dialog. You can,
however create a custom name for a selected
room, also in the Room Specification
dialog. See General Panel on page 339.
Before creating a custom Room Name,
assign the Room Type most similar to the
rooms actual use. For example, if you wish
to name a room Guest Room, begin by
specifying it as a Bedroom since these
rooms have similar uses.
When a Room Name is based on its Room
Type, the name in the label will be in all
capital letters. When a custom Room Name
is used, capitalization is user-defined.
If you wish to further customize a rooms
label by adding text or a text macro, uncheck
Room labels can move or even disap-
pear when room entries are revalidated.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 323 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
324
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Show Room Label in the Room
Specification dialog and create your own
label using a Text object. See The Text
Tools on page 983.
Displaying Room Labels
The display of room labels is controlled in
the Layer Display Options dialog. By
default, room labels are placed on the
Rooms, Labels layer and use the Text Style
assigned to that layer. See Layer Display
Options Dialog on page 144.
You can specify how the area of rooms is
calculated by the program by turning on the
display of one or more of these layers:
Rooms, Standard Area is measured from
the center of interior walls to either the
outside surface of exterior walls or exte-
rior wall framing, depending on the Liv-
ing Area to setting in the General Plan
Defaults dialog. It is rounded to the near-
est square foot or mm and does not
include the area within bay, box and bow
windows. See General Plan Defaults
Dialog on page 82.
Rooms, Interior Area is measured from
the inner surfaces of all the room's walls.
Its format is set on the Dimension Format
panel of the Room Label Defaults dialog
for the current floor. See Room Label
Defaults on page 316.
Rooms, Interior Dimensions is also
measured from the inner surfaces of the
room walls. Its format is set in the Floor
Defaults dialog for the current floor.
The display of room labels can also be
controlled on a room by room basis in the
Room Specification dialog. See General
Panel on page 339.
Editing Room Labels
Room labels are similar to simple Text
objects and can be changed, moved and
resized much like any other text object. You
can also modify a room labels Text Style
and other attributes in the Room Label
Specification dialog. See Text
Specification Dialog on page 992.
The text of a room label cannot be modified
in its specification dialog, however: it must
be specified in the Room Specification
dialog. See General Panel on page 339.
If you delete a room label, the Room Type
and Room Name remain unchanged in the
Room Specification dialog. To restore the
label, check the Show Room Label
checkbox on the General panel of that dialog.
Room Area
Unlike the rest of a room label, the room area
and dimensions are not standard text entries
and cannot be edited or changed. The room
area moves, resizes and rotates with the rest
of the room label, but you can turn the area
and dimensions on or off separately in the
Layer Display Options dialog. See
Displaying Rooms on page 319.
You can customize room labels using a
variety of text macros. See Text Mac-
ros on page 1014.
Note: If you use the Convert to Rich Text edit
tool to convert a Room Label to a Text object,
it will no longer be display room size informa-
tion or update if the room type is changed.
See Convert to Rich Text on page 998.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 324 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Room Labels
325
The Interior Area room area calculation
includes the areas within bay, box or bow
windows, while the Standard Area and
Interior Dimensions calculations do not.
You can also insert room areas as well as
other information into text objects using Text
Macros. See Text Macros on page 1014.
Living Area
The Living Area label displays the area of
the floor platform for living areas in a plan. It
is found near the bottom center of the plan as
soon as a room area is defined by walls and/
or railing. The area is recalculated every time
you add, delete, or move walls, or Rebuild
Walls/Floors/Ceilings .
The Living Area displays for an individual
building if half or more of that building's area
is living area. For example, a living area
label would not display for a detached garage
that contains a bathroom or small shop.
You can choose not to display this label by
clearing the Show Living Area checkbox
in the Plan Defaults dialog or by turning off
the display of the Room Labels layer in the
Layer Display Options dialog.
The Living Area label can be moved or
deleted. To restore a deleted Living Area
label, select Tools> Checks> Plan
Check . You can click the Done button
immediately, without actually completing
Plan Check. See Plan Check on page 1077.
Living Area vs. Footprint
The Living Area should not be mistaken for
the footprint of the house. Only true livable
areas are included in the Living Area
calculation. By default, exterior and hybrid
room types such as Garage, Deck, and Porch
are not included. Neither is any room labeled
Open Below or Attic. See Available Room
Types on page 321.
Regardless of its room type, you can specify
whether a room is included in the Living
Area calculation in the RoomSpecification
dialog. See General Panel on page 339.
Living Area is measured from either the
outside surface or the outer surface of the
Main Layer of exterior walls. When walls
separate the living area from exterior or
hybrid room types, it is measured to the wall
center line. See Wall Type Definitions on
page 288.
To find the footprint of a floor
1. Click outside a plan, near an exterior
wall. This selects the exterior room
surrounding the plan.
2. Click the Make Room Polyline edit
button. This creates a polyline surround-
ing the plan from the exterior wall sur-
face.
3. You can edit the polyline shape if you
want to measure portions of a home.
4. Select the Polyline and click the Open
Object edit button. A Polyline Area
displays in the Polyline Specification
dialog. If no area is shown, the polyline
is not closed.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 325 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
326
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Decks
A Deck room is an exterior-type room that
uses deck planking and framing to create a
floor platform rather than using a floor finish
that spans the entire room area. See Floor
and Ceiling Platform Definitions on page
330.
The default settings for deck planking and
framing are set in the Deck Room Defaults
dialog. The defaults for deck post footings
are set in the Framing Defaults dialog. See
Room Defaults on page 316 and Posts
Panel on page 570.
To draw a deck, select Build> Deck> Deck
Railing , then click and drag to draw a
railing.
To create a deck without a railing, use one
of the Deck Edge tools. See Fencing
Tools on page 257.
You can also create a regular, polygon-
shaped deck using the Polygon Shaped
Deck tool. See Polygon Shaped
Deck on page 256.
A room does not have to be defined by Deck
Railing to be specified as a Deck. See
Room Types on page 321. You can also
define a room as a Deck in the Room
Specification dialog. See General Panel
on page 339.
By default, decks do not have roofs. If you
want a roof over a deck, check Roof Over
This Room in the Room Specification
dialog. See Structure Panel on page 340.
To give the roof a visible means of support,
you can select the Post to Beam option in the
Wall Specification dialog. See Rail Style
Panel on page 309.
Openings in deck railings can be created
using Doorways . See Openings in
Railings on page 358.
Deck Framing and Planking
When a Deck room is created, the floor
platform is modeled using joists, beams,
posts, and planking as specified in the Deck
Room Defaults dialog. See Structure
Panel on page 340 and Deck Panel on
page 343.
If a floor is present below the one that the
Deck room is created on, the framing will
be created there. If needed, beams may be
generated with posts beneath them, if
specified. When terrain is present, the
posts will have footings, again, if speci-
fied.
If a floor is not present below the Deck,
framing will be generated on the same
floor as the room. Beams may be created
but posts will not.
Deck framing and planking are placed on
the Framing, Deck Framing and Fram-
ing, Deck Planking layers, which are
often turned off in floor plan view. See
Layer Display Options Dialog on page
144.
If standard floor framing is present when a
room is specified as a Deck, that framing is
deleted and replaced with deck framing.
If changes are later made to the settings on
the Deck panel of the Room Specification
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 326 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Floor and Ceiling Heights
327
dialog, the deck framing and planking will be
automatically rebuilt in response. To prevent
this from happening, uncheck Automatic
Deck Framing.
Once created, the individual planking and
framing objects generated for a Deck room
can be selected and edited like other framing
objects, provided that Automatic Deck
Framing is turned off. See Editing
Framing on page 582.
To rebuild a decks framing and remove any
changes you may have made to individual
deck framing or planks, select the Deck room
and click the Build Deck Framing edit
button.
If you delete a Deck room, its deck framing
and planking will be automatically deleted,
as well. To prevent this from happening,
check Keep Deck Framing After Deck
Room is Deleted. See Deck Panel on page
343.
Floor and Ceiling Heights
Default floor and ceiling heights are defined
in the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor,
including the foundation. Use the Floor
Defaults dialog to change these values on a
floor-by-floor basis. See Floor and Room
Defaults on page 316.
Use the Room Specification dialog to set
floor heights on a room-by-room basis. See
Room Specification Dialog on page 338.
Different rooms on the same floor can have
unique floor and ceiling heights, allowing
you to create:
Split levels and bi-levels
Sunken living rooms and garages
Cathedral, vaulted, and coffered ceilings.
In 3D views, you can adjust the default floor
and ceiling height for the entire floor, the
floor and ceiling height for an individual
room, or the top and bottom heights of an
individual wall. See In 3D Views on page
319.
In order to raise or lower an areas floor or
ceiling height, you must give it a room
definition. To create room definition without
enclosing an area with solid walls, use
Railings .
Invisible walls and railings will fill in the
vertical space between floor platforms of
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 327 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
328
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
different heights as long as Generate
Between Platforms is checked in their
specification dialog. See General Panel on
page 296.
Ceiling and floor heights are interrelated.
Changing the floor height in one room can
affect ceiling heights of the rooms below.
If a rooms floor is lowered, its ceiling
height is increased while the ceiling
below that room drops.
If the floor is raised, the ceiling height
decreases while the ceiling below that
room is raised.
If the rooms above a particular room have
more than one floor height, the rooms
ceiling is stepped.
In a situation like this, a Lowered Ceiling can
be used to cover steps made by different
floor heights on the floor above. See
General Panel on page 339.
Dropped Ceilings and
Raised Floors
The structure of a dropped, or suspended,
ceiling can be specified in the Ceiling Finish
Definition dialog either for a room or the
defaults for a floor. See Floor and Ceiling
Platform Definitions on page 330.
To create a framed dropped ceiling
1. Select a room and click the Open
Object edit button.
2. On the Structure panel of the Room
Specification dialog, click the Ceiling
Finish button. See Structure Panel on
page 340.
3. In the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog:
Specify Layer 1 as the plenum space.
Specify Layer 2 as the horizontal fram-
ing. Framing member spacing and
width are set in the material definition.
See Define Material Dialog on page
831.
Specify Layer 3 as the drywall.
Specify Layer 4 as the paint color.
A dropped ceiling composed of a metal grid
requires only two layers: one for the plenum
and one for the tiles.
You can create a raised floor, such as for a
shower pan, in a similar manner by
specifying it in the Floor Finish Definition
dialog.
Split Levels
A split level can be created by raising or
lowering the floor and ceiling heights of
various areas of the plan.
In the following example, the lowest floor
height is 0, the next is 24, and the next is 48
inches. The ceiling height in each room is set
at 109 inches. See Split Levels on page
424.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 328 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Floor and Ceiling Platforms
329
Floor and Ceiling Platforms
In many ways, rooms in Chief Architect are
defined by the floor platforms below them
and the floor and/or ceiling platforms above.
You can specify the thickness and framing
materials used to construct floor and ceiling
platforms on a floor-by-floor basis in the
Framing Defaults dialog. See Floor Panels
on page 562.
You can also specify the floor and ceiling
structures of individual rooms in the Room
Specification dialog. See Structure Panel
on page 340.
Floor vs Ceiling Platforms
Floor and ceiling platforms are not the same
thing in Chief Architect. Floor platforms
have living space above them and are
designed to be weight-bearing. Ceiling
platforms, on the other hand, have living
space below them but not above them. They
are not designed to bear weight and are
typically less strong - and less thick - than
floor platforms.
Stepped Floor and
Ceiling Platforms
Each floor has default floor and ceiling
heights. You can, however, use the Room
Specification dialog to specify floor and
ceiling heights on a room by room basis to
create stepped floors and ceilings. See
Structure Panel on page 340.
If you require a single floor platform with a
uniform height and thickness but different
ceiling heights for the rooms below, specify a
lowered ceiling using the Ceiling Finish
Specification dialog. See Lowered
Ceilings on page 334.
By default, the gap between floor and ceiling
platforms that step at a railing or invisible
wall is closed off by a short section of solid
wall. If you require a gap between the
platforms, either select a single-layer wall
type or uncheck Generate Between
Platforms in the Wall or Railing
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 329 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
330
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Specification dialog. See General Panel
on page 296.
Cantilever Undersides
If a room cantilevers out past an exterior
wall, the cantilever will use the floor
platform of the room above it. You can
specify the surface material of the underside
of a cantilever on the Materials tab of the
Room Specification dialog. For no material,
select No Material from the Plan Materials
dialog. See Room Specification Dialog on
page 338.
Platform Edges
Typically, floor and ceiling platforms are
built so that they bear on top of walls. The
edges of the platform structures extend
through exterior walls to the layer of the wall
type definition with the Build Platform to
This Line setting. See Wall Type Defini-
tions on page 288.
For framed walls, the Build Platform to
This Line layer is set as the outside of the
walls Main Layer,
For concrete walls, its the inside of the
walls Main Layer.
The platforms of rooms with raised floors
and/or lowered ceilings build in the same
manner: to the Build Platform to This
Line layer of the wall type assigned to the
railing or invisible wall defining the
room. See Floor and Ceiling Heights on
page 327.
For a given wall type, you can specify a
different Build Platform to This Line wall
layer surface provided that it is on the
exterior side of the Main Layer.
In addition, you can specify that individual
walls build through floor and ceiling
platforms in the Wall Specification dialog.
See General Panel on page 296.
Platform Holes
Select Build> Floor> Hole in
Floor Platform or Hole in
Ceiling Platform, then click and drag a
rectangular polyline that forms a hole in the
designated platform.
You can also create a hole in a floor or
ceiling platform by drawing a closed CAD
polyline and then using the Convert
Polyline edit button to convert it into a
platform hole. See Convert Polyline on
page 230.
Platform hole edges derive their material
from the ceiling finish of the room directly
below the hole.
Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions
Floor and ceiling platforms are made up of
layers of different materials such as framing,
subflooring, drywall, and finish materials.
So, typically, are Floor Material Regions. See
Floor Material Regions on page 756.
You can specify the composition of floor
and/or ceiling platforms on a floor-by-floor
and also a room-by-room basis in the Floor
and Ceiling Structure Definition dialogs.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 330 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions
331
To specify the composition of the floor
and ceiling platforms for an entire floor:
open the Structure tab of the Floor
Defaults dialog and click the Floor
Structure or Ceiling Structure button.
To specify the floor and/or ceiling struc-
ture for an individual room, open the
Structure tab of its Room Specification
dialog and click the Floor Structure or
Ceiling Structure button. See Structure
Panel on page 340.
In addition to the structural layers of a
platform, floors and ceilings typically have
one or more finish layers. You can specify
floor and ceiling finish materials for an entire
floor or individual room much the way you
can structural layers: by clicking the Floor
Finish and/or Ceiling Finish button on the
Structure tab of either the Floor Defaults or
Room Specification dialog to open the
Floor or Ceiling Finish Definition dialog.
Floor and ceiling platform definitions play a
role in determining floor and ceiling heights.
Floor and ceiling finishes can be used to
create raised floors as well as dropped
ceilings. See Floor and Ceiling Heights on
page 327.
All floor and ceiling materials are used for
the calculation of the materials list. See
Materials Lists on page 1225.
Floor/Ceiling Structure Definition Dialog
The settings in the Floor and Ceiling
Structure Definition dialogs are similar to
one another. They are also similar to the
settings found in the Floor and Ceiling
Finish Definition dialogs, as well as in the
Material Layers Specification dialog for
Layered Material Polylines.
If you use the Material Painter to change
a rooms floor or ceiling finish material, it
will add that material to the rooms Floor or
Ceiling Finish Definition. Changes to a Deck
rooms planking or framing will affect its floor
structure definition. See The Material
Painter on page 818.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 331 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
332
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
The layers of the floor or ceiling
platform structure definition are listed
here. Layers are numbered and listed from
the top of the structure to its bottom.
To select a layer for editing, click on it in the
structure diagram at the bottom right of the
dialog: the arrow to the right of the diagram
points to the selected layer.
Specify the Thickness for each structural
layer by typing in the text field. The layer
thickness format can be changed by click-
ing the Number Style button.
The Total thickness of the structure defi-
nition displays here as a reference.
Click the Insert button to create a new
layer directly above the currently selected
layer in the structure definition.
To insert a layer at the bottom of the
structure definition, click on the bottom
line in the structure diagram.
Click Delete to remove the currently
active layer. The arrow to the right of the
structure diagram points to the active
layer.
Specify the characteristics of the
Selected Layer.
A preview of the selected layers fill style
displays above the Fill Style button. Click
You can also select a layer by clicking
in its Thickness text field.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 332 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions
333
on it or the Fill Style button to open the
Layer Fill Style dialog and specify a fill
style for the selected wall layer. This dia-
log is similar to the Fill Style tab for CAD
objects. See Fill Style Panel on page
1048.
Previews of the selected layers material
display above the Library Material but-
ton. Click on either preview or this button
to open the Select Library Object dialog
and select a material from the library. See
Select Library Object Dialog on page
807.
Click the Plan Materials button to select
a material from the Plan Materials dialog.
See Plan Materials Dialog on page 830 .
Click the Structure Type drop-down and
select the type of framing member used
for the platform structure. Only available
when the selected material is a Framing
type. See Framing Member Types on
page 585.
Check Auto Detail as Insulation to dis-
play insulation in the selected layer when
the Auto Detail tool is used in a cross
section view. See Auto Detail on page
870.
A diagram of the floor structure assembly
displays below the Selected Layer set-
tings. To select a layer, click on a layer in
the diagram or click in its Thickness
field. The arrow to the right of the dia-
gram points to the Selected Layer.
Specify the Energy Values of the
selected floor or ceiling structure. Not
available for Layered Material Polylines.
Specify the structures Cavity R-Value,
which is the R-value of its cavity insula-
tor: most commonly, the insulation
between wood or metal joists.
Specify the Continuous R-Value, which
is the R-value of continuous insulators
such as rigid foam sheets.
Ceiling Finish Dialog
The Ceiling Finish dialog is only available
in Chief Architect Lite.
Check Frame Lowered Ceiling to enable
the two settings that follow.
Specify the Air Gap, which is the vertical
distance between the lowered ceiling
framing and the framing of the platform
above it.
Specify the Framing Thickness, which is
the vertical depth of the framing of the
lowered ceiling.
Specify the Finish Thickness, which is
the vertical depth of the ceiling finish
material.
The Total thickness of the Ceiling Finish
Definition displays for reference.
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 333 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
334
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Special Ceilings
By default, the program builds a flat ceiling
platform on top the wall plates of a room.
More varied and complex ceilings are made
using settings in the Room Specification
dialog and the Ceiling Plane tool.
Ceiling planes are drawn and can be edited
much like roof planes. See Ceiling Planes
on page 490.
Lowered Ceilings
You can define a lowered or dropped ceiling
in a room without affecting the top plate
height of the walls by specifying the lowered
ceiling framing as a layer in the ceiling
finish.
In the following illustration, the default
ceiling height for the entire first floor is 120",
and the room on the right has a ceiling finish
lowered to 96".
To create a lowered ceiling
1. Select the room in which you would like
to specify a lowered ceiling.
2. Click the Open Object edit button
to open the Room Specification dialog.
3. On the Structure panel, click the Ceiling
Finish button to open the Ceiling Finish
Definition dialog. See Floor/Ceiling
Structure Definition Dialog on page
331.
Select Layer 1 of the ceiling finish def-
inition, then click the Insert button to
create a new layer above the current
Layer 1.
Specify the desired Thickness of the
new layer, which will form the lowered
ceiling framing.
Click either the Library or Plan Mate-
rial button and specify the new layers
material as a Framing material.
Specify the Structural Type, the type
of framing member you want to use to
frame the lowered ceiling.
4. Repeat step 3 if you require additional
layers, such as an air gap, above the low-
ered framing.
5. When you are finished, click OK to
close the Ceiling Finish Definition dia-
log.
6. On the Structure panel, notice that the
preview diagram represents the Finished
Ceiling height (F).
Normal ceiling Lowered ceiling
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 334 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Special Ceilings
335
Vaulted and Cathedral Ceilings
A cathedral ceiling has the same pitch as the
roof and is created using the underside of the
roof above the room. A vaulted ceiling
typically has a different pitch from that of the
roof and is often framed using scissor
trusses. See Scissors Trusses on page 607.
To create a cathedral ceiling
1. Build a roof for your plan. See Roofs
on page 453.
2. Select the room and open the Room
Specification dialog. See Room Speci-
fication Dialog on page 338.
3. On the Structure panel, clear the check-
box for Ceiling Over This Room.
By default, cathedrals ceiling use the ceiling
material set in the Room Specification
dialog. If you require a different material on
a given roof plane, uncheck Use Room Ceil-
ing Finish in the Roof Plane Specification
dialog. See Options Panel on page 482.
To create a vaulted ceiling
1. To create a ceiling pitch different from
the roofs, select Build> Roof> Ceiling
Plane and draw ceiling planes. See
Ceiling Planes on page 490.
2. Select each ceiling plane and specify its
pitch. See Ceiling Plane Specification
Dialog on page 492.
Tray Ceilings
A tray ceiling is flat in the center and sloped
around the perimeter, and is easily created
using the underside of roof planes above.
To create an automatic tray ceiling
1. In the Room Specification dialog, make
sure that Ceiling Over this Room is
checked, then specify the desired height
of the walls as the Ceiling Height. See
Structure Panel on page 340.
2. Make sure that Auto Rebuild Roofs is
unchecked, then build the roof. See
Build Roof Dialog on page 460.
3. Change the Ceiling Height of the room
to the desired height of the flat ceiling
surface in its center.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 335 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
336
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
In floor plan view, dashed lines indicate
where the ceiling changes from sloped to
flat. These lines are located on the Ceiling
Break Lines layer in theLayer Display
Options dialog. See Layer Display Options
Dialog on page 144. You can specify
whether ceiling break lines indicate the break
at the ceiling finish layer or the framing layer
in the Build Roof dialog. See Options
Panel on page 465.
If the roof is rebuilt after the ceiling height is
adjusted upward, the new roof will be raised
to match the new ceiling height and a tray
ceiling will not be created.
In the following example, a hip roof is built
on 8 (2400 mm) ceilings. After the roof is
built, the Ceiling Height is raised to 10
(3000 mm). The resulting ceiling follows the
roof pitch for 2 (600 mm), then becomes a
flat ceiling.
Cantilever Undersides
Occasionally, a room will cantilever out past
an exterior wall. You can specify the surface
material of the underside of a cantilever on
the Materials panel of the Room
Specification dialog. For no material, select
No Material from the Plan Materials
dialog. See Room Specification Dialog on
page 338.
Other Special Ceilings
Soffits can be used in various ways to
enhance the 3D model. Soffits ability to
follow the slope of the roof offers unlimited
possibilities, such as exposed beams or
trusses and coffered ceilings. See Special
Applications for Soffits on page 754.
Hip roof with
cathedral ceiling over.
Hip roof, ceiling over,
ceiling height raised.
Ceiling Break lines in
floor plan view.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 336 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Room Polylines
337
Polyline solids, framing members and locked
roof trusses can also be used for similar
purposes.
Room Polylines
Click the Make Room Polyline edit
button to create a standard polyline on
the Current CAD Layer that follows the
surfaces of the selected room. See Current
CAD Layer on page 1026.
Room polylines and room molding polylines
are not affected when the room is altered.
Room Molding Polylines
To create a molding polyline that
follows the interior surfaces of a
room, select the room and click the Make
Room Molding Polyline button on the edit
toolbar.
Room molding polylines can be edited just
like other molding polylines. Their shape and
height can be altered and the molding profile
can be changed. Additional molding profiles
can also be assigned. See Molding
Polylines on page 638.
Make Room Molding
Polyline Dialog
Select the Molding type to assign to the
room molding polyline from the drop-down
list. The options available will be the
moldings already assigned to the selected
room.When you convert a molding type to a
molding polyline, the room molding turns
off. See Moldings Panel on page 345.
Base Molding - Select to convert the
rooms base molding into a molding poly-
line.
Chair Rail Molding - Select to convert
the rooms chair rail molding into a mold-
ing polyline.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 337 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
338
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Crown Molding - Select to convert the
rooms crown molding into a molding
polyline.
Blank Molding - Select to generate a
blank molding polyline. The polyline fol-
lows the room perimeter and has blank
sections where the polyline crosses win-
dows and doors if these objects are at the
polyline height.
Specify the Height of the selected molding
polyline, as measured from the selected
rooms floor.
Expand Room Polyline
The Expand Room Polyline edit
button is available when you select a
room separated from other rooms by
invisible walls or railings. Select this edit
tool to create and select a temporarily
enlarged room definition that ignores those
invisible walls and railings.
To use the Expand Room Polyline tool
1. Click in a room defined by at least one
invisible wall or railing.
2. Click the Expand Room Polyline
edit button.
3. Click the Make Room Polyline or
Make Room Molding Polyline edit
button to create a polyline that follows
the interior surfaces of walls, ignoring
invisible walls and railings.
Expand Room Polyline does not create
a new room and cannot be used in
combination with the Auto Interior
Dimensions or Auto NKBA
Elevation Dimension
Defaults and in the Dimension Defaults
dialogs for a layout file or CAD Detail
window, only the CAD Objects settings on
this panel will be available.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 950 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Dimension Defaults Dialog
951
The Walls settings affect Manual and
Interior Dimensions and are also
available in most Auto Dimension Defaults
dialogs. See The Manually Drawn
Dimension Tools on page 959 and Auto
Dimension Defaults Dialogs on page 955.
The first two settings also determine the
marked location in wall assemblies referred
to by Extension Lines as well as the Reach
and 1st Line Offset settings. See The
Dimension Layer on page 290.
Select Surfaces to locate exterior walls
by outer surface and interior walls by one
of their surfaces.
Select Wall Dimension Layer to locate
walls at the Dimension Layer. A walls
Dimension Layer is specified in its wall
type. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog
on page 291.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 951 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
952
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
The Wall Options settings control how
dimensions locate interior walls where
they intersect exterior walls, and only apply
to interior walls drawn perpendicular to the
exterior walls they intersect. They are
available in the Auto Exterior Dimension
Defaults dialog but not the other Auto
Dimension Defaults dialogs.
Select Interior Wall Centers to have
dimension lines locate the centers of inte-
rior walls. If Wall Dimension Layer is
selected above, dimensions locate interior
walls at the center of their Main Layers.
See The Main Layer on page 289.
Select Primary Wall Side to have
dimension lines locate one side of interior
walls.
Select Both Wall Sides to have dimen-
sion lines locate both surfaces of interior
and exterior walls. Wall thicknesses are
also dimensioned.
Check Interior Walls Only for dimen-
sions to ignore the interior surface of
exterior walls and the thicknesses of inte-
rior walls. Only available when Both
Wall Surfaces is selected.
The Cabinets options affect how
dimension lines locate objects cabinets
and cabinet fillers and are also available in
the Auto Interior and Auto Elevation
Dimension Defaults dialogs.
Check Sides to locate the sides of cabinet
objects. The sides must be perpendicular
to the dimension line.
Check Corners to locate the corners of
all cabinet objects within the Reach area.
Angled cabinets are dimensioned to their
corners at a right angle to the dimension
line. A cabinets front or sides do not
need to be perpendicular or parallel to the
dimension line for its corners to be
located.
Check to locate the Centers of all cabinet
objects within the Reach area. A cabi-
nets front or sides do not need to be per-
pendicular or parallel to the dimension
line for its center to be located.
The Fixtures/Appliances options
affect how dimension lines locate
appliances and other fixtures and are also
available in the Auto Interior and Auto
Elevation Dimension Defaults dialogs.
Check to locate the Sides/Corners of
appliances and other fixtures. For sides to
be located, they must be perpendicular to
the dimension line.
Check to locate the Centers of all fix-
tures within the Reach area. An objects
front or sides do not need to be perpen-
dicular or parallel to the dimension line
for its center to be located.
The Furniture options control how
furnishings are located by dimension
lines and are also available in the Auto
Interior and Auto Elevation Dimension
Defaults dialogs.
Check to locate the Sides/Corners of fur-
nishings. For sides to be located, they
must be perpendicular to the dimension
line.
Check to locate the Centers of all fur-
nishings within the Reach area. An
objects front or sides do not need to be
Note: Walls specified as No Locate will not be
located by some dimension tools. See No
Locate on page 272.
2
3
4
5
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 952 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Dimension Defaults Dialog
953
perpendicular or parallel to the dimension
line for its center to be located.
The Openings options control how
wall openings are located by dimension
lines and are also available in most Auto
Dimension Defaults dialogs.
Select Centers for dimensions to locate
the centers of wall openings.
Select Sides to locate both sides of wall
openings. This option locates the nominal
width - not the rough opening.
Select Casing to locate both sides of wall
openings at the outer edges of the casing.
Because interior and exterior casing often
has different widths, an opening may
have different interior and exterior
dimensions when this option is selected.
Select Rough Opening to locate both
sides of windows and doors at the rough
opening.
Select None for dimensions to not locate
wall openings. This setting does not
affect Auto Exterior Dimensions.
The CAD Objects options control how
dimension lines locate 2D CAD objects
as well as CAD-based objects such as slabs
and polyline solids, and stairs. They are also
available in the Auto NKBA
Dimension
Defaults dialog.
Check Line/Sides to locate lines and
edges that are perpendicular to the
dimension line. If the lines or edges are
not perpendicular to the dimension line,
they are not dimensioned.
Check Ends/Corners to locate all ends
of lines or corners of polylines, no matter
what angle they are in relation to the
dimension line.
Check Callouts/Markers to locate these
objects.
Check Text to locate text objects.
The Primitives/Shapes options affect
how dimension lines locate objects
drawn with the Primitive Tools . See
Primitive Tools on page 739.
The Framing options affect how
dimension lines locate framing objects.
Select Centers for dimensions to locate
the centers of framing objects.
Select Sides to locate both sides of fram-
ing objects.
The Other Objects options affect how
dimension lines locate additional object
types. The Electrical option is available in
the Auto Interior and Auto Elevation
Dimension Defaults dialogs.
Check Electrical to locate electrical
objects. Use this option when you want to
precisely position electrical objects.
Check Plants and Images to locate these
objects.
Note: In cross section/elevation views,
dimensions can only locate furniture at points
where a surface is present.
Note: Openings in walls specified as No
Locate will not be located by Auto Exterior
Dimensions. See No Locate on page 272.
6
7
8
9
10
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 953 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
954
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Extensions Panel
Specify the length and spacing of
Extension Lines relative to the marked
location on an object.
Select Gap From Marked Object to
specify the distance between the end of
extension lines and their marked location
in plan inches or mm. If a dimension line
is moved, extension lines update, and the
size of this gap is maintained.
Select Length Towards Marked Object
to specify a fixed length for the portion of
an extension line that extends from the
dimension line toward the object it
locates. If the dimension line is moved,
this length remains the same but the size
of the gap updates.
Specify the Length Away From Marked
Object, which is the length of the portion
of an extension line that extends from the
dimension line in the opposite direction
of the object it locates.
Check Proximity Fixed to specify a
fixed distance between the marked
object and the dimension line. You can only
fix the proximity for a single extension line.
See Using Proximity Fixed on page 970.
Distance to Marked Object - When
Proximity Fixed is checked, you can
specify the distance from the dimension
line to the marked object using a positive
value.
Gap From Marked Object
+ Length Toward Marked Object
= Distance to Marked Object
Proximity Fixed only affects dimension lines
that locate an object using an extension line.
When a dimension line arrowhead points
directly to the object without using an
extension line, this option has no effect.
Auto Exterior Dimensions ignore Distance to
Marked Object and use the default 1st Line
Offset and Line Separation values. See
Setup Panel on page 946.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 954 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Auto Dimension Defaults Dialogs
955
Legacy Support - Specify how
dimensions behave in files created in
Chief Architect Version 8 or prior. See
Compatibility With Previous Versions on
page 943.
Check Chief Version 8 Compatible
Extensions to make extensions function
as they did in Chief Architect Version 8.
Check Short Extensions to have short,
uniform-length extension lines instead of
extension lines that reach all the way to
the objects they locate.
Layer Panel
The Layer panel is found in the specification
dialogs for many different objects. For more
information, see Layer Panel on page 148.
If an automatic dimension line is edited, it
will no longer be considered Automatic and
the Default checkbox on this panel will be
unchecked. See Editing Dimension Lines
on page 966.
Arrow Panel
For information about the Arrow panel, see
Arrow Panel on page 1037.
Text Style Panel
The settings on the Text Style panel control
the size, font and other attributes of
automatic, manually drawn, and temporary
dimension line labels. See Dimension
Labels on page 965.
For information about the settings on this
panel, see Text Style Panel on page 1012.
Temporary dimension labels always use the
color assigned to their layer - not the color
specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog.
Auto Dimension Defaults Dialogs
Select Edit> Default Settings or
double-click either the Automatic
Dimension Tools or Dimension
Tools parent button. Expand the
Dimension category, select one of the
Auto subcategories , and click the Edit
button.
The settings in the five Auto Dimension
Defaults dialogs allow you to control the
initial appearance and behavior of
dimensions created using the various Auto
Dimension tools. See The Automatic
Dimension Tools on page 962.
You can also add buttons to your toolbars
that you can click to quickly open each of
Extension Line and Gap lengths are
measured from the marked location on
a wall. See The Dimension Layer on page
290.
Note: If you select an extension line, Chief
Version 8 Compatible Extensions will be
turned off automatically.
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 955 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
956
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
these dialogs. See To add a button to a
toolbar on page 128.
The default Line Separation and First Line
Offset values for automatic dimensions are
set in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
Setup Panel on page 946.
General Panel
Specify how far Auto Exterior Dimen-
sion lines Reach to locate objects set
back from exterior walls. The default is
192 inches (4800 mm). If exterior walls
are set back further than this distance,
additional dimension lines are produced
to dimension the set-back walls. Only
available in the Auto Exterior
Dimension Defaults dialog.
Specify the Minimum Area: the mini-
mum enclosed area needed for Auto
Dimensions to generate. Not available in
the Auto Elevation or Auto NKBA
or Auto NKBA
Elevation Dimension
Defaults dialog, only the CAD Objects
options are available. The Locate Objects
panel is not found in the Auto NKBA
Dimensions
The Auto NKBA
Dimensions tool
can be used to measure Kitchen, Bath
and Master Bath rooms in floor plan view in
either of two ways:
Select CAD> Automatic Dimensions>
Auto NKBA
Dimensions to gener-
ate interior dimensions measuring each
wall defining rooms specified as Kitchen
and Bath types on the current floor.
Select one or more Kitchen and/or Bath
rooms and click the Auto NKBA
Dimensions do not
recognize the No Locate setting for walls. If
a wall defining a Kitchen or Bath is specified
as No Locate, Auto NKBA
Dimensions
will locate it anyway.
Auto Elevation Dimensions
The Auto Elevation Dimensions tool
generates dimensions that locate walls
and other objects in cross section/elevation
views, as specified in the Auto Elevation
Dimension Defaults dialog.
Auto NKBA
Elevation
Dimensions
The Auto NKBA
Dimensions tool
generates dimensions that locate walls
and other objects in cross section/elevation
views in accordance with NKBA
standards,
as specified in the Auto NKBA
Elevation
Dimension Defaults dialog.
Displaying Dimension Lines
The display of dimension lines is
controlled in theLayer Display
Options dialog. See Displaying Objects on
page 140.
You can customize the display of dimension
lines for different purposes. See Annotation
Sets on page 74.
Dimension lines created by any of the
dimension tools share the same components.
Dimension Lines run parallel with the
distance being measured.
Extension Lines are perpendicular to
dimension lines, indicating what they
locate. If a dimension line locates more
than two objects, extension lines divide
the dimension line into segments.
Arrowheads display at the intersections
of dimension and extension lines.
Dimension Labels display at the mid-
point of dimension line segments and
indicate the distance that each segment
measures.
If a manual dimension line is on a layer that
is turned off and you select an object located
by that dimension line, it will display for
reference using the Move color specified in
thePreferences dialog. See Colors Panel
on page 88. This will happen only if
Dimension
Labels
Extension Line Labels
Arrowheads
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 964 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Displaying Dimension Lines
965
Temporary Dimensions are turned on.
See Temporary Dimensions on page 962.
Extension Lines
If a dimension line is offset from the objects
it locates, extension lines can help clarify
exactly what is being located. You can
specify the default length of extension lines
in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
Extensions Panel on page 954.
Once drawn, the appearance of extension
lines can be edited. See Editing Extension
Lines on page 968.
Any extension line can be specified as a
Centerline that displays the symbol. See
Centerline Dimensions on page 961.
Dimension Labels
Manually drawn, automatic and temporary
dimension labels use the Text Style specified
in theDimension Defaults dialog. Unlike
many objects that use Text Styles, by default
dimensions use a Text Style specified in the
defaults dialog rather than the Text Style
assigned to their layer. See Text Style
Panel on page 955.
By default, dimension labels have a solid fill
that is the same as the Background Color
set in the Preferences dialog. You can
instead specify that labels use a Text Style
that has a transparent or other fill.
You can also specify the minimum size of
dimension numbers displaying on screen in
the Preferences dialog. See Appearance
Panel on page 86.
Labels can both a primary and secondary
format and can be centered on dimension
lines or located either above or below them.
See Primary Format Panel on page 947.
Dimension labels have their own edit handle
and can be moved when a dimension line is
selected.
Dimension Arrowheads
You can specify the style, color and size of
dimension arrows in the Dimension
Defaults and Dimension Line Specification
dialogs. See Arrow Panel on page 1037.
The arrow at the end of a dimension line will
not display if it is close enough to to another
dimension arrow that the two will overlap. A
typical example of this is where two sections
of an Interior Dimension locate two sides of
an interior wall.
Like other text, dimension labels are
subject to scaling. For example, A font
size of 6 prints a 1/8 tall number at 1/4 =1
scale. A font size of 125 mm prints a 3 mm
tall number at 1 m = 50 m scale. See
Printing Text and Dimensions on page
1169.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 965 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
966
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Selecting Dimension Lines
Before a manually-drawn or automatic
dimension line can be edited, it must be
selected. To select a dimension or a group of
dimensions, click on it when the Select
Objects or Manual Dimension tool
is active.
The edit handles that are available when a
dimension line is selected depend on where
you clicked to select it:
Click on the dimension line to display a
full set of dimension edit handles. See
Editing Dimension Lines on page 966.
Click on an extension line to display
resize edit handles only on the ends of the
dimension lines extensions. See Editing
Extension Lines on page 968.
Editing Dimension Lines
With the exception of Temporary
Dimensions, dimension lines can be selected
and edited using the mouse, the edit toolbar
buttons, and the Dimension Line
Specification dialog. See Dimension Line
Specification Dialog on page 973.
If an Auto Dimension line is edited, it will no
longer be considered an automatic dimension
line and will not be deleted and replaced the
next time the Auto Dimensions tool is
used.
Using the Mouse
When a dimension line is selected, its edit
handles can be seen. There are four types of
dimension line edit handles. More than one
of some types display, depending on how
many extension lines are present.
If you select an extension line by mis-
take, press the Esc key to display the
full set of dimension line edit handles.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 966 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Editing Dimension Lines
967
The Extension Line handles mark the
location being dimensioned and are used
to move or delete extension lines. See
Moving Extension Lines on page 969.
The Add Extension Line handle displays
to the side of the Move handle and is used
to add extension lines to the dimension
line. Dimension lines do not extend
unless an object can be located. See
Adding Extension Lines on page 968.
The small, square Move Dimension
Label handle is located at the center of
the selected label. Use this handle to
move the dimension number for each
dimension line section. The pointer
changes to a four-headed arrow when
moved over this handle.
The Move handle is located where you
clicked to select the dimension line and is
used to move the entire dimension line,
including any subsections, perpendicular
to itself. Extension lines are resized as
appropriate. The pointer changes to a
two-headed arrow when moved over
this handle.
The Rotate handle is located one plan
foot past the end of the dimension line
and is used to rotate the dimension line.
Using the Edit Tools
Dimension lines can be repositioned, copied,
and deleted using the edit toolbar buttons just
like other objects in the program can. See
The Edit Toolbar on page 34.
Click the Edit Dimension Ends edit
button to edit the dimension line using edit
handles similar to those on line based
objects. See Editing Line Based Objects on
page 180.
Edit Dimension Ends is useful for
locating a point on an object that it might not
locate otherwise, such as the corner of a
polyline.
Click the Edit Extensions edit button to
edit the lengths of the selected dimensions
extension lines. See Editing Extension
Lines on page 968.
Dimension Number Size
The initial size of dimension numbers is
specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog.
See Dimension Defaults Dialog on page
945.
You can specify number height for individual
dimension lines in the Dimension Line
Specification dialog. See Dimension
Panel on page 974.
Rotate
Extension Line
Extension Line
Move Dimension
Label
Move
Add Extension
Line
Note: A selected dimension lines cannot be
moved if Proximity Fixed is checked in the
Dimension Line Specification dialog. See
Extensions Panel on page 976.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 967 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
968
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
As with text and other objects, dimension
number size is subject to scaling when sent to
layout or printed. See Printing Text and
Dimensions on page 1169.
Copying and Pasting
Dimension Lines
Dimension lines can be copied and pasted
into any view type that supports dimensions.
If a dimension line is copied independent of
the objects it originally locates, the pasted
dimension line will locate point markers.
Dimension lines can also be copied and
pasted from one plan or layout file to
another. Bear in mind that dimension lines
use dynamic defaults. If the destination file
has a Saved Manual Dimension Default with
the same name as that used by the dimension
line being copied, the pasted dimension will
refer to it. If no such saved default exists in
the destination file, the pasted dimension will
become associated with the currentlly active
Saved Manual Dimension Default.
Deleting Dimension Lines
There are several ways to delete dimension
lines.
You can select any manual or automatic
dimension line or group of dimension lines,
then press the Delete key or click the
Delete edit button. See Deleting
Objects on page 244.
The Delete Objects dialog allows you to
delete all manually drawn and/or automatic
dimension lines at once. See Delete Objects
Dialog on page 244.
Individual dimension line segments located
between extension lines can also be deleted.
If a segment is located between two other
segments along the same dimension line, that
dimension will be broken in two.
To delete a portion of a dimension line
1. Select any Dimension Tool aside from
Angular or Auto Exterior Dimensions.
2. Manually draw a dimension line over
the segment that you wish to remove,
dragging from extension line to exten-
sion line.
Editing Extension Lines
Extension lines can be added, edited, and
deleted using the mouse. Extension lines are
also affected by settings in the Dimension
Line Specification dialog. See Extensions
Panel on page 976.
Adding Extension Lines
To add an extension line
1. Select the dimension line.
2. Click the diamond-shaped Add Exten-
sion Line edit handle which displays
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 968 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Editing Extension Lines
969
near the Move edit handle. The pointer
changes to a two-headed arrow .
3. Drag the handle to the object that you
want to locate with a new extension han-
dle. This example adds an extension line
to the window edge.
4. Release the mouse button to add an
extension line.
Moving Extension Lines
Extension lines can be moved to locate the
centers, sides, or surfaces of most objects. In
this example an extension line is moved from
the windows edge to the center.
To move an extension line
1. Select the dimension line it is connected
to, not the extension line itself.
2. Click the Extension Line edit handle.
The pointer changes to a two-headed
arrow .
3. Drag the handle to a new location. The
extension line snaps to possible marks as
the handle is moved.
4. Release the mouse button at the new
location.
Resizing Extension Lines
You can resize extension lines in the
Dimension Line Specification dialog or
using their edit handles. See Extensions
Panel on page 954.
To resize an extension line
1. Click on the extension line or select the
dimension line and click the Edit
Not all library symbols can be located
by a dimension line as it is drawn. Once
a dimension is drawn, however, you can
move or add an extension line to locate the
library object.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 969 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
970
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Extensions edit button to display
two handles along the extension line.
2. Click either handle, turning the pointer
into a two-headed arrow .
3. Extend or contract the extension line and
release the mouse.
Using Proximity Fixed
The Proximity Fixed option allows you to
specify a fixed length for one extension line
that will not change if the object the
extension line locates is moved.
To use Proximity Fixed
1. Select a dimension line that locates mul-
tiple independent objects and note the
Extension Number of extension line that
you would like to have a fixed length.
2. Open the Dimension Line
Specification dialog and go to the
Extensions panel. See Extensions
Panel on page 954.
Select the Extension Number that you
noted in step 1 from the Selected
Extension drop-down list.
Check Proximity Fixed.
Specify the desired Distance to
Marked Object, which is the distance
from the selected dimension line to the
object that the Selected Extension
locates. This distance includes the Gap
From Marked Object.
Click OK.
To see how Proximity Fixed works, select the
object that the extension line with Proximity
Fixed specified and move it. Notice that the
dimension line moves in response and that all
extension lines lengths adjust except for the
one with Proximity Fixed.
Deleting Extension Lines
When an extension line is deleted, the
remaining dimensions update. If a dimension
line hasonly two extension lines, they cannot
be deleted.
To remove an extension line
1. Select the dimension line it is connected
to, not the extension line itself.
2. Click the Extension Line edit handle.
3. Drag it perpendicular to the direction of
the arrows, away from any dimension-
able object, and release the button when
the extension line disappears.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 970 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Add Additional Text
971
Add Additional Text
Text can be added to any manual or
automatic dimension line using the
Add Additional Text edit tool.
To add text to a dimension label
1. Select a dimension line that you would
like to add text to.
2. Click the Add Additional Text edit
button.
3. Click on the segment of the dimension
line with the label you wish to add text
to.
4. In the Additonal Text dialog:
Type any Leading Text that you want
to display before the dimension value
Type any Trailing Text that you want
to display after the dimension value
5. When you click OK, the segment you
selected will display the added text.
Additional Text can also be added and edited
in the Dimension Line Specification dialog.
See Additional Text Panel on page 977.
Moving Objects Using Dimensions
Most objects can be moved by changing an
automatic, manual or temporary dimension
value that locates it. This technique can be
applied in nearly any situation where
dimensions are present, including angular
dimensions. See Moving Objects on page
212.
In addition, some objects can be resized
using dimensions. See Resizing Objects on
page 221.
Note: Dimension lines with text added are not
supported when exported to .dxf/.dwg. When
exported, they are converted to text and CAD
lines. The same occurs when CAD Detail
from View is used. See CAD Detail from
View on page 1066.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 971 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
972
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Your pointer indicates which dimensions can
be used to relocate the selected object by
changing to a pointing hand icon.
Another way to tell is to select an object and
drag it in the desired direction. As you drag,
note which dimensions update. These
dimensions are the dimensions that can be
used to move that object.
To move an object using dimensions
1. Select the object and click on a dimen-
sion line that locates it. An inline text
field opens at the location where you
clicked.
The actual distance displays in the text
field using the default primary format.
See Primary Format Panel on page
947.
If the dimension is locating two differ-
ent objects, the Move Edge and Move
Entire Object buttons display to the
right of the text field.
If the dimension describes a selected
walls length, the Move Start, Move
End and Move Both Ends buttons dis-
play to the right instead.
2. Click the Move button of your choice.
3. Enter a new value in text field. The unit
of measurement is set in the Number
Style/Angle Style dialog.
To use a different unit, include its indi-
cator after the value. See Dialog
Number/Angle Style Dialog on page
122.
To move the selected object past a sec-
ond object, to its opposite side, enter a
negative value.
4. The selected object moves or resizes
when you press the Enter key or click
outside of the text field.
5. If Bumping/Pushing is enabled, the
object being moved will bump into any
objects in its move path and not move
the entire distance. Hold down the Ctrl
key when you press Enter to override
this move restriction. See Bumping/
Pushing on page 213.
To resize an object using dimensions
1. Select the object along the edge that you
would like to move. See Selected
Edge on page 177.
2. Click on a dimension line that indicates
its distance from the objects opposite
side.
3. In the inline text field, enter a value.
4. Click Move edge to move the selected
edge only.
5. The selected edge moves, resizing the
object, when you press the Enter key.
Move Entire Object
Move Edge (selected)
Move Both Ends
Move Start Move End
You can cancel a move or resize opera-
tion using dimensions at any time by
pressing the Esc key.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 972 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Dimension Line Specification Dialog
973
Resizing a House Using
Exterior Dimensions
When resizing a house using dimensions, it
is important to work your way around the
house in one direction. Relocate one wall at a
time in succession so that you do not redefine
the same dimension more than once.
For more information, see Measuring
Walls on page 271.
Using Angular Dimensions
Angular Dimensions are useful for
adjusting the angles of polyline-based
objects and walls.
To change an angular dimension
1. Draw an CAD> Dimensions> Angular
Dimension , then click and drag to
draw an arc within the angle you wish to
measure.
2. Select the edge that you want to move.
3. Click the dimension value to open the
Set Angular Dimension dialog.
The Set Angular Dimension dialog indi-
cates the Previous Value in degrees, minutes
and seconds.
4. Enter a value in the New Value field.
5. Specify what you want to rotate:
Select Rotate Edge to move the
selected edge when you click OK, or
Select Rotate entire polyline to rotate
the entire object about the corner
formed by the edges that the Angular
Dimension locates, maintaining the
previous value of that angle.
6. Click OK to apply the change.
Dimension Line Specification Dialog
To open the Dimension Line
Specification dialog, double-click a
dimension line using the Select Objects
or Manual Dimension tool, or select a
dimension line or group of dimension lines
and click the Open Object edit button.
The settings in this dialog are dynamic
defaults associated with a particular Saved
Manual Dimension Default. See Dimension
Defaults Dialog on page 945.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 973 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
974
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Dimension Panel
Inherits Default Properties From -
The name of the Saved Dimension
Default that the selected dimension line gets
its default attributes from displays here.
If multiple dimension lines are selected,
No Change may display here.
You can select a different Saved Dimen-
sion Default from the drop down list.
If a dimension line inherits attributes
from a Saved Dimension Default, that
default cannot be deleted. See Saved
Defaults Dialog on page 71.
Options - Specify the size and display
of wall widths attributes for the selected
dimension line. The minimum on-screen size
can be set in the Preferences dialog. See
Appearance Panel on page 86.
Specify the Number Height for the
selected dimension. Type d in the box
to reset the number size to the default.
Check Suppress Wall Widths to sup-
press those portions of the dimension line
that measure between two surfaces of the
same wall. Both sides of a wall may still
be located, but its width will not display.
This option is checked by default for
most manually drawn dimensions, but is
unchecked for Interior Dimensions.
Specify the use and appearance of
Rounded Value Indicators, which can
display when the degree of accuracy in use is
not sufficient to describe a dimensions true
value.
Check Use Default to use the default
indicator(s). Uncheck this box to make
the options that follow active.
1
2
Dimension Number Height is subject to
scaling. For example, A Number Height
of 6 prints a 1/8 tall number at 1/4 = 1
scale. A Number Height of 125 mm prints a 3
mm tall number at 1 m =50 m scale.
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 974 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Dimension Line Specification Dialog
975
Check + or - After Number to indicate
that the actual dimension value is higher
or lower than the value shown.
Check ~ Before Number to indicate
dimension values that are not accurate
with the ~symbol.
Dimension Panel for Angular Dimensions
Number Height - Define a number
height for the selected dimension. Type
D in the box to reset the number size to the
default.
Select an Angle Style radio button to
specify the how the selected Angular
Dimensions angle value displays. See Dia-
log Number/Angle Style Dialog on page
122.
Primary Format Panel
To enable the settings on the Primary Format
panel of the Dimension Line Specification
dialog, uncheck Use Default Formatting.
The settings that follow are the same as those
on the same panel of the Dimension
Defaults dialog, but apply only to the
selected dimension line(s). See Primary
Format Panel on page 947. Not available for
Angular Dimensions.
Secondary Format Panel
To enable the settings on the Secondary
Format panel of the Dimension Line
Specification dialog, uncheck Use Default
Formatting and then check Include Second
Format.
The settings that follow are the same as those
on the same panel of the Dimension
Defaults dialog, but apply only to the
selected dimension line(s). See Secondary
Format Panel on page 949. Not available for
Angular Dimensions.
1 2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 975 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
976
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Extensions Panel
The Extensions panel is not available for
dimensions selected as a group or for
Angular Dimensions .
Selected Extension - Choose an
extension line associated with the
currently selected dimension from the drop-
down list. The selected extension can then be
edited here.
Each extension lines number displays beside
it when a dimension line is selected.
Uncheck Use Plan Default to enable
the three settings that follow. Check
this box to restore the default settings to the
Selected Extension line. See Dimension
Defaults Dialog on page 945.
These settings are the same as those
found on the Extensions panel of the
Dimension Defaults dialog, but apply to the
extension lines associated with the selected
dimension line only. See Extensions Panel
on page 954.
Click Apply to All to apply the settings
for the Selected Extension line to all
extension lines associated with the selected
dimension.
Check Proximity Fixed to specify a
fixed distance between the marked
object and the dimension line. You can only
fix the proximity for a single extension line.
Distance to Marked Object - When
Proximity Fixed is checked, you can
specify the distance from the dimension
line to the marked object using a positive
Opening this panel will turn off Version 8
Compatible Extensions if it is enabled in
the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Exten-
sions Panel on page 954.
1
2
3
4
5
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 976 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Dimension Line Specification Dialog
977
value. See Extensions Panel on page
954.
Check Mark as Centerline to mark the
selected extension line with a
Centerline symbol . Not available in the
Dimension Defaults dialog. See Centerline
Dimensions on page 961.
Additional Text Panel
Additional Text can also be added to a
dimension line using the Add Additional
Text edit tool. See Add Additional
Text on page 971.
Select the Segment of the selected
dimension line that you would like to add
text to.
Type the Leading Text, which appears
before the dimension value in the label.
Type the Trailing Text, which appears
after the dimension value in the label.
Layer Panel
The Layer panel is found in the specification
dialogs for many different objects. For more
information, see Layer Panel on page 148.
Arrow Panel
For information about the settings on this
panel, see Arrow Panel on page 1037.
6
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 977 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
978
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 978 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
979
Chapt er 32:
Text, Callouts,
and Markers
Text, callouts and markers are an ideal way
to draw attention to special details of your
drawings. Text can be added in floor plan
view, in cross section/elevation views, in
CAD Details, and to layout pages.
Text lines with arrow can be attached to text
objects, allowing you to direct attention to
specific plan details.
The display of text can be controlled by layer
or set specifically for each text object.
Chapter Contents
Text Defaults and Preferences
Fonts and Alphabets
The Text Tools
Creating Text, Callouts and Markers
Displaying Text, Arrows, Callouts and
Markers
Rich Text Specification Dialog
Text Specification Dialog
Editing Text
Copying and Pasting Text
Spell Check
Text Arrows
Callouts
Callout Specification Dialog
Editing Callouts
Markers
Marker Specification Dialog
Editing Markers
Text Styles
Text Macros
Creating User Defined Text Macros
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 979 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
980
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Text Defaults and Preferences
Text Defaults can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings in
any view in which text can be created. Click
the "+" next to Text, Callouts and Markers
to display the sub-headings. See Default
Settings vs Preferences on page 68.
The default settings for Rich Text, Text,
Callouts, Markers, and Arrows determine
what these objects look like when they are
first created. Text Style Defaults determine
the appearance of text associated with things
like dimensions and object labels.
Rich Text , Text , Callouts ,
Markers , and Arrows can support
multiple Saved Defaults. In order to open the
defaults dialog for of these tools, you must
first open its Saved Defaults dialog and
choose an available saved defaults setup. See
Multiple Saved Defaults on page 70.
When you access a defaults dialog for
any of the Text Tools via the Default
Settings dialog, the Saved Defaults dia-
log will open first, allowing you to select
which Saved Default you wish to edit.
See Multiple Saved Defaults on page
70.
When you access this dialog by double-
clicking aText Tool button, the
defaults dialog for the currently active
Saved Default is opened directly. If you
would like the Saved Defaults dialog to
open first in this situation, you can enable
this option in the Preferences dialog.
See General Panel on page 92.
In either case, the name of the Saved
Default being edited will display in the
title bar at the top of the dialog box.
Changes made to default settings do not alter
existing text objects, so it is a good idea to go
over these settings before placing text.
Text Style Defaults
Select Text Style from the list in the
Default Settings dialog and click the Edit
button to open the Saved Text Style
Defaults dialog. The Text Style Defaults
button can be added to your toolbars. See To
add a button to a toolbar on page 128.
The Text Style Defaults dialog allows you to
specify the attributes of the various Text
Styles in use in the current file. See Text
Styles on page 1011.
Rich Text Defaults
Double-click the Rich Text or Leader
Line tool to open the Saved Rich Text
Defaults dialog and edit the currently active
Saved Default.
The Rich Text Defaults dialog is similar to
the Rich Text Specification dialog, but the
name of the current Saved Default displays
in the title bar. See Rich Text Specification
Dialog on page 986.
Leader Lines and Text Lines with
Arrows use the same default layer as
Rich Text, so by default they have the same
color, line weight and line style. See
Layers on page 139.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 980 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Text Defaults and Preferences
981
Text Defaults
Double-click the Text tool to open the
Saved Text Defaults dialog and edit the
currently active Saved Default.
The Text Defaults dialog looks almost the
same as the Text Specification dialog, but
the name of the current Saved Default
displays in the title bar. See Text
Specification Dialog on page 992.
Callout Defaults
Double-click the Callout tool to open the
Saved Callout Defaults dialog and edit the
currently active Saved Default.
The Callout Defaults dialog looks almost the
same as the Callout Specification dialog,
but the name of the current Saved Default
displays in the title bar. See Callout
Specification Dialog on page 1006.
Marker Defaults
Double-click the Marker tool to open
the Saved Marker Defaults dialog and edit
the currently active Saved Default.
The Marker Defaults dialog looks almost the
same as the Marker Specification dialog, but
the name of the current Saved Default
displays in the title bar. See Marker
Specification Dialog on page 1009.
Arrow Defaults
Double-click the Text Line with Arrow
tool to open the Saved Arrow Defaults and
edit the currently active Saved Default.
The settings in the Arrow Defaults dialog
determine the initial settings for arrows
drawn using the Leader Line , Text Line
with Arrow and Line With Arrow
tools. These settings also determine the
initial appearance of arrows when they are
added to CAD lines, arcs, and polylines.
The Arrow Defaults dialog looks almost the
same as the Arrow panel of the Line
Specification dialog, but the name of the
current Saved Default displays in the title
bar. See Arrow Panel on page 1037.
Annotation Sets
The Text Tools are among the items
associated with Annotation Sets, which are
groups of Saved Defaults that can be
customized and activated for specific
drawing tasks. See Annotation Sets on
page 74.
Preferences
Specify the number of segments for
new leader lines and whether pressing
the Enter key creates a new line of text or
closes the Text Specification dialog in the
Preferences dialog. See Text Panel on
page 91.
Avoid typing any text in any text
Defaults dialog unless you want it to be
present in all text objects you create.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 981 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
982
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Fonts and Alphabets
Chief Architect allows you to use any font
found in your Windows Fonts directory.
For best printed results, using true-type or
open-type fonts is recommended.
Blueprint Fonts
Three architectural fonts: Chief Blueprint,
City Blueprint, and Country Blueprint are
installed in the Windows Fonts directory
when Chief Architect is installed.
International Alphabets
The Rich Text tool supports unicode
alphabets and characters. In order to use a
unicode alphabet or characters, the
appropriate language support must be
installed on your computer.
Special characters can be added to any Rich
Text object by:
Copying and pasting the character from
another application;
Copying and pasting the character from
the Windows Character Map;
Typing the keystroke associated with the
character.
See Copying and Pasting Text on page
1000.
Character Size
Text, callouts, markers as well as dimension
numbers can be sized to 1/128 accuracy
when Inches is used as the number style
(0.078125 mm when Decimal mm is used).
See Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog on
page 122.
Either of two font sizing methods may be
used:
The default method specifies text size as
the measurement from the baseline to the
topmost part of the capital letter A. This
method is similar to that used in most
CAD programs.
Alternatively, you can use a font sizing
method similar to most word processing
applications, where size is based on
information stored in the font. This infor-
mation varies from font to font and is
responsible for apparent differences in
font height.
To size Rich Text based on the size of
the capital letter A, use CAD Style Font
Sizing. See Appearance Panel on page
989.
To size Text , Callouts , Markers
and dimension numbers based on font
information, use Legacy Compatible Size.
The sizing method used for text objects can
be set as defaults and also specified per
object in objects specification dialogs. See
Text Defaults and Preferences on page
980.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 982 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
The Text Tools
983
The sizing method used for dimensions can
only be specified in theDimension Defaults
dialog. See Dimension Defaults Dialog on
page 945.
Missing Fonts
If you open a plan or layout file that uses a
font that is not installed on the current
computer, the program will give you an
opportunity to replace it in the Replace
Fonts dialog.
The table lists all missing fonts and how they
will be replaced.
Click on a font name in the list to select
it. Use the Shift or Ctrl key to select mul-
tiple fonts. See Shift and Ctrl Select on
page 179.
Select a replacement font from the
Replace With drop-down list, or leave
No Change as the selection to maintain
the files association with the missing
fonts.
A preview of the selected font displays
below the Replace Width list.
If you do not plan to return the file to the
computer where it was created, you may
want to replace missing fonts with the fonts
you normally use. On the other hand, if you
do intend to return the file, you may prefer to
not replace any missing fonts.
The Text Tools
Select CAD> Text to access the Text
Tools. These tools are available in
floor plan view, in cross section/elevation
views, in CAD Details, and in layout files.
The Rich Text tool is used to create
text objects.
The Text tool is used to create simple
text objects with a single font and
style format, or with Tab-delimited columns.
It is not as flexible as the Rich Text tool;
however, it was the tool used to create text in
Chief Architect X1 and prior. See Creating
Text, Callouts and Markers on page 984.
You can convert simple Text to a Rich
Text object by clicking the Convert to
Rich Text edit button. See Convert to Rich
Text on page 998.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 983 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
984
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
The Text Line with Arrow tool is
used to connect text and another
object with an arrow. See Text Arrows on
page 1002.
The Leader Line tool places either a
Text or Rich Text object with an arrow
attached. See Leader Line on page 1003.
The Callout tool is used to place
callouts. See Callouts on page 1005.
The Marker tool is used to place
markers for Level Lines, Test
Borings and Point Markers. See Markers
on page 1009.
Creating Text, Callouts and Markers
Text, callouts and markers can be created in
floor plan view, in cross section/elevation
views, in CAD Details, and on layout pages.
Once created, text, callouts and markers can
be selected and edited in a variety of ways.
See Editing Text on page 996.
To create Rich Text
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text .
2. Click and drag to draw a rectangle defin-
ing the area of the text object.
The rectangle that you drag must be at
least as tall as the default line spacing
for a single line of text. See Paragraph
Options Dialog on page 988.
When you release the mouse button, a
blank text box is created with an active
cursor, ready for you to type.
3. Type or paste the desired text into the
Text Field.
4. Use the options on the Edit Bar, which
displays above the Text Field, to change
the font, style and size of any portion of
the text. See Editing Text on page 996.
5. When you are finished, simply click out-
side of the Text Field to close it and the
Edit Bar. The Rich Text tool
remains active, so you can click and
drag to create additional Text objects if
you wish.
Rich Text , Callouts and
Markers can also be created in the same
manner as Text .
You can also create lines with arrows
connecting the text that you create to items in
Text Field Edit Bar
Note: If you do not type anything in the Text
Field, a text object will not be created when
you click outside of it.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 984 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Displaying Text, Arrows, Callouts and Markers
985
the drawing. See Text Arrows on page
1002.
To create Text
1. Select CAD> Text> Text .
2. Click where you want the upper left cor-
ner of the text to be located. The Text
Specification dialog opens. See Text
Specification Dialog on page 992.
3. Enter text and click OK.
Up to 32,000 characters can be inserted in
one Text object. It is usually better to use
several smaller Text objects when a lot
of text must be inserted.
Text and CAD Objects
Text can be used in combination with CAD
objects to create legends, title blocks, and a
wide variety of other details. See CAD
Objects on page 1021 and Layout on page
1183.
A selection of legends and other CAD blocks
that use both text and CAD can be found in
the Library Browser. See The Library on
page 789.
Displaying Text, Arrows, Callouts and Markers
As with other types of objects, the display of
Text objects is controlled in the Layer
Display Options dialog. By default, text
objects are located on layers with Text at
the beginning of the layer name, such as
Text, Callouts. See Layer Display
Options Dialog on page 144.
Text objects can only be displayed in views
where text can be created.
The display attributes of each individual text
object can be controlled independent of the
layer it is placed on. See Rich Text Specifi-
cation Dialog on page 986.
Custom Text Layers
Text objects do not need to be shown at all
times. For instance, electrical notes will be
included with the electrical plan, but are not
needed in the framing plan. You can create
custom layers and layer sets to control the
display of text and other objects. See Layer
Sets on page 141 and Layer Display
Options Dialog on page 144.
To move text to a different layer, select the
text object or group of text objects, then click
the Open Object edit button to open the
Text Specification dialog. The selected text
objects layer can be changed on the Line
Style panel. See Line Style Panel on page
1035.
Text Arrows
If a text arrow is attached to a Text object
and they are on the same layer, changing the
layer of the text will also change the layer of
the attached text arrow. However, changing
the layer of the text arrow will not change the
layer of the text it is attached to. See
Displaying Objects on page 140.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 985 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
986
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Rich Text Specification Dialog
TheRich Text Specification dialog
opens if you select theRich Text
tool and then click once in the drawing area.
You can also open this dialog by selecting
one or more Rich Text objects, then
clicking the Open Object edit button.
When Rich Text objects are group-
selected, the text content and zoom factor
cannot be changed, but everything else can
be.
The Rich Text Specification dialog is
similar to the Rich Text Defaults dialog but
affects the selected text rather than all
subsequently created text objects. Also, the
name of the Saved Default being edited will
display in the title bar of the defaults dialog.
See Text Defaults and Preferences on page
980.
Text Panel
The settings on the Text panel allow you to
type the selected Rich Text objects content
and control many aspects of its appearance,
including its font, size, color and style.
You can specify the appearance of the text
before typing, and can also select and change
the attributes of all or portions of the text
content after it is typed. To change text that
already exists, simply highlight it using the
mouse and/or the Shift +arrow keys and then
make any needed changes to its attributes.
Note: Text objects have a different specifica-
tion dialog. See Text Specification Dialog on
page 992.
Note: If you do not type anything in the text
field on this panel when creating a new
object, no object will be created when you
click OK. On the other hand, if you remove
the text from an existing object and click OK,
an empty text box will result.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 986 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Rich Text Specification Dialog
987
Use the options on the Edit Bar, which
displays above the Text Entry field, to
change the font, style and size of the text.
The Edit bar also displays in the drawing
area above the Text object when you click
the Edit Text in Place edit button. See
Editing Text on page 996.
Select the desired options before typing to
affect the text as it is typed, or select some or
all of the text and then specify which options
to apply to it.
Select a Font from the drop-down list.
Specify the Text Size in drawing units.
Click the Print Size button to open
the Printed Size Input dialog. See Scal-
ing Text on page 998.
Click the Color button to specify the
color of the selected or subsequently
typed text. See Color Chooser/Select
Color Dialog on page 843. If Layer
Color Text is checked on the Appearance
panel, any custom colors specified here
are lost.
Click the Bold button to specify text
as bold.
Click the Italic button to specify text
as italic.
Click the Underline button to specify
text as underlined.
Click the Strikethrough button to
selected or specify text as stricken-
through.
Click the Align Left , Align
Center , or Align Right button to
specify the how text is aligned.
Click the Paragraph Options button
to specify the selected paragraphs align-
ment, spacing and bullets or numbering
in the Paragraph Options dialog.
Click the Spell Check button to
check the spelling in the selected text
object. See Spell Check on page 1001.
Click the Insert Macro button to
place a Text Macro at the location of the
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 987 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
988
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
cursor. Not available when multiple text
objects are selected. User Defined macros
are only available when the selected Rich
Text object points to an eligible object
using a leader line or text line wtih arrow.
See Text Macros on page 1014.
Specify the Zoom factor of the selected
text by typing a percentage value in the
text field or clicking the up/down arrows.
This setting only affects the text as it
appears in this dialog.
Type or paste text in the Text Entry
field. See Copy, Cut and Paste on
page 999.
Right-click in the Text Entry field to access a
contextual menu from which you can select
Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Spell Check
and Select All. See Contextual Menus on
page 35.
To edit text in the entry field, click and drag
to highlight any portion of it and then use the
tools on the Edit Bar as needed.
Paragraph Options Dialog
Specify the Alignment of the selected
paragraph(s). See Aligning Text on
page 999.
Specify the Line Spacing of the
selected paragraph(s).
Click the radio button beside Single, 1.5
Lines, Double or User Specified.
If you select User Specified Line
Height, type the desired height for each
line of text in the selected paragraph(s).
For best results, this value should be at
least as much as the largest character size
used in the selected paragraph(s).
Specify the appearance of Margins of
the selected paragraph(s).
Specify the appearance of Bullets and
numbering in the selected paragraph(s).
Select the desired bullet, numbered, or
lettered Type from the drop-down list.
Specify the Number Prefix, which are
any characters that you would like to dis-
Note: Some fonts cannot be drawn at certain
zoom factors. When this is the case, the
appearance of the text will not change.
2
1
2
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 988 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Rich Text Specification Dialog
989
play before the selected paragraphs num-
ber or letter. Does not affect paragraphs
using circle or square bullets.
Specify the Number Suffix, which are
any characters that you would like to dis-
play after the selected paragraphs num-
ber or letter and before its actual text.
Does not affect paragraphs using circle or
square bullets.
Appearance Panel
Leader Lines and Text Lines with
Arrows use the same default layer as
Rich Text, so they share the same default
color, line weight and line style. See
Layers on page 139.
Layer Information -
Check Default to place the selected
object on the default Text layer.
Click the drop-down list to select from all
layers available in the plan or layout file.
Click Define to open the Layer Display
Options dialog and select, modify, or add
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 989 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
990
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
a new layer. See Layer Display Options
Dialog on page 144.
Check Layer Color Text to apply the
color assigned to the selected Layer to to
the text on the Text panel.
Check Border to display a border
around the selected text object and
enable the settings that follow.
Check Layer Color to use the line color
assigned to the text objects layer, or click
the Color bar to select a different color.
See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog
on page 843.
Check Use Layer Line Style to use the
line style assigned to the text objects
layer, or choose another style either from
the drop-down list or by clicking the
Library button. See Line Styles on
page 1056.
Check Use Layer Weight to use the line
weight assigned to the text objects layer,
or specify a different weight. See Line
Weights on page 1170.
Check Fill to display a fill color within
selected text object(s) and enable the
settings that follow.
Select Custom Color then click the
Color bar to use a fill color of your
choosing. See Color Chooser/Select
Color Dialog on page 843.
Check Use Background Color to use
programs Background color as the text
objects fill color. See Colors Panel on
page 88.
Check Use Layer Color to use the color
assigned to the text objects layer as its
fill color.
Specify the Top, Bottom, Left, and
Right Margins, which are the distance
between the text and the border of the
selected text object(s).
Note: If you change the color of some or all of
the selected objects text, Layer Color Text
will become unchecked. If it is checked again,
the custom color(s) will be removed.
2
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 990 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Rich Text Specification Dialog
991
Options Panel
Options
Check Add an Arrow to add a Text
Arrow to the selected text object. See
Text Arrows on page 1002.
Check Rotate with Plan to rotate the
selected text when Rotate Plan View
is used. If unchecked, the selected text is
unaffected when Rotate Plan View is
used. See Rotate Plan View on page
228.
Rotate with Plan also affects text in
views sent to layout if the layout box is
rotated. See CAD and Text in Layout
on page 1186.
Specify the Layout Page that the
selected object(s) is located on. Only
available in layout files, but not in the
Rich Text Defaults dialog in layout. See
Layout on page 1183.
Specify the Origin/Angle of the
selected text object.
Specify the X Position and Y Position of
the selected object relative to the origin.
See 3D Drafting on page 29.
Specify the Angle of the selected text
object. The default value is 0.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 991 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
992
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Specify the Size of the selected text
object.
Specify theHeight of the selected text
object(s) or check Auto Height to auto-
matically adjust the text objects height to
match its contents.
Specify the Width to of the selected text
object(s) or check Auto Width to auto-
matically adjust the text objects width to
match its contents. When Auto Width is
used, text extends in a single line rather
than wrap.
CAD Style Font Sizing measures text
size based on the total height of the capi-
tal letter A, as most CAD programs do.
Uncheck this to instead size text accord-
ing to information stored with the font.
The Drawing Group options control
how the selected object(s) display
relative to other objects. See Drawing
Groups on page 210.
Specify theBack Group to display the
selected object(s) behind objects in the
other two drawing groups.
Specify theDefault Group to display the
selected object(s) in front of those in the
Back Group but behind those in the Front
Group.
Specify theFront Group to display the
selected object(s) in front of objects in
the other two drawing groups.
Check Move to Front of Group to dis-
play the selected object(s) in front of
other objects in the same drawing group.
This is an action rather than a state and is
not available in the Rich Text Defaults
dialog.
Specify the desired Bumping behaviors
for the selected object(s). See
Bumping/Pushing on page 213.
Check CAD Stops Move to bump the
selected object into other CAD or CAD-
based objects as it is moved.
Check Wall Stops Move to stop the
selected object when it bumps into a wall.
Text Specification Dialog
The Text Specification dialog opens
if you select the Text tool and then
click once in the drawing area. It will also
open when you use the Leader Line tool
if Create Rich Text is unchecked in the
Preferences dialog. See Text Panel on
page 91.
You can also open this dialog by selecting
one or more Text objects, then clicking
the Open Object edit button.
The Text Specification dialog is similar to
the Text Defaults and Room Label
Specification dialogs but affects the selected
text object rather than all subsequently
created text. Also, the name of the Saved
Default being edited will display in the dia-
log box title bar. See Text Defaults and
Preferences on page 980 and Editing
Room Labels on page 324.
3
4
5
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 992 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Text Specification Dialog
993
Text Panel
The settings on the Text panel allow you to
type the selected Text objects content.
Click Insert to choose from a list of
special characters and text macros.
User Defined macros are only available
when the selected Rich Text object points to
an eligible object using a leader line or text
line wtih arrow. See Text Macros on page
1014. Not available when the selected object
is a Room Label. See Room Labels on
page 323.
Click Insert to choose from a list of spe-
cial characters and text macros. User
Defined macros are only available when
the selected text object points to an eligi-
ble object using a Leader Line or Text
Line with Arrow. See Text Macros on
page 1014. Not available when the
selected object is a Room Label. See
Room Labels on page 323.
Check Add an Arrow to add a Text Line
with Arrow to the selected text object.
See Text Arrows on page 1002.
Click the Spell Check button to check
the spelling of the text that displays in the
Text Entry area. If Spell Check finds a
word that may be spelled incorrectly, the
Check Spelling dialog opens. See Spell
Check on page 1001. Not available
when multiple Text objects are selected.
Note: Rich Text objects have a different spec-
ification dialog. See Rich Text Specification
Dialog on page 986.
Note: If you do not type anything in the text
field on this panel when creating a new
object, no object will be created when you
click OK. On the other hand, if you remove
the text from an existing object and click OK,
an empty text box will result.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 993 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
994
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Enter text in the Text Entry field. This
field is not available if the selected
object is a Room Label. See Room Labels
on page 323.
Depending on the current Preferences
settings, pressing the Enter key either
forces a new line in the text box or closes
the dialog. See Text Panel on page 91.
Text automatically wraps to a new line
without requiring a hard return.
Tabs can be added to the text by pressing
the Tab key.
A preview of the selected text object
displays on the right. Not available for
Room Labels. See Dialog Preview Panes
on page 38.
Attributes Panel
Tabs - Check Box/Grid to have
gridlines separate the rows and columns
of tabbed text. When no tabs are present, a
simple box is drawn around the text.
In the text field, specify the number of spaces
from the left edge of the text box where each
new column begins. The first column always
starts at 0 and is not listed.
Select an Alignment option from the
drop-down list to apply to the text.
Specify the Origin/Angle of the
selected text object.
2
3
1
2
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 994 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Text Specification Dialog
995
Specify the X Position and Y Position of
the selected object relative to the origin.
See 3D Drafting on page 29.
Specify the Angle of the selected text
object. The default value is 0.
Specify the Size of the selected text
object(s).
Specify theHeight of the selected text
object(s) or check Auto Height to auto-
matically adjust its height to match its
contents.
Specify the Width to of the selected text
object(s) or check Auto Width to auto-
matically adjust its width to match its
contents. When Auto Width is used, text
extends in a single line rather than wrap.
Specifying a Height and/or Width of 0 sizes
the text box as small as the text within it
allows without turning on the Automatic
behavior.
Specify the Margins to be used with
the text. This is the distance between
the text and the edge of the text box.
A default Left and Right margin is applied.
Top and Bottom margins are measured
relative to the line height and may not extend
to the text box completely when given a
value of 0.
A preview of the selected text object
displays on the right. Not available for
Room Labels.
Link Panel
Hyperlinks can be associated with web pages
or files saved on your computer. If a selected
Text object has a hyperlink specified, you
can click the Follow Hyperlink edit
button to open the linked web page or file.
Specify a Hyperlink for the selected
Text object. Note that if no text is
entered on the Text panel, a text object will
not be created.
4
5
6
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 995 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
996
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Type a web page address or the pathname
of a file on your computer in the text
field.
Click the Browse button to select a file
on your computer and add its pathname
to the text field above.
Click the Text Link button to confirm
that the address or pathname in the text
field is associated with a web page or
available file.
A preview of the text entered on the
Text panel displays on the right. Not
available for Room Labels.
To use a hyperlink
1. Select the text object.
2. Click the Follow Hyperlink edit
button to activate the link.
Line Style Panel
The Line Style panel is found in the
specification dialogs for many different
objects. For more information, see Line
Style Panel on page 1035.
Fill Style Panel
For information about the Fill Style panel,
see Fill Style Panel on page 1048.
Dimension Format Panel
The Dimension Format panel is available in
the Room Label Defaults dialog and allows
you to control the format of the portion of the
room label that describes the rooms size. For
information about these settings, see
Displayed Line Length Dialog on page
1024.
Text Style Panel
The Text Style panel is available for a variety
of objects in the program and control the
appearance of the selected objects text. See
Text Style Panel on page 1012.
Editing Text
Once created, Rich Text objects can be
selected individually or as a group and edited
using the edit handles, the edit toolbar
buttons, and theRich Text Specification
dialog. See Rich Text Specification Dialog
on page 986.
Text objects can be selected and edited
much the way Rich Text objects can;
however, there are a few differences which
are described here.
Editing Text Attributes
Most text attributes, including the font, size,
style, and the content itself, are edited in the
Rich Text and Text Specification dialogs.
In order to edit the attributes of an existing
Rich Text object, you must select some
or all of the text before making changes. See
Text Panel on page 986.
Chief Architect automatically adds the
http:// prefix for links that begin with
"www" when Test Link is clicked.
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 996 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Editing Text
997
To edit Rich Text attributes
1. Select a Rich Text object and click
the Open Object edit button.
2. On the Text panel of the Rich Text
Specification dialog, click and drag to
select some or all of the text typed into
the Text field.
3. With some or all of the text selected,
change any of the attributes available
along the top of the panel, including the
font, size, color, and style.
4. As changes are made, the selected text
updates. Only the selected text is modi-
fied.
Text objects do not support multiple
fonts or other attributes in the same text
object. When you choose an attribute, it is
applied to all characters in the text object.
Using the Mouse
A selected Rich Text or Text object
has the same edit handles as other box-based
objects. See Editing Box-Based Objects on
page 198.
As a text boxs width is made narrower or
wider using an edit handle, the its height may
expand or contract to allow all text to be
shown. The opposite is not true, however: a
text boxs height cannot be resized smaller
than the height of the rows of text it contains,
plus its margins.
Depending on the active Edit Behavior ,
the text box and the characters within it may
or may not resize together when a corner edit
handle is dragged. See Edit Behaviors on
page 172.
If Resize editing is enabled, both the
text object and the font resizes when a
corner edit handle is dragged.
If Default or Concentric editing
is enabled, the text box resizes, but not
the font size.
If Fillet editing is selecting, the cor-
ners become rounded and the font size
does not change. See Behaviors Panel
on page 108.
When text is resized using the edit han-
dles, there is a sticky point at the natu-
ral size of the text box. Hold down the Ctrl key
while resizing to override this behavior.
Resize
Extend/
Contract
Rotate
Move
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 997 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
998
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Edit Text in Place
The contents and appearance of text
objects created with the Rich Text
tool can be edited directly in the drawing
area using the Edit Text in Place edit tool.
To use Edit Text in Place
1. Select a Rich Text object and click
the Edit Text in Place edit button.
The text appears as it did when it was
first created: inside a text field with the
Edit Bar above. See To create Rich
Text on page 984.
2. Click inside the Text Field to type or
select any of the existing text.
3. Use the tools on the Edit Bar to edit any
or all of the text as needed. The tools on
the Edit bar are the same as those on the
Text panel of the Text Specification dia-
log. See Text Panel on page 986.
4. When you are finished, click outside of
the text field to close it and the Edit Bar.
Convert to Rich Text
Text objects cannot be edited to the
same degree that Rich Text can. You
can, however, convert a selected simple Text
object to Rich Text by clicking the
Convert to Rich Text edit button. Most
attributes of the selected simple Text
object are retained; however, columns
created using the Tab key are not. See Tab
Spacing on page 1000.
Using the Edit Tools
A selected Rich Text or Text object
can be edited in a variety of ways using the
buttons on the edit toolbar. See The Edit
Toolbar on page 34.
Resizing Text
Both the border of a text object and the
characters it contains can be resized.
The border of a text object can be resized
using its edit handles or by specifying the
Height and Width in its specification dialog.
The default character height of Rich Text
and Text objects can be specified as
can the character height for individual
objects, in their specification dialogs. See
Text Defaults and Preferences on page
980.
Character height can be measured in either of
two ways. See Character Size on page 982.
Scaling Text
As with the size of other objects, text size is
subject to the current drawing scale specified
in the Page Setup dialog. See Drawing
Sheet Setup Dialog on page 1164.
To determine the Height in drawing units
that is needed to produce text of a specific
size when printed, use the Print Size
Calculator dialog.
To use the Print Size Calculator dialog
1. Select the text object or Text Style that
you wish to scale and click:
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 998 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Editing Text
999
The Print Size button on the Text
panel of the Rich Text Specification
dialog. See Text Panel on page 986.
The Scale button on the Text panel of a
variety of specification dialogs. See
Text Style Panel on page 1012.
The Scale button in the Text Style
Defaults dialog.
2. In the Print Size Calculator dialog:
Confirm the desired Printed Scale.
Enter the Desired Print Size of the
text.
The Text Height in View required to
produce the Desired Print Size displays
here for reference.
3. Click OK to return to the previous dia-
log. The Character Height value now
equals that of the Text Height in View.
Generally, the Printed Scale does not need
to be changed in the Print Size Calculator
dialog unless you intend to send the current
view to layout at a different drawing scale.
See Sending Views to Layout on page
1188.
Aligning Text
Text can be aligned in a number of ways.
The text content of a text object can be
aligned to the left, right, center or justi-
fied in the Rich Text Specification dia-
log. See Text Panel on page 986.
The text content of a text object can be
also be aligned by clicking the Align
Left , Align Right , Center ,
or Justify edit button.
The center points of text objects can be
aligned with one another by assigning
them the same X and/or Y Position. See
Attributes Panel on page 1007.
Text objects can be aligned by bumped
them against a CAD line or CAD based
object such as a roof plane. See Bump-
ing/Pushing on page 213.
A variety of other alignment methods are
also available. See Aligning Objects on
page 215.
Copy, Cut and Paste
Copy, Cut and Paste of text into and out of
the text specification dialogs can be
accomplished using keyboard hotkeys:
Press Ctrl +X to Cut the selected text and
save it to the system clipboard.
Press Ctrl +C to Copy the selected text
and copy it to the system clipboard.
Press Ctrl +V to paste your last cut or
copied selection in a new text object.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 999 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1000
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
For more, see Copying and Pasting
Objects on page 164.
Copy, Cut and Paste use the system
clipboard, making it possible to to transfer
text between text objects, between Chief
Architect files, from a plan or layout into
another application, or vice versa.
Tab Spacing
The Tab key functions differently in Rich
Text and Text objects.
In Rich Text , the Tab key creates a
space. CAD Style Font Sizing affects the size
of the space created. See Options Panel on
page 991.
Tab spacing in Text objects produces
columns with widths that can be edited using
edit handles.
To insert tab-spaced text
1. Highlight a block of text objects con-
taining tabs from another program or
text from the Materials List and press
Ctrl +C to copy them to the system clip-
board.
2. Return to the floor plan view, select the
Text tool, and click to place a text
object.
3. Press Ctrl +V to paste the copied mate-
rials into the text box, then click OK.
The text object displays on-screen.
4. Select the text object and note the addi-
tional lines with handles separating each
column.
Columns automatically resize to fit the
contained text. When a text object is selected
you can use the edit handles that display at
each column to adjust spacing.
Copying and Pasting Text
The Copy, Cut and Paste commands use the
system clipboard, making it possible to
transfer text between text objects, between
Chief Architect files, from a plan or layout
into another application such as a text editor
or spreadsheet program, or vice versa. See
Copying and Pasting Objects on page 164.
All or selected portions of the Materials List
can also be copied and pasted into a text
object, as well as into a word processing or
spreadsheet program. See Materials Lists
on page 1225.
Cut, Copy, and Paste can also be accessed
from the Edit menu of many applications,
including Chief Architect. These menu
commands are not available when the text
specification dialogs are open, but you can
use the associated hotkeys.
To Copy, Cut and Paste text
1. On the Text panel of either text specifi-
cation dialog or in another program alto-
gether, highlight the text you wish to cut,
copy or paste.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1000 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Spell Check
1001
2. Press Ctrl +X to Cut the selected text
out of its original location and save it to
the system clipboard.
3. Press Ctrl +C to Copy the selected text
to the system clipboard without remov-
ing it from its original location.
4. Open the text object or a file in another
application and click to place your cur-
sor in the Text field, writing area, or
spreadsheet cell.
5. Press Ctrl +V to Paste the copied text at
the location of your cursor.
Bear in mind that when text is copied and
pasted, its formatting is not always retained.
The results depend on the program or type of
text object in which the content was created
as well as the type of text object into which it
is pasted.
Pasting into Text
Text pasted into a simple Text object
from another source will not retain its
formatting. Instead, the settings for that
Text object are always used. See Text
Specification Dialog on page 992.
This is the case even if the text is copied
from another Text object unless that
object happens to use the same formatting.
Text pasted into a simple Text object
from a spreadsheet program will retain basic
column and row information. Each row can
only have a single line of text; however, the
width of each column can be adjusted. See
Tab Spacing on page 1000.
Pasting into Rich Text
Text pasted into a Rich Text object
from another source, on the other
hand, will retain most of its custom
formatting.
Text pasted into a Rich Text object from
a spreadsheet program retains basic column
and row information. Column width cannot
be adjusted as it can in simple Text ;
however, as you add or remove text froma
cell, row height will increase or decrease to
accomodate your changes.
The background colors of two or more cells
copied from a spreadsheet application will be
retained if pasted in to Rich Text ;
however, once pasted background color
cannot be edited.
If you want to retain the color of the actual
text being pasted into a Rich Text object,
be sure to uncheck Layer Color Text in the
Rich Text Specification dialog. See
Appearance Panel on page 989.
Spell Check
Select Tools> Checks> Spell Check
to open theSpell Check dialog. The
Spell Check feature checks each text object
in the current current .plan or .layout file
consecutively for spelling errors.
Spell Check can also be accessed by clicking
the Spell Check button in the Rich Text or
Text Specification dialog or by clicking the
Spell Check edit button. When accessed
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1001 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1002
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
in this manner, only the selected text object is
checked for spelling errors. See Editing
Text on page 996.
Spell Check Dialog
Spell Check looks in for each word in
all open dictionaries. When a word that
is not recognized is found, it displays here.
Click Ignore to ignore the word in ques-
tion in all Spell Checks during the current
program session. The word will not be
ignored the next time Chief Architect is
launched.
Click Skip to ignore the current instance
of the word, but find other instances that
may be present.
Click Learn to add the word in question
to the User Dictionary. See Chief Archi-
tect Data on page 49.
Click Delete to remove the selected word
from the text.
Click Replace to replace the word in
question with the suggested word, below.
Spell check displays Suggestions for
corrections here. There are two ways to
replace a misspelled word:
Type a correction in the field and click
the Replace button.
Click on a suggestion to select it, then
click Replace to accept it.
When Spell Check is finished checking the
text object or file for errors, the Spell Check
results window displays.
Text Arrows
Text arrows, which are simply CAD lines
with arrows drawn on the Text layer, can
be used to connect text objects to details of
interest in your drawing. See Line Tools on
page 1030.
Text arrows can be snapped together to form
open or closed polylines. If two lines with
arrows meet within the bounding box of a
text object, however, they will not join. This
allows you to attach multiple, separate text
Note: Spell Check does not look for duplicate
or repeated words.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1002 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Text Arrows
1003
arrows to a single text object. See Editing
Line Based Objects on page 180.
Lines with arrows can be independent or
attached to other objects. Arrows attach to
closed polyline-based objects along their
edges, but can attach to an architectural
object anywhere within its 2D symbol in
floor plan view. If an arrow is attached to text
or another object, deleting either the text or
the object will also delete the arrow.
Leader Line
The Leader Line tool places either a
Text or Rich Text object with an arrow
already attached. This arrow can be selected
and moved like any other line with arrow.
To create text with a leader line
1. Select CAD> Text> Leader Line .
2. Starting at the point where you want the
arrow to point, drag to where you want a
bend in the leader line and release the
mouse button.
3. Click at the point where you want the
center of the first line of text to display.
The Rich Text Specification dialog
opens. See Rich Text Specification
Dialog on page 986.
4. Enter text and click OK.
Click in the same location to create a Rich
Text object without a leader.
If multiple leader lines are specified, click in
the same location to stop adding leader
segments.
The initial alignment of text created with the
Leader Line tool depends on the
direction that the leader line was drawn:
Leader Lines drawn from left to right
produce text that is right-aligned.
Leader Lines drawn from right to left
produce text that is left-aligned.
Leader Lines drawn from vertically pro-
duce text that is center-aligned.
Text Line with Arrow
Text Lines with Arrow can be
attached to text, CAD and
architectural objects by selecting CAD>
Text> Text Line with Arrow and then
clicking and dragging to draw a line. There is
no limit to the number of text lines with
arrows that can be attached to an object.
The endpoints of Text Lines with
Arrows can be joined to form polylines
with corners that can be adjusted using the
edit handles. See Polylines on page 1046.
A Text Line with Arrow behaves like a
Line With Arrow with one exception:
Text Lines with Arrow are initially placed on
the default Text layer, not the Current CAD
Layer. See Layers on page 139.
Auto Positioning Arrows
If either or both ends of a line with arrow are
attached to a text object, Auto Position Tail
and Auto Position Head are in the Line
Note: Leader lines create Rich Text and have
two leader line segments by default. You can
change this in the Preferences dialog. See
Text Panel on page 91.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1003 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1004
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Specification dialog. See Arrow Panel on
page 1037.
Check either or both if you want the text line
with arrow to update its position on the text
object if the text object or text line with
arrow is moved.
The first segment of a polyline arrow
attached to text maintains its angle when
Auto Position is off and text is moved.
Auto Position is turned off automatically
when an arrow is not attached to one of
the auto position locations.
Arcs and splines with arrows can also be
attached to text objects.
There are four auto position locations on a
text object: one at the midpoint of each side.
The following image illustrates the behavior
of auto positioning. The arrow has the Auto
Position Tail option checked. When the head
of the line with arrow is moved, the tail of
the arrow snaps to different auto position
locations on the text object, maintaining its
connection.
If a selected Text Line with Arrow is moved
away from an auto position location and you
check Auto Position Tail, the tail will snap
to the nearest auto position location.
Special Use Arrows
A Text Line with Arrow attached to a
Rich Text or Text object and
designated as a Special Use Arrow offers
functionality that may be useful when
annotating the height of various objects. A
Special Use Arrow replaces the first number
in the attached Text object with the height of
the architectural object it is attached to on the
other end. The height is relative to 0-0 on
Floor 1.
To create a Special Use Arrow
1. In floor plan view, create a Rich Text
or Text object that has a Text
Line with Arrow or Leader
Line attached.
1. Make sure the text includes a dash.
2. Connect the Line with Arrow to a slab,
foundation wall, slab footing, stair
landing, or custom countertop.
3. Select the Line with Arrow click the
Open Object edit button.
4. On the Arrow panel of the Arrow
Specification dialog, check Special Use
and click OK.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1004 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Callouts
1005
5. The height of the connected object will
be added after the dasy, using the format
specified in the Dialog Number/Angle
Style dialog. See Dialog Number/
Angle Style Dialog on page 122.
Callouts
Select CAD> Text> Callout, then
click at the location where you want a
callout to be placed in floor plan view, a
cross section/elevation view, a CAD Detail
or on a layout page. The Callout
Specification dialog displays. Make any
needed changes and click OK to place a
callout. See Callout Specification Dialog
on page 1006.
Cross Section Lines
Check the Cross Section Line box in the
Callout Specification dialog to add a cross
section line perpendicular to the nearest wall.
See Callout Panel on page 1006.
Cross section lines can be added to any
callout shape. Resize or rotate the cross
section line by dragging the triangular edit
handle near the end of the cross section line.
Pointers and Arrows
To add an arrow or hat to a callout, select
the callout and drag the diamond-shaped
handle away from the center of the callout.
An arrow is created, pointing in the direction
you dragged.
Change the arrows direction by selecting
the callout and dragging the edit handle
appearing just beyond the arrow.
Remove an arrow by clicking and drag-
ging the edit handle at the point of the
arrow towards the center of the callout.
You can also add as many lines with arrows
as you like to callouts. To add an arrow to a
callout, select CAD> Text> Text Line with
Arrow , then click and drag to create a
line with arrow, which can be moved or
resized as needed.
Double Callouts
Any callout can be specified as a Double
Callout in the Callout Specification dialog.
See Attributes Panel on page 1007.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1005 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1006
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
To resize the line between the two callout
shapes, select the callout and then click and
drag the edit handle at the center of either
callout shape. The arrows on a double callout
are always the same on both callouts.
Callout Specification Dialog
To open the Callout Specification
dialog, select a callout and click the
Open Object edit button. This dialog also
displays when a new callout is created using
the Callout tool.
The Callout Specification dialog is similar
to the Callout Defaults dialog but affects the
selected callouts rather than all subsequently
created callouts. Also, the name of the Saved
Default being edited will display in the title
bar of the defaults dialog. See Text Defaults
and Preferences on page 980.
Callout Panel
Specify the text of the selected callouts
Label by typing in the text fields here.
Type a Callout Label, which displays
inside the callout shape. If no Text Below
Line is specified, the Callout Label is
centered in the callout.
Type the Text Below Line for the bottom
row, if desired. If Text Below Line is
added, a line will separate it from the
Callout Label.
Click the Insert button to the right of
either option to choose from a list of spe-
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1006 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Callout Specification Dialog
1007
cial characters and text macros. See Text
Macros on page 1014.
Specify the Callout Shape by clicking
the radio button beside one of the
options here.
Additional Specifications can be set
here.
Uncheck Automatic to enable the Size
field and specify a new value. When
checked, the callout is sized so that it
encompasses the text of its label.
Specify the Angle of the selected callout.
Attributes Panel
Specify the attributes of the selected
callouts Cross Section Line.
Check Display to apply a cross section
line to the selected callout. When
unchecked, no cross section line is used.
Check Double Callout to specify two
identical callouts connected by the cross
section line. Only available when Display
is checked.
Select the cross section lines line Style
from the drop-down list or by clicking the
Library button. When By Layer is
checked, the line style specified in the
Layer Display Options dialog is used.
See Line Styles on page 1056.
Specify the Weight of the cross section
line or check By Layer to use the line
weight specified in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
Specify the attributes of the Callout
Arrows.
Check By Layer to use the color speci-
fied in the Layer Display Options dialog
or click the Color bar to choose an arrow
color. See Color Chooser/Select Color
Dialog on page 843.
2
3
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1007 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1008
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Check Filled to specify arrows with a
solid fill. When unchecked, arrows are
unfilled.
Specify the Number of arrows and
whether they are Small or Large.
Line Style Panel
The Line Style panel is found in the
specification dialogs for many different
objects. For more information, see Line
Style Panel on page 1035.
Additional attributes for the cross section
line and arrows can be specified on the
Attributes panel.
Text Style Panel
The settings on this panel control the
appearance of the selected objects text. For
more information, see Text Style Panel on
page 1012.
Editing Callouts
Callouts can be edited using the edit handles,
the edit toolbar buttons and the Callout
Specification dialog. See Callout
Specification Dialog on page 1006.
When a callout is selected, it has at least four
edit handles. An additional rotate handle
displays for each pointer added to the callout.
The Move handle is located at the center
of the callout and is used to move it.
The triangular Extend/Rotate handle is
used to extend and/or rotate the callouts
cross section line, if one exists. See
Cross Section Lines on page 1005.
The small, square Resize handle is
located on the edge of the callout and is
used to resize it and its associated text.
The Add pointer handle is used to add
pointers by dragging away from the call-
out.
The small triangular Rotate pointer han-
dle located at the end of a pointer, if one
has been added, is used to rotate that
pointer.
Resizing Callouts
Callout shapes can be resized either in the
Callout Specification dialog or using the
edit handles. See Callout Panel on page
1006.
Callout text can be resized in the Callout
Specification dialog. See Attributes Panel
on page 1007.
As long as Specify Callout Size box is
checked, a callouts shape and text resize
independent of one another. When this box is
unchecked, the two are dynamically linked:
Resize Add
Move Extend/
Rotate
Rotate
pointer
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1008 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Markers
1009
if you resize the shape, the text adjusts
accordingly or vice versa.
Markers
Markers for Level Lines, Test
Borings and Point Markers can be
placed in floor plan view, cross section
views, or CAD Details. Framing Reference
Markers should only be placed in floor plan
views.
To create a marker, select CAD> Text>
Marker and click at the location where
you want it to be placed. The Marker
Specification dialog opens.
You can also place a framing reference
marker using Build> Framing> Framing
Reference . See Framing Reference
Markers on page 575.
Point Markers and Dimensions
When the Point to Point Dimension tool
is used to draw a dimension line and an
object is not available to snap to at either the
start or end point, a Point Marker will be
automatically created and the dimension line
will locate it. See Point to Point
Dimensions on page 960.
In addition, any dimensions drawn in a cross
section/elevation view may locate Cross
Section Lines that represent objects rather
than the objects themselves. When this
occurs, Point Markers will also be placed and
the dimension lines will locate them. See
Cross Section Lines on page 884.
Marker Specification Dialog
To open the Marker Specification
dialog, select a marker and click the
Open Object edit button.
This dialog also displays when a new marker
is created by clicking in floor plan view
using the Marker tool.
The Marker Specification dialog is similar
to the Marker Defaults dialog but affects the
selected markers rather than all subsequently
created markers. The name of the Saved
Default being edited will display in the title
bar of the defaults dialog. See Text Defaults
and Preferences on page 980.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1009 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1010
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Marker Panel
Choose a marker Type. Note that
Framing Reference Markers affect
the model, while the other marker types are
for annotation only.
Specify the text of the selected
markers Label.
Type the Text which displays above the
markers line.
Type the Text Below Line that displays
below the markers line, if desired. Only
available for Level Lines.
Click the Insert button to the right of
either option to choose from a list of spe-
cial characters and text macros. See Text
Macros on page 1014.
Specify the Size of the selected marker.
Specify the Marker Radius, which is the
distance from the markers center to the
edge of its filled shape.
Enter a number in the Height field. This
value will display in the Label when a
pound sign (#) is entered in either Label
text field.
Line Style Panel
The Line Style panel is found in the
specification dialogs for many different
objects. For more information, see Line
Style Panel on page 1035.
Additional attributes for the cross section
line and arrows can be specified on the
Attributes panel.
1
Level Line
Test Boring
Point Marker
Framing Reference Marker
2
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1010 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Editing Markers
1011
Text Style Panel
The settings on this panel control the
appearance of the selected objects text. For
more information, see Text Style Panel on
page 1012.
Editing Markers
Markers can be edited using the edit handles,
edit toolbar and Marker Specification
dialog. See Marker Specification Dialog
on page 1009.
When a marker is selected, it has four edit
handles.
The Move handle is located at the center
of the marker and is used to move it.
The Resize handle is located on the edge
of the marker and is used to resize the
marker and associated text.
The triangular Rotate handle is used to
rotate the marker and associated text.
The Extend handle is used to adjust the
distance between the marker and its asso-
ciated text.
Text Styles
In Chief Architect, a Text Style is a saved set
of attributes that can be assigned to any
object that displays text, such as Text,
Callouts, Markers, Dimensions, Schedules,
CAD objects, and object labels. A given Text
Style can be assigned to objects:
In the Layer Display Options dialog;
On the Text Style panel of various
objects defaults dialogs;
On the Text Style panel some individual
objects specification dialog.
This makes it easy to ensure that various
objects display text with a consistent
appearance.
You can create your own or edit existing Text
Styles to suit your needs in the Text Style
Defaults dialog
Text Style Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings,
expand the Text, Callouts and Mark-
Rotate Resize
Move Extend
Note: Because of its ability to use multiple
attributes in the same object, Rich Text does
not use Text Styles. See Rich Text Specifica-
tion Dialog on page 986.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1011 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1012
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
ers category, click on Text Styles and click
Edit to open the Text Style Defaults dialog.
The Saved Defaults dialog will open, allow-
ing you to select which Saved Text Style
Defaults you would like to edit. See Multi-
ple Saved Defaults on page 70.
The Text Style Defaults dialog can also be
accessed:
From the Layer Display Options dialog.
See Layer Display Options Dialog on
page 144.
By clicking the Text Style Defaults
button, which can be added to your tool-
bars. See To add a button to a toolbar
on page 128.
By clicking the Define button on the Text
Style panel of various objects specifica-
tion dialogs.
The settings in the Text Style Defaults
dialog are similar to those on the Text Style
panel of object specification dialogs
throughout the program but affect all objects
using that style rather than an individual
selected object.
Text Style Panel
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1012 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Text Styles
1013
Specify where the selected object
should draw its Text Style from. These
options are not available in the Text Style
Defaults dialog.
Select Use Layer for Text Style to use
the Text Style assigned to the layer tht the
selected text is located on.
Select Use Text Style, then choose a style
from the drop-down list to apply that
style to the selected object, regardless of
what layer it is on. When this is not
selected, the name of the selected objects
Text Style displays here for reference.
Select Use Custom Text Style to enable
the settings below and customize the
selected objects Text Style attributes.
Check Use Default Text Style to use the
default style for the selected object type, or
uncheck this box to enable the settings below
and define a custom style.
The settings that follow are only editable
when Use Custom Text Style is selected.
When it is not selected, information about
the Text Style that is assigned to the selected
object displays for reference.
Specify the attributes of the selected
Text Styles Font.
Select a font from the drop-down list.
The text styles Bold, Underline, Italic,
and Strikeout are available. Check any
of the boxes to apply that style.
Specify theCharacter Height of text
using the selected Text Style.
Enter the Character Height in drawing
units. This height is subject to the current
drawing scale.
Click the Scale button to open the
Printed Size Input dialog. See Scaling
Text on page 998.
In Version 9, text size was driven by
dimension information associated with
the font. Check Legacy Compatible Size
to use this information for text sizing. See
Character Size on page 982.
Options -
Check Rotate with Plan to rotate text
using the selected Text Style when
Rotate View is used. If unchecked,
the text is unaffected when Rotate View
is used. See Rotate Plan View on page
228.
Rotate with Plan also affects text in a
view sent to layout if the layout box is
rotated. See CAD and Text in Layout
on page 1186.
Check Transparent to make text boxes
using the selected Text Style transparent.
When unchecked, text boxes have a solid
fill the same color as your background
color. See Colors Panel on page 88.
Specify the selected Text Styles Text
Color. When Use Custom Text Style is
not selected above, a Text Color does not
display here for reference.
When By Layer is checked, text uses the
line color assigned to the layer that the
object it is assigned to is located on. See
Displaying Objects on page 140.
Uncheck By Layer, then click the Color
bar to select a different color. See Color
Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page
843.
1
2
3
4
5
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1013 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1014
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
A preview of the Text Style currently
assigned to the selected object displays
here.
Text Macros
Text macros insert dynamic information
relevant to the current plan or layout file, or a
selected object. Macros are particularly
useful in layouts: page numbers, drawing
scale, and information to identify drawings
can be inserted to improve organization and
clarity.
Text macros can also be used to create
customized object labels. See Creating User
Defined Text Macros on page 1016.
There are three categories of text macro:
Global macros have information about
the project, the date and time, and can be
used to insert special characters.
Object Specific macros have information
specific to a selected object type and can
be included in object labels. See Label
Panel on page 1223.
User Defined macros can include a wide
range of values, including global and
object specific information and text.
They can also be written to perform cal-
culations. See Creating User Defined
Text Macros on page 1016.
To insert a text macro
1. Click the Insert Macro button on the
Text panel of either the Rich Text or
Text Specification dialog.
2. A menu of macros displays. Move your
cursor over a menu item to view its sub-
menu.
3. Select from the list of available text
macros. In this example Time Date>
Short Date (%date.short) is selected.
4. Click OK to close the Text
Specification dialog and place the text.
5. The text object displays the date rather
than the macro formula.
Contact Info
Macros in the Contact Info submenu display
information about the Client, Designer and
the Registered User of Chief Architect.
Information supplied by Client macros is
specified in the Client Information dia-
log. This information is file-specific and
can be edited at any time. The client info
for a plan file and a layout file are seper-
ate. See Client Information on page
1075.
Information supplied by Designer macros
can be specified in the Designer
6
The macro formula
displays in the dialogs
Text Entry field
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1014 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Text Macros
1015
Information dialog. Information in this
dialog is file-specific and can be edited at
any time. See Designer Information on
page 1075.
By default, the Designer Information
dialog is populated by information from
the Default Designer Information dia-
log. See Text Panel on page 91.
Information supplied by Registered User
macros corresponds to the information
that was given when the current installa-
tion was registered and cannot be modi-
fied without reinstalling and registering
the program.
File Info
Macros that display information about the
file name and saved location of the current
plan or layout are available in the File Info
submenu.
Plan Info
Macros in the Plan Info submenu display
information about the current plan or layout
file.
Macros that display information about rooms
derive that information from the location of
the text object.
Information about a room will display if
at least half of the text object is located
inside that room. See Room Definition
on page 317.
If the text object has a Text Arrow
attached to it, room macros display infor-
mation about the room located at the Text
Arrows endpoint rather than at the loca-
Macro Description
%file.dir% The directory path of the current
file. (\myplans\)
%file.drive% The drive letter of the current
file. (C:)
%file.ext% The file type of the current file.
(.plan or .layout)
%file% The full pathname of the current
file (C:\myplans\myPlan.plan)
%file.name% The name of the current file.
(myPlan)
Macro Description
%scale% Current drawing scale. When
printed, this is the scale used
for printing. On screen this var-
ies based on the zoom factor.
%sheet.size% The size of the drawing sheet.
%room.area.
internal%
Internal room area of the room
that the center of the text is in.
%page% Page number of the current
layout page.
%living.area% Living area of the current plan.
%numpages% Total number of printable
pages in the current layout.
%room.
dimensions%
Dimensions of the room that
the center of the text is in.
%room.area.
standard%
Standard room area of the
room (at center of text).
%room.height.
ceiling%
Ceiling height of the room (at
center of text).
%room.height.
loweredceiling
Lowered Ceiling height of the
room (at center of text).
%room.
volume%
Volume of the room (at center
of text) measured from wall,
floor, and ceilng surfaces.
%room.
name%
Name of the room (at center of
text).
%room.type% Room Type of the room (at
center of text).
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1015 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1016
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
tion of the text. See Text Arrows on
page 1002.
Special Characters
Special text characters such as and can
be inserted into text in the same manner as
dynamic text macros.
Time and Date
The current date and time can be displayed
using macros in the Time Date submenu.
When a documented is printed, these macros
display the date and time that the printing
took place.
Object Specific
Information about a specific object can be
shown in its label, when specified in the
objects specification dialog. or in a text
object with an arrow pointing to the object.
The macros available for a given object
depend on its type. Additional, user defined
macros can also be created.
Creating User Defined Text Macros
In addition to the text macros installed with
the program, you can create your own
custom text macros for a variety of purposes.
Custom object labels See Object
Labels on page 1221.
Custom object labels inserted into text.
Shortcuts for names or other written
information.
Text Macro Management
A list of all user-defined text macros
present in the current plan or layout
file can be accessed by selecting CAD>
Text> Text Macro Management.
If you wish to create a user defined macro
for an object, or find out whether an
existing macro is valid for an object,
open this dialog while the object is
selected.
To create a user-defined macro to be
inserted into a text object that describes
another object, or to find out whether
such a macro is valid, select a text object
with an arrow pointing to the object in
question and then open this dialog. See
Named Values and Context on page
1250.
An object-specific version of this dialog is
also available for objects saved in an
Macro Description
%time.24% 24 hour time.
%time% AM/PM time.
%date.
short%
Inserts a short version of the
date using system settings.
(03/19/08)
%date.long% Inserts a long version of the date
using system settings (Wednes-
day, Mar 19, 2008)
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1016 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Creating User Defined Text Macros
1017
unlocked library. Right-click on a single
object of a type able to display labels and
select Text Macro Management from the
contextual menu. See Using the Contextual
Menus on page 792.
Any macros in use by the object as a label
when it is added to the library are listed
here. Note that objects in some manufac-
turer catalogs may include macros. See
Manufacturer Catalogs on page 795.
Custom macros can be imported to and
exported from a library object, and addi-
tional macros can be added to the object,
but you cannot specify them as part of a
label while it is in the library.
When the object is added to a plan, any
macros associated with it are added to the
plan, as well.
An alphabetical list of all User-Defined
Macros present in the current file
displays here.
Click on the Name of a macro to select it.
If a macro is Valid in the current context,
a checkmark will display to the right of
its Name. See Named Values and Con-
text on page 1250.
Information about a selected macro dis-
plays in the Macro Value and Expanded
Macro Value fields to the right of the
list.The Macro Value field shows the
defined Value of the selected macro. The
Expanded Macro Value shows the output
of the macro in the current context.
Edit or delete the text macro selected in
the list on the left, or create a new one.
Click the Edit button to make changes to
the selected macro in the Edit Text Macro
dialog. Only available when an existing
macro is selected.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1017 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1018
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Click the New button to open the Edit
Text Macro dialog and create a new
macro.
Click the Copy button to create a copy of
the currently selected macro and open the
Edit Text Macro dialog. Only available
when an existing macro is selected.
Click the Delete button to remove the
selected macro from the list. Only avail-
able when an existing macro is selected.
User Defined Macros can be imported
and exported between files as well as
unlocked library objects.
Click the Import button to open the
Import Text Macros dialog and import
macros exported from another file into
the current file. See Importing Files on
page 59.
Click the Export button to open the
Export Text Macros dialog and make the
user-defined macros in this file available
to be imported into another file. See
Exporting Files on page 54.
Click the Show Evaluation Error
button to open an Information box with
a description of why the selected macro is
not Valid. Only available when the selected
macro is not Valid.
Edit Text Macro Dialog
The Edit Text Macro dialog can be accessed
by clicking the Edit, New, or Copy button in
the Text Macro Management dialog.
Type a short, descriptive Name for the
new object label macro. Macro names
must be unique within a given file, or library
object.
Type a named value, reference to a
Ruby .rb file, and/or insert an existing
macro in the Value field.
You can also copy a Named Value out of
the Ruby Console or a definition from an
.rb file and paste it here. See To Copy,
Cut and Paste text on page 1000.
Click the Insert button above the Value
field to insert an already existing macro
into the selected macro. See Text Mac-
ros on page 1014.
Check the Evaluate box, then select a
Context from the drop-down list.
Choose None if the macros context - or
contexts - are stated in its Value, or if the
macro performs a function but doesnt
refer to an object.
Choose Owner Object to create a macro
for use in an object label.
3
4
1
2
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1018 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Creating User Defined Text Macros
1019
Choose Referenced Object to create a
macro for use in a Text object with an
arrow that points at an object that the
macro describes.
Click OK to return to the Text Macro
Management dialog.
Importing and Exporting
Macros
User-defined text macros can be exported out
of one plan file, layout file, or library object
and imported into another file or object using
the Text Macro Management dialog.
If the program encounters macros with
duplicate names when importing into a plan
or layout file, the Text Macro Name Conflict
dialog will display, allowing you to choose
how to handle the name conflict.
Select Rename the imported macro,
then type a short, descriptive, unique
New Macro Name to keep both the
existing macro and the one being
imported. By default, the new name is
simply the original name appended by a
number.
Select Discard the imported macro to
use the existing macro already present in
the destination file or library object rather
than import the new one.
Select Replace the existing macro with
the imported macro to delete the exist-
ing macro and replace it with the one
being imported.
Check Do this for all remaining macro
conflicts to apply the same choice for any
other macros with conflicting names in
the current import operation.
If the program encounters a macro name
conflict when importing into a library object
or when placing a library object in a plan, a
Question message box will ask if you wish
to replace the existing macros. Click Yes to
replace any existing macros with imported
macros of the same name or click No to keep
the existing macros and not import those of
the same name.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1019 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1020
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1020 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1021
Chapt er 33:
CAD Obj ects
With the 2D Computer Aided Design (CAD)
tools included in Chief Architect, you can
add details to views of your 3D model to
create complete working drawings. Custom
details can be created, saved, and used in
other plans.
The CAD Tools are used to add information
to 2D views of your model. CAD objects do
not affect 3D objects or display in camera
views or overviews, but they can be used to
add details to layout pages, floor plan view
and cross section/elevation views.
CAD polylines can be converted to 3D
objects such as countertops and terrain data,
and shown in 3D views. See Convert
Polyline on page 230.
CAD objects are edited much like other
objects in Chief Architect. See Editing
Objects on page 171.
Chapter Contents
CAD Defaults and Preferences
The CAD Drawing Tools
Point Tools
Line Tools
Line Specification Dialog
Arc Tools
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes
Arc Specification Dialog
Circle Tools
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification
Dialog
Polylines
Polyline Specification Dialog
Box Tools
Box Specification Dialog
Revision Clouds
Revision Cloud Specification Dialog
Splines
Displaying CAD Objects
Line Styles
CAD Blocks
CAD Block Specification Dialog
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1021 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1022
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
CAD Details
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog
CAD Defaults and Preferences
CAD Defaults can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings from
the menu and expanding the CAD category.
The behavior and appearance of CAD
objects are also affected by settings on
the CAD, Line Properties, Sun Angle,
Behaviors, and Snap Properties Panels of the
Preferences dialog. Unlike default settings,
preference settings are global, affecting all
plan and layout files. See Preferences
Dialog on page 85.
CAD Defaults Dialog
The settings in the CAD Defaults
dialog control the basic appearance of
CAD objects. This dialog can also be opened
by clicking the CAD Defaults button, which
can be added to a toolbar See To add a
button to a toolbar on page 128.
Each plan file has multiple CAD Defaults
dialogs: one affecting floor plan view, one
for every cross section/elevation view, and
one for every CAD Detail and Wall Detail.
Each layout file has its own CAD Defaults,
as well. Each set of CAD Defaults can be
accessed by opening the CAD Defaults
dialog from within that view.
Select the Current CAD Layer from
the drop-down list. See Current CAD
Layer on page 1055.
Note: Although there are multiple CAD
Defaults dialogs in each plan file, only one
layer can be specified as the Current CAD
Layer at any given time. When a new Current
CAD Layer is selected, the change affects all
views and view types.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1022 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
CAD Defaults and Preferences
1023
Click the Define button to open the Layer
Display Options dialog. See Layer Dis-
play Options Dialog on page 144.
Specify the Displayed Line Length
Format, which controls the appearance
of line length indicators. These only display
when Show Length is checked in an objects
specification dialog. See Line Style Panel
on page 1035.
A preview of the current line length for-
mat displays here.
Click the Define button to open the
Displayed Number Style dialog and edit
the displayed line length format.
Display Line Angles as - Specify the
format to use when Show Angle is
checked in an objects specification dialog.
See Line Style Panel on page 1035.
Line angles can be displayed using three
basic methods:
Degrees/Minutes/Bearings - Measured
counterclockwise from a line drawn hori-
zontally to the right of the angles vertex.
Useful for most drawing tasks. Select the
level of accuracy that you require.
Quadrant Bearings - Measured from a
vertical line representing North/ South,
Quadrant Bearings use directional bear-
ings in their measurements. Useful for
site drawings.
Azimuth Bearings - Measured from a
line drawn straight up from the angles
vertex (ie, North on a site plan). Useful
for site drawings, Azimuth Bearings use
degrees, minutes, and seconds in their
measurements.
Select any combination of the available
Options.
Check Show Arc Centers and Ends
to show arc centers and ends. Ends dis-
play as small lines where arcs connect to
one another. Centers also acts as snap
points. See Arc Centers and Ends on
page 188.
Check Fill New Framing Members to
draw all new framing members with a
solid white fill. This settings is not view
specific - it affects all new framing mem-
bers, regardless of the floor they are
drawn on.
Check Use Line for Framing to show all
framing members as single lines rather
2
3
Minutes + Seconds
Minutes
Degrees
Quadrant Bearing
Azimuth Bearing
Line length and angle indicators use
the Text Style of the layer that their
object is on. See Text Styles on page 1011.
4
Show Arc Centers andEnds
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1023 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1024
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
than as closed polylines in floor plan
view. See Displaying Framing on page
580.
Displayed Line Length Dialog
The settings in the Displayed Line Length
dialog control the appearance of CAD line
length indicators, when set to display. See
Show Length and Angle on page 1056.
To access this dialog, click the Define button
under the Displayed Line Length Format
heading in the CAD Defaults dialog.
The settings here are similar to those found
on the Dimension Format panel of the Room
Label Defaults dialog and the Format panels
of the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
Primary Format Panel on page 947.
Specify the numbering Format for
CAD line length indicators.
Select the Units of measurement to be
used by line length indicators from the
drop-down list.
Check Unit Indicators to display the unit
of measurement along with the dimen-
sion number.
Check Leading Zeros to display the zero
before a decimal less than 1 or to display
0 or 0 when the ft-in or - unit formats
are used.
Check Trailing Zeros to display trailing
zeros at the end of decimal values.
Check Thousands Separator to use a
thousands separator for values greater
than 999.
Select the Use Comma or Use Dot radio
button to use a comma or a dot as the
thousands separator. See Region and
Language Settings on page 69,
Select the Use Space radio button to use
a space as the thousands separator.
Specify the degree of Accuracy used
by dimension numbers.
Select the Decimal Places radio button
for length indicators in decimal format.
In the text field, specify the number of
decimal places to use, from 0 to 20. If 0 is
used, no decimal places are used.
Select the Smallest Fraction radio but-
ton for length indicators using whole
numbers and fractions. In the text field,
specify the largest denominator to use,
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1024 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
The CAD Drawing Tools
1025
from 1 to 128. If 1 is entered, whole num-
bers are used.
Uncheck Show Denominator to turn off
the display of fraction denominators used
by line length indicators. Denominators
are typically only turned off when eighths
are desired.
Uncheck Reduce Fractions to always
use the denominator specified above.
When checked, the lowest possible
denominator will be used.
Reduce Fractions Using - Specify how
fractions are reduced. These settings
are only available when Smallest Fraction is
selected above.
Select the Greatest Common Divisor
radio button to reduce fractions using the
largest value that divides equally into the
numerator and the denominator specified
above. This option is best for fractional
inches.
Select the Closest Fraction radio button
to reduce fractions without referring to
the denominator specified above. Not
recommended when fractional inches are
used.
A value of 0.33333 is represented by the
fraction 5/16 when Greatest Common
Divisor is used and the Smallest Fraction
denominator is 16. When Closest Fraction is
selected, this value is represented by 1/3.
Revision Cloud Defaults
Settings in the Revision Cloud Defaults
dialog determine the initial appearance of
Revision Clouds. The settings in this dialog
are similar to those in the Revision Cloud
Specification dialog. See Revision Cloud
Specification Dialog on page 1052.
The CAD Drawing Tools
The CAD Tools are available in the
CAD menu and on the toolbars.
Point Tools
Select CAD> Points to access the
Point Tools.
The Place Point , Input Point , Point
Marker , and Delete Temporary
Points tools can be used to create or
remove snap points for a variety of purposes.
See Point Tools on page 1026.
Line Tools
Select CAD> Line to access the Line
Tools.
The Draw Line , Input Line , Line
With Arrow , Sun Angle , and the
North Pointer allow you to create
various types of lines. See Line Tools on
page 1030.
Arc Tools
Select CAD > Arcs to access the Arc
Tools.
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1025 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1026
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
The Draw Arc , Input Arc , and the
Arc With Arrow tools allow you to
create arcs. See Arc Tools on page 1040.
Box Tools
Choose CAD > Boxes to access the
Box Tools.
The Rectangular Polyline , Regular
Polygon , Box , Cross Box , and
Insulation tools allow you to create a
variety of polyline and box objects. See Box
Tools on page 1049.
Circle Tools
Select CAD> Circles to access the
Circle Tools.
The Circle , Circle About Center ,
Oval , and the Ellipse tools are
discussed in detail later in this chapter. See
Circle Tools on page 1044.
Revision Cloud
Select CAD> Revision Cloud, then
click and drag to draw a rectangular
shape with edges that display a series of arcs.
See Revision Clouds on page 1052.
Splines
A Spline is a curve that passes
smoothly through a set of points.
Select CAD> CAD> Draw Spline to draw
connected line segments that form a spline.
See Splines on page 1054.
Once created, a spline can be selected and
edited. See Editing Spline Based Objects
on page 201 and Polyline Specification
Dialog on page 1047.
Dimension Tools
Select CAD> Dimensions or CAD>
Automatic Dimensions to access the
manually drawn and Automatic Dimension
Tools. The Dimension Tools can be used
with CAD and architectural objects and are
discussed in their own chapter. See
Dimensions on page 943.
Text Tools
Select CAD> Text to access the Text
Tools. The Text Tools are discussed in
their own chapter. See Text, Callouts, and
Markers on page 979.
Current CAD Layer
Select CAD> Current CAD Layer to
change the current default CAD layer.
See Select Layer Dialog on page 147.
Point Tools
Select CAD> Points to access the
Point Tools.
Temporary points created using the Place
Point and Input Point tools and
permanent Point Markers can be used
with Object Snaps to accurately position
a variety of objects. See Object Snaps on
page 156.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1026 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Point Tools
1027
The size of temporary points is specified in
the Preferences dialog. See Snap
Properties Panel on page 109.
Place Point
Select CAD> Points> Place Point,
then and click in the drawing area to
place a temporary CAD point at that
location.
Input Point
Temporary CAD points can be placed
with precision by entering
coordinates. See 3D Drafting on page 29.
To use the Input Point tool
1. Select CAD> Points> Input Point
to open the New CAD Point dialog.
2. Select a Location option, and enter the
desired location of the point.
3. Click OK to close the dialog and create
the new point. The new point becomes
the Current Point and is highlighted. See
The Current Point on page 1028.
4. Alternatively, click Next to create the
new point but remain in the New CAD
Point dialog and create additional
points. As each is created, it becomes
the Current Point.
New CAD Point Dialog
The location of the Current Point
displays here. If no CAD points are
present, the origin (0, 0) displays. See The
Current Point on page 1028.
Specify thelocation of the New Point.
Absolute Location - Define the point in
X Position (horizontal) and Y Position
(vertical) coordinates, relative to the ori-
gin at (0,0).
Relative to Current Point - Define the
new point in X and Y coordinates that are
relative to the Current Point, as though
that point was at (0,0). Only available
when a Current Point exists.
Check Polar to define the new point by
its Distance and Angle from the Current
Point rather than in X and Y coordinates.
This is helpful when creating a plot plan.
See Plot Plans and PlanFootprints on
page 703.
The position of the New Point is defined
here. The options available depend on the
method chosen to define it, above.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1027 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1028
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
X Position and Y Position coordinates
relative to (0,0) are entered if the Abso-
lute Location method is specified.
X Position and Y Position coordinates
relative to the Current Point are entered if
the Relative to Current Point method is
specified.
Distance and Angle from the Current
Point are entered if the Relative to Cur-
rent Point: Polar method is specified.
Click Next to create the new point with-
out exiting the dialog so you can input
data for the next point. The newly created
point becomes the Current Point.
Point Markers
Use a permanent Point Marker as a
snap point for dimension lines and
other CAD objects. Select CAD> Points>
Point Marker and click in the view to place
a permanent point marker. Point markers
display as a simple cross, with or without a
text label. They can be opened for
specification and modified to include a label
or alter their attributes.
You can also place Point Markers using the
Marker tool, which lets you specify the
marker label and type. See Markers on
page 1009.
Point Markers are also created when the
Point to Point Dimension tool is used.or
when a dimension line is copied and pasted
independent of the objects it locates. See
Point to Point Dimensions on page 960.
Delete Temporary Points
All temporary points can be deleted at
once using CAD> Points> Delete
Temporary Points.
You can also press the Delete key when
nothing is selected to delete the points one by
one; however, Delete Temporary Points
can save time when there are many points.
The Current Point
In any plan view, there may be multiple tem-
porary CAD points created by the user and/or
the program. The Current Point is either the
most recently created or the most recently
accessed temporary CAD point and is used
for a variety of functions, such as:
As an anchor for snapping objects to a
precise location.
As the starting point for objects as they
are drawn by entering data. See Entering
Coordinates on page 162.
As the point about which objects are
rotated. See Rotating Objects on page
226.
To indicate the points at which roof
planes can join. See To find roof plane
intersection points on page 474.
When multiple temporary points are on-
screen, the current CAD point is highlighted
so it can be easily identified.
Click the Number Style button to
change the units used in dialogs. See
Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog on page
122.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1028 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Point Tools
1029
To delete the Current Point
1. Make sure no other objects are selected
by clicking the Select Objects but-
ton. You can also press the Esc key to
deselect any selected objects.
2. Press the Delete key on the keyboard to
delete the Current Point. The temporary
point created prior to this one becomes
the new Current Point.
3. If you continue pressing the Delete key,
temporary points will be deleted in the
reverse order that they were created.
Move Point Dialog
A CAD Point can be repositioned relative to
itself, another point, or a CAD object such as
a line using the Move Point dialog. When a
Point is moved, it becomes the Current Point.
For example, you can locate the point exactly
one-quarter the distance along a given line,
or exactly 6 inches from one end. This new
location can then be used for the start point
of a new line or other purpose.
To reposition a CAD Point, double-click on it
using the Select Objects tool. That point
becomes the Current Point, and the Move
Point dialog opens.
The Current Location of the selected
point displays at the top of the dialog
for reference.
Specify the New Location of the point.
Absolute Location - Define the new
location in X (horizontal) and Y (vertical)
Position coordinates, relative to the ori-
gin at (0,0).
Relative to Itself - Define the new loca-
tion in X and Y Position coordinates rel-
ative to the current location, as though
that point were the origin.
Relative to Previous Point - Define the
new location relative to the point that was
the Current Point prior to this one, as
though that point was the origin. Only
available if the selected point is located
on a CAD object.
Current
Point
There can only be one Current Point
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1029 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1030
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Check Polar to define the new locations
Distance and Angle from the previous
point instead of using X and Y coordi-
nates. Only availalbe if Relative to Itself
or to Previous Point is selected above.
Along Line - Define the new location rel-
ative to the edge of a nearby CAD object.
This option is enabled only when the
point is located near a CAD object and
refers to the end nearest to the points
original location.
Check Percentage (%) to specify the
Along Line value as a percentage of the
total line or arc length rather than as a
distance. 0% moves the point to the clos-
est end of the nearest edge, 50% to the
midpoint, and 100% to the other end.
Negative numbers and percentages
greater than 100 are allowed.
Specify the new position of the point
here. The options here depend on the
method chosen to define the New Loca-
tion.
X Position and Y Position coordinates
are entered if the Absolute Location
method is specified or if either Relative
method is used with Polar unchecked.
Distance and Angle are entered if either
Relative method is specified when Polar
is checked.
From Edge - When the Along Line
method is used, specify the distance of
the points New Location to the end of
the CAD objects edge that it was origi-
nally closest to. When Percentage (%) is
checked, enter this value as a percentage
instead.
If the point is near an arc, Along Line is
measured along the curve.
If the point is near a box or polyline, Along
Line is measured along the nearest side just
as it does with an individual line or arc.
If the point is near an oval or circle, Along
Line is measured along an (invisible) axis
line that the item was originally drawn along.
Line Tools
Select CAD> Draw Lines to display
the Line Tools.
If Object Snaps is enabled and Edit
Object Parts is disabled, you can
connect the ends of two lines and/or arcs to
form a single entity called a polyline. See
Polylines on page 1046.
Draw Line
There are two methods that you can
use to draw lines with the Draw Line
tool. The standard method is to select CAD>
Lines> Draw Line, then click and drag from
beginning to end.
An alternative method that allows you to
drawing multiple lines is also available. See
Alternate on page 173.
Click the Number Style button to
change the units used in dialogs. See
Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog on page
122.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1030 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Line Tools
1031
To draw continuous lines
1. Select CAD> Lines> Draw Line .
2. Press the Alt key on your keyboard (or
use the right mouse button) and click
and drag to draw a line. You can also
toggle to alternative mode.
3. Move your cursor to a new location in
the drawing area and click once. A new
line is drawn that is connected to the end
of the previous line.
4. To stop, press Esc on your keyboard or
press two mouse buttons at the same
time.
By default, this continuous drawing behavior
will turn off when a closed shape is created.
You can specify that this behavior remain on
in the Preferences dialog. See Behaviors
Panel on page 108.
Input Line
CAD lines can also be created using
absolute values entered with the
keyboard by selecting CAD> Lines> Input
Line. This method is slower but more precise
than using the mouse and is ideal when the
desired length and angle of each line is
known, such as with property lines.
Before any line is drawn using this method, a
starting point must be defined. If a starting
point has not been defined, Chief Architect
assumes a starting point of 0,0.
To use the Input Line tool
1. Select CAD> Points> Place Point ,
then click the screen to place a CAD
point. This is the Current Point, and is
the start point for the new line. See The
Current Point on page 1028.
2. Select CAD> Lines> Input Line to
open the New CAD Line dialog.
The New CAD Line dialog can also be
opened by double-clicking the Line
Tools parent button.
3. If necessary, specify the start point.
4. Specify the method used to define the
location of the End Point, then define the
End Point.
5. Click OK to close the dialog and draw
the line, or click Next to draw the line
but remain in the New CAD Line dialog
and draw additional lines.
If you double-click the Draw Line tool,
the Input Line dialog will open.
Note: If you accidentally click OK instead of
Next and need to continue drawing a polyline
using the New CAD Line dialog, select the
Input Line tool again and continue.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1031 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1032
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
New CAD Line Dialog
The X Position (horizontal) and Y
Position (vertical) coordinates of the
start point for the new line display here. They
can also be changed, if you wish.
Begin by specifying how you want to
define the lineEnd Point Location.
Absolute Location - Define the end
point of the new line in X Position (hori-
zontal) and Y Position (vertical) coordi-
nates, relative to (0,0).
Relative to Start Point - Define the end
point of the new line in X and Y coordi-
nates that are relative to the lines Start
Point, as though it were at (0,0).
Check Polar to define the End Point of
the new line by its Distance and Angle
from the Start Point rather than in X and
Y coordinates. This is helpful when cre-
ating a plot plan. See Plot Plans and
PlanFootprints on page 703.
Relative to Previous Line - Define the
End Point of the new line by its Distance
and Angle relative to the end of the last
line drawn, as though that lines angle
were at 0 and its End Point, at (0,0).
The new lines End Point is defined
here. The information used to define it
depends on the method chosen to define the
End Point Location.
X Position (horizontal) and Y Position
(vertical) coordinates relative to (0,0) are
entered if the Absolute Location method
is specified.
X Position (horizontal) and Y Position
(vertical) coordinates relative to the start
point are entered if the Relative to Start
Point method is specified.
Distance and Angle from the start point
are entered if the Relative to Start Point:
Polar method is specified.
Distance and Angle from the start point
are entered if the Relative to Previous
Line method is specified.
Click Next to create the line without exit-
ing the dialog so you can input data for
the next line. The start point of the next
line is the end point of this line.
To enter an angle in bearings
1. While not required, you may want to
select Quadrant or Azimuth Bearings
in the Dialog Number/Angle Style dia-
log.
2. For Quadrant Bearings, begin by typing
N or S (for North or South).
1
2
Click the Number Style button to
change the units used in dialogs. See
Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog on page
122.
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1032 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Line Tools
1033
3. Next, type the number of degrees fol-
lowed by either a letter d or a space.
4. Type the number of minutes followed by
either a or a space.
5. Type the number of seconds followed by
either a or a space.
6. Finally, for Quadrant Bearings, type
either E or W (for East or West).
Following are some examples of Quadrant
Bearings. It is not necessary to capitalize the
letters. Spaces after each value are optional.
N 20d 30' E
S 45' W
N 89d 48' 30" W
N 90' E
Enter Coordinates
Similar to Input Line, lines can also be
specified by pressing the Tab key on the
keyboard when a line is in the process of
being drawn. This opens the Enter
Coordinates dialog. See Entering
Coordinates on page 162.
Line With Arrow
Create a line or polyline with an arrow
on one or both ends by selecting
CAD> Lines> Line With Arrow, then
clicking and dragging on screen. The initial
attributes of the lines arrow are set in the
Arrow Defaults dialog. See Arrow
Defaults on page 981.
As with lines, lines with arrows can
connected to form polylines and can be
edited after they are created. See Editing
Line Based Objects on page 180 and Line
Specification Dialog on page 1034.
You can also create arcs with arrowheads.
See Arc with Arrow on page 1041.
If a line or arc with arrow is snapped to
another object such as text and that object is
deleted, the line or arc with arrow will be
deleted, as well.
North Pointer
The North Pointer tool is used to
define the direction of true north in a
plan. The direction of north does not affect
the orientation of the Snap and Reference
grids, but it does determine the direction of
bearing information as well as how shadows
and conditioned area totals are calculated.
See North Pointer on page 905.
If a North Pointer is not used, north is
assumed to be straight up on screen in floor
plan view.
Sun Angle
Sun Angles let you specify the date,
time, latitude, and longitude that the
program uses when calculating the angle of
the Default Sun Light as well as the direction
and length of sun shadows. See Sun Angles
and Shadows on page 904.
Create Line Style
The Line Style Specification dialog
allows you to create new line styles
for use in Chief Architect. Select CAD>
Lines> Create Line Style to access this
dialog. See Creating Line Styles on page
1057.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1033 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1034
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Line Specification Dialog
Select a CAD Line, Line With Arrow,
or Text Line With Arrow and click the
Open Object edit button to open the Line
Specification dialog.
The settings on the Line, Line Style, and
Arrow panels in this dialog are found in the
specification and defaults dialogs for a
variety of different objects in the program.
Line Panel
The information on the Line panel of the
Line Specification dialog is similar to that
found on the Selected Line panels of various
specification dialogs in the program.
Lock - These lock options control how
changing properties on this dialog
affect the line.
Start - Select this option to keep the start of
the line fixed when changing the length,
angle, and end.
End- Select this option to keep the end of the
line fixed when changing the length, angle,
and start.
Center- Select this option to keep the center
of the line fixed. Changing the length of the
line moves the start and end of the line
equally. Changing the angle rotates the line
around the center.
Select Length/Angle to keep the length and
angle of the line segment fixed. Moving the
start or end moves the other end so the length
and angle of the line do not change.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1034 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Line Specification Dialog
1035
Specify the Length and Angle of the
selected line.
Specify the X and Y coordinates of the
lines Start Point. Not available when
the Start or Center Point is locked.
Specify the X and Y coordinates of the
lines End Point. Not available when
the Center or End Point is locked.
The format used here can be changed by
clicking the Num Style button. See Dialog
Number/Angle Style Dialog on page 122.
Line Style Panel
The Line Style panel is found in the
specification dialogs for many different
objects. Here you can control the display of a
CAD line(s) and/or arc(s) that make up an
object.
Line Options -
Check Show Border to display a border
around the selected Picture file. Not
available for other object types. See Pic-
tures on page 1089.
Specify the Layer that the selected object
should be located on. Check Default to
use the default layer for the selected
2
3
4
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1035 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1036
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
objects type or choose a layer from the
drop-down list. If the selected object is an
automatically generated dimension line,
freize molding, or shadow board that has
been edited, Default will be unchecked.
Click the Define button to open the Layer
Display Options dialog. See Layer Dis-
play Options Dialog on page 144.
Specify the line Color used to represent
the selected object. Check By Layer to
use the color assigned to the objects
layer or click the Color bar to select a
different color. See Color Chooser/
Select Color Dialog on page 843.
Specify the line Style used to represent
the selected object. Check By Layer to
use the line style assigned to the objects
layer or click the drop-down list or
Library button to selecta different style.
Define the Line Weight (in pixels) or
check By Layer to use the Line Weight
assigned to the objects layer.
Specify the desired Bumping behaviors
for the selected object(s). These options
are not available for Primitive objects and
only function when Bumping/Pushing is
enabled. See Bumping/Pushing on page
213.
Check CAD Stops Move to bump the
selected object into other CAD or CAD-
based objects as it is moved, and/or to
push the other object(s).
Check Wall Stops Move to stop the
selected object when it bumps into a wall.
Walls cannot be pushed by other objects.
The Drawing Group options control
how the selected object(s) display
relative to other objects. Not available for
Walkthrough Paths. See Drawing Groups
on page 210.
Select Back Group to display the
selected object(s) behind objects in the
other two drawing groups.
Select Default Group to display the
selected object(s) in front of those in the
Back Group but behind those in the Front
Group.
Select Front Group to display the
selected object(s) in front of objects in
the other two groups.
Check Move to Front of Group to dis-
play the selected object(s) in front of
other objects in the same drawing group.
Not available in defaults dialogs.
You can also move a selected object to
the front of its drawing group by clicking
the Move to Front of Group edit
button. See Move to Front of Group on
page 211.
Select the desired Display Options.
These options not available for CAD
Box- or CAD Circle-based objects, or for
North Pointers or Sun Angles.
Check Show Length to show the length
of each line centered above the line.
Check Show Angle to show the angle of
each line centered below the line. If the
Setting the line weight to zero (0)
makes the line weight print as thin as
possible.
2
Note: Move to Front of Group is an action,
not an attribute. The box is not checked the
next time the specification dialog is opened,
and is not available in defaults dialogs at all..
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1036 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Line Specification Dialog
1037
object is an arc, its radius will also dis-
play.
The Length and Angle formats are speci-
fied in the CAD Defaults dialog. See
CAD Defaults Dialog on page 1022.
Uncheck All Angles to show only those
angles that are neither horizontal nor ver-
tical. This is automatically checked when
Show Angle is checked.
Check Reverse Angle to reverse the
angle by 180. This may be helpful when
showing a lines bearing, since the direc-
tion a line is drawn from start point to end
point defines its bearing.
Specify the Layout Page that the
selected object(s) is located on. Only
available in layout files, but not in defaults
dialogs for objects such as callouts and
markers. See Layout on page 1183.
Arrow Panel
The Arrow panel is available for any line,
arc, open polyline, or spline that can have an
arrow. The defaults for arrows are set in the
Arrow Defaults dialog. See CAD Defaults
and Preferences on page 1022.
Closed polylines, Sprinkler Lines and
Electrical connections are examples of
objects that cannot have arrows.
Check Include Arrow to turn the arrow
on.
Select an arrowhead Style from the drop-
down list or check Default to use the
default arrowhead.
Select the Fill Color used to fill the
arrowhead or check Default to use the
default fill color.
Specify a Size for the arrow or check
Default to use the default size. The
Default Size value also affects the size of
the start circle for Running Dimensions
5
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1037 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1038
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
. See Running Dimensions on page
961.
Check Arrow on Both Ends to place a
head on both ends of the selected object.
Check Special Use Arrow to create an
arrow that can be used in layouts and
floor plan views to show platform eleva-
tions. See Special Use Arrows on page
1004.
Auto Position Tail and Auto Position
Head are available when either end of the
line is attached to a text object. Check
either or both options if you want this text
line with arrow to update its position on
the text object if the text object or text
line with arrow is moved. See Auto
Positioning Arrows on page 1003.
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes
There are five Arc Creation Modes
that control how arcs and arc-based
objects are drawn. Each mode allows you to
specify a different aspect of the arc, such as
its radius or tangent. Select Edit> Arc
Creation Modes to select a mode.
The program remembers the last creation
mode used between sessions. Once drawn,
all arcs are edited similarly. See Editing Arc
Based Objects on page 184.
Before deciding which Arc Tool or Arc
Creation Mode is best for the project at hand,
it is helpful to be familiar with the different
components that make up an arc.
The center of an arc is the point the arc is
drawn about.
The radius is the distance from the center
to the arc.
The start is where the arc begins.
The end is where the arc stops.
The chord is the straight line between the
start and end point.
A straight line that intersects an arc and is
perpendicular to the radius of the arc at
that point is tangent to the arc.
Free Form Arc
Free Form Arc mode allows you to
define an arc by clicking and dragging
along the desired path. There are two
methods for using this mode.
To draw a Free Form arc
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc ,
then click at the arcs start point.
2. Move the pointer along the desired
curve while dragging to curve the arc.
3. Release the mouse button at the end
point to complete the arc.
Center Radius
Chord
Start
End
Tangent
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1038 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes
1039
To draw continuous Free Form arcs
This mode is useful for making custom
revision clouds.
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc .
2. Press the Alt key on your keyboard and
click and drag to draw an arc.
3. Move your cursor to a new location and
click. A new arc is drawn that is con-
nected to the end point of the previous
arc.
By default, this continuous drawing behavior
will turn off when a closed shape is created.
You can specify that this behavior remain on
in the Preferences dialog. See Behaviors
Panel on page 108.
Center/Radius/End Arc
Center/Radius/End Arc mode allows
you to define the center and radius of
an arc, and then its length.
To draw a Center/Radius/End arc
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc ,
then click at the center of the arc and
drag to define the radius.
2. Release the mouse button, then move the
mouse to the end of the arc and click
again.
Start/End/On Arc
Start/End/On Arc mode allows you
to define the start and end points of an
arc, then adjust the curvature.
To draw a Start/End/On arc
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc ,
then click at the start point of the arc and
drag to the end point.
2. Release the mouse button at the end
point.
3. Move the mouse to adjust the curvature
of the arc, then click to release the
mouse and create the arc.
Start/Tangent/End Arc
Start/Tangent/End Arc mode allows
you to define the start and end points
of an arc, its tangent and its curvature.
To draw a Start/Tangent/End arc
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc ,
then click at the start of the arc and drag
a line to define the arcs tangent at the
start point.
2. Release the mouse button.
3. Move the mouse to adjust the length and
curvature of the arc, then click to release
the mouse and create the arc.
Arc About Center
Arc About Center mode allows you
to draw an arc by defining the center
and then the start and end points.
To draw an Arc About Center
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc ,
then click once to define the center
point.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1039 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1040
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
2. Click and drag from the start point of the
arc to its end point.
3. Or, click and drag an arc. The Current
Point is used as the center. See The
Current Point on page 1028.
Arc Tools
Select CAD> Arcs to display the
submenu of Arc Tools.
Draw Arc
The method used to draw an arc using
Draw Arc depends on which Arc
Creation Mode is currently active. Once
drawn, an arc can be edited. See Editing Arc
Based Objects on page 184.
Input Arc
An arc can be drawn to exact
specifications using the New CAD Arc
dialog.
To use the Input Arc tool
1. Select CAD> Points> Place Point ,
then click the screen to place a CAD
point. This is the Current Point, and will
be the start point for the new arc. See
The Current Point on page 1028.
2. Select CAD> Lines> Input Arc to
open the New CAD Arc dialog.
The New CAD Arc dialog can also be
opened by double-clicking the Arc
Tools parent button.
3. If necessary, specify the Start Point.
4. Specify the method used to define the
arcs Direction, then define its angle.
5. Specify the method used to define the
arcs Extension, or length, then define it.
6. Click OK to close the dialog and draw
the arc.
New CAD Arc Dialog
The X Position (horizontal) and Y
Position (vertical) coordinates of the
Start Point for the new arc display here.
They can also be changed, if you wish.
Specify how you want to define the
arcs Direction., then specify its angle.
The Start Direction defines the angle of
the tangent from the arcs start point.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1040 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Arc Tools
1041
The Chord Direction defines the angle
of the arcs chord from the start point.
Define the Radius of the arc.
The Extension settings control the
length of the arc. Define only one:
The Arc Angle is defined by imaginary
lines drawn from the arc centerpoint to its
two endpoints.
The Arc Length is the length of the arc
along its curve from one endpoint to the
other.
The Chord Length is the length of an
imaginary straight line drawn from one
arc endpoint to the other.
Select the direction that the arc curves:
either to the Right/Clockwise or to the
Left/Counterclockwise.
Arc with Arrow
You can create an arc with an arrow on
one or both ends, using the Arc With
Arrow tool.
Draw an Arc With Arrow like a regular
arc. When you release the mouse button, the
arc has an arrowhead at the end. The default
attributes of the arrow are determined by the
settings in the Arrow Defaults dialog. See
Arrow Defaults on page 981.
As with regular arcs, arcs with arrows can be
edited after they are created. See Editing
Arc Based Objects on page 184 and Arc
Specification Dialog on page 1042.
Continue to draw connected lines and arcs to
form a polyline with an arrowhead at the end.
The arrowheads display only at the free ends,
not where the lines connect. See Polylines
on page 1046.
Lines with arrowheads can also be created.
See Line With Arrow on page 1033.
Start Direction = 0 Chord Direction = 45
3
4
Arc Angle = -90
Chord Length =
282 13/16
Arc Length = 314 3/16
Radius = 200
Click the Number Style button to
change the units used in dialogs. See
Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog on page
122.
A line can be converted to an arc or vice
versa by selecting the line, pressing
and holding down the Alt key, then using the
edit handle at either end to bend the line.
5
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1041 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1042
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Arc Specification Dialog
Select an arc and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Arc
Specification dialog.
Arc Panel
The settings on the Arc panel are also found
on the Selected Arc panels for many objects.
The Lock options control how
changing properties on this dialog
affects the arc.
Start - Select this option to keep the start
fixed when changing the arc, chord, or
end.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1042 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Arc Specification Dialog
1043
End - Select this option to keep the end
fixed when changing the arc, chord, or
start.
Center - Select this option to keep the
center of the arc fixed when changing the
arc.
Arc - Select this option to keep the arc
fixed when changing the arc location.
Chord - Select this option to keep the arc
chord fixed when changing the arc
radius.
Arc - These parameters define the arc.
Various controls are disabled depending
on what lock option is used.
Center X Point - Specify the X coordi-
nate for the center of the arc.
Center Y Point - Specify the Y coordi-
nate for the center of the arc.
Radius - The distance between the center
of the arc and the arc surface.
Start Angle - Specify the angle that a line
drawn from the arc center to the arc start
makes with a horizontal line to the right.
End Angle - Specify the angle that a line
drawn from the arc center to the arc end
makes with a horizontal line to the right.
Arc Angle - The angle between the cen-
ter of the arc and each end.
Arc Length - The length of the arc along
the curve.
Start Point - These values define the
start point of the arc. The Position
settings are disabled when the Start is locked.
Start X Position - Specify the X coordi-
nate for the beginning of the arc.
Start Y Position - Specify the Y coordi-
nate for the beginning of the arc.
Start Direction - Specify the angle of a
tangent line at the start of the arc.
End - These values define the end point
of the arc. The Position settings are
disabled when the End is locked.
End X Position - Specify the X coordi-
nate for the end of the arc.
End Y Position - Specify the Y coordi-
nate for the end of the arc.
End Direction - Specify the angle of a
tangent line at the end of the arc.
Chord - These values define the chord
of the arc.
2
3
4
5
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1043 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1044
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Chord Length - The straight line dis-
tance between the two ends of the arc.
Chord Angle - Specify the angle of the
chord (the imaginary straight line going
from the start of the arc to the end of the
arc).
Line Style Panel
For information about the Line Style panel,
see Line Style Panel on page 1035.
Arrow Panel
For information about the Arrow panel, see
Arrow Panel on page 1037.
Circle Tools
Select CAD> Circles to access the
Circle Tools.
Circles
Draw a Circle by dragging across the
diameter. If a small circle is needed,
draw a larger circle and then resize it.
Use the Circle Specification dialog to
accurately define size, position and other
attributes. See CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse
Specification Dialog on page 1045.
Draw Circle About Center
Select CAD> Circles> Circle About
Center to create a circle by dragging
the radius out from the center point.
To draw a Circle About Center
1. Click the Circle About Center tool.
2. Click the screen to define the center.
3. Drag the radial distance and release the
mouse button. If you are using Object
Snaps , both the center point and the
radius snap to any appropriate nearby
CAD object, intersection or point.
Ovals
An Oval is a four-arc approximation
of an ellipse. To draw an oval, select
CAD> Circles> Oval, then click and drag.
Use the CAD Oval Specification dialog to
accurately set the length and width of the
oval and other attributes.
Ellipses
An Ellipse is a set of points with a
constant combined distance from two
points called foci. An ellipse looks like a
stretched circle, or a circular surface viewed
at an angle.
To draw an ellipse, select CAD> Circles>
Ellipse and drag at an angle to define its
maximum height and width.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1044 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog
1045
Use the CAD Ellipse Specification dialog to
accurately set the length and width of the
ellipse and other attributes.
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog
Select a circle, oval or ellipse and
click the Open Object edit button to
open the CAD Circle, Oval or Ellipse
Specification dialog.
The CAD Circle, Oval and Ellipse
Specification dialogs are almost exactly the
same. The Oval and Ellipse Specification
dialogs have an additional setting for Angle
on the General panel.
General Panel
Specify the position of the circle, oval
or ellipses Center Point.
Specify the X Position and Y Position of
the center of the circle, oval or ellipse.
Specify an oval or ellipses Angle. Not
available for circles.
Size - Specify the Length and Width
of an oval or ellipse, or the Diameter
and Radius of a circle.
Line Style Panel
For information about the Line Style panel,
see Line Style Panel on page 1035.
Fill Style Panel
For information about the Fill Style panel,
see Fill Style Panel on page 1048.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1045 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1046
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Polylines
A polyline consists of two or more
line and/or arc segments that are
attached at their endpoints. Select CAD>
Boxes> Rectangular Polyline, then click
and drag from corner to corner to create a
rectangular-shaped, closed polyline. A
closed polyline measuring 2x 2 (600 mm x
600 mm) can also be created by clicking
once while the Rectangular Polyline tool is
active.
When Object Snaps is enabled and Edit
Object Parts is disabled, you can also
create a polyline by drawing lines and/or arcs
end-to-end, allowing the end of each new
object to snap to the end of the previous one.
Line- and arc-based objects will only snap
together to form a polyline if they are on the
same layer and share identical attributes such
as color, line style, and arrow specifications.
If one end of the polyline is connected to the
other, it becomes a closed polyline. Closed
polylines can be assigned a fill pattern and/or
turned into special 3D objects such as slabs
or countertops that display in 3D views.
Lines and polylines can be distinguished by
the edit handles that display when you select
each. A line displays an edit handle at each
end and one in the middle. If more than three
edit handles display, the object is a polyline.
Lines that appear connected to a polyline
may prove to be unconnected when selected.
For example, the two polylines in the
following image appear identical until their
left edges are selected. The polyline on the
left reveals that its left edge is not attached.
In contrast, the left edge of the polyline on
the right is part of the larger polyline unit.
Closed Polylines Open Polylines
Line
Polyline
Unconnected Connected
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1046 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Polyline Specification Dialog
1047
The Close Polyline edit tool can be used
to connect the edges of an open polyline.
This tool adds a segment between the two
open ends, closing the gap between them.
See Using Close Polyline on page 194.
Polylines can be copied, moved, reshaped, or
resized as a single unit. Additionally, the
individual segments can be edited. See Edit
Object Parts on page 178.
Once created, polylines can be edited in a
variety of ways. See Editing Open Polyline
Based Objects on page 189 and Editing
Closed-Polyline Based Objects on page
194.
Polyline Specification Dialog
Select an open polyline, closed
polyline, spline, Sprinker polyline or
Electrical connection and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Polyline
Specification dialog.
Polyline Panel
The Polyline panel indicates the Length/
Perimeter, enclosed Area, and Volume of a
selected polyline and is found in the
specification dialogs for open- and closed-
polyline-based objects throughout the
program.
If the polyline is not closed, the Area and
Volume are described as Not closed. The
Volume of a 2D polyline will always be 0,
even if it is closed.
If the selected object is a closed polyline
based architectural object such as a Slab, the
Area and Volume values will not include any
holes in the object.
If multiple objects of the same type are
selected, their total Length/Perimeter, Area,
and Volume are stated.
Spline Panel
The Spline panel has a single option and is
only available when the selected object is a
spline. See Splines on page 1054.
New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
between line segments that are used to draw
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
draw the spline faster.
Selected Line Panel
The Selected Line panel is available when
the selected edge of the polyline is a line as
opposed to an arc. See Editing Line Based
Objects on page 180.
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
end of the previous connected line, if there is
one. Similarly, moving the End of a line
segment moves the start of the next
connected line, if there is one.
This panel is similar to the Line panel of the
Line Specification dialog. See Line Panel
on page 1034.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1047 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1048
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Selected Arc Panel
The Selected Arc panel is available when the
selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
opposed to a line.
This panel is similar to the Arc panel of the
Arc Specification dialog. See Arc Panel
on page 1042.
Line Style Panel
This panel is similar to the Line Style panel
in the Line Specification dialog. See Line
Style Panel on page 1035.
Fill Style Panel
The information on the Fill Style panel for
closed polylines is similar to that for many
other objects in the program, including
closed CAD shapes and a variety of
architectural objects.
The Fill Style panel is not available for
Sprinkler Lines or Electrical Connections as
these tools cannot be used to form closed
shapes.
Specify the characteristics of the
selected objects fill Pattern. When
None is the selected pattern Type, the rest
of these settings are disabled.
Choose a pattern Type from the drop-
down list. If Custom is selected, the
Custom Pattern options become available
below.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1048 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Box Tools
1049
Specify the Spacing of the selected fill
pattern. Not available for Solid fill.
Specify the Angle of the selected fill pat-
tern. Not available for Solid fill.
Set the Line Weight for the selected fill
pattern. Not available for Solid fill.
Check Transparent Fill to make the
spaces between fill pattern lines transpar-
ent, allowing any objects behind the fill
pattern to be visible through it. Not avail-
able for Solid fill.
Specify the Color of the lines that make
up the fill pattern, or the fill color of
Solid fill, by clicking the color bar. The
layer color is used by default. See Color
Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page
843.
Select Use Background Color to use the
background color for solid fills or patterns.
Check Use Layer Color to have the fill
pattern use the layer color for the pattern
lines. If it is a solid fill, the fill color is the
same as the layers color.
A preview of the selected pattern displays to
the right. As changes are made to the settings
on this panel, the preview will update.
Choose a Preview Width from the drop-
down list. This value controls how large
an area the preview represents. The
selected value indicates the length of
each side of the preview in actual plan
inches (mm).
The Custom Pattern section is only
enabled when Custom is selected
from the Fill Pattern list.
Click the Browse button to open the
Custom Pattern File dialog and select a
pattern (.pat) file from the Chief Archi-
tect Patterns directory or a custom .pat
file elsewhere on your computer. The
selected .pat files path name displays
and can be edited in the text field.
Select a Pattern from the drop-down list.
This list includes all custom patterns
available in the selected file.
Specify a Scale for the selected Custom
pattern. This setting affects all instances
of the pattern in the current plan or layout
file - not just in the selected object(s).
Arrow Panel
The Arrow panel is available for most open
polylines and splines and is similar to the
Arrow panel of the Line Specification
dialog. See Arrow Panel on page 1037.
The Arrow panel is not available for closed
polylines, Sprinkler Lines or Electrical
Connections.
Box Tools
Select CAD> Boxes to access the Box
Tools.
Rectangular Polyline
A Rectangular Polyline can be drawn
in either of two ways:
Click in the drawing area to place a 24 x
24 square polyline at that location.
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1049 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1050
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Click and drag from corner to corner to
draw a rectangle of any size.
Once created, a rectangular polyline can be
edited into any shape or converted to a 3D
object. See Editing Closed-Polyline Based
Objects on page 194.
Regular Polygon
You can draw a regular polygon based
on the length of a side, or the length of
the radius to a vertex or a side. Select your
options in the New Regular Polygon dialog
and click OK. Click in your plan to place the
polygon.
The settings in this dialog are similar to those
in the Polygon Shaped Rooms dialog. See
Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks on
page 262.
Box
Draw a 2D box from the midpoint of
one side to the midpoint of the
opposite side. The sides of a box can be
resized, but a box always has four 90
corners.
Boxes have some unique editing behaviors.
See Editing Box-Based Objects on page
198.
Cross Box
Use the Cross Box tool to create a 2D
box with an X-shaped cross in the
interior to represent framing in a cross
section detail.
In cross section/elevation views, Cross
Boxes are used to represent joists and rafters
members that are perpendicular to and cut by
the cameras clip plane. See Cross Section/
Elevation Views on page 868.
Insulation
Use the Insulation tool to draw
insulation in cross section details.
Insulation Boxes are like 2D boxes and Cross
Boxes; however, unlike these other types of
boxes, Insulation Boxes do not have
perimeter lines: only the curves of the
insulation pattern.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1050 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Box Specification Dialog
1051
Box Specification Dialog
Select a CAD box, a framing box, a
wall bridging box, a cross box, or
insulation and click the Open Object edit
button to open the Box Specification dialog.
See Box Tools on page 1049.
General Panel
Specify a Box Style. Select Normal to
specify a normal box, Cross to specify
a cross box, or Insulation to specify an
insulation box. If multiple CAD boxes are
selected, No Change may display.
Define the Position of the box.
Specify the X Position and Y Position of
the center of the box.
Specify the Angle of the box.
Define the Size of the box by
specifying its Height and Width.
Line Style Panel
For information about the Line Style panel,
see Line Panel on page 1034.
Fill Style Panel
For information about the Fill Style panel,
see Fill Style Panel on page 1048.
1
2
3
To find out which direction is the height
and which is the width of a square box,
select it. The triangular rotate handle is near-
est the side you originally dragged from when
creating the box. Changing the height
changes the length of this side.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1051 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1052
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Revision Clouds
The Revision Cloud tool allows you
to draw a closed polyline with a series
of arcs or bulges displaying along each edge.
Select CAD> Revision Cloud, then click
and drag to draw a rectangular shape with
edges that display a series of arcs.
There are several additional ways to create a
Revision Cloud:
Click and drag using the Alternate
edit mode to draw the first edge, then
click to define the end points of subse-
quent edges. Click on the start point of
the first edge to finish drawing the cloud.
The Revision Cloud tool is still
active until you select a different tool.
See Alternate on page 173.
Create Revision Clouds around one or
more selected objects in floor plan view
by clicking the Revision Cloud(s)
Around Objects edit button. A sepa-
rate revision cloud will be drawn around
each selected object. This edit tool is also
available for CAD objects, text, and
dimensions in cross section/elevation
views, but not for architectural objects.
Convert a closed CAD polyline into a
Revision Cloud. See Convert Polyline
Dialog on page 230.
Revision Clouds are drawn based on the
settings in the Revision Cloud Defaults
dialog and are initially placed on the layer
specified there. Unlike other CAD objects,
they are not placed on the Current CAD
Layer. See Displaying CAD Objects on
page 1055.
Once created, Revision Clouds can be
selected and edited much like other closed-
polyline based objects. See Editing Closed-
Polyline Based Objects on page 194.
Unlike other closed polylines, however, the
edges of a Revision Cloud can only be seen
when it is selected. When it is not selected,
only the arcs along its perimeter are visible.
The arcs along a Revision Cloud are not its
actual edges and cannot be individually
selected, although you can control their size
and frequency.
If you wish to individually edit the arcs,
convert it to a plain polyline. See Convert to
Plain Polyline on page 232.
Revision Cloud Specification Dialog
Select one or more Revision Clouds
and click the Open Object edit button
to open the Revision Cloud Specification
dialog.
Not Selected Selected
Only arcs are visible Edges are also visible
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1052 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Revision Cloud Specification Dialog
1053
The settings in the Revision Cloud Defaults
dialog are similar to those in the Revision
Cloud Specification dialog, but determine
the initial settings of revision clouds as they
are drawn. See CAD Defaults and
Preferences on page 1022.
Cloud Panel
Specify how the arcs on the selected
revision cloud(s) are sized.
Select Automatic Arc Lengths to have
the program automatically size the
selected clouds arcs.
Select Average Arc Length to specify
the selected clouds average arc length,
which is measured along its chord.
Select Number of Arcs, then specify the
number of arcs on the selected cloud.
Use the slider bars or text fields to
specify the Size Variation of the
selected clouds arcs.
Specify the Length Diversity, which is
the maximum amount that a given arcs
length can deviate from the Average Arc
Length, specified above.
Specify the Minimum Bulge, which is
the smallest amount that a given arc can
extend out from its center. 0% allows arcs
with a radius of 0, essentially flat lines;
50% allows 180 arcs, or half-circles;
100% only allows arcs of about 300.
Specify the Maximum Bulge, which is
the largest amount that a given arc can
extend out from its center. 100% allows
arcs of about 300;50% allows 180 arcs;
0% only allows arcs with a radius of 0.
Selected Line Panel
The Selected Line panel is available when
the selected cloud edge is a line as opposed
to an arc. See Selected Edge on page 177.
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
end of the previous connected line, if there is
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1053 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1054
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
one. Similarly, moving the End of a line
segment moves move the start of the next
connected line, if there is one.
This panel is similar to the Line panel of the
Line Specification dialog. See Line Panel
on page 1034.
Selected Arc Panel
The Selected Arc panel is available when the
selected segment of the cloud edge is an arc
as opposed to a line.
This panel is similar to the Arc panel of the
Arc Specification dialog. See Arc Panel
on page 1042.
Line Style Panel
This panel is similar to the Line Style panel
in the Line Specification dialog. See Line
Style Panel on page 1035.
Fill Style Panel
This panel is similar to the Fill Style panel in
the Polyline Specification dialog. See Fill
Style Panel on page 1048.
Splines
A Spline is a curve that passes
smoothly through a set of points.
Splines are typically used in situations where
there is an irregular curve. A contour line is a
typical example. Splines are useful wherever
a free-flowing curve is needed.
Once created, splines can be selected and
edited. See Editing Spline Based Objects
on page 201 and Polyline Specification
Dialog on page 1047.
To use the Spline tool
1. Select CAD> Spline .
2. Draw the first spline segment just as you
would a line. A single spline segment
looks identical to a line. You may need
to turn off Angle Snaps to draw
freely.
3. Draw the second segment from the end
of the first at a different angle. Object
Snaps should be on to assure that
new segments attach correctly to the
ends of previous segments.
4. As soon as two straight spline segments
connect end-to-end, the straight seg-
ments become a curve that passes
As drawn
Result
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1054 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Displaying CAD Objects
1055
through the endpoints defined by the
original segments. Each point is called a
vertex.
5. Draw a few more segments, connecting
each to the free end of a previously
drawn segment.
6. Notice as additional segments are drawn
that the spline changes the curvature of
the previous segment to create a contin-
uous curve between the last three points.
7. Form a closed spline by drawing a seg-
ment between its two free ends.
8. The result is an irregular curve that
flows smoothly through each vertex.
Spline-based objects will only snap together
to form a single spline if they are on the same
layer and share identical attributes such as
color, line style, and arrow specifications.
You can also convert an open or closed
polyline into a spline using the Convert to
Spline edit tool. See Convert to Spline
on page 225.
Displaying CAD Objects
As with architectural objects, the display of
CAD objects is controlled in the Layer
Display Options dialog. See Layer Display
Options Dialog on page 144.
CAD objects can be drawn in floor plan
view, CAD Details, layout, and cross section/
elevation views. They are 2D objects only,
though, so they cannot be seen in any view
other than the one they are drawn in and are
never visible in camera views or overviews.
See Architectural vs CAD Objects on page
154.
Current CAD Layer
When drawn, most CAD objects are
automatically placed on the Current
CAD Layer. In floor plan and cross section/
elevation views, the name of this layer
displays on the right side of the Status Bar at
As drawn
Result
As drawn
Result
Draw segment to close
Result
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1055 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1056
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
the bottom of the screen. See The Status
Bar on page 38.
Initially, the CAD, Default layer is set as
the Current CAD Layer, but this can be
changed at any time in any of several ways:
In the CAD Defaults dialog. See CAD
Defaults Dialog on page 1022.
By selecting CAD> Current CAD
Layer from the menu. See Select
Layer Dialog on page 147.
Activate a different Annotation Set. See
Annotation Sets on page 74.
Revision Clouds are placed on the layer
specified in the Revision Cloud Defaults
dialog - not on the Current CAD Layer. See
Revision Clouds on page 1052.
Annotation Sets
The Current CAD Layer is among the items
associated with Annotation Sets, which are
groups of Saved Defaults that can be
customized and activated for specific
drawing tasks. See Annotation Sets on
page 74.
Show Length and Angle
You can specify that line segment length and
angle display along a CAD line, CAD arc, or
along each segment of a CAD polyline. If the
segment is an arc, its radius also displays.
See Line Style Panel on page 1035.
The format of the length and angle can be
specified in the CAD Defaults dialog. See
CAD Defaults Dialog on page 1022.
Line length and angle indicators use the Text
Style assigned to the layer that their CAD
object is on. See Text Styles on page 1011.
Endcaps
Dashed lines often display endcaps, which
are dashes of a particular length. You can
specify the Printed Length of endcaps in the
Preferences dialog. See Line Properties
Panel on page 105.
Line Styles
A selection of line styles is available in the
Library Browser which you can apply to both
CAD and architectural objects. See The
Library on page 789.
If you do not see a line style that meets your
needs, you can create your own custom line
styles.
Line Styles
The Line Styles library contains line styles
that be applied to objects individually in their
specification dialogs, by default in their
defaults dialogs, or by layer in the Layer
Display Options dialog. See Line Style
Panel on page 1035 and Layer Display
Options Dialog on page 144.
If an object has a line style that includes text,
that text will use the font and transparency
Changing the Current CAD Layer
affects subsequently-drawn objects, but
existing CAD objects are unaffected by the
change. As a result, you can efficiently pro-
duce CAD drawings on multiple layers
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1056 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Line Styles
1057
setting of the Text Style assigned to the layer
that the object is on. See Text Styles on
page 1011.
The MEP Toolbar Configuration
includes a selection of toolbar buttons that
access line styles from the library.
You can draw a line with a selected style
directly from the library. See Line Tools on
page 1030.
To draw with a line style from the library
1. Select a line style in the selection pane
of the Library Browser. See The
Library Browser on page 790.
2. Click and drag in a 2D view to produce a
CAD line with the selected style.
You can also apply line styles to the Place
Library Object button. See Place
Library Object Button on page 808.
Additional line styles can be imported into
the library.
To import line styles
1. Locate a line style and copy its file to a
convenient location on your hard drive.
These files have the extension .lin. Pre-
vious versions of Chief Architect used
the .dat format, which also works.
2. Select File> Import> Line Style Defi-
nitions .
3. Browse to the location where you saved
the .lin file.
4. Click Open to add the line style to the
library.
In addition, you can create custom line styles
for use in Chief Architect. See Creating
Line Styles on page 1057.
Creating Line Styles
The Line Style Specification dialog
allows you to create new line styles
for use in Chief Architect. To open this
dialog, select CAD> Lines> Create Line
Style or right-click on an unlocked library
folder and select New> Line Style. See
Adding Library Content on page 799.
You can also edit an existing line style by
copying it to a User library, then right-
clicking on it and selecting Open from the
contextual menu. See Using the Contextual
Menus on page 792.
Note: Line styles created using the Line Style
Specification dialog are not retained in views
exported to .dxf/.dwg. See Exporting 2D
DXF/DWG Files on page 1123.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1057 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1058
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Line Style Specification Dialog
Line Style Name - Type the name of
your custom line style in the text field.
This is the name that will be listed in the
Library Browser.
A preview diagram of the line style
displays here.
Click on a line style component in the
preview to select it and edit it below.
Check Highlight Selection to display a
red rectangle around the currently
selected line style component.
Check Mark Repeating Segments to
display vertical dashed lines indicating
the division between the last component
of one segment and the first component
of the next in the preview diagram.
These options allow you to add new
components to your line style.
Click the Dash button to add a line seg-
ment to the line style.
Click the Dot button to add a single point
to the line style.
Click the Text button to add a section of
text to the line style.
Select theInsert Before radio button to
add the new component before the com-
ponent that is currently selected.
1
2
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1058 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
CAD Blocks
1059
Select theInsert After radio button to
add the new component after the cur-
rently selected component.
A list of the line styles individual
components displays here.
Click on the name of a component in the
list to select it. When Highlight Selec-
tion is checked, above, a red rectangle
displays around this component in the
preview diagram.
Click the Up arrow to move the selected
component up one position in the list and
one position to the left in the preview dia-
gram.
Click the Down arrow to move the
selected component down one position in
the list and one position to the right in the
preview diagram.
Click the Remove button to remove the
selected component from the line style.
Control the appearance of the selected
component.
Specify the Length of a selected Dash or
Text component. If the Length exceeds
that required by a Text component, empty
space is added on each side of the text.
Specify the Spacing of the selected com-
ponent by defining the length of an empty
space to the components right.
Type the Text of a selected Text compo-
nent.
Specify the Text Height of a selected
Text component. Each text component
can have its own height.
CAD Blocks
A CAD block is a group of 2D CAD objects,
text objects, and/or dimensions that have
been grouped together so that they behave as
a single object. A CAD block can also
contain other CAD blocks: these are referred
to as nested.
Dimension lines can only be included in a
CAD block if they reference objects that are
also included in the block.
With the exception of a few CAD-based
objects such as slabs, custom countertops
and framing, CAD blocks cannot contain
architectural objects. Such objects can
instead be blocked as architectural blocks.
See Architectural Blocks on page 781.
CAD blocks can be selected, moved, rotated
and resized much like CAD boxes. They can
also be exploded into their individual parts.
See Editing Box-Based Objects on page
198.
CAD blocks can be imported into the
program and can also be added to the library.
See Importing and Exporting on page
1113.
A list of the CAD blocks present in the
current file is available in the CAD Block
Management dialog. See CAD Block
Management on page 1061.
4
Text inserted into a line style uses the
font and transparency setting of the Text
Style of the layer that it is on when assigned
to an object. See Text Styles on page 1011.
5
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1059 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1060
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Make CAD Block
To create a CAD block, group select
two or more eligible objects, and then
click the Make CAD Block edit button. See
Marquee Select on page 179.
Eligible CAD block component objects
include:
CAD objects
Text objects
Dimension lines
CAD blocks
CAD-based objects such as Slabs, Fram-
ing, and Custom Countertops.
If the Make CAD Block edit button is not
available, then the selection set may contain
an object that is not an eligible CAD block
component.
Explode CAD Block
When a block is selected, click the
Explode CAD Block edit button to
separate it into its individual components.
If a CAD block includes nested blocks, these
nested blocks are not exploded.
When a selected CAD block is exploded, its
definition is not affected: only the instance.
See CAD Block Management on page
1061.
If a block has been resized so that its original
aspect ratio is altered, it cannot be exploded.
See CAD Block Specification Dialog on
page 1063.
Select Insertion Point
By default, a CAD block has one
insertion point located at its center.
When placing the CAD block in a drawing or
moving it to a new location, you can snap its
insertion point to some other snap point for
accuracy. See Object Snaps on page 156.
In some cases, it may be helpful to position a
CAD block using an insertion point other
than its center. For example, a CAD block
representing a bolt or other fastener may be
better positioned using the bottom center of
its head or washer rather than its center. You
can use the Select Insertion Point edit
button to replace the insertion point at the
center with a different point.
To select an insertion point
1. Make sure that Object Snaps are
enabled, then select the CAD block.
2. Click the Select Insertion Point edit
button.
3. Click at the location where you would
like the insertion point.
The available snap points on a CAD block
are located around the perimeter of its
bounding box. If you need a different point,
place a temporary CAD Point at that
location, and then snap to it when creating
the insertion point.
A CAD blocks Move edit handle displays at
the location of its insertion point. If you
place an insertion point at the midpoint of
To access the snap points associated
with a CAD blocks subobjects, explode
the block, place a CAD Point at the desired
location, then block it again. The CAD Point
can be snapped to, but will not be included in
the block.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1060 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
CAD Block Management
1061
one of the bounding box edges, the Move
edit handle may display instead of the Resize
handle. CAD blocks also rotate about their
insertion point.
A CAD blocks insertion point can also be
specified relative to the blocks center point
in the CAD Block Specification dialog. See
General Panel on page 1063.
Add to Library
Like a variety of other objects, CAD
blocks can be added to the library for
future use in other files. See Adding Library
Content on page 799.
Many manufacturers provide CAD details in
DXF/DWG format. These drawings can be
imported, blocked and added to the library.
See Importing 2D Drawings on page 1114.
Custom 2D Symbols
In floor plan view, 3D symbols and images
are represented by 2D CAD blocks.
You can specify the CAD block used by a
symbol in its Symbol Specification dialog.
See 2D Block Panel on page 1142.
The CAD block used by images and plant
images is specified in the Image
Specification dialog. See Image Panel on
page 1086.
If you do not see an existing CAD block that
suits your needs, you can create your own.
For best results, follow these guidelines:
The CAD block should have the same X
and Y dimensions as the 3D symbol. An
incorrect CAD block size will result in
inconsistent placement of your symbol.
It is usually best to build your CAD block
with solid filled properties. This keeps
background patterns and other objects
from showing through. See Fill Style
Panel on page 1048.
So that your custom CAD block can be
easily identified, it is best to give it a
name in the CAD Block Specification
dialog. See General Panel on page
1063.
CAD Block Management
A list of all CAD blocks present in the
current plan or layout file can be
accessed by selecting CAD> CAD Block
Management.
CAD Block Definition
There are two aspects to each CAD block:
CAD blocks that have nested blocks
within them cannot be assigned to 3D
objects or to images.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1061 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1062
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
The block definition, which holds infor-
mation about the blocks component
objects.
The block instance, which holds informa-
tion about its position, orientation, size,
aspect ratio and other settings specific to
an individual block placed in a file.
All instances of a given CAD block can have
unique positions and sizes; however, the
block definition that they share is the same
regardless of the floor, view, or layout page
that they display in.
Copying a block instance to a completely
different file also copies the block definition
to that file.
If all instances of a CAD block are deleted
from a file, its definition will remain saved
with the file. To control file size, it is a good
idea to regularly purge files of unused CAD
blocks or have the program do it for you
automatically. Both options are available in
the CAD Block Management dialog.
CAD Block Management Dialog
An alphabetical list of all CAD block
definitions saved in the current file displays
here. CAD blocks definitions that currently
have no instance anywhere in the file may
also be included.
Click on a CAD Block Name in the list
to select it. The selected item is high-
lighted in blue.
CAD Block definitions with at least one
instance in the current file have a check-
mark in the In Use column.
Unused CAD block definitions with no
instances in the current file have no check
mark after their names.
Select a block in the list, click the Insert
button, then click in the current view to
place an instance of the block into that
view. Not available for blocks marked for
deletion.
Select a block from the list, then click
Rename to specify a new name for it.
Not available for blocks marked for dele-
tion.
Press the Purge button to delete any
unused block definitions from the list.
Select an unused block from the list and
click the Delete button to remove it from
the list.
Check Automatically Purge CAD
Blocks to remove unused CAD block
definitions fromthe current file. When
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1062 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
CAD Block Specification Dialog
1063
this is unchecked and all instances of a
CAD block are removed from the current
file, its definition will continue to be
saved in the file and will be listed here.
CAD Block Specification Dialog
Select one or more CAD blocks and
click the Open Object edit button to
open the CAD Block Specification dialog.
General Panel
Name and Copyright - Specify the
CAD Blocks name. Not available
when multiple CAD blocks are selected. If
the CAD block has a copyright, information
about it displays here.
This name is included in the CAD Block
Management dialog and is used when you
export the block via DXF/DWG, and is also
imported with DXF/DWG block definitions.
Unlike other settings in this dialog, which
affect only the selected instance of the block,
Note: The CAD blocks associated with
default electrical symbols cannot be deleted,
even if no objects are present in the plan.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1063 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1064
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
changing the name modifies the actual block
definition. See CAD Block Management
on page 1061.
Specify the Position and angle of the
selected CAD block instance.
Specify the X and Y Positions, which are
the coordinates of the CAD blocks inser-
tion point.
Specify the Angle at which the CAD
block instance is placed.
Specify the Size of the selected CAD
block instance.
Check Retain Aspect Ratio of x to retain
the original ratio between the CAD
blocks Height and Width. This only
affects changes made in the dialog: it
does not affect editing using the edit han-
dles. If a block is resized so that its aspect
ratio is changed, it cannot be exploded.
See Explode CAD Block on page
1060.
Specify the Height of the selected CAD
block instance.
Specify the Height Factor, which is the
ratio of the current height of the CAD
block instance to its original height.
Specify the Width of the selected CAD
block instance.
Specify the Width Factor, which is the
ratio of the current width of the CAD
block instance to its original width.
Specify the location of the selected
CAD block instances Insertion Point
(Relative to Center). These offset values use
the CAD block instances coordinate system
rather than that of the drawing area, so if the
block is rotated, its insertion point will
remain in the same location relative to the
block itself. See Select Insertion Point on
page 1060.
Specify the X Offset, the horizontal dis-
tance of the insertion point relative to the
CAD blocks center point.
Specify the Y Offset, the vertical dis-
tance of the insertion point relative to the
CAD blocks center point.
Line/Fill Style - Specify how line and
fill styles are applied to the selected
CAD block instance.
Select By Block to use the line and fill
styles specified for the selected CAD
block instance.
Select By Object to use the line and fill
styles of the individual objects in the
selected CAD block instance.
New block instances use to By Block unless
Use By Object when creating new CAD
blocks is checked in the Preferences dialog.
See CAD Panel on page 104.
Line Style Panel
Many of the settings on the Line Style panel
are only available if By Block is selected on
the General panel of this dialog. For
If you assign a name that is used by
another CAD block in the current file,
the definition of the other block is overwritten.
2
3
Note: If the Height and Width Factors are set
to different values, the selected CAD block
instance cannot be exploded and ovals and
arcs within it may appear distorted.
4
5
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1064 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
CAD Details
1065
information about this panel, see Line Style
Panel on page 1035.
Fill Style Panel
The settings on the Fill Style panel are only
available if By Block is selected on the
General panel of this dialog. For information
about these settings, see Fill Style Panel on
page 1048.
If Always use By Object for CAD block
fill style is checked in the Preferences
dialog, the settings on this panel are not used.
See CAD Panel on page 104.
CAD Details
CAD Details are special view windows for
drawing, saving and organizing 2D drawings
associated with the current plan or layout
file, such as site plans and cross section
details. They are listed in the the CAD Detail
Management dialog as well as in the Project
Browser. See Project Browser on page
1073.
Like other views, CAD Details are saved in
the file they are created in and can be printed.
If saved with a plan file, a CAD Detail can
also be sent to layout. See Sending Views to
Layout on page 1188.
2D CAD information can be copied into or
out of a CAD Detail window using the group
select and copy functions. See Copying and
Pasting Objects on page 164.
CAD Detail Management Dialog
Select CAD> CAD Detail Manage-
ment to open the CAD Detail
Management dialog.
An alphabetical list of all CAD Details in the
current file displays here.
Click on a CAD Detail Name in the list
to select it. The selected item is high-
lighted in blue.
If a CAD Detail is currently open, it will
have a checkmark in the Open column.
Click New to open the Create New CAD
Detail dialog:
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1065 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1066
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Type a short, descriptive name for the
CAD Detail, click OK, and a new CAD
Detail view window opens.
To rename an existing CAD Detail, select
it and click Rename. Type a new name
for it in the Rename CAD Detail dialog
and click OK.
To delete a CAD Detail from the list,
select it and then click Delete. An auto-
matically generated Truss Detail cannot
be deleted if there are trusses present in
the current plan. See Truss Details on
page 597.
To open an existing CAD Detail, select it
and click Open. CAD Details that are
presently open have a checkmark to the
right of their name.
Special CAD Details
Some CAD details are created automatically
by the program. If any roof or floor trusses
are present in your plan, the program creates
a Truss Detail that includes an editable
diagram of each truss type used and a count
of each. See Truss Details on page 597.
When walls are framed using the Build
Framing dialog, a Wall Detail is created for
each wall. These details are listed in the
Project Browser and are also accessible by
selecting a wall and clicking the Open Wall
Detail edit button. Wall Details are not
listed in the CAD Detail Management
dialog. See The Library Browser on page
790.
CAD Detail from View
CAD> CAD Detail from View
converts the current view into a 2D
CAD drawing composed of editable CAD
objects.
CAD Detail from View is available in
all line-based views, including floor plan
view and any 3D view using the Vector View
rendering technique. See Rendered and
Vector Views on page 854.
A CAD Detail created using CAD Detail
from View inherits a variety of settings
from the original view, including:
The layer set used by the original view.
See Layer Sets on page 141.
When the original view is a layout page
with one or more layout boxes, a new
Layout Box Export Contents layer is
created for the contents of the layout
boxes. See Layout on page 1183.
The Dimension Defaults settings used
by the original floor plan or cross section/
elevation view. See Dimension Defaults
Dialog on page 945.
The rotation of the original view. See
Rotate Plan View on page 228.
Camera views and overviews do not have
Dimension Defaults, so the defaults for
floor plan view are inherited by CAD Details
created from these types of views.
Note: CAD Details created using CAD Detail
from View are not dynamically linked to the
original view. Changes made to the view do
not update in the detail or vice versa.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1066 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints
1067
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints
Using the CAD Tools and conventional
survey information, you can create an
accurate plot plan in floor plan view or a
CAD Detail. See Creating a Plot Plan on
page 194 of the Users Guide.
A plot plan can be sent to layout and
included in working drawings. See Floor
Plan Views and CAD Details on page 1191.
A plot plan can also be converted into a
terrain perimeter, allowing you to add
elevation data and accurately position
buildings for 3D modeling of home and lot.
Plan Footprint
Select CAD> Plan Footprint to
create a CAD object representing the
building footprint in a CAD Detail window.
Once the Plan Footprint appears in the detail
window, you can control what information
displays.
To create a Plan Footprint
1. Open the floor plan view of the plan you
want to create a plan footprint from.
2. Select CAD> Plan Footprint . The
program creates a new CAD Detail with
the footprint of the current floor.
By default, this new CAD Detail uses
the Plan Footprint layer set. You can
control what displays in the footprint
using the Layer Display Options dia-
log. See Layer Sets on page 141.
You can also control the appearance of
a Plan Footprint in the Plan Footprint
Specification dialog. See Plan Foot-
print Specification Dialog on page
1068.
To insert a plan footprint in a CAD Detail
1. Open the CAD Detail in which you want
to insert a Plan Footprint.
2. Select CAD> Plan Footprint .
3. Select the floor to use from the drop-
down list and click OK.
4. The floor plan appears in the CAD
Detail window. Select Window> Fill
Window to center the footprint on
screen.
5. The footprint can be rotated and moved
anywhere in the window.
If the model consists of several buildings, a
footprint is created for each. Moving one
footprint automatically adjusts all the
footprints in order to maintain their
relationship.
If you edit a plan using Reverse Plan or
the Edit Area tools, the plan footprint
updates automatically.
Layer Display Options
When you create a plan footprint by selecting
CAD> Plan Footprint while in floor
plan view, the default layer set for plan
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1067 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1068
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
footprints is used. See Layer Set Defaults
on page 142.
When a plan footprint is created by selecting
CAD> Plan Footprint while in a CAD
Detail, the current layer set is used. See
Layer Set Management on page 143.
Regardless of the layer set in use, the
appearance of objects in a Plan Footprint is
controlled in the Layer Display Options
dialog. Individual objects are on the same
layer as in floor plan view, while the entire
Plan Footprint is on the CAD, Default
layer. See Layer Display Options Dialog
on page 144.
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog
Select a plan footprint and click the
Open Object edit button to open the
Plan Footprint Specification dialog for the
selected plan footprint.
General Panel
Select theFloor Used for Plan Foot-
print from the drop-down list.
Check Display Footprint Polyline to
draw a polyline around the perimeter of
the footprint. This polyline may not be
visible if you also have Display Plan
Details checked.This option must be cho-
sen if you want to use a fill pattern or
specify a line style.
Check Display Plan Details to show the
walls and other details as they appear in
floor plan view.
Check Use Current Layer Set to Dis-
play to control what displays in the foot-
print using Layer Display Options. If you
uncheck this box, you lose control of
what displays and the program makes the
determination for you.
Polyline Panel
The Polyline panel indicates the plan
footprint polylines Length/Perimeter, its
enclosed Area, and the Volume of a closed
polyline. See Polyline Panel on page 1047.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1068 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog
1069
Line Style Panel
For information about using the Line Style
panel, see Line Style Panel on page 1035.
Fill Style Panel
For more information about the Fill Style
panel, see Fill Style Panel on page 1048.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1069 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1070
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1070 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1071
Chapt er 34:
Pr oj ect Management
The tools described in this chapter allow you
to track the time you spend on plans,
eliminating guesswork and making billing
easier.
Others let you draw plans with ease and
flexibility, run checks on plans so you can be
more confident that they are free of code
violations and common drawing errors, and
consider loan calculations for your projects.
Chapter Contents
Time Tracker
Time Log Dialog
Project Browser
Project Information
Space Planning
Plan Check
Loan Calculator
Time Tracker
The Time Tracker tool monitors the
time spent on each Chief Architect
file. You can enter start and end times each
time a plan or layout file is opened and
closed, or allow it to run automtically. The
Time Tracker keeps a log that can be
amended and edited as needed.
Select Tools> Time Tracker>Start
Time Logging to begin logging time
for the current plan or layout file. This
creates a new entry. Opening a plan or layout
automatically starts a time log if you set your
preferences to do so. See Time Tracker
Panel on page 102.
Select Tools> Time Tracker> Stop
Time Logging to stop logging time
for the current file. This button is only
available when an entry is currently being
recorded.
Select Tools> Time Tracker> View
Time Log to open the Time Log
dialog and view the time log for the current
file.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1071 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1072
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Time Tracker information is stored with each
file and can be printed or exported from the
Time Log dialog.
You can control how Time Tracker
functions in the Preferences dialog. See
Time Tracker Panel on page 102.
Time Log Dialog
The Time Log dialog displays all
entries logged for the current plan or
layout file. Entries can be added, deleted,
edited, exported, and printed.
Select Tools> Time Tracker> View Time
Log to open the Time Log dialog.
A summary of the entries displays here.
Select an entry in the Start Time
column and edit the details in the lower
portion of the dialog.
Click Add to add a new entry using the
current time.
Select an entry and click Delete to
remove it.
Time Tracker logs times for each plan
and layout file separately, even if they
have the same project name or are saved in
the same directory on your computer.
1 2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1072 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Project Browser
1073
Click Export to open the Save Time Log
dialog and specify a name and destination
for the exported file. Time log informa-
tion can be exported as either a text (.txt)
or Comma Separated Values (.csv) file.
Click Print to open the Print dialog and
print the log.
Select an entry and edit the Start and
End times. Highlight the digits and
enter new values or use the arrow keys on the
keyboard. You can also click the drop-down
list and select a date from the calendar. The
start time must predate the end time.
The Duration of the selected entry and the
Total Duration display at right.
Initially the User information is derived
from the Chief Architect license
registration information. By default, the User
information prefills from the Default User
Name on the Time Tracker panel of the
Preferences dialog. You can select an entry
and change the User here.
Select an entry and add Notes.
Project Browser
The Project Browser is a convenient
way access to all of the views and
Materials Lists saved with an open plan and
all of the pages saved in an open layout. You
can dock it to the top, bottom, or side of the
Chief Architect window or let it float freely.
To open the Project Browser, select View>
Project Browser. See View and Side
Windows on page 33.
If you have multiple plan and/or layout
files associated with a particular project
and wish to bill them together, export your
Time Logs to another application and then-
combine them.
3
4
5
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1073 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1074
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
The name of an open plan file displays
here.
All CAD Details saved with the plan are
listed here. See CAD Details on page
1065.
All Cameras and overviews saved with
the plan are listed here by floor. See 3D
View Tools on page 863.
All saved Cross Sections and elevation
views are listed here.
All Floors in the plan are listed here,
including the Foundation and Attic. See
Multiple Floors on page 417.
All Materials Lists saved with the plan
are listed here. See Materials Lists on
page 1225.
All Wall Details saved with the plan are
listed here by floor. See In Wall Detail
Views on page 581.
The name of an open layout file
displays here. See Layout Page
Management on page 1204.
Any CAD Details saved with the layout
are listed here. See CAD Details on
page 1065.
Any pages that are in use in an open lay-
out display here, in numeric order. See
In the Project Browser on page 1204.
Using the Contextual Menu
Items in the Project Browser can be
accessed, modified and organized using the
contextual menu. To access its contextual
menu, simply right-click on an item. See
Contextual Menus on page 35.
All views and pages can be accessed by
selecting Open View or Show Page,
respectively. You can also open a view or
page by double-clicking on its name.
All views aside from Floors and layout
Pages can be Renamed.
All views aside from Floors and layout
Pages specified as Templates can be
Deleted. See Page Templates on page
1184.
New Pages can be Inserted Before or
After a selected layout Page.
Undocked Project Browser
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1074 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Project Information
1075
Project Information
Information about the current project, the
client it is drawn for, and the registered Chief
Architect user can be inserted into text
objects to improve organization and clarity in
your documents. See Text Macros on page
1014.
Some of this information can also be
included when exporting information to
REScheck. See Export to REScheck on
page 1136.
Designer Information
Designer Information is initially
populated by registered user
information, such as name and address, that
was entered when the software installation
was registered. This information is saved in
the Default Designer Information dialog.
which can be accessed through the
Preferences dialog. See Text Panel on
page 91.
If you would like to customize the Designer
Information for a particular file, select
Tools> Project Information> Designer
Information to open the Designer
Information dialog.
Enter information in each text field exactly
as you want it to display when the
corresponding text macro is used. See Text
Macros on page 1014.
Client Information
Select Tools> Project Information>
Client Information to open the
Client Information dialog. This dialog is
similar to the Designer Information dialog,
but its specifications apply to Client text
macros. This information must be filled out
seperately for plan files and layout files.
Registered User Information
Registered User information corresponds to
the information that was given when the
current Chief Architect installation was
registered and cannot be modified without
reinstalling and registering the program. See
User Informationon page 5.
Space Planning
The Space Planning Assistant Tools
are a time-saving way to create a
preliminary room-by-room design of a home
without getting caught up in the details. Once
the shape and layout of the rooms are
finalized, the Build House tool converts
them into a working plan that can be edited
and detailed to completion.
Space Planning Assistant
Select Tools> Space Planning>
Space Planning. The Space
When entering new Client Information,
begin by clicking the Clear Form button.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1075 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1076
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Planning Assistant leads you through a
series of windows that gather information
about the rooms you want to include in your
house. When you click Finish, the selected
room boxes display.
Room boxes can now be arranged into a floor
plan.
Placing Room Boxes
In addition or as an alternative to the room
boxes created for you by the Space
Planning Assistant, you can create your
own room boxes. To do so, select Tools>
Space Planning , then choose the desired
room type from the submenu. Click in floor
plan view to place a room box of the selected
type at that location.
Displaying Room Boxes
Room boxes and their labels are located on
the Space Planning Boxes layer. Space
Planning Box labels use the Text Style
assigned to that layer, as well. See
Displaying Objects on page 140.
Editing Rooms
Once created, room boxes can be edited in a
variety of ways.
Select room boxes using the Select
Objects tool just like other objects in
Chief Architect. See Selecting Objects
on page 176.
Room boxes can be resized, rotated, and
rearranged. See Editing Box-Based
Objects on page 198.
Try to line up the rooms so that they are
just touching. Excessive overlaps may
cause your rooms to form incorrectly.
Closets are the exception. You can over-
lap a room with a closet, or place in
inside another room box.
Rooms can be copied and pasted using
the Copy/Paste edit button and
deleted using the Delete edit button.
Select Tools> Space Planning or
click the Space Planning Configuration
button to access the room box tools
and place additional room boxes in your
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1076 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Plan Check
1077
plan. Select a tool and click in the plan to
place a room box of that type.
Select Tools> Space Planning> Toggle
Room Boxes or click the toggle but-
ton to hide or show the room boxes.
Build House
When the rooms are in place, select Tools>
Space Planning> Build House to
convert the rooms into a building model.
Walls and doors are inserted between the
rooms that you arranged.
When you Build House, the Space Planning
Boxes layer is automatically turned off. The
room boxes that you created are not deleted,
however.
Multiple Floors
If you specified a two-story house, follow
these steps:
1. Edit and arrange the room boxes on
Floor 1 as desired.
2. Select Tools> Space Planning> Build
House tool to create the walls on the
first floor.
3. Go Up One Floor and notice that
the positions of the walls on Floor 1 dis-
play in red as a reference.
4. Arrange the rooms on Floor 2 as desired,
using the reference display as a guide.
5. On the second floor, select Tools>
Space Planning> Build House to
complete the second floor.
Plan Check
Plan Check checks the floor of your
plan currently shown on screen for
anything that appears to violate common
building practices. Plan Check may not find
all the problems in a plan, but does it point
out areas that may need improvement.
As your plan evolves, a number of things that
may become incorrect can be fixed using
Plan Check. For example, doors that change
from exterior to interior as you add new
rooms are redrawn without the threshold line
that marks an exterior door. A cabinet,
fixture or furniture item that is against a wall
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1077 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1078
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
because the wall was moved into it, as
opposed to the item moving, are attached to
the wall.
To run Plan Check, select Tools> Checks>
Plan Check .
Plan Check Dialog
The current error number, along with
the total number of errors found.
A description of the current error
displays here.
Options for navigating Plan Check are
found on the right side.
Click Next to ignore the current error and
proceed to the next.
Click Previous to return to the previous
error.
Click Hold to suspend Plan Check so you
can fix the current error. Select Tools>
Checks> Plan Check again and the
check starts where it left off.
Click Done to terminate Plan Check.
Potential plan errors found are usually
highlighted in floor plan view. To ensure the
highlighted item is on-screen, make sure the
entire plan is shown in the window before
you run Plan Check .
If this dialog obscures the floor plan view,
drag its title bar to move it. It remembers its
new position and displays there the next time
Plan Check is run.
Room Types
Plan Check can do a much better job of
checking for problems if it knows what the
rooms in your plan are to be used for, so you
should assign a Room Type to each room in
your plan. See Room Types on page 321.
The first time Plan Check runs in a plan,
it automatically assigns a room type to as
many undesignated rooms as it can. Some
rooms are determined by their size and
shape, and others by their contents. For
example, a shelf in a small room indicates a
closet; a stove or refrigerator indicates a
kitchen; or a bed, a bedroom. If the program
cannot assign a room type, Plan Check
highlights it and suggests that you do so
manually.
Disclaimer: The Plan Check feature in
Chief Architect compares your plan with
common building practices. Plan Check does
not claim to detect all building code and
design requirements. Always have your plans
checked by a licensed professional before
beginning actual construction.
1
2
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1078 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Loan Calculator
1079
Loan Calculator
Select Tools> Loan Calculator to
open the Loan Calculator dialog. This
dialog lets you calculate different aspects of
a loan for the current plan based on a variety
of parameters.
Specify what aspect of the loan you
would like to calculate from the
Calculate drop-down list:
Monthly Payment
Loan Amount
Term
Interest Rate
The calculation Result, based on the
information you provide, displays here.
If you make changes to any of the fields in
the dialog, click the = button to refresh the
Result.
The Required Fields are the same as
the options in theCalculate drop-down
list. The option selected under Calculate will
be inactive under Required Fields.
Specify the desired Loan Amount.
Specify the desired Term, in years.
Specify the desired Interest Rate.
Specify the desired Monthly Payment.
The Optional Fields allow you to
include additional information in your
loan calculation.
Specify the expected Property Taxes per
year.
Specify the expected Homeowners
Insurance cost per year.
Specify the expected Private Mortgage
Insurance (PMI) cost per year.
Specify the cost of any expected Other
Fees.
When Monthly Payment is calculated, each
Optional value is divided by twelve (months)
and then added to the total payment.
When a Calculate option other than Monthly
Payment is selected, these values are divided
by twelve (months) and then subtracted from
the specified Monthly Payment value. The
result, which does not display, is then used to
determine the Loan Amount, Term or Interest
Rate.
1
2
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1079 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1080
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1080 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1081
Chapt er 35:
Pictures, Images,
and Walkthroughs
Chief Architect uses picture files in a variety
of ways to enhance your drawings.
The Library Browser contains images of real
world objects like plants, vehicles, and
people that can display in 3D views.
Picture files can also be imported into Chief
Architect and shown in most views.
You can save any view using a variety of
picture file formats. In addition, Chief
Architect allows you to create virtual tours
that can be saved as .avi files, shared with
others, and played back later.
Chief Architect can also generate ray trace
images from a Standard rendered view for
photo-realistic rendering capabilities. Ray
tracing is discussed in its own chapter. See
Rendering and Ray Tracing on page 895.
Chapter Contents
Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects
Images
Displaying Images
Editing Images
Image Specification Dialog
Pictures
Picture File Box Specification Dialog
Metafiles
Metafile Box Specification Dialog
PDF Files
PDF Box Specification Dialog
Displaying Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF
Boxes
Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes
Copy Region as Picture
Creating Screen Captures
3D Backdrops
Walkthroughs
Walkthrough Path Specification Dialog
Creating VRML Files
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1081 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1082
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects
In common computer language, picture files,
pictures and images are more or less
synonymous. In the Chief Architect
environment, however, there are some
notable differences between these terms.
In Chief Architect, a two dimensional image
file such as a .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png is
referred to as a picture file or an image file.
Examples of these files are saved on most
computers and can be opened in a variety of
applications.
A Picture, on the other hand, is a file that has
been imported into the program. Pictures can
be imported into floor plan view, cross
section/elevation views, CAD details, and
layout pages. They are two-dimensional only
and do not display in camera views or
overviews.
An Image object is also based on a picture
file, but it does display in both 2D and 3D
views. Images have 3D width and height data
associated with them, as well as a 2D symbol
which displays in floor plan view.
Picture files have additional uses in Chief
Architect, as well:
Backdrops are picture files that display
behind 3D views. See 3D Backdrops
on page 874.
Textures are picture files that realistically
represent materials in 3D views. See
About Materials on page 818.
Images
Images add realistic detail to 3D views
without adding many surfaces to the
model. For example, a tree image with a
single surface can be used instead of a tree
symbol with thousands, dramatically
improving realism without compromising
drawing time.
There are two types of Images in Chief
Architect:
Images rotate so that they always
face the camera in 3D views.
Billboard Images do not rotate to
face the camera. An example of when
this may be useful is an image of a trellis,
which might look awkward when facing
a camera from a side view.
Placing Images
A selection of Images are available in
the Library Browser. Select one and
click in a floor plan view, camera view or
overview to place it. See Placing Library
Objects on page 805.
Creating Images
Custom Images can be added to the
Library Browser, as well as created in
plan files. Chief Architect can use any image
with a *.bmp, *.jpg, *.png, *.gif, *.tif,
*.pcx, or *.tga extension.
Generally, .png files work best as Images
because this format has good compression
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1082 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Images
1083
and allows for the Image to contain
transparency information.
To create an Image in floor plan view
1. In floor plan view, select Build>
Image> Create Image or Billboard
Image to open the Image
Specification dialog. See Image Speci-
fication Dialog on page 1085.
2. On the Image panel:
Click the Browse button to select a pic-
ture file on your computer or enter the
path to a valid picture file in the Image
File field.
Select a 2D Plan Symbol from the drop-
down list or click the Library button
and select a CAD block or symbol from
the library. The selected symbol repre-
sents the image in floor plan view. See
Image Panel on page 1086.
Specify the Size and Position of the
image.
3. Specify transparency information on the
Transparency panel.
4. Click OK to close the Image
Specification dialog.
5. Click to place the new Image in floor
plan view.
To create an image in the Library Browser
1. In the Library Browser, right-click on an
unlocked folder.
2. Select New> Image from the contextual
menu to open the Image Specification
dialog.
3. Browse to the image file you want to
add and select your other options. See
Image Specification Dialog on page
1085.
4. Once created, the image is listed in the
library folder that you right-clicked on.
Size and other data is saved.
Using Paste Image
You can also import an image by first
copying it to the Windows Clipboard,
then navigating to a Chief Architect window
and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste from the
menu, or by using the Screen Capture tools.
See Paste Special on page 167 and
Creating Screen Captures on page 1101.
Converting a Folder
of Images
A folder of image files can be
converted into Image objects and
added to the library all at once, saving the
effort of converting them individually.
To convert a folder of images
1. Select Build> Image> Create Image
Library .
2. In the Select an Image Folder dialog,
select a folder of image files to convert
and click OK.
3. A new library with the same name and
directory structure as the converted
folder is listed in the Library Browser.
Depending on the number of images in
the folder, this may take a few moments.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1083 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1084
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Displaying Images
The display of images in floor plan
and 3D views is controlled in the
Layer Display Options dialog. See
Displaying Objects on page 140.
Images are placed on theImages layer by
default but can be moved to other layers once
they have been created. See Image
Specification Dialog on page 1085.
In Floor Plan View
In floor plan view, most images are typically
represented by an Image symbol. You
can specify a different symbol to represent an
image if you wish. See Image Specification
Dialog on page 1085.
Any 2D CAD block from the library can
represent an image object. If you do not see a
CAD block that suits your needs, you can
create one or import one from another
application. See Custom 2D Symbols on
page 1061.
In 3D Views
The actual picture associated with an image
object can be seen in 3D views, as can any
transparency data associated it. See Image
Specification Dialog on page 1085.
Images can be set to either rotate so that they
always face the camera or remain stationary,
like billboards. See Images on page 1082.
You can choose to turn off the display of
images in 3D views in the Preferences
dialog. See Render Panel on page 117.
In Layout
The symbols representing images in floor
plan view, whether 2D symbols or CAD
blocks, can display on a layout sheet and be
printed or plotted. See Sending Views to
Layout on page 1188.
Editing Images
Images can be selected in 2D and 3D views
and edited using the edit handles, edit tools
and the Image Specification dialog. See
Image Specification Dialog on page 1085.
Using the Mouse
In floor plan view, a selected image rotated,
moved, and resized. In 3D views, a selected
image only has one edit handle: the circular
Resize handle.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1084 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Image Specification Dialog
1085
When an image is resized using the edit
handle, its aspect ratio is retained and 2D
symbol resizes proportionally.
Using the Edit Toolbar
A selected image or images can be edited in a
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar. As with most objects, images can be
copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See
The Edit Toolbar on page 34.
Image Specification Dialog
Select an image and click the Open
Object edit button to open theImage
Specification dialog.
You can also open this dialog by right-
clicking on an image in an unlocked library
and selecting Open from the contextual
menu.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1085 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1086
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Image Panel
General information about the selected
Image can be specified here.
The Image File associated with the
Image can be specified. Click Browse to
choose a file saved on your computer or
type the files full pathname in the text
field.
Select a 2D Plan Symbol from the drop-
down list to represent the Image in floor
plan view. See Displaying Images on
page 1084.
Click the Library button to choose a
CAD block from the library to act as the
Images 2D symbol. See Select Library
Object Dialog on page 807.
Specify the Size of the image as it
displays in 3D views.
Enter a Height for the selected image.
Enter a Width for the selected image.
Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio of X if
you would like to modify the Height or
Width without affecting the other value.
1
Note: Images cannot be assigned a 2D Plan
Symbol that contains a nested CAD block.
See CAD Blocks on page 1059.
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1086 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Image Specification Dialog
1087
If you do this, the image may appear dis-
torted.
This checkbox does not affect editing
performed outside of this dialog and is an
action rather than a state: the next time
you open this dialog, it will be checked.
Click Reset Original Aspect Ratio of to
reset the images original aspect ratio and
remove any distortion caused by resizing.
Specify the location of the selected
Images Center Point.
Position the selected image precisely by
specifying its X and Y Coordinates.
Specify the images Height Above
Ground.
Specify the appearance of the Block
Line/Fill Style of the images 2D
symbol in floor plan view. Only available
when a CAD block from the library is
selected as the images 2D Plan Symbol.
Select Use Image Settings to use the
images line style, which is set by layer,
and its fill style, which is None (Trans-
parent).
Select Use Block Settings to use the2d
CAD blocks line and fill styles. See
Custom 2D Symbols on page 1061.
Options -
Check Reverse Image to reflect the
appearance of the image about an imagi-
nary vertical line through its center.
Check Image Always Faces Camera to
prevent the image from rotating to face
the camera in 3D views. This box is
unchecked for Billboard Images. See
Images on page 1082.
Any Copyright information associated
with the selected Image will be stated
here.
A preview of the selected Image
displays here. See Dialog Preview
Panes on page 38.
Transparency Panel
The settings on the Transparency panel let
you specify portions of the selected image as
transparent.
3
4
5
6
7
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1087 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1088
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Click the Use Transparency From The
Image File radio button to use any trans-
parency data included in the image file.
Click the Use Custom Transparency
Color radio button to specify a color in
the image to represent the transparency
and enable the settings below.
Click the Color box to select a color in
the Select Color dialog. See Color
Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page
843.
Use the slide bar or enter a value to spec-
ify a level of Tolerance to be applied to
colors that are almost the same as the
specified transparency color.
Move your pointer over the small pre-
view image below. The pointer changes
to an eyedropper and a magnified pre-
view displays to its right. Click to select
the color of the pixel your pointer is over
as the Transparency color. The selected
color displays in the Color box, below.
A magnified preview of the area in the
preview image above displays here,
allowing for accurate pixel selection.
The Transparency Color
If the portion of the image file that you wish
to use contains the transparency color, that
part of the image also becomes transparent.
If this happens, the image may appear
partially disintegrated.
You may need to experiment to find the best
transparency color and tolerance for the
image.
Note: The image preview will display its orig-
inal orientation, even if Reverse Image is
checked on the Image panel.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1088 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Pictures
1089
Layer Panel
For information about the settings on this
panel, see Layer Panel on page 148.
Fill Style Panel
For information about the settings on this
panel, see Fill Style Panel on page 1048.
Pictures
A variety of picture file types can be
imported into and exported out of Chief
Architect.
Metafiles are also types of picture files that
can be imported and exported. See
Metafiles on page 1092.
Exporting Pictures
Using the Export Picture tool is
similar to creating a screen capture of
everything in the current Chief Architect
view window. Pictures can be saved in
various file formats and used in other
applications.
Export Picture is best suited for
rendered and Ray Trace views. When
exporting a line-based view, best results can
be achieved by saving it as a Metafile. See
To export a metafile on page 1093.
To export a picture
1. Open the view that you would like to
export as a picture file.
2. Zoom, pan or otherwise adjust the view
so that what you see on screen suits your
needs. See Displaying 3D Views on
page 871.
3. Select File> Export> Picture (BMP,
JPG, PNG) in any view to open the
Export Picture File dialog. See Export-
ing Files on page 54.
The Copy Region as Picture tool also
lets you create a picture file based on the
current view, but allows you to specify what
portion of the view is exported. See Copy
Region as Picture on page 1100.
The Screen Capture tools offer another way
to create a picture file based on the current
view. See Creating Screen Captures on
page 1101.
Importing Pictures
Pictures can be imported into and
displayed in floor plan view, cross
section/elevation views, CAD Details, and
layout pages. Pictures do not display in
camera views or overviews. See Displaying
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes on page
1098.
There are several ways to import a Picture
into Chief Architect:
Select File> Import> Picture (BMP,
JPG, PNG) to open the Import
Picture File dialog, which is a typical
open file dialog. See Importing Files
on page 59.
Click and drag an image file from a Win-
dows Explorer window into the Chief
Architect window.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1089 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1090
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
In any application, copy an image to the
Windows Clipboard, then select Edit>
Paste> Paste from the Chief Archi-
tect menu in an eligible view window.
See Paste Special on page 167.
Use the Screen Capture tools. See Creat-
ing Screen Captures on page 1101.
An imported picture is placed in the center of
the current view. Once imported, pictures can
be selected and edited. See Editing Pictures,
Metafiles, and PDF Boxes on page 1098.
Picture File Box Specification Dialog
Select an imported picture file and
click the Open Object edit button to
open the Picture File Box Specification
dialog.
Note: Importing large, or multiple, Pictures
into a plan or layout file can result in program
slowness.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1090 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Picture File Box Specification Dialog
1091
Information about the selected Picture
File can be specified here.
The Filename of the picture file displays
here. Type a new pathname to change the
picture assigned to this box.
Click the Browse button to choose a new
picture file or to relink to a missing file.
Check Save in Plan to embed the picture
in the plan or layout file. If a picture file
is embedded, you do not need to include
it when sending the plan or layout to a
different computer.
Click the radio button beside either PNG
or JPEG to specify how to save the
embedded picture data. Pictures that were
originally .jpg or .tga files use the JPEG
option by default; those that were .gif or
.png files use the PNG option by default.
Specify the pictures Quality %. when
JPEG is selected. A lower value results
in better compression, while a higher
value reduces data loss.
Specify the Size of the picture in plan
inches (mm).
1
Note: PNG is the better option for pictures of
line drawings, text, or large areas of a single
color. J PEG is the better option for photos.
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1091 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1092
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Specify the Width of the picture box.
The original width in pixels displays to
the right.
Specify the Height of the picture box.
The original height in pixels displays to
the right.
Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio of X if
you would like to modify the Height or
Width without affecting the other value.
If you do this, the picture may appear dis-
torted.
This checkbox does not affect editing
performed outside of this dialog and is an
action rather than a state: the next time
you open this dialog, it will be checked.
Reset Original Aspect Ratio - If the
aspect ratio is changed, you can click this
button to return the picture to its original
aspect ratio.
Check Reset Cropping to fill the extents
of the selected Picture box with the image
associated with it. If the box has been
resized, the image may appear distorted.
See Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and
PDF Boxes on page 1098.
Specify the Angle of the picture box rela-
tive to a horizontal line pointing towards
the right hand side of the screen.
Specify the position of the selected
Pictures Center Point. See 3D
Drafting on page 29.
Specify the X and YPosition relative to
the absolute origin.
A variety of Display Options are
available.
Check Black and White Dither to
dither the selected picture file. Dithering
creates a two tone effect that may pro-
duce better results when printed.
Check Grayscale to replace the color in
the selected picture with shades of gray.
Check Reflect to reverse the image.
Enter a degree of Brightness from 1 -
100%.
Enter a degree of Contrast from 1 -
100%.
Line Style Panel
The settings on this panel are similar to those
on the Line Style panel in numerous other
dialogs, with one exception: uncheck Show
Border to turn off the display of the pictures
border polyline.
See Line Style Panel on page 1035.
Fill Style Panel
For information about using the Fill Style
panel, see Fill Style Panel on page 1048.
Metafiles
A metafile (.emf, .wmf) is a special picture
file format made up of vectors (lines) that
allow the image to be rescaled without loss
of quality.
High resolution pictures of line-based views
can be exported as a metafile.
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1092 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Metafiles
1093
Exporting Metafiles
An enhanced metafile (.emf) can be
exported from any line-based view:
that is, from floor plan view, CAD Details,
layout pages, and 3D Vector Views.
Only objects that display on screen are
included in an exported metafile.
To export a metafile
1. Accurately position the view on screen.
2. Select File> Export> Metafile
(EMF) .
3. Drag a marquee from corner to cor-
ner, defining the area that will included
in the metafile.
4. Release the mouse to open theMetafile
Size dialog.
5. Specify the desired Width or Height of
the metafile. When one value is edited,
the other changes to maintain its aspect
ratio.
Specify, too, the desired Dots Per Inch
(DPI) for the metafile. A larger value
results in a higher quality metafile, but
also a larger file size.
6. When a metafile is exported from a 3D
Vector View, you can also specify the
printed thickness of lines in the view. To
increase the printing line weight, type a
larger number in the Use Line Weight
field. See Vector View on page 912.
Metafiles exported from floor plan view
use the line weights defined in the Layer
Display Options dialog. See Layer
Display Options Dialog on page 144.
7. Click OK to open the Export Metafile
dialog, which is a typical Save As dia-
log. See Saving, Exporting, and Back-
ing Up Files on page 51.
8. Enter a name and location on your com-
puter for the metafile, then click Save.
Importing Metafiles
Metafiles can be imported into and
displayed in floor plan view, cross
section/elevation views, CAD Details, and
layout pages. Metafiles do not display in
camera views or overviews. See Displaying
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes on page
1098.
There are two ways to import a metafile into
Chief Architect:
Select File> Import> Metafile
(EMF,WMF) to open the Import
Metafile dialog, which is a typical open
file dialog. See Importing Files on page
59.
You can also click and drag a metafile file
from a Windows Explorer window into
the Chief Architect window to import it.
An imported metafile is placed in the center
of the current view. Once imported, metafiles
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1093 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1094
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
can be selected and edited. See Editing
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes on page
1098.
Metafile Box Specification Dialog
Select an imported metafile and click
the Open Object edit button to open
the Metafile Box Specification dialog.
General Panel
Center/Orientation - Specify the
position of the selected metafiles
center point and its angle. See 3D Drafting
on page 29.
Specify the X and YPosition relative to
the absolute origin.
Specify the Angle of the metafile box rel-
ative to a horizontal line pointing towards
the right hand side of the screen.
Specify the Size of the metafile in plan
inches (mm).
Specify the Width of the metafile box.
Specify the Height of the metafile box.
Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio of X if
you would like to modify the Height or
Width without affecting the other value.
If you do this, the metafile may appear
distorted.
This checkbox does not affect editing
performed outside of this dialog and is an
action rather than a state: the next time
you open this dialog, it will be checked.
Reset Original Aspect Ratio - If the
aspect ratio is changed, you can click this
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1094 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
PDF Files
1095
button to return the picture to its original
aspect ratio.
Check Reset Cropping to fill the extents
of the selected metafile box with the
image associated with it. If the box has
been resized, the image may appear dis-
torted. See Editing Pictures, Metafiles,
and PDF Boxes on page 1098.
Line Style Panel
The settings on this panel are similar to those
on the Line Style panel in numerous other
dialogs, with one exception. Uncheck Show
Border to turn off the display of the pictures
border polyline.
See Line Style Panel on page 1035.
Fill Style Panel
For information about the Fill Style panel,
see Fill Style Panel on page 1048.
PDF Files
Portable Document Format (.pdf) files are a
special type of file that can be viewed on
nearly any computer and can include a wide
variety of visual information.
You can import .pdf files into Chief
Architect in floor plan view, cross section/
elevation views. CAD Details, and in layout.
Once imported, PDF boxes behave and can
be edited similar to imported pictures and
metafiles. See Editing Pictures, Metafiles,
and PDF Boxes on page 1098.
Some .pdf files can contain both 2D and 3D
information; however, Chief Architect can
only support 2D data in an imported .pdf file.
When a 3D .pdf file is imported, it may
display text, a static image of the 3D model,
or it may not import at all.
You can also create a 2D .pdf from any view
by printing. See Printing to a PDF File on
page 1170.
Importing PDF Files
To import a .pdf file, select File>
Import> Import PDF.
You can also import a .pdf file by dragging it
from a Windows Explorer window into the
Chief Architect window.
Note: Importing large, or multiple, .pdf files
into a plan or layout file can result in program
slowness.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1095 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1096
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
The full Filename of the .pdf file
displays here.
Click the Browse button to choose a new
.pdf file or to relink to a missing file.
Specify the Page of the .pdf file that dis-
plays in the preview on the right. Type a
page number in the text field or use the
arrow buttons to browse the pages
sequentially.
A preview of the page selected above
displays here.
Specify how much of the .pdf file you
wish to Import. When multiple pages
are imported, a separate PDF box is created
for each one.
Select Current Page to import only the
page specified above and shown in the
preview to the right.
Select Pages, then specify the starting
page in the From field and the ending
pgae in the To field.
Select All to import the entire .pdf file.
PDF Box Specification Dialog
Select an imported PDF box and click
the Open Object edit button to open
the PDF Box Specification dialog.
1
2
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1096 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
PDF Box Specification Dialog
1097
The full Filename of the .pdf file
displays here. Type a new name to
associate the selected PDF box with a
different .pdf file.
Click the Browse button to choose a new
.pdf file or to relink to a missing file.
Specify the Page of the .pdf file that dis-
plays in the selected PDF box.
Check Save in Plan to embed the .pdf in
the plan or layout file. If a .pdf is embed-
ded in a file, you do not need to include it
when sending the file to a different com-
puter.
Specify the Size of the PDF box in plan
inches (mm).
Specify the Width of the PDF box.
Specify the Height of the PDF box.
Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio of X if
you would like to modify the Height or
Width without affecting the other value.
If you do this, the PDF box may appear
distorted.
This checkbox does not affect editing
performed outside of this dialog and is an
action rather than a state: the next time
you open this dialog, it will be checked.
Reset Original Aspect Ratio - If the
aspect ratio is changed, you can click this
button to return the picture to its original
aspect ratio.
Check Reset Cropping to fill the extents
of the selected PDF box with the image
associated with it. If the box has been
resized, the image may appear distorted.
See Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and
PDF Boxes on page 1098.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1097 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1098
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Specify the Position of the selected
PDF boxs center point. See 3D
Drafting on page 29.
Specify the X and Y Positions of the
PDF box relative to the origin.
Specify the Angle of the PDF box rela-
tive to an imaginary horizontal line point-
ing towards the right hand side of the
view window.
Line Style Panel
The settings on this panel are similar to those
on the Line Style panel in numerous other
dialogs, with one exception: uncheck the
Show Outline box to turn off the display of
the PDF boxs border polyline.
See Line Style Panel on page 1035.
Displaying Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes
The display of pictures, metafiles, and
PDF boxes is controlled in the Layer
Display Options dialog. See Displaying
Objects on page 140.
Pictures, metafiles, and PDF boxes are
placed on the Current CAD Layer by default;
but once imported, they can be moved to
other layers. See Image Specification
Dialog on page 1085.
Pictures, metafiles, and PDF boxes can be
imported into and displayed in floor plan
view, cross section/elevation views, CAD
Details, and layout pages. A picture,
metafile, or PDF box can only be seen in the
view where it was imported and cannot be
imported into a camera view or overview.
Drawing Groups
By default, imported pictures are placed in
the Back Drawing Group, and imported
metafiles and PDF boxes are placed in the
Default Drawing Group. Once imported,
they can be moved to a different group. See
Drawing Groups on page 210.
In Layout
Pictures, metafiles, and PDF boxes are
included when a view is sent to layout, and
can also be imported directly onto a layout
page. See Pictures, Metafiles, and PDFs in
Layout on page 1187.
Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes
Pictures, metafiles, and PDF boxes can be
selected and edited using the edit handles,
the edit toolbar, and their specification
dialogs.
Imported pictures, metafiles, and PDFs are
placed on the Current CAD Layer by default;
but once imported, these objects can be
placed on any layer. See Layers on page
139.
Using the Mouse
Pictures, metafiles, and PDF boxes have edit
handles similar to other box-based objects.
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1098 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes
1099
See Editing Box-Based Objects on page
198.
The corner Resize handles behave do not
behave the same for pictures, metafiles,
and PDF boxes as they do for CAD
boxes, however. If you drag a corner han-
dle of one of these objects while the
Default Edit Behavior is active, its con-
tents will resize and height to width ratio
will be retained.
If you drag an Extend handle along a pic-
ture, metafile, or PDF boxs edge, the
contents of the box will not be resized. If
you resize it larger, an empty space will
be created between that edge and the con-
tents; if you resize it smaller, the contents
will be cropped.
In the Specification Dialog
Pictures, metafiles, and PDF boxes can be
customized in their specification dialog. See:
Picture File Box Specification Dialog
on page 1090
Metafile Box Specification Dialog on
page 1094
PDF Box Specification Dialog on page
1096
Using the Edit Handles
A selected picture, metafile, or PDF box can
be resized, moved, and rotated using the its
edit handles. See Editing Box-Based
Objects on page 198.
Using Dimensions
Pictures, metafiles, and PDF boxes can be
relocated relative to other objects with
precision using dimensions.
To avoid changing the selected objects
aspect ratio, make sure you choose to move
the entire object rather than the selected
edge. See Moving Objects Using
Dimensions on page 971.
Using the Edit Tools
A selected picture, metafile, or PDF box can
be edited in a variety of ways using the
buttons on the edit toolbar. See The Edit
Toolbar on page 34.
Point to Point Resize
A selected picture, metafile, or PDF
box can be resized in either the X or Y
direction with the Point to Point Resize edit
tool.
To use the Point to Point Resize tool
1. Select a picture box, metafile box, or
PDF box.
2. Click the Point to Point Resize edit
button.
3. Click on two points in the selected
objects box area that have a known dis-
tance between them.
4. After you click at the second point, the
Point to Point Resize dialog opens
showing the current distance between
the points.
5. Enter a new dimension that matches the
desired distance between the points.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1099 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1100
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
6. Click OK to resize the picture, metafile,
or pdf.
Resize Factor
With a bit of calculation, an imported picture,
metafile, or PDF box can be resized to scale
using the Transform/Replicate Object
dialog. Once resized, the information in the
object box can be traced using Chief
Architects drawing tools and then deleted.
To calculate the Resize Factor
1. Find two items in the imported object
that are separated by a known horizontal
or vertical distance, such as two walls or
plot lines.
2. Draw parallel CAD lines on top of these
two items. See The CAD Drawing
Tools on page 1025.
3. Find the distance between the CAD
lines. See The Manually Drawn
Dimension Tools on page 959.
4. The Resize Factor for the image is the
distance described in the picture divided
by the distance between the CAD lines.
For example, if the items are supposed to be
10 feet apart on the picture, but the distance
between the two CAD lines drawn on them is
only 2 feet, you need to set the Resize Factor
for the picture to 5. (10 divided by 2 equals
5). When the picture is 5 times the original
size, the items on the picture are at the actual
scale shown on the picture.
5. Select the picture and click the Trans-
form/Replicate Object edit button.
6. In the Transform/Replicate Object dia-
log, select the Resize Factor check box.
7. Enter the Resize Factor calculated
above, then click OK.
Copy Region as Picture
You can copy any portion of the
screen and save it as a picture file
using the Copy Region as Picture tool. See
Exporting Pictures on page 1089.
To use Copy Region as Picture
1. Open the view that you would like to
copy all or part of as a picture.
2. Select Edit> Copy Region as
Picture . Your pointer displays a
marquee icon.
3. Click and drag a rectangular selection
marquee around the desired region.
4. The selection is copied to the Windows
clipboard.
If the current view is vector-based, the
Metafile Size dialog displays because
metafiles are better suited for line-based
pictures. See Metafiles on page 1092.
It is a good idea to delete a resized pic-
ture after it is traced to help avoid pro-
gram slowness and limit your plan or layout
files size.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1100 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Creating Screen Captures
1101
If the current view is a rendered or Ray
Trace view, the region is sent directly to
the Windows clipboard.
5. From there, the picture can be pasted
into another view or another program.
Creating Screen Captures
Use the Screen Capture tools to add
images, backdrops, or materials to the
Chief Architect Library or to create picture
objects. You can capture screens in Chief
Architect or other applications.
Begin by selecting Tools> Screen Capture>
Screen Capture Setup to open the
Screen Capture Setup dialog.
Screen Capture Setup Dialog
Save Capture As - Specify in what form you
would like the screen capture to be saved.
If you select Backdrop as the capture
type, the program will add the capture to
the library, and it will display in the
library preview panes. See 3D Back-
drops on page 874.
If you select Image as the capture type,
the program will add the capture to the
library as an image object. The image
will display in the preview panes and will
be selected. Click in the plan to place it.
See Images on page 1082.
If you select Material as the capture
type, the new material will be added to
the My Materials library category and
will be shown in the preview panes. Use
the Material Painter to apply the
material. See The Material Painter on
page 818.
If you choose Picture as the capture type,
the picture displays on screen in Chief
Architect. See Pictures on page 1089.
Check Hide Chief Architect While
Capturing to minimize the program win-
dow so you can capture an image in
another application.
Click Capture to proceed with a screen
capture and click Done when you are fin-
ished. The Screen Capture Setup set-
tings are saved between program sessions
and are used in all files.
To create a screen capture
1. Select Tools> Screen Capture> Cap-
ture Screen , or click the Capture
button in the Screen Capture Setup
dialog.
2. The mouse pointer displays a cross hairs
icon when the Screen Capture tool is
active. Move it to the window that you
want to capture from. This can be in
Chief Architect, a web page, or another
program.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1101 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1102
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
3. Click and drag a rectangular marquee to
capture the area within the marquee.
4. A captured Picture will be placed imme-
diately in the Chief Architect drawing
area. Captured Backdrops, Materials,
and Images are saved in the User Cata-
log of the Library Browser.
To change the name of a captured backdrop,
image, or material, right-click on its name in
the library list, select Rename, and type in
the new name. See Renaming Library
Items on page 802.
3D Backdrops
A backdrop is an image, typically of an
exterior view, that displays in the background
of 3D views to help place the model into a
realistic setting and add a sense of
perspective.
A selection of backdrop images is available
in the Library Browser. You can also create
your own backdrop images and import them
into the library. See Adding New
Backdrops on page 800.
Backdrops automatically adjust to fit each
view window, so they look best when they
are created with a height to width ratio that is
similar to the window you are working in.
Specifying a Backdrop
You can select a backdrop image for a plan
from the library in either of two ways:
In any view, select 3D> 3D View
Defaults to open the 3D View
Defaults dialog. See Backdrop Panel
on page 861.
In a 3D view, open the Library Browser.
Select a Backdrop image, then move your
mouse pointer into the view window.
Click anywhere in the view to apply the
selected backdrop.
Regardless of how it is selected, only one
backdrop can be used in a plan at any given
time. If a backdrop is not applied, Chief
Architect applies a background color.
You can specify which view types and
Rendering Techniques use the selected
backdrop in the 3D View Defaults dialog. By
default, Perspective Camera views using the
Standard, Painting, and Watercolor
Rendering Techniques use backdrops while
the other techniques and view types do not.
You can create digital photos of a build-
ing site for use as a backdrop.
The backdrop in this view includes hills and clouds
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1102 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
3D Backdrops
1103
Spherical Panoramic
Backdrops
Spherical Panoramic Backdrops are a special
type of backdrop that wraps around the
model in 3D views as though it were applied
to a sphere surrounding it. It takes an image
processing program or special camera to
generate spherical panoramic backdrops.
The Use Generated Sky option produces a
special Spherical Panoramic Backdrop that
simulates a daytime sky using the Default
Sun. It can be specified in the 3D View
Defaults dialog and uses the Sun Angle
data present in the plan. See Sun Angles and
Shadows on page 904.
Backdrop Specification Dialog
To open the Backdrop Specification
dialog, select File> Import>
Backdrop or right-click on the User Catalog
in the Library Browser and select New>
Backdrop from the contextual menu.
You can also open this dialog by right-
clicking on a backdrop image in an unlocked
library category or folder and selecting
Open from the contextual menu.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1103 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1104
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
A preview of the selected image
displays here.
Backdrop - Specify backdrops Name
and the image file associated with it.
Type a Name for the selected backdrop,
to be used in the Library Browser and 3D
View Defaults dialog.
In the Location field, type the full path-
name of the image file or click the
Browse button and browse to the file on
your computer.
The Spherical Backdrop Options
should only be used if the selected
backdrop was specially created to serve as a
spherical panoramic backdrop.
Check Spherical Panoramic Backdrop
to project the image onto a sphere that
surrounds the model in camera views and
overviews.
The Horizontal Angle controls how
many times the backdrop appears as you
rotate in a full circle around the model. A
value of 360 wraps the image around
once; a value of 720, twice; and a value
of 180 makes only half the image wrap
around the sphere.
The Vertical Angle determines how
much of the backdrop stretches up and
down. To have it stretch from the highest
point in the sky to the lowest point below
the ground, use a value of 180. To have
the backdrop stretch from just below a
horizontal render to just above, use a
smaller value, such as 100.
Some experimenting with the Angle values
may be necessary to achieve the desired
results. You may prefer to do this in the 3D
View Defaults dialog after adding the back-
drop to a plan. See Backdrop Panel on
page 861.
If the selected image has a Copyright,
information about it will display here.
Walkthroughs
A 3D Walkthrough is a series of
pictures saved as an .avi file that can
be played like a video by other applications
such as Windows Media Player.
There are two approaches to recording a
walkthrough of a plan:
Draw a path in floor plan view, then
direct the program to record a walk-
through along that path.
Create a 3D view, then begin recording
and use the Move Camera tools to navi-
gate through the view.
Create Walkthrough Path
There are several ways to record a
walkthrough along a path, but the
Create Walkthrough Path tool is the fastest
and most flexible option.
To create a Walkthrough Path
1. In floor plan view, select 3D> Walk-
throughs> Create Walkthrough
Path , then click and drag to draw a
Walkthrough Path. See To use the
Spline tool on page 1054.
1
2
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1104 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Walkthroughs
1105
2. Edit the direction and curvature of the
splines segments, as needed. See Edit-
ing Spline Based Objects on page 201.
3. Add Key Frames to the path and
modify their specifications.
4. Select the path and click the Record
Walkthrough Along Path edit but-
ton. See Record Walkthrough Along
Path on page 1106.
You can also create a walkthrough based on a
regular CAD polyline or spline by selecting
it and clicking the Record Walkthrough
Along Path edit button. This was the only
way to record a walkthrough along a path in
Chief Architect versions X1 through X4 and
does not provide as many options as using a
Walkthrough Path.
In floor plan view, you can convert a CAD
polyline or spline into a Walkthrough Path.
See Convert Polyline Dialog on page 230.
Walkthrough Paths display in floor plan view
when the Walkthrough Paths layer is
turned on. When displayed, Walkthrough
Paths display in front of other objects and
will print. They are included in views sent to
layout or exported to .dxf/.dwg. See
Layers on page 139.
Key Frames
Key Frames are points along a
Walkthrough Path that allow you to
change:
Camera direction, tilt angle, and height;
Changes in walkthrough speed;
The floor that the walkthrough is on.
These changes are applied as the camera
moves along the Walkthrough Path from one
Key Frame to another.
To add a Key Frame to a Walkthrough Path,
select the path and click the Add Key
Frame edit button. Then click on the
path to add a Key Frame at that location.
In floor plan view, each Key Frame is
represented by a camera symbol centered
along the walkthrough path. It displays the
frame number, is pointed in the direction of
its Camera Angle, and its position along the
path corresponds to the Time setting.
Key Frame positions and other properties can
be edited in the Walkthrough Path
Specification dialog. See General Panel
on page 1109.
You can also use the Edit Key Frames
edit tool to enable Move and Rotate edit
handles for each Key Frame on the selected
Walkthrough Path.
To use the Edit Key Frames edit tool
1. Select a Walkthrough Path and click the
Edit Key Frames edit tool.
2. Each Key Frame on the selected Walk-
through Path will display a Move and
Rotate edit handle.
Walkthrough Paths can follow stairs
and ramps to span multiple floors. See
Walkthrough Paths and Stairs on
page 1106.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1105 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1106
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Click and drag the square Move handle
to reposition the Key Frame along the
path.
Click and drag the rectangular Rotate
handle to change the Key Frames direc-
tion angle
3. When you are finished adjusting the Key
Frames, click the Main Edit Mode
edit tool to restore the Walkthrough
Paths normal edit handles.
Walkthrough Paths and Stairs
If you draw a Walkthrough Path up or down
a staircase or ramp, it will follow the height
of the stairs or ramp and continue on the next
floor.
To create a multiple floor walkthrough
1. Draw a Walkthrough Path so that it
extends into a staircase or ramp in the
same direction as its Direction Arrow.
See Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and
Landings on page 519.
Do not drag the Walkthrough Path
across the entire length of the stairs or
ramp. If you do, its height will remain
relative to the current floor.
2. When you release the mouse button, the
program will automatically display a
dashed line with an arrow extending past
the last Key Frame on the current floor.
If it follows stairs or a ramp going
upward, the path will also extend to the
top end of the staircase or ramp.
3. Go up or down one floor, select the
Walkthrough Path, and resize and
reshape it as needed. You can use the
Create Walkthrough Path tool to
draw more segments and additional Key
Frames can be added, as well.
Record Walkthrough Along
Path
Once a Walkthrough Path has been drawn,
you can use it to record a walkthrough video.
Before recording a walkthrough, it is a good
idea to choose a codec that will best suit your
needs. See Selecting a Codec on page
1108.
To record a walkthrough along a path
1. In floor plan view, select a Walkthrough
Path or a CAD polyline or spline.
2. Click the Record Walkthrough Along
Path edit button or select 3D>
Walkthroughs> Record Walkthrough
Along Path from the menu.
3. An Information message displays,
reminding you that while a walkthrough
is being recorded along a path, you
should avoid using your computer.
4. In the Save Video As dialog, specify a
name and saved location for your .avi
walkthrough file. See Exporting Files
on page 54.
5. In the Walkthrough Options dialog:
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1106 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Walkthroughs
1107
Specify the desired number of Frames
Per Second, between 1 and 100. A
higher number results in a higher quality
recording but also a larger .avi file.
Specify a Duration Along Path, in sec-
onds.
The Total Frames to Record displays
for reference and equals the Frames Per
Second times the Duration along Path.
Specify a Compression percentage
between 0 and 100. A value of 0 gives
the highest quality images and largest
file sizes.
From the drop-down list, select the Ren-
dering Technique you would like the
walkthrough to use. See Rendering
Techniques on page 911.
Click OK.
To cancel the recording as it is being created,
press the ESC key on your keyboard.
Frame by Frame Walkthroughs
You can also create a walkthrough by
recording it frame by frame. Although time-
consuming, creating a walkthrough in this
manner lets you see exactly what is being
recorded as you record it.
As with walkthroughs recorded along paths,
it is a good idea to select a codec that meets
your needs before recording a walkthrough
frame by frame. See Selecting a Codec on
page 1108.
To record a walkthrough frame by frame
1. Create a camera view. This view is the
first frame of the walkthrough.
2. From the view, select 3D> Walk-
throughs> Record Walkthrough .
3. Specify a location and name for the
walkthrough in the Save Video As dia-
log and click Save.
4. In the Walkthrough Options dialog:
Select a Frame Rate between 1 and
100. The value entered is the number of
frames per second.
Select a Compression Percent between
0 and 100. A value of 0 gives the highest
quality images and the largest file size.
Click OK.
5. Use the camera movement tools to cre-
ate additional views. Each time the
screen redraws, that view is recorded as
the next frame in sequence. See Editing
3D Views on page 879.
6. To move the camera without saving a
view, select 3D> Walkthroughs> Pause
Recording to temporarily stop
recording.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1107 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1108
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
You can then select 3D> Walk-
throughs> Save Frame button to
control what views are saved.
You can start recording again by select-
ing Pause Recording once more.
7. When the walkthrough sequence is com-
plete, select 3D> Walkthroughs> Stop
Recording or close the view.
If you resize the current view window while
recording a walkthrough, the program will
stop recording.
Playing a Walkthrough
Once a walkthrough has been recorded, it
can be played on any media player.
To play a walkthrough
1. Select 3D> Walkthroughs> Play
Walkthrough to open the Select
Video File dialog.
2. Browse to an .avi file on saved on your
computer. Your default video application
plays the walkthrough video.
Selecting a Codec
A codec is a a utility that compresses and
decompresses media files, and is used when
both recording and viewing .avi files such as
walkthrough videos.
You can specify which codec to use when
recording walkthroughs in the Preferences
dialog. See Render Panel on page 117.
Before recording a walkthrough, it is a good
idea to try each of the codecs installed on
your system to see how well their
walkthrough quality and file compression
meet your needs.
Walkthrough Path Specification Dialog
Select a Walkthrough Path and click
the Open Object edit button to open
the Walkthrough Path Specification dialog.
See Walkthroughs on page 1104.
Note: Zooming in and out and using the scroll
bars does not change the viewpoint and does
not produce a frame for the walkthrough.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1108 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Walkthrough Path Specification Dialog
1109
General Panel
A list of the selected paths Key
Frames displays on the left. Click on a
Frame in the list to select and edit it using the
settings on the right. When the dialog is
opened, the last key frame edited in the cur-
rent program session will be selected auto-
matically. See Key Frames on page 1105.
Specify the Floor that the selected Key
Frame is located on. See Multiple
Floors on page 417.
Specify the Time in seconds at which the
selected Key Frame is found in the dura-
tion of the walkthrough. Frame 1 is
always at 0.0 and cannot be moved; simi-
larly, the last frame is always at the end
of the walkthrough Duration.
Specify the Speed After (ft/s), which is
how fast the camera moves along the
walkthrough path from the current Key
Frame to the next. Not available if the
last Key Frame is selected.
Specify the Camera Angle at the
selected Key Frame.
Specify the Tilt Angle of the camera at
the selected Key Frame.
Specify the Height of the camera at the
selected Key Frame.
Click the Delete button to remove the
selected Key Frame from the path.
Specify the Key Frame Symbol Size,
which is the size of the symbols repre-
senting the selected walkthrough paths
Key Frames in floor plan view. See Key
Frames on page 1105.
By default, Key Frames use the Camera
Symbol Size set in the Camera Defaults
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1109 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1110
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
dialog. See Camera Defaults Dialog on
page 855.
Walkthrough Options -
Specify the Duration, or total length of
the walkthrough video in seconds.
Specify how Camera Angles are measured:
Select Relative to Path to measure each
camera angle relative to the direction of
the walkthrough path at each Key Frame
location.
Select Absolute to measure each camera
angle relative to the plans X, Y, and Z
axes. See 3D Drafting on page 29.
Specify how Camera Height is measured:
Select Relative to Floor/Terrain to mea-
sure camera height relative to the floor or
terrain at each Key Frame location.
Select Absolute to measure camera
height relative to the plans Z axis.
Polyline Panel
The Polyline panel indicates the paths
Length/Perimeter. The Area and Volume
of a walkthrough path will always be
described as Not closed. See Polyline
Panel on page 1047.
Selected Line Panel
The Selected Line panel is available when
the selected path edge is a line as opposed to
an arc. See Selected Edge on page 177.
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
end of the previous connected line, if there is
one. Similarly, moving the End of a line
segment moves move the start of the next
connected line, if there is one.
This panel is similar to the Line panel of the
Line Specification dialog. See Line Panel
on page 1034.
Selected Arc Panel
The Selected Arc panel is available when the
selected path edge is an arc as opposed to a
line. See Change Line/Arc on page 223.
This panel is similar to the Arc panel of the
Arc Specification dialog. See Arc Panel
on page 1042.
Spline Panel
The Spline panel has a single option and is
only available if the selected walkthrough
path is a spline. See Splines on page 1054.
New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
between line segments that are used to draw
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
the splines curvature smoother.
Line Style Panel
This panel is similar to the Line Style panel
in the Line Specification dialog. See Line
Style Panel on page 1035.
Note: When Relative Angles are used, a
Camera Angle of 0 points in the direction of
the walkthrough path. When Absolute Angles
are used, 0 always points in the positive
direction along the X axis.
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1110 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Creating VRML Files
1111
Creating VRML Files
VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling
Language) is a 3D file format that can
be used by various walkthrough viewers,
as well as other rendering packages.
VRML files use the .wrl file format and
contain an entire 3D model, including
lighting information. Images and textures
can also be referenced. You can post a .wrl
file and its associated image and texture files
to the web or e-mail them to a customer.
VRML files are often created from rendered
views so that lighting and textures are used;
however, you can export from a Vector View
if you wish. See Editing 3D Views on page
879.
The entire model is exported, but the starting
point for the walkthrough is defined by the
camera location at the time of export.
When a camera view or overview is active,
select File> Export> Export VRML .
The VRML Export Options dialog opens.
VRML Export Options Dialog
Define the Camera Field of View.
Standard most closely corresponds to
the default Chief Architect camera view. The
other options generate a wider field of view.
Specify how Textures/Images are
exported.
Check No Textures Exported to prevent
texture files from being exported with the
.wrl file. If textures are exported, the tex-
ture files must be in the same folder as
the .wrl file.
Check Copy Images to Export Folder if
you plan to share the VRML with others.
This copies texture bitmaps with the .wrl
file so that they render correctly when
exported.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1111 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1112
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Specify how Lighting is exported.
Turn off Ambient Lights turns off the
default lights that are used to light a
scene.
Turn off Fixture Lights turns off the
default lights that are generated for fix-
tures and used to light a scene.
Night Sky/Ground Colors darkens the
ground plane and sky to create a night-
time appearance.
Options
Walk Through Surfaces allows you to
walk through walls and closed doors
from room to room, instead of stopping
when you reach a wall.
Run Default VRML Viewer starts the
.vrml viewer and opens the new .vrml
file as soon as it is generated.
Once the general parameters have been
selected, click OK. Name the .wrl file and
save it in the desired folder and click Save.
VRML Use of Texture
and Image Files
In order for textures to be rendered correctly,
the texture and image files associated with an
exported VRML file must be in the same
directory as the .wrl file.
VRML files do not support the use of .bmp
textures or images. Instead, compressed file
formats such as .gif, .png, or .jpg files must
be used.
If you wish to use custom textures or images
in your VRML file, you have two options:
Make sure that they are saved in a format
other than .bmp before you bring import
them into Chief Architect. This is the rec-
ommended option.
Create a .gif file with the same name and
in the same directory as the .bmp file.
When you export the .wrl file, Chief
Architect automatically substitutes the
.gif for the .bmp file. Whenever possible,
you should use a supported file format
instead of using .bmp and .gif pairs.
For more information about .vrml players,
visit www.chiefarchitect.com.
It is best to keep all .vrml files in a folder
separate from your normal Chief Archi-
tect files, since all textures used in the model
also export to the same folder. This could add
a significant number of files, creating poten-
tial organization problems.
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1112 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1113
Chapt er 36:
Importing and
Exporting
Importing is the process of opening a file that
was produced in a different program in Chief
Architect. Exporting, on the other hand, is
the process of saving information in a Chief
Architect file to a format that can be read by
another program.
Chief Architect allows you to import and
export a variety of information from and to
other applications. This chapter focuses on
importing and exporting 2D .dwg/.dxf files
and a variety of 3D file formats. Other
importing and exporting options are
described in the chapters in which those
objects or settings are discussed.
Chapter Contents
DXF vs DWG File Formats
Importing 2D Drawings
Import Drawing Assistant
Export to REScheck
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files
Additional 2D Export Information
3D Data Import Requirements
Importing 3D Symbols
Symbol Categories
3D Symbols and Materials
Exporting a 3D Model
Export to REScheck
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1113 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1114
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
DXF vs DWG File Formats
.dwg is the native AutoCAD
file format.
Originally a proprietary format, it is now
widely used with many different products.
.dxf (Drawing eXchangeFormat) is a
standard file format created by Autodesk for
the transfer of data between other programs.
Many design programs can read and write
.dxf and .dwg files. Both formats interpret
data as CAD objects such as lines, polylines,
and circles. Both formats can also contain 3D
data which can be imported into Chief
Architect, as well.
Binary .dxf format is another related file
format. It is easier for computers to read, is
more accurate, and occupies less disk space
and regular .dxf files. When exporting,
however, bear in mind that not all
applications support binary .dxf.
Importing 2D Drawings
2D drawings are imported by reading entities
from a.dwg or .dxf file and creating the
equivalent CAD objects in Chief Architect.
Chief Architect X6 can import 2D .dxf or
.dwg files compatible with AutoCAD
through version 2012.
Only drawings created in AutoCAD
s
Model Space can be imported directly into
Chief Architect. Entities drawn on the first
page of Paper Space are imported as a CAD
block and can be inserted into a drawing
from the CAD Block Management dialog.
See CAD Block Management on page
1061. Entities drawn on subsequent pages of
Paper Space are not recognized.
A .dxf or .dwg file can be imported into floor
plan view, a Wall Elevation view, Cross
Section/Elevation view, or a CAD Detail.
In general, all Z coordinates are mapped to
zero. If an entity in an imported drawing has
thickness, Chief Architect ignores it.
Supported Entities
The following is a list of the entities that are
imported and how they are converted. All
other entities are ignored:
Lines - Both 2D and 3D lines.
Circles - Fully supported in 2D.
Arcs - Fully supported in 2D.
Ellipses - Fully supported in 2D.
Spline entities - Fully supported as 2D
polylines.
Polylines and Lightweight Polylines -
Polylines are imported as polylines.
Bumps are converted to arcs. Line widths
are ignored.
Lightweight Polylines - Fully supported
in 2D.
Points - Points are not supported unless
the layer they are on is converted to Ele-
vation Data. See Importing Elevation
Data on page 717.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1114 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Importing 2D Drawings
1115
Text and Multi-line Text - Both are
imported as Rich Text and mapped to the
Text layer. Multi-line text objects retain
their original width. The first font in a
multi-line text object is applied to the
entire object. If that font is unavailable,
Arial is used.
Unicode Text - Fully supported.
Blocks and Block Inserts - A block is a
named group of CAD entities that have
been joined together to behave as a single
object. A block insert is a reference to
such a block. Blocks are loaded by name.
If a duplicate name is found, you can
specify whether a block is imported under
a new name, replaces an existing block or
simply uses the existing block of the same
name.
Hatch entities - If Import Hatch entities
is selected on the Select File page of the
Import Drawing Assistant for a .dwg
file, Hatch patterns are imported as a
CAD block consisting of solid black filled
polylines.
2D Solids (Not ACIS Solids) - Fully sup-
ported in 2D.
Solids - A solid is a 3 or 4-sided filled
area. These are imported as 2D faces.
2D Solids (Not ACIS Solids)
3D Faces/Polyface Meshes - A 3D face
has its Z coordinate mapped to zero, and
imports as a polyline.
Dimensions - Rotated, aligned and 3-
point angular dimensions are supported.
All other dimension types are imported as
lines and text rather than functioning
dimensions.
CAD blocks containing dimensions as
text must be exploded before the text can
be edited separately. For more on
exploding, see CAD Blocks on page
1059.
Attributes - Attributes are text objects
associated with other items, like blocks.
These are imported as text objects at the
appropriate location but the association
with the original object is broken.
Line Styles - Line styles are not imported.
Instead, if a style of the same name dis-
plays in the Chief Architect line styles,
that line style is used. Otherwise a solid
line style is used.
Layers - You can specify which layers in
the imported drawing to import into your
Chief Architect file. You can also choose
how you wish to map drawing layers to
layers in the destination file. See Layers
on page 139.
Layers
There can be some confusion between
importing a layer and mapping a layer; the
distinction, however, is important.
You can control which objects in a drawing
are imported by choosing to import the layers
they are on.
Once you have elected to import a layer, you
can then specify how you would like to map
it in the Chief Architect drawing. You have
three options:
You can map all layers in the imported
drawing to a single Chief Architect layer.
You can map all layers in the imported
drawing to Chief Architect layers of the
same name. The program will create those
layers if they do not already exist.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1115 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1116
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
You can use Advanced Layer Mapping
to individually map each imported layer
to a Chief Architect layer.
Import Drawing Assistant
A 2D .dxf or .dwg file can be
imported into floor plan view, a Wall
Elevation view, Cross Section/Elevation
view, or a CAD Detail.
To import a 2D drawing file, open the view
in which you would like to place the drawing
and select File> Import> Drawing (DWG/
DXF) to open the welcome page of the
Import Drawing Assistant. Click Next to
continue.
You can also launch the Import Drawing
Assistant by dragging a .dxf/.dwg file from
a Windows Explorer window into the Chief
Architect window.
Select File
Click the Browse button to select the
file that you wish to import. When a file
is selected, its full pathname displays to its
left. The directory containing the last file
selected using the Import Drawing
Assistant displays here otherwise.
CAD Details are an excellent place to
import and organize CAD drawings.
See CAD Details on page 1065.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1116 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Import Drawing Assistant
1117
If you want to convert lines with shared
end points to polylines and/or boxes,
check the appropriate options. Polylines are
not affected by these settings, nor are lines
that do not share end points.
Check Polylines to import lines with
shared end points as polylines.
Check Boxes to import lines with shared
end points that form a closed rectangular
shape as boxes.
Specify how to treat CAD blocks
associated with the selected drawing.
Select Import all CAD blocks to include
all CAD blocks associated with the file
being imported whether or not they are in
use. See CAD Block Management on
page 1061.
Select Only import CAD blocks if they
are referenced in the drawing to reduce
the volume of transferred data.
Check Import Hatch entities to import
areas of hatching as solid-filled
polylines.
Click Next to load the file into memory so
that Chief Architect can present information
about the contents of the file. This can take a
while for larger files.
Select Layers
A list of the layers found in the
imported file and information about
each layer displays in this table. See
Layers on page 1115.
In the Layer column, check the box to the
left of each layer name to specify which
layers you want to import. Layers with
checked boxes are imported; those with
unchecked boxes are not.
2
3
4
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1117 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1118
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Layers that were Visible in the original
program are checked by default. You can
include a layer that is not visible by
checking the box to the left of its name.
Layers that were Frozen in the original
program are not checked by default. You
can include a frozen layer by checking the
box to its left.
If a layer is set to Convert To a Terrain
Perimeter or Elevation Data, it will be
indicated in this column provided that you
are importing into floor plan view.
Click Select All to check the box to the
left of all layer names in the table. Click
Clear All to clear the checkbox to the left of
all layer names in the table.
The Convert To drop-down list allows
you convert the data on any layer into a
Terrain Perimeter or Elevation Data. See
Terrain Perimeter on page 688 and
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data on
page 724. Only available when importing
into floor plan view.
To convert a layer to a Terrain Perimter or
Terrain Data, click on its name in the table
and then select an option from the Convert
To drop-down list. The option you choose
will then display in the Convert To column
in the table.
Layer Mapping
The Layer Mapping page lets you control
how layers in the imported drawing are
mapped into the destination file.
The simplest option is select A single
layer in Chief Architect and assign all
objects in the imported drawing to that layer.
Original layer attributes are lost, but line
2
Note: if an open polyline is converted into a
Terrain Perimeter, the program will draw an
additional edge to close the gap.
3
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1118 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Import Drawing Assistant
1119
color, style, and weight are preserved on a
per object basis.
Select a layer from the drop-down list or
click the Define button to open the Layer
Display Options dialog and specify a
layer and its properties. See Layer Dis-
play Options Dialog on page 144.
The second option is to map the layers
in the drawing to Chief Architect
layers by name. Layers are created in the
destination file with the same names as those
listed on the Select Layers window of the
Import Drawing Assistant, and the imported
CAD objects are placed on those layers.
In combination with the second alterna-
tive, you may choose to import all attri-
butes for each layer into the current Layer
Set, or import no attributes at all.
The third option is to map each layer
individually with complete control of
all layer mapping options. Selecting the third
option opens the Advanced Layer Mapping
page.
Advanced Layer Mapping
If you select the Advanced Layer Mapping
option, the Advanced Layer Mapping page
displays, allowing you complete control of
how all imported layers are mapped.
A list of the layers found in the
imported file and the layers in Chief
Architect that they are mapped to display in
this table.
The original name of each DWG/DXF
Layer is found in the first column.
2
3
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1119 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1120
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
The name of the Chief Layer that each
imported layer is mapped to is listed in
the second column. The initial Chief
Layer selections depend on which option
was selected on the Layer Mapping page.
If a Chief Layer does not already exist in
the destination plan or layout file, it will
be listed as New in the third column.
When a row in the table above is
selected, the Chief Layer options
become active. Select multiple entries by
holding down the Shift key
If the layer in the selected row is mapped
to an existing Chief layer, it will display
in the drop-down; if not, the drop-down
will be blank.
Select a layer already present in the desti-
nation plan or layout file from the drop-
down list.
Click the Browse button to open the
Layer Display Options dialog. See
Layer Display Options Dialog on page
144.
Click Next to continue.
Duplicate CAD Blocks
If one or more CAD blocks in the imported
file have the same name as a CAD block in
the destination plan or layout, the Duplicate
CAD Blocks page will display. See CAD
Blocks on page 1059.
There are four options. The first three apply
to all duplicate CAD blocks in the plan.
The first choice is to have the program
automatically generate unique names for
each duplicate. For instance, if the origi-
nal files name is blockname, the pro-
gram gives the new block a name like
blockname_Copy_1.
The second option is to replace the block
already in the plan with the duplicate
being imported. This option is not recom-
mended, as every instance of the CAD
block in the plan will be replaced.
The third is to keep the block that already
exists in the plan and discard the duplicate
being imported.
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1120 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Import Drawing Assistant
1121
Select the fourth option to open the
Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks page
and manage each duplicate individually.
Click Next to continue.
Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks
If you chose the fourth option on the
Duplicate CAD Block page, the Advanced
Duplicate CAD Block page displays,
allowing you to manage each duplicate CAD
block individually.
Click on a CAD block name in the list of
Duplicate Names. Select multiple names by
holding down the Shift key.
Click one of the three active buttons in the
center of the dialog to specify how the
selected block(s) are to be treated.
Click Auto Name to have the program
automatically generate a unique name for
the selected CAD block. The duplicates
name is the same as the original with
_Copy appended to the end.
Click Replace to replace the existing
CAD block in the destination file with the
CAD block listed here. This option is not
recommended, as all instances of the
CAD block are replaced.
Click Use Existing to keep the CAD
block already in the destination file and
discard the CAD block listed here.
Review your choices in the tables at the
right.
To remove a CAD block from a field on
the right, select it and click the Remove
button.
Click Next to continue.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1121 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1122
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Drawing Unit
Select a unit of measurement from the
drop-down list. Selecting the correct
unit helps ensure that your imported drawing
is accurately sized.
If the file being imported was drawn at a
scale other than 1:1, you can compensate for
this scaling by creating a custom unit of
measurement and specifying it here. See
Unit Conversions Panel on page 99.
Specify how dimensions are imported.
Select Import as dimensions where pos-
sible to import dimensions as Chief
Architect-supported dimension lines.
Select Import as CAD blocks to import
dimensions as CAD entities that are not
recognized by Chief Architect as dimen-
sions.
Check Move drawing to the origin in
Chief Architect to place the drawing at
0,0. When unchecked, it is imported to the
same location as it was drawn in the original
application. See 3D Drafting on page 29.
Import Complete
When a .dxf/.dwg file is imported into Chief
Architect, all of its components are selected
as a group. The selection set has Move and
Rotate edit handles available for relocating
the entire drawing, as well as a variety of edit
tools. Once another object or tool is selected,
the drawing components are no longer
group-selected.
If you do not see your imported drawing,
select Window> Fill Window , as it may
have been placed at a location not currently
Note: During the import process, Chief Archi-
tect defaults to inches or millimeters. If you
are importing a site plan or topo prepared by
a surveyor, or if you are importing a metric
drawing into an imperial plan (or vice versa),
you may need to change units.
1
2
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1122 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Import Room Planner File
1123
visible on screen. When the drawing can be
seen, move your mouse pointer over it and
note its coordinates in the Status Bar. If any
coordinate value has more than six digits, use
the Transform/Replicate Object edit
button to move it closer to the origin. See
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog on
page 233.
Imported CAD objects can be selected and
edited just like objects that were drawn in the
program. See Editing Objects on page 171.
Import Room Planner File
Select File> Import> Import Room
Planner File, then log in to your
account on the Chief Architect web site to
select and download a Room Planner 2.0 file
from the cloud.
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files
Line-based 2D files can be exported from
Chief Architect in both .dxf and .dwg file
formats. You can specify the version of
AutoCAD
and many
other CAD programs.
When exporting a layout page, it is often
best to uncheck this box.
Check Export Pattern Lines to export
pattern lines. Pattern lines are exported as
normal CAD lines.
Check Export Filled Areas to export
filled areas as AutoCAD
2D solid enti-
ties.
Check Export AutoCAD
Index Col-
ors to automatically map all colors used
in the drawing to the closest 256 Auto-
CAD
s Model Space.
Supported Entities
The following entity types are currently
supported for 2D export:
Line - The simplest entity. In AutoCAD
,
lines are 3 dimensional with the Z coordinate
set to zero.
Arc - Arcs have a start angle, end angle and
radius.
Circle - Fully Supported.
Multi Line Text - If exporting to an
AutoCAD
.
Block Insert - A block insert is a reference
to a block, which is a named collection of
entities. A block can also contain block
inserts.
Dimensions
Aligned, rotated, and angular dimensions can
all be exported. CAD blocks containing
dimensions as text must be exploded before
the text can be edited separately. See CAD
Blocks on page 1059.
Dimensions with text added using the Add
Additional Text tool are not supported
when exported to .dxf/.dwg. When exported,
they are converted to text and CAD lines.
See Add Additional Text on page 971.
Each dimension has an associated block
containing a representation of the dimension
as it is drawn in Chief Architect. It also
contains all the data to recreate that
information.
When an exported dimension is modified
in AutoCAD
documentation
for more information.
Line Types
A line type, or line style, is used by layers
and entities to determine how lines are
drawn. Chief Architect line types installed
with the program are supported on export;
custom, user-created line styles, however, are
not. See Line Styles on page 1056.
Layers
Layers in other systems are similar to Chief
Architect layers, but there are some subtle
differences. Layer information is mapped as
follows:
Note: Uncheck Use Associative Dimensions
in the Export Drawing File dialog if the CAD
program you are using does not support
AutoCAD
Color. Chief
Architect uses the default Auto-
CAD
, line
weights are determined by a
table of mm line widths. Chief
Architect maps to the closest
match in the default line weight
table based the current views
Line Weight Scale. See Drawing
Sheet Setup Dialog on page
1164.
Style Line type
Lock Lock
Chief Architect is not able to provide
support for any third party software.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1127 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1128
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
more information about defining the ori-
gin, see Symbol Origin on page 1153.
If a symbol with faces that have more
than four vertices is imported, the faces
are truncated, resulting in an object that
appears to have holes. The best remedy is
to re-export the model from the original
application using only triangular or quad-
rilateral faces.
Chief Architect does not support grouped
objects in symbols imported from .3ds
files.
Surface Normals
If you use third party software to create a
.dxf /.dwg/.obj/.3ds./skp files that will be
imported as a symbol, you should be familiar
with the concept of surface normals.
If you use third party software to create a
.dxf/.dwg/.obj/.3ds./skp file that will be
imported as a symbol, you should be familiar
with the concept of surface normals.
A surface normal is a vector that is
perpendicular to the plane of a surface. This
vector points in one direction, determined by
the way the face is drawn.
If a face is drawn clockwise, the surface
normals are directed outward; if a face is
drawn counter-clockwise, the surface
normals point inward. Chief Architect
assumes that the face on the positive side of
the normal vector is the outside face.
Many objects can be drawn using only one
side of each face. A cube is a good example:
the inside of a cube is not visible, so it is not
necessary to create its inside faces. When
inside faces are not calculated, 3D views in
Chief Architect can generate more quickly.
Importing 3D Symbols
Chief Architect supports the import of
3D surface and 3D solid objects saved
in .dwg, .dxf, .3ds, .obj, .stl, .dae, and .skp
formats.
For most file types, there are two ways to
import a 3D symbol into Chief Architect:
By dragging and dropping the file from
Windows Explorer into floor plan view.
Using the Import 3D Symbol tool.
3D .dxf/.dwg files can only be imported by
selecting File> Import> Import 3D
Symbol .
Symbols imported by clicking and dragging
are imported for use in the current plan,
while those imported using the Import 3D
Symbol dialog can also be saved in the
library. See The Library on page 789.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1128 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Importing 3D Symbols
1129
To drag and drop a 3D symbol
1. Open the plan in which you would like
to import a 3D symbol and remain in
floor plan view.
2. Open a Windows Explorer window in
front of the Chief Architect program
window.
3. If the Explorer window fills your screen,
click the Restore Down button at the top
right and resize the window so that the
Chief Architect program window can be
seen behind it.
4. Click on the desired .3ds, .obj .stl, .dae,
or .skp file and drag it into the Chief
Architect program window.
5. When your cursor changes to a +, click
in the drawing area to place as many
copies of the symbol as desired. When
you are finished, select a different tool.
Symbols imported by clicking and dragging
are imported as generic stand-alone interior
fixtures. If you wish to assign different
characteristics to a symbol, use the Import
3D Symbol dialog to import it.
Importing Multiple Symbols
More than one symbol can be imported into
the Chief Architect library at a time provided
that the following requirements are met:
The symbols are located in the same
folder on your computer.
Multiple symbols can only be imported
using the Import 3D Symbol dialog. If
you try to drag and drop group-selected
files in Windows Explorer, only the file
that was selected first is imported.
When imported as a group, symbols must
be assigned to the same symbol category.
If you wish to assign them to different
categories, they must be imported sepa-
rately.
Symbols that are imported as a group are
assigned names based on their original file
names with the file extension omitted.
Import 3D Symbol Dialog
Select File> Import> 3D Symbol to
open the Import 3D Symbol dialog.
The Import 3D Symbol File dialog is a
typical Open File dialog in which multiple
files can be group-selected for import. See
Importing Files on page 59.
The Import 3D Symbol dialog, which opens
next, allows you to specify additional
information about the symbol.
Note: The .skp file format does not currently
offer support for 64-bit applications. As a
result, .skp files cannot be imported into the
64-bit version of Chief Architect.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1129 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1130
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
The Files Selected for Import display
here for reference.
Choose a symbol Category from the
drop-down list. The category affects how
and where the symbol can be used, and
cannot be changed after it is imported.
Check Add Symbol to Library to save
the symbol in the User Catalog. This is
always checked when multiple symbols
files are selected. See Add to Library on
page 799.
Check Show Advanced Options to open
the symbols specification dialog. See
Symbol Specification Dialog on page
1139.
Click OK to import the symbol, then click
in floor plan view to place the symbol at
that location. Continue clicking to place
as many copies of the symbol as needed.
Select another tool when finished.
Note: If you import a .obj, .3ds or .skp file
with textures that are already present in your
library, the Texture Filename Conflict
dialog opens. See Texture Filename
Conflict on page 1133.
Symbol Categories
The category that you assign to a symbol will
influence how the symbol can be placed in a
plan and how it will appear in the Materials
List and in schedules. See Materials Lists
on page 1225 and Schedules and Object
Labels on page 1211.
Category Placement Schedules and Materials Lists
Cabinet Can only be placed as a free-standing
object. See Cabinets on page 649.
Listed in Cabinets category of Materials
Lists; can be included in Cabinet Sched-
ules.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1130 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Symbol Categories
1131
Cabinet
Door/Drawer
Can be assigned to a cabinet or free-
standing. See Cabinets on page
649.
When free-standing, listed in Cabinets
category of Materials Lists. When
assigned to a cabinet, listed as a compo-
nent of the cabinet in Materials Lists and
Cabinet Schedules.
Door Can only be placed in a wall or
assigned to a doorway. See Doors
on page 347.
Listed in Doors category of Materials
Lists; can be included in Door Schedules.
Doorway Can only be placed in a wall. See
Doorways on page 349.
Listed in Doors category of Materials
Lists; can be included in Door Schedules.
Electrical Can be specified as a variety of free-
standing electrical items and may be
ceiling-, floor-, wall- or cabinet-
mounted. See Electrical on page
613.
Listed in Electrical category of Materials
Lists; can be included in Electrical
Schedules.
Fixture
(Exterior)
Exterior Fixtures can act as plumbing
items or appliances and have many
different options. They may be free-
standing, inserted into a cabinet,
mounted on the ceiling, a wall, under
a cabinet or on a roof.
Listed in Fixtures category of Materials
Lists; can be included in Fixture Sched-
ules.
Fixture
(Interior)
Interior Fixtures can act as plumbing
items or appliances and, like Exterior
Fixtures, have many different options.
Listed in Fixtures category of Materials
Lists; can be included in Fixture Sched-
ules.
Furnishings
(Exterior)
Can only be placed as a free-standing
object but can be ceiling-, floor- or
roof-mounted.
Listed in Furniture category of Materials
Lists; can be included in Furniture Sched-
ules.
Furnishings
(Interior)
Can only be placed as a free-standing
object but can be ceiling-, floor- or
roof-mounted.
Listed in Furniture category of Materials
Lists; can be included in Furniture Sched-
ules.
Geometric
Shapes
Can only be placed as free-standing
object. See General Shapes on
page 753.
Listed in General category of Materials
Lists.
Hardware Can be specified as a hinge, handle
or lock and assigned to a cabinet, to a
door, or free-standing.
Listed as a component of the object it is
assigned to in Materials Lists or in Hard-
ware category when free-standing; can
be included in schedules as a component
of the object it is assigned to.
Millwork Can be free-standing or assigned to
an object such as a railing or cabinet.
See Millwork on page 633.
Listed in Exterior Trim, Interior Trim, or
Fixtures category of Materials Lists. May
be included in Fixtures Schedules.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1131 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1132
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
3D Symbols and Materials
When a symbol is imported into Chief
Architect, material definitions may be
included with it. Whether and how material
information is included depends on the
symbols file format. See About Materials
on page 818.
DXF/DWG and STL Files
.dxf/.dwg and .stl files do not include
information about material definitions. If the
.dxf/.dwg or .stl file associated with a
symbol is changed, all previously specified
material information for the symbol will be
lost.
All layers, layer names, solids and instances
of blocked solids from the .dxf/.dwg or .stl
file display in the list on the left side of the
Materials panel of its specification dialog.
OBJ Files
Material definitions for most .obj files are
saved in a separate file with the .mtl file
extension. If such a file exists, the materials
associated with the .obj file display in the list
on the left side of the Materials panel of its
specification dialog.
If Chief Architect does not receive material
definition information in an accompanying
.mtl file, default material properties are
assigned.
Material definitions for .obj files can also
include texture information in the form of
image files (.jpg, .png, etc).
In order to properly import an .obj file, Chief
Architect needs the .obj file, the .mtl file,
and any referenced texture files. If a texture
file is not available, the material it is
associated with is created without a texture.
The material definitions associated with an
imported .obj symbol are not available for
use by other objects in Chief Architect until
that symbol has been placed into a plan. The
associated texture files are then copied to the
users Textures folder. See Chief Architect
Data on page 49.
3DS and DAE Files
Material definitions for .3ds and .dae files
refer to texture information in separate image
files.
Molding Can only be assigned to a room, cabi-
net, countertop or molding polyline.
See Trim and Molding on page 627.
Listed in Exterior Trim or Interior Trim cat-
egory of Materials Lists.
Plant Can only be placed as a free-standing
object. See Plant Tools on page 769.
Listed in Landscaping category of Materi-
als Lists; can be included in Plant Sched-
ules.
Sprinkler Can only be placed as a free-standing
object. See Sprinkler Tools on page
777.
Listed in Landscaping category of Materi-
als Lists.
Window Can only be placed in a wall. See
Windows on page 375.
Listed in Windows category of Materials
Lists; can be included in Window Sched-
ules.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1132 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Exporting a 3D Model
1133
In order to properly import a .3ds and .dae
file, Chief Architect needs these referenced
image files. If a texture file is not available,
the material it is associated with will be
created without it. The associated texture
files are copied to the users Textures folder.
SKP Files
The textures associated with a .skp file are
saved in the file. After you import a symbol
and either place it in a plan or add it to the
Library, these textures are saved in the Chief
Architect Textures folder.
Chief Architect does not support deformed
textures. If a texture associated with a .skp
file is deformed, it will be imported without
the deformations.
Texture Filename Conflict
If a texture of the same name already exists
in the plan when an .obj, .3ds or .skp file is
imported, the Texture Filename Conflict
dialog displays.
Select Rename the imported texture,
then click the Browse button to create a
copy of the textures image file with a
new name that you specify.
Select Use the existing texture instead
of the imported texture to keep the
existing texture.
Select Replace the existing texture with
the imported texture to replace the tex-
ture already present in the plan with the
new, imported one.
Check Do this for all remaining textures
in this object to use the same selection
for all textures with filename conflicts
associated with this symbol.
Exporting a 3D Model
The entire 3D model, or any part of it that
you choose, can be exported from Chief
Architect into one of four different formats:
3DS Format
DAE Format
STL Format
DXF/DWG Format
To export the 3D model
1. A camera view or overview must be
active. See Types of 3D Views on
page 854.
2. Make sure that everything that you want
to export is set to display in the current
view, and everything you do not want to
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1133 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1134
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
export is not set to display. See Layers
on page 139.
Any surfaces removed using the Delete
Surfaces tool will not be exported.
See Displaying 3D Views on page
871.
3. When the model is ready, select File>
Export and choose the format that you
want to use.
4. Give the file a name, making sure to
save it in the desired location. See
Exporting Files on page 54.
3DS Format
A .3ds file can be opened by any
program that uses 3D Studio
s .3ds
format. When the model is ready, select
File> Export> 3D Model (3DS) to export to
this format.
The Export 3D Studio (3DS) Mesh dialog
opens:
Check Truncate Texture Names to 8.3
format to truncate material and object
names to an eight character file name with
a three character extension. This allows
import into applications that support only
legacy .3ds files.
The Export 3D Studio
s
.dae format. When the model is ready, select
File> Export> 3D (COLLADA) Model to
export to this format.
The Export COLLADA Model dialog is a
typical File Save dialog.
Any material textures used in the model are
saved as image files in a folder in the same
location as the saved .dae file. The folder has
the same name as the .dae file, appended
with _textures.
STL Format
An .stl file can be opened by any
program that uses Stereolithography
format, and can be printed using a
stereolithography machine, or 3D printer.
When the model is ready, select File>
Export> 3D Model (StL).
The Export StL Model dialog is a typical
File Save dialog.
A 3D model exported to .StL format does not
include any material or texture information.
DXF/DWG Format
A .dxf or .dwg file can be opened by
any program that uses AutoCAD
s
3D .dxf or .dwg format. When the model is
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1134 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Exporting a 3D Model
1135
ready, select File> Export> 3D Model
(DWG/DXF) to export to this format.
The entire 3D model, including geometry, is
exported, with all surfaces exported as
3DFACE entities.
3D DXF/DWG Layer Names
When you export a 3D model to .dxf/.dwg
format, all surfaces are exported as 3DFACE
entities. Each entity represents a surface in
the 3D model. The entities are placed on
layers that are named by Chief Architect:
A 3D model exported to .dxf/.dwg does
not include any material or texture infor-
mation.
AutoCAD
Layer Name
Chief Architect
Surface / Object
A-APPL-MAIN Appliance
A-CASE-CABF Cabinet Door
A-CASE-CABN Cabinet Box
A-CASE-CNTR Cabinet Counter Top
A-CASE-GLAS Cabinet Glass
A-CASE-SOFF Soffit
A-CASE-TOEA Cabinet Toe Area
A-CEIL-BAY Bay / Bow Window
Ceiling
A-CEIL-MAIN Platform Ceiling
A-CEIL-SLOP Roof Ceiling
A-DOOR-STND Door
A-EQPM-DOOR Window Hardware
A-EQPM-HDWR Cabinet Hardware
A-FIXT-GLAS Fixture Glass
A-FIXT-MAIN Fixture
A-FLOR-BAY Bay / Bow Window
Floor
A-FLOR-MAIN Platform Floor
A-FOOT-FOOT Footing Top
A-FRAM-CEIL Ceiling Framing
A-FRAM-DECK Deck Framing
A-FRAM-GENL Framing
A-FRAM-J OIS Floor Framing
A-FRAM-ROOF Roof Framing
A-FRAM-TRUS Truss Framing
A-FRAM-WALL Wall Framing
A-FURN-MAIN Furniture
A-GLAZ-DOOR Door Glass
A-GLAZ-WIND Window
A-HRAL-BAL Stair Baluster
A-HRAL-BLST Railing Baluster
A-HRAL-NWEL Newel
A-HRAL-RAIL Handrail
A-CASE-CABD Cabinet Drawer
A-MASN-FIRE Fireplace
A-NONE-NONE Miscellaneous
A-PLAT-RIM Platform Rim
A-RISR-MAIN Stair Riser
A-ROOF-EAVE Roof Soffit
A-ROOF-FASC Roof Fascia
A-ROOF-MAIN Roof
A-STRS-RUNR Stair Runner
A-STRS-TRED Stair Tread
A-STRS-UNDR Stair Bottom
A-WALL-BAY Bay / Bow Window
Wall
A-WALL-EXTW Corner Board
A-WALL-MAIN Wall
A-WALL-PAPE Wallcovering
A-WALL-PONY Pony Wall
A-WDWK-EXTR Exterior Door / Window
Trim
A-WDWK-EXTTRIM Exterior Sash
A-WDWK-MOLD Molding
A-WDWK-SHLF Shelf
A-WDWK-TRIM Interior Door / Window
Trim
C-PROP-CURB Curb
C-PROP-ROAD Road
C-PROP-TERA Terrain
C-PROP-TRFE Terrain Feature
C-PROP-TRSK Terrain Skirt
E-ELEC-TRIM Electrical
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1135 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1136
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
DXF Codes
Each exported layer name can include a DXF
Code for the materials applied to objects on
that layer. If a material has been specified for
an object and appears on its surface, the DXF
code for the material is included in the layer
name.
DXF Codes are specified for each material in
thePlan Materials dialog. See Plan
Materials Dialog on page 830.
Export to REScheck
REScheck
is a residential energy
code compliance program offered by
the U.S. Department of Energy that evaluates
the thermal envelope of a structure and
determines how well it meets various energy
codes. For more information, visit:
http://www.energycodes.gov/rescheck.
To export a plans thermal envelope
information for use in REScheck
, select
File> Export> Export to REScheck .
Chief Architect exports using the .rxl file
format, which can be used by both the
desktop and web-based versions of
REScheck
.
Exported Project Data
Chief Architect can export the following
REScheck Project data:
Front Faces - The side of the house that
faces down on-screen is considered the
front, and North is considered up on-
screen unless a North Pointer is used. See
North Pointer on page 905.
The Conditioned Floor Area is calcu-
lated and exported by Chief Architect.
See Conditioned Area Totals on page
1240.
The Owner/Agent information is drawn
from the plan files Client Information.
See Client Information on page 1075.
The Designer Contractor information is
drawn from the plan files Designer Infor-
mation. See Designer Information on
page 1075.
In a REScheck report exported from Chief
Architect, the Project Type is set as New
Construction and 1-and-2 Family,
Detached is selected under Building
Characteristics. Location and Title/Site/
Permit are not exportable
Exported Envelope Data
Nearly all REScheck Envelope data can be
exported from a Chief Architect plan:
Floors - The Assembly type, Gross Area,
and Cavity and Continuous R-Values are
exported. See Floor and Ceiling Platform
Definitions on page 330.
Slabs on Grade - The Slab Perimeter and
Continuous R-Value are exported. Slab
Depth of Insulation is not included and
must be entered manually. See Founda-
tions on page 429.
Ceilings - The Assembly type, Gross
Area, and Cavity and Continuous R-Val-
ues are exported.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1136 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Export to REScheck
1137
Walls - The Assembly type, Orientation,
Gross Area, and Cavity and Continuous
R-Values are exported. All are exported as
Walls rather than Basement or Crawl
Walls. Like walls on the same floor are
grouped by orientation. See Wall Type
Definitions Dialog on page 291.
Doors and Windows - The Assembly
type, Orientation, Gross Area, U-Factor,
and Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC)
are exported. See Energy Values Panel
on page 373.
Information about skylights and mulled units
is not exported.
Export to REScheck Dialog
Uncheck Group Similar Walls to treat
walls on multiple floors separately. When
checked, walls with the same properties
and orientation are added together and
treated as one wall, regardless of the
floors they are on.
Uncheck Group Similar Doors/Win-
dows to treat all doors and windows sepa-
rately. When checked, doors and windows
with the same properties and orientation
are added together and treated as one item
Click the Export button to open the Export
REScheck File dialog, which is a typical
Save File dialog. See Exporting Files on
page 54.
Note: The On Center Spacing of Framed
walls is derived from the framing material
assigned to the wall types Main Layer. See
Material Types on page 827.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1137 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1138
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1138 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1139
Chapt er 37:
Cust om Symbol s
Chief Architect provides a complete set of
architectural tools for highly customized
design, as well as the vast selection of
objects in the Library Browser that can be
used to add more detail to a plan.
In addition, if you dont find precisely what
you need, you can either import symbols
from third party sources or create your own
symbols in Chief Architect. See Importing
3D Symbols on page 1128.
Custom symbols can also be edited and
added to the library. See The Library on
page 789.
Chapter Contents
Symbol Specification Dialog
Get Last Symbol
Convert to Symbol
Editing Custom Symbols
Symbol Specification Dialog
The Symbol Specification dialog
allows you to specify the attributes of
a symbol before it is imported, as well as to
edit existing symbols in either a plan or the
Library Browser.
This dialog can be accessed in several ways:
Select a symbol and click the Open Sym-
bol edit button. Only the selected
symbol is affected by any changes that
you make: other instances of the symbol
in plans are not affected, nor is the sym-
bol saved in the library. Cabinet symbols
cannot be edited in this manner.
Right-click on a symbol in the library and
select Edit> Open. Editing a symbol in
the library changes this original symbol
and all future instances of it, but not any
symbols already placed in a plan. Cabinet
symbols cannot be edited in this manner.
See In the Specification Dialog on page
812.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1139 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1140
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Check Show Advanced Options in the
Import 3D Symbol dialog. Editing a
symbol as it is imported determines the
initial attributes that it will have once
brought into a plan or saved in the library.
See Importing 3D Symbols on page
1128.
Check Show Advanced Options in the
Convert to Symbol dialog. See Convert
to Symbol on page 1152.
3D Panel
The options on the 3D panel primarily affect
the symbols appearance in 3D views.
Specify how the symbols Name should
appear in its object specification dialog,
its label, in the Materials List, and in
schedules. See Materials Lists on page
1225.
Enter a Symbol Name. When imported
into the program, a 3D symbol is given
the same name as its file name. Not avail-
able when multiple symbols are selected.
See Importing 3D Symbols on page
1128.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1140 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Symbol Specification Dialog
1141
Select a Display Size format from the
drop-down list to append the name of the
symbol with size information.
3D Geometry -
The pathname of the file associated with
the selected symbol displays here for ref-
erence. If muliple symbols are being
imported, only one file displays.
Click the Replace Geometry button to
choose a file to associate with the
selected symbol. Not available when a
symbol is being imported or converted.
Select the Drawing Unit that was used to
create the symbol. If any units other than
inches or mm are selected, the program
will convert the data into units appropri-
ate for Chief Architect. Not available
when a symbol is being or converted. To
apply a change to this setting, you must
also click the Browse button and reload
the symbol data from the original file.
Specify how the selected symbols 3D
Faces are generated.
The Number Of Faces that a selected
symbol has displays here for reference.
When multiple symbols are being
imported, nothing displays. Although
there is no limit to the number of faces,
large numbers can increase rendering
time significantly.
Specify the Smoothing Angle, which
determines whether two adjacent surfaces
are shown with a smooth or sharp angle
between them in rendered views. If the
angle between two surface normals is less
than this angle, normal averaging is used
to give the effect of a curved surface.
This value also effects the generation of
automatic edge lines.
A good example is a hexagonal cylinder.
The angle between adjacent surfaces is
360/8, or 45. If you want it to look cylin-
drical, set the Surface Smoothing Angle
to something greater than 45. If you
want to make the cylinder look hexago-
nal, set it to less than 45.
Automatic Edge Lines is checked by
default so the program can choose an
appropriate Smoothing Angle for legacy
symbols migrated into version X6. It
applies specifically to legacy symbols as
they are brought into the program and in
most cases, should remain checked.
Chief Architect assumes that faces in an
imported model are drawn counterclock-
wise and automatically reverses them to
clockwise on import. If the model is
already clockwise, check Reverse Sur-
face Direction to keep that orientation.
Chief Architect always imports the front
side of faces in .skp files; however, it
does not support faces with different tex-
tures on the front and back and will
import the back side as a separate face.
Check Draw Self Intersection Lines to
display lines where parts of the selected
symbol are drawn in such a manner that
they occupy the same 3D space as other
parts of the same symbol. In most cases,
this box should be unchecked.
Note: SKP files are always imported using
inches, regardless of the default units used in
the plan file.
2
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1141 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1142
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Check Cull Layered Transparent Sur-
faces to if you need to troubleshoot the
appearance of a transparent symbol. Gen-
erally, this box should be left unchecked.
Check Specify Origin to specify how
the selected symbol is positioned when
placed in a Chief Architect plan. Specifying
a particular origin is helpful if the selected
symbol will be inserted into another object,
such as a sink to be placed in a cabinet. See
Symbol Origin on page 1153.
There are three options:
Leave this box unchecked to accept Chief
Architects default origins for the sym-
bol. Checking this box and entering 0 in
the X, Y, and Z fields produces the same
results. For most symbols, this is the
appropriate option.
Check this box and enter new values to
manually adjust the origin. The values in
the X, Y, and Z fields represent the offset
of the symbols origin point from the
default Chief Architect origin. This
option is appropriate for symbols that
will be placed within other objects.
Check this box and leave the X, Y, and Z
values unchanged to use the origin point
from the original .dxf/.dwg/.obj/.3ds/
.skp file. The values in the X, Y, and Z
fields represent the difference between
the default Chief Architect origin for that
type of symbol and the origin from the
original .dxf/.dwg/.obj/3ds file.
Rotation - These settings allow you to
rotate the selected symbol(s) about the
X, Y, and Z axes.
Select they X, Y, or Z Axis.
Specify the number of Degrees to rotate
the symbol in the text field. 90 is set by
default.
Click the Rotate + or Rotate - button to
rotate the object around the selected axis
in a clockwise or counterclockwise direc-
tion, respectively.
A preview of the symbols appearance
displays here and updates as changes
are made to the settings in this dialog. When
multiple symbols are selected, the most
recently selected symbol displays.
2D Block Panel
The 2D Block panel allows you to select a
2D CAD block to represent the selected
symbol in floor plan view. See CAD
Blocks on page 1059.
This panel is not available for Doors,
Doorways, and Cabinet Doors, nor is it
available when multiple symbols are being
imported.
4
If changes are made to an existing sym-
bol in a plan or the Library Browser, you
may also want to generate a new 2D Block to
represent it in floor plan view.
5
6
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1142 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Symbol Specification Dialog
1143
Selected CAD Block -
The CAD block associated with the
selected symbol is selected in the list of
Available CAD Blocks and displays in
the preview.
The CAD block name of an imported
symbol will be based on the symbols
original file name. See Importing 3D
Symbols on page 1128.
You can select a different CAD block
from the list if you wish.
Click the Generate Block button to auto-
matically generate a CAD block based on
an overhead projection of the selected
symbol and add it to the list.
Enter a Rotation Angle to rotate the 2D
CAD block from its original angle of 0.
The orientation of the 2D CAD block in
floor plan view does not affect the sym-
bols orientation in 3D views.
Specify the selected symbols Fill
Color.
Click the Color bar to select a fill color
for the 2D block. See Color Chooser/
Select Color Dialog on page 843.
Check No Fill (Transparent) to have the
2D background be transparent.
1
If you do not see a CAD block in this list
that suits your needs, you can create
your own. See Custom 2D Symbols on
page 1061.
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1143 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1144
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Check Use Original Plan Colors to
make the symbols fill color white.
A preview of the selected CAD Block
displays here.
Options Panel
The settings on the Options panel affect how
a symbol behaves and can be placed.
The options that display in this window vary,
depending on the type of symbol selected. A
complete list of the options available for
different types of symbols is available in the
Help in the program. See TODO.
Specify the selected symbols Height Off
Floor, which serves as its default Floor to
Bottom value in its specification dialog
and is dynamically linked to that setting.
See Symbol Object Specification Dia-
logs on page 813.
Select a Type of Object from the drop-
down list. Available for doorway, cabinet
door/drawer, fixture, furniture and win-
dow symbols.
A variety of checkboxes may be available
in the white Options field, depending on
the selected symbols Category and Type.
For more information, refer to the Help
in the program.
Click the Components button to open the
Components dialog. Not available for
symbols in the process of being imported
or converted. See Components Dialog
on page 1243.
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1144 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Symbol Specification Dialog
1145
The Default Light Offset field is only
available only for electrical symbols in
the process of being imported or con-
verted, and is enabled when the Light
option is checked. Enter a distance to off-
set the light source from the symbols ori-
gin. The Light Offset for an existing
symbol can be specified in its Electrical
Service Specification dialog. See Light
Data Panel on page 904.
Available Options
The following table lists each of the options
that are available and how this option affects
the behavior of the symbol:
Option Categories Effect on Symbol
110 / 220 Volts Electrical If a 110V or 220V outlet is on a wall, Auto Place
Outlets does not place an outlet in that area.
3-Way Electrical Electrical symbol is a 3-way switch.
4-Way Electrical symbol is a 4-way switch.
Treat as Appliance
in Fixture Schedule
Fixture Check this box to make this fixture appear in the Appli-
ance Schedule.
Treat as HVAC in
Fixture Schedule
Fixture Check this box to make this fixture appear in the HVAC
Schedule.
Treat as Plumbing
in Fixture Schedule
Fixture Check this box to make this fixture appear in the Plumb-
ing Schedule.
Breaker Panel Electrical No effect
Can sit on base
cabinet or table
Fixtures,
Furniture,
Electrical
Allows fixture to be placed on top of a cabinet. Symbols
remain selectable and independent of cabinet after place-
ment. Can also be placed independently, 0" from floor to
bottom.
Ceiling Mounted Electrical Electrical item is attached to ceiling at origin.
Doorbell Electrical Uses switch default height.
Doorway has no
threshold
Doorways Check this box to include a threshold over the floor sur-
face within the doorway. When unchecked, no threshold
is created and the floor surface is used.
Fan Electrical Recognized by Plan Check as needing to be connected
to a switch.
Fits under wall cab-
inet
Fixtures Attaches fixture top to bottom of selected wall cabinet
and fixture back to adjacent wall. Fixture can be placed
independently on plan, and locates itself 54" from floor to
bottom.
Floor Mounted Electrical Electrical item is attached to floor at origin. Use Height
Off Floor to specify distance from floor.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1145 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1146
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
GFCI Electrical If an electrical symbol has the GFCI attribute and is
placed behind a cabinet in a kitchen or bathroom, Auto
Place Outlets recognizes it and does not insert a
GFCI outlet behind that cabinet.
Hangs on wall Fixtures and
Furniture
Fixture attaches to wall at 54" from floor if placed within
8" of the nearest wall. Can be placed independently of
wall if placed more than 8" away and inserts at 54" from
floor to bottom.
Inserts into
cabinet front
Fixtures Fixture attaches itself centrally to the front of a full height
cabinet. It becomes merged with the cabinet and is
selectable and resizable only in the Cabinet Specification
dialog. When this is the only option selected, fixture can
be placed in a full height cabinet only.
*Note: CAD must also be the same size as the 3D's or
width/depth modification is required. For modification,
depth must equal distance from back of block to point
wanted to attach to cabinet, in order for 2D CAD to show
properly.
Inserts into
countertop
Fixtures When placed on a base cabinet, fixture drops into coun-
tertop.
Light Electrical Creates light source with available properties to individ-
ual symbols. Recognized by Plan Check as needing to
be connected to a switch.
Mounts under wall
cabinet
Electrical Symbol attaches to underside of wall cabinet if one is
present, or to the ceiling if one is not.
No default door in
this doorway
Doorways
and Windows
Check this option to exclude a door from the doorway.
Outdoor Electrical Plan Check warns that this is not a waterproof switch/out-
let.
Outlet Electrical Can be placed automatically using the Place Outlets
option. Electrical Defaults determines placement above
floor.
Phone Electrical Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet
default height.
Requires high/stan-
dard voltage
Fixtures If against a wall, Place Outlets places an outlet of the
appropriate type behind the fixture. Also makes fixture
appear in Appliance Schedule.
Requires natural
gas
Fixtures Appears in Appliance Schedule.
Requires water
drain
Fixtures Appears in Plumbing Schedule.
Sits on floor Fixtures and
Furniture
Default option for Fixtures. Places fixture on floor.
Option Categories Effect on Symbol
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1146 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Symbol Specification Dialog
1147
Available Appliance and Fixture Types
Materials Panel
The Materials panel allows you to assign
materials to the symbols components and is
similar to the Materials panel in many
specification dialogs. See Materials Panel
on page 821.
Sits on Roof Fixtures and
Furniture
Places symbol on top of roof plane.
Smoke Detector Electrical Recognized by Plan Check as a requirement for certain
rooms.
Switch Electrical Recognized by Plan Check for connection to a switched
item. Electrical Defaults determines height above floor.
Switched Electrical Recognized by Plan Check as needing to be connected
to a switch.
System supplies
rectangular casing
Doorways
and Windows
Chief Architect automatically supplies rectangular casing
if your model does not already have a casing.
Thermostat Electrical No affect. Uses switch default height.
TV Electrical Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet
default height.
Wall Mounted Electrical Electrical item is attached to wall at origin.
Item Type Placement Affect
Appliances
(built-in base cabs)
Placement in base cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Front option
is selected.
Appliances
(under wall cabs)
Placement under wall cabinet is allowed if Fits under Wall Cabinet option
is selected.
Cooktops Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is
selected.
Ovens (built-in) Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is
selected.
Refrigerators
(built-in)
Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Front option is
selected.
Sinks (bathroom) Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is
selected.
Sinks (kitchen) Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is
selected.
Sinks (laundry) Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is
selected.
Option Categories Effect on Symbol
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1147 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1148
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
If the selected symbol is in the process of
being imported, bear in mind that .dxf/.dwg
files do not include material information, so
the symbols components will not have
materials assigned to them. See 3D
Symbols and Materials on page 1132.
Sizing Panel
The settings on the Sizing panel allow you to
control the size of a symbols bounding box
and how the symbol behaves when resized.
Bounding Box Dimensions - Specify
the Width, Depth and Height of the
selected symbols bounding box, measured
from the symbols origin with 1/16" (1 mm)
accuracy. Not available when multiple
symbols are selected.
When a symbol is first created, its bounding
box is the same size as the actual 3D object.
See Bounding Boxes on page 1155.
Stretch Planes define where a symbol
stretches when resized. If no stretch
planes are used, the symbol resizes
uniformly. See Stretch Planes and Zones
on page 1155.
Width planes are oriented vertically and
run from the back of the symbol to its
front, or along the symbols X axis.
A symbols actual size cannot be
changed in the Symbol Specification
dialog. See Resizing Objects on page 221.
1 2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1148 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Symbol Specification Dialog
1149
Depth planes are oriented vertically and
run from one side of the symbol to the
other, or along the symbols Y axis.
Height planes are oriented horizontally,
or along the symbols Z axis.
Uniform Stretch Zones define an area
between two planes that stretches
uniformly when the object is resized, leaving
the area outside of the zone unaffected.
Cabinet Panel
The Cabinet Front Symbols panel is only
available for Cabinet symbols as they are
being imported. The settings on this panel
control the function of both the cabinet and
its individual parts once it is imported.
Specify the symbols Cabinet Type:
Base Cabinet, Wall Cabinet or Full
Height Cabinet.
Layer/Component Assignment -
Specify the type of component for each
layer associated with the cabinet symbol.
Click on a Layer Name in the list, then
select the type of cabinet component type
3
Note: Stretch Planes and Stretch Zones do
not affect a symbols 2D CAD block, which
always resizes in a uniform manner. If you
resize a symbol using custom Stretch Planes
and Zones, consider generating a new CAD
Block. See 2D Block Panel on page 1142.
1 2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1149 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1150
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
from the Component Type drop-down
list.
Opening Panel
The settings on the Opening panel define the
selected Window or Doorway symbols
rough opening when placed in a wall.
The Opening panel is only available for
Windows and Doorways.
An editable diagram of the symbols
wall opening displays here.
Edit the symbols opening size and shape by
clicking on a dimension number and typing
the desired value. To update the preview,
press the Tab key.
If the Window or Doorway has an
angled or arched top, click the Opening
Cabinet symbols should not include
hardware. Handles and hinges are
assigned according to cabinet defaults when
the cabinet is created. See Door/Drawer
Panel on page 675.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1150 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Symbol Specification Dialog
1151
Sections drop-down and choose the section
diagram that most closely resembles the
rough opening shape that you want. You can
then edit the section as needed.
Plan View Panel
The Plan View panel controls the appearance
of Window and Doorway symbols in floor
plan view.
The Plan View panel is only available for
Windows and Doorways.
An editable diagram of the symbols
representation in floor plan view
displays here. The settings here also affect
how many units the symbol contains as well
as their size in both 2D and 3D views.
To change the size of the symbols units
in floor plan view, click on a dimension
number and type the desired value. Press
the Tab key to update the diagram.
The size and shape of a symbols open-
ing is independent of the symbols size.
Make sure that the two are compatible.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1151 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1152
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
To change a unit in the preview from a
window to a door swing, click on the unit
in the diagram.
Click the Plan View Sections drop-
down and choose the number of units
contained by the Doorway or Window
symbol. Up to five units are possible.
Plant Information Panel
This panel is available when the Symbol
Specification dialog is opened for a plant.
The options are the same as the Plant
Information panel of the Plant Symbol
Specification dialog. See Plant Information
Panel on page 775.
Plant Description Panel
This panel is available when the Symbol
Specification dialog is opened for a plant.
The options are the same as the Plant
Description panel of the Plant Symbol
Specification dialog. See Plant Description
Panel on page 776.
Get Last Symbol
If you import or convert a symbol that
cannot be placed in the current view
or must be contained by another object that is
not present in the view, you can quickly
select it for placement once the needed
conditions are met using the Get Last
Symbol command.
Open a view in which the symbol can be
placed or create an object to place the symbol
into, then select Tools> Symbol> Get Last
Symbol to retrieve the last symbol
created and click in your plan to place the
symbol.
Convert to Symbol
While 3D symbols can be imported
from third parties, you can also create
your own symbols in Chief Architect using
any combination of architectual objects.
To create a custom symbol, begin by opening
a new, blank plan and then use any
combination of architectural objects to
produce a model of what you would like your
custom symbol to look like.
When the objects are configured as desired,
use the Convert to Symbol tool to create
a single symbol that is assigned to a category
The size of a symbols units is entirely
independent of the size of the symbol
itself. Make sure that the total width of the
symbols units in plan view equals the width
of the 3D symbol.
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1152 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Editing Custom Symbols
1153
that reflects how the object will be used. For
example, if you design a cabinet door, select
Cabinet Door/Drawer as the symbols
category so you can assign the resulting
symbol to a cabinet.
To convert an object to a symbol
1. Create a camera view or overview in
which the object or objects that you wish
to convert to a single symbol are the
only things displaying.
2. Select Tools> Symbol> Convert to
Symbol .
3. The Convert to Symbol dialog displays:
Choose a Symbol Category from the
drop-down list.
Check Add To Library if you would
like the symbol to be added to the
library. See Add to Library on page
799.
Check Show Advanced Options to
open the Symbol Specification dialog
when you click OK, where you have
more extensive control over the
symbols settings. See Symbol
Specification Dialog on page 1139.
4. Click OK to close the dialog and con-
vert your custom object to a symbol.
Editing Custom Symbols
Custom symbols can be selected and edited
much like other objects in the program. A
symbols category determines exactly what
editing options are available; however, most
symbols can be edited using the edit handles,
edit toolbar and specification dialog. See
Editing Objects on page 171.
Symbols have some additional options that
allow you to control how the symbol behaves
when it is placed, selected, moved and
resized.
Symbol Origin
All symbols have an origin point, which
determines how the object is positioned
when it is placed in a plan. The origin point
also determines the location of a symbols
bounding box and 2D block.
The location of a symbols origin point is
typically on its back surface, at the bottom
A wide variety of unique objects can be
created using the Primitive Tools. See
Primitive Tools on page 739.
Symbol objects have two specification
dialogs: one based on its object type
and accessed using the Open Object edit
button, and the Symbol Specification dialog
accessed using the Open Symbol edit button.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1153 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1154
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
center; however, this may vary, depending on
the symbols category.
The following table lists these default origins
by symbol type. You can offset a symbol from its origin point.
This can make it easy to insert the object
inside of another object, but does not affect
the location of the bounding box or the 2D
block that displays in floor plan view.
To create an insertable symbol
1. Make a note of the symbols actual size
on the General panel of its specification
dialog.
2. Click the Open Symbol edit button
to open the Symbol Specification dia-
log.
3. On the 3D panel, check Specify Origin.
4. Adjust the X, Y and/or Z values as
needed:
To insert the back of the symbol into
the side of another object at a particular
distance, specify that distance in the Y
field as a positive value.
Symbol Type Origin location
Cabinet Bottom, Back, Center
Cabinet Door Bottom, Back, Center
Doors Bottom, Back, Center
Doorways Bottom, Outside, Center
Electrical,
Ceiling Mounted
Center Top
Electrical,
Flush Mounted
Back, Center
Electrical,
Floor Mounted
Center, Bottom
Electrical,
Wall Mounted
Center, Back
Furniture Bottom, Back, Center
Fixture Bottom, Back, Center
Geometric Shapes Bottom, Back, Center
Hardware Bottom, Back, Center
Symbol origin located
at the back, middle,
bottom of object
Millwork Bottom, Back, Center
Molding n/a
Plant Bottom, Back, Center
Sprinkler Back, Center. Height
varies.
Windows Bottom, Outside, Center
(of sill)
Window origin located bottom, outside, center.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1154 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Editing Custom Symbols
1155
To insert the bottom of the symbol into
the top of another object, specify the
distance that it should be dropped as a
negative value in the Z field.
Bounding Boxes
An objects bounding box determines the
amount of space it requires in 3D and thus
how close it can be moved to other objects
before it bumps into them.
The bounding box also defines the selectable
area around a symbol: when you click within
an objects bounding box, it will become
selected. Similarly, the bounding box affects
whether an object is included in a selection
marquee. See Selecting Objects on page
176.
When a symbol is selected, its edit handles
display around the perimeter of its bounding
box. See Edit Handles on page 32.
You can create setback space for a symbol by
increasing its bounding box size on the
Sizing panel of the Symbol Specification
dialog. See Sizing Panel on page 1148.
To create setback space for a symbol
1. Make a note of the symbols actual size
on the General panel of its specification
dialog.
2. Click the Open Symbol edit button
to open the Symbol Specification dia-
log.
3. On the Sizing panel, increase the Width,
Depth and/or Height values by the
amount of the desired setback space.
The bounding box Width is always
centered on the symbols origin point.
The Depth is measured from the sym-
bols origin point towards its front.
The Height is measured from the sym-
bols origin point towards its top.
You can also allow a symbol to set into
another object by reducing its bounding box
size. Unlike the symbol itself, the bounding
box and 2D block cannot be offset from the
origin.
Stretch Planes and Zones
Stretch Planes and Stretch Zones define
where a symbol stretches when resized.
If a symbol has no Stretch Planes or Zones,
its surfaces will all resize uniformly; if, on
the other hand, a Stretch Plane or Zone is
defined, the object will resize only within the
plane or zone. Any portions of the symbol
located outside of the plane or zone will not
resize at all.
A Stretch Plane is a two dimensional
plane within a symbol which increases or
decreases in thickness as the symbol is
resized.
A Stretch Zone defines an area between
two Stretch Planes that resizes uniformly,
leaving the area outside unaffected.
Stretch Plane coordinates are relative to the
symbols origin point. For many object types,
the origin is located at the bottom center of
its back surface.
To define a Width stretch plane
1. Open a symbols Symbol Specification
dialog using any of the available meth-
ods. See Symbol Specification Dialog
on page 1139.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1155 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1156
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
2. On the Sizing panel, under the Stretch
Planes heading, check the box beside 1
to the left of the Width column. The
field to its right becomes active.
3. The new plane has an initial value of 0.
Leave it at 0 to run the plane through
the objects default origin point.
Specify a negative number to define a
plane to the left of the origin.
Specify a positive number to define a
plane to the right of the origin.
4. Click OK. When the symbols width is
changed, only the cross section defined
by the Stretch Plane will be affected.
To define a Depth or Height stretch plane
1. On the Sizing panel of the Symbol
Specification dialog, under the Stretch
Planes heading, check the box beside 1
to the left either the Depth or Height
column. The field to its right becomes
active.
2. The new plane has an initial value of 0.
To define a Height stretch plane, spec-
ify a positive number between 0 and
the overall height of the symbol.
To define a Depth stretch plane, specify
a negative number.
3. Click OK. When the symbols depth or
height is changed, only the cross section
defined by the Stretch Plane will be
affected.
A symbol can have up to three Stretch Planes
in each direction, for a total of nine.
To define two stretch planes
1. Open a symbols Symbol Specification
dialog.
2. On the Sizing panel, check the boxes
beside 1 and 2 to the left of a column
under Stretch Planes. The fields to their
right becomes active.
3. Specify the desired values to define each
Stretch Plane within the symbol.
4. Click OK. When the symbol is resized,
the two cross sections defined by the
Stretch Plane will be affected.
Location and effect of Width stretch planes
Location and effect of Z-axis stretch planes
Location and effect of two Width stretch planes
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1156 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Editing Custom Symbols
1157
To define a stretch zone
1. Open a symbols Symbol Specification
dialog.
2. On the Sizing panel, under the Stretch
Planes heading, check the boxes beside
1 and 2 to the left of a column under
Stretch Planes. The fields to their right
becomes active.
3. Specify values for both planes.
4. Check the box beside the corresponding
option in the Stretch Zones section of the
panel.
5. Click OK. When the symbol is resized,
only the area within the Stretch Zone
will be affected.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1157 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1158
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1158 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1159
Chapt er 38:
Chapt er 38:
Printing and Plotting
Chief Architect provides a variety of printing
options, from printing scaled plan views and
3D perspectives, to a set of templates that
can be assembled into a 3D model.
To create working drawings, you can use the
programs Layout facility. Multiple views of
the model can be arranged on pages along
with a border and title block. For more
information, see Layout on page 1183.
Chief Architect also allows you to save your
drawings in .pdf file format that can then be
sent to a printing service.
Chapter Contents
Introduction to Printing
Printers and Plotters
Printing Defaults
The Printing Tools
Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog
Print Preview
Printing to Scale
Printing Across Multiple Pages
Printing to a PDF File
Line Weights
Print View Dialog
Print Image Dialog
Print Model
Note: Screen captures are provided for
illustrative purposes only and are not an
endorsement of any products.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1159 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1160
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Introduction to Printing
Chief Architect offers printing options to suit
a variety of needs. It is helpful to be familiar
with these options and choose the one that
makes the most sense for the project at hand.
Output Options
Printing From Layout - For professional
quality documents with a title block, border,
and multiple views of the model, printing
from layout provides the best results. For
more information, see Layout on page
1183.
Printing Directly From a View - You may
prefer to print individual drawings directly
from a view. See Print Tools on page 1163.
Printing to PDF - Plans can be printed to a
.pdf file and printed remotely. See Printing
to a PDF File on page 1170.
Print Model - Creates a set of templates that
can be used to create a 3D model of your
design. See Print Model on page 1178.
Terminology
Drawing Sheet Size - The dimensions of the
final printed output. This may or may not be
the same as the printer paper size. If the sheet
and paper sizes are the same, only one page
is required per sheet. See Drawing Sheet
Setup Dialog on page 1164.
Paper Size - The dimensions of the paper to
be printed on. Specifying a paper size that is
smaller than the Sheet Size allows large
drawings to be printed across multiple pages.
Check Plot - A test printing, typically at a
smaller scale, made before final output to
large paper format. For more information,
see Check Plots on page 1169.
Line Weight - The thickness of a line. A
thicker line weight is easier to see, but may
not show as much detail. See Line Weights
on page 1170.
Drawing Scale - You can specify this scale
in the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog. See
Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog on page 1164.
When a particular scale is not important,
drawings can also be sized to fill a particular
area. See Printing to Scale on page 1168.
Printing Problems
If you encounter difficulties when trying to
print, see Troubleshooting Common
Technical Issues on page 1256.
Note: Student, Academic, and Presentation
versions of the software produce a watermark
on all printed documents.
Always familiarize yourself with your
printer or plotter before a deadline is
near, and bear in mind that it can take a little
time to configure a new printer.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1160 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Printers and Plotters
1161
Printers and Plotters
There are many different types of printers
and plotters. In general, a printer is smaller,
normally outputting 8 x 11" (Letter or
ANSI A size), 8 x 14" (Legal Size) or
sometimes as large as 11 x 17" (Tabloid or
ANSI B size).
Plotters are typically used to output larger
sheets of paper such as 17 x 22" (ANSI C),
22 x 34" (ANSI D) or 34 x 44" (ANSI E).
Printer Drivers
A printer driver is a program that allows a
printer to communicate with the rest of the
computer system. Drivers are usually created
by the printer manufacturer, are typically
updated regularly, and can usually be
downloaded free of charge from the
manufacturers web site.
In addition to interpreting between the
printer and the rest of the system, printer
drivers save default page size, orientation,
margin size, and other information that Chief
Architect refers to unless you specify
otherwise. See Print View Settings on page
1162.
If you experience printing problems,
consider installing updated drivers for your
printer. Visit your printer manufacturers web
site for more information.
Printing to File
If your print service requires you to print to a
file that can be read by their plotter, you can
install that printers drivers on your system
and then use the Windows System Print
dialog to Print to File. See Print View
Dialog on page 1173.
Please note that printing to a file is not an
option in the Mac System Print dialog.
Clearing Printer Information
Some information specific to individual
printers and plotters, such as available paper
sizes, is saved with each plan and layout file.
You can select File> Print> Clear Printer
Info to clear the printer-specific information
stored with the plan or layout file.
Printing Defaults
You can print to any printer or plotter that is
supported on your operating system and can
specify the current printer at any time in
either the Drawing Sheet Setup or Print
View dialog.
Drawing Sheet Setup
When any orthographic view is active,
you can specify its Drawing Sheet
size, orientation, margins, its printed
Drawing Scale, and more in the Drawing
Options available with one driver may
not be available with another. Printers
and plotters supported in one operating
system may not be supported by the
manufacturer in another.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1161 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1162
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Sheet Setup dialog. Select File> Print>
Drawing Sheet Setup to open this dialog.
See Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog on page
1164.
The settings in the Drawing Sheet Setup
dialog are view-specific. This means that in a
plan file, they can be set up independently
for floor plan view and each cross section/
elevation view and CAD Detail. When a new
view is created, its initial settings are derived
from the current settings in floor plan view.
The Drawing Scale set in the Drawing Sheet
Setup dialog acts as the default scale for the
active views Print, Printed Size Input, and
Send to Layout dialogs. See Send To
Layout Dialog on page 1189.
The settings in the Drawing Sheet Setup
dialog can be customized and saved in your
template plans and layout files. See
Template Files on page 78.
Print View Settings
When you are ready to print an
orthographic view, select File>
Print> Print. The initial settings in the Print
View dialog are drawn from the Drawing
Sheet Setup for the view. The systems
default printer is selected and if possible, the
paper size and orientation are set to match
those of the Drawing Sheet.
Once a view has been printed, the settings in
the Print View dialog are saved and will be
applied to all views of the same type, in all
Chief Architect files. View types with
separate Print View settings are:
Floor plan view
Cross Section/Elevation views
Layout
Materials Lists
CAD Details
Time Tracker Logs
If you prefer that the Print View settings not
be retained in this manner, uncheck
Remember Print Settings after Printing in
the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.
Displaying Objects
You can control the display of objects
when printing directly from a view in
theLayer Display Options dialog. See
Layer Display Options Dialog on page
144.
Objects must be visible in order for them to
print; however, not all items that are visible
will print. See Print Preview on page 1166.
To control the display of objects in an
orthogonal view sent to layout, select the
view, click the Layout Box Layers edit
button, and make any needed changes in the
Layer Display Options dialog. See
Layout View Layers.
To control the display of objects in a camera
view sent to layout, turn layers on/off in the
view before it is sent to layout. You may find
it helpful to create a custom layer set for
printing directly from a view. See Layer
Sets on page 141
Print Preview
To get a sense of whether your current
settings will meet your needs when
printed, you can use the Print Preview
toggle to view the printed output on screen
before any paper is used. See Print
Preview on page 1166.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1162 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
The Printing Tools
1163
The Printing Tools
Select File> Print to view the Print
Tools submenu. These tools fall into
four categories.
Print Setup Tools
Drawing Sheet Setup - Opens the
Drawing Sheet Setup dialog. See
Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog on page 1164.
Scale to Fit - Automatically selects a
scale that fits your plan to the drawing
sheet. See Printing to Scale on page 1168.
Center Sheet - Automatically centers
the drawing sheet on your drawing.
See Center Sheet on page 1168.
Print Preview - Shows on screen how
the current view will appear printed.
See Print Preview on page 1166.
Print Tools
Print - Prints the current floor plan
view, Vector View, CAD Detail, or
layout sheet to a specified scale. See Print
View Dialog on page 1173.
Print Image - Prints the current view
including images, textures, and
backdrop. Views printed with Print Image
are not scaled. See Print Image Dialog on
page 1176.
Print Model - Opens thePrint Model
dialog, allowing you to print templates
for making a physical model of your plan.
See Print Model on page 1178.
Display Toggles
A number of toggles allow you to turn
various aspects of the display on or off. See
Interface Toggles on page 30.
Color - Turn the on-screen display of
color on or off in all views except
perspective views. See Color on page
1167.
Line Weights - When this is on, line
weights appear on screen as they will
print. See Line Weights on page 1167.
Drawing Sheet - Turn this on for a
preview of your plan relative to the
current Drawing Sheet. See Drawing Sheet
on page 1167.
Reference Grid - The Reference Grid
does not print, so you can turn this off
to get a better sense of what the view will
look like printed. See Reference Grid on
page 1167.
Additional Print Tools
Customize Sheet Sizes - Allows you to
create custom sheet sizes. See Customize
Sheet Sizes Dialog on page 1166.
Clear Printer Info - Clears the printer
information associated with the current page
setup.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1163 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1164
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog
Select File> Print> Drawing Sheet
Setup to open the Drawing Sheet
Setup dialog.
The Drawing Sheet Setup dialog is only
available when an orthogonal view or layout
is active. See Orthogonal Views on page
1168.
The settings in this dialog are specific to the
current orthogonal view or layout file, and
are saved with the .plan or .layout file. See
Specify the Orientation and Size of the
Drawing Sheet, which is the final
printed output.
Click the Customize button to open the
Customize Sheet Sizes dialog. See
Customize Sheet Sizes Dialog on page
1166.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1164 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog
1165
Specify the Drawing Scale for the
active view. This scale is applied only
when the view is printed.
The scale is specified in two parts, which by
default are 1 ft =1 ft or 1 m =1 m for layout
views, and inch =1 ft or 1 m =50 m for all
other views. Both imperial and metric units
of measurement are available and can be
selected independently.
The units of measurement available here can
be controlled in the Preferences dialog. See
Unit Conversions Panel on page 99.
The Drawing Scale acts as the default scale
for the active views Print, Printed Size
Input, and Send to Layout dialogs.
Specify the Printer for View. which is
the printer for the active view.
Uncheck Remember Print Settings
after Printing to enable the Choose but-
ton, below. When this is checked, the
printer is selected in the Print View dia-
log. See Printing Defaults on page
1161.
Click the Choose button to select a
printer and edit its paper settings.
If you have questions about your printers
settings, consult its documentation.
Specify the Drawing Margins. which
define the extents of the printable area
of the active views Drawing Sheet.
Click the Populate from Printer button
to set the margins based on the selected
printers default settings. See Printers
and Plotters on page 1161.
Specify the width of the desired Top,
Left, Right, and Bottom margins.
The Advanced Line Weight Options
allow you to specify the active views
line weight scale. A layout files line weight
scale should always be the same as that of
any plan views associated with it. See Line
Weights and Scaling on page 1171.
Check Automatic to have the program
specify the line weight scale and adjust it
to maintain line thickness and dash size
when the drawing scale is changed.
Automatic Line Weight Scale is based
on a 1/4 inch =1 foot drawing scale and
1=1/300 inch line weight scale and is an
option for .plan files only. Plans origi-
nally created in any of the Home
Designer programs have Automatic
checked by default; however, this option
is not normally recommended. See Line
Weights on page 1170.
Select the Line Weight Scale. See Line
Weights and Scaling on page 1171. This
setting should always be the same for
both a given layout file and any plan
views associated with it.
A line weight Preview illustrates how
changes to the line weight scale affect
the printed size of various line weights at the
current Drawing Scale.
Paper can often be inserted into plotters
in either of two orientations. Refer to
your plotters documentation to find out which
way to insert the paper for correct results.
2
3
4
5
6
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1165 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1166
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Customize Sheet Sizes Dialog
To open the Customize Sheet Sizes dialog,
select File> Print> Customize Sheet Sizes,
or click the Customize button in the
Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.
Several options are available:
Click New to create a new sheet size.
Select a sheet size and click Copy to cre-
ate a duplicate sheet size.
Click Delete to remove the selected sheet
size.
Select a sheet size and click Edit to open
the Edit Paper Size dialog and change its
description, dimensions, and units of
measurement.
Click OK to close the dialog. Any new
sheet sizes created are now available in
the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.
The data for this dialog is stored in the
sheetSizes.sheet file in the programs
Data folder.
Clearing Printer Information
Select File> Print> Clear Printer Info to
clear the printer-specific information stored
in the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.
This is useful for creating plan and layout
templates without an associated printer. See
Template Files on page 78.
Print Preview
Print Preview and its related display
toggles allow you to get a sense of
what the current view will look like when it
is printed.
Print Preview
Select File> Print> Print Preview for
an on-screen representation of how
the current view will appear when printed.
Print Preview is only available in views that
can be scaled. See Printing to Scale on
page 1168.
When Print Preview is on, the Drawing
Sheet and line weights are displayed, and the
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1166 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Print Preview
1167
toggle buttons Drawing Sheet and Line
Weights are overridden.
Objects such as camera symbols, CAD
points, and the Snap and Reference Grids
that do not print do not display in Print
Preview . Text and dimension objects
appear on-screen as they will on the printed
page.
When Print Preview is enabled, color
will display depending on whether Print in
Color is selected in the Print View dialog.
See Print View Dialog on page 1173.
The Reference Display does print if it is
visible. See Reference Floor Display on
page 426.
Color
The Color toggle turns the on-screen
display of color on or off in all views.
When Color is toggled off, views print in
either black and white or greyscale
depending on your Preferences setting. See
Colors Panel on page 88.
Reference Grid
The Reference Grid is an on-screen
grid composed of regular squares that
can be used to convey a sense of scale while
drawing. It does not print, and its size can be
specified in the General Plan Defaults
dialog. See General Plan Defaults Dialog
on page 82.
Line Weights
Select View> Line Weights for an on-
screen representation of line weights
and line styles. Turning Line Weights on or
off does not affect the final printed output.
When Line Weights is turned on, you can
Zoom In to see the location of lines and
dashed lines as they will appear on the
printed page.
When Line Weights is off, dashed lines look
the same, regardless of the zoom factor.
Line Weights can also be turned on or off in
the Preferences dialog. See Appearance
Panel on page 86.
Drawing Sheet
Select View> Drawing Sheet to show
the drawing sheet on screen. The sheet
size is specified in the Drawing Sheet Setup
dialog. See Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog
on page 1164.
A blue border represents the margins of the
printable area. If the margins have been set to
populate from the selected printer, this
border may not display on all edges of the
drawing sheet. See Printer Drivers on page
1161.
When Drawing Sheet is on, the drawing
sheet behaves as an object.
When selected at its border the sheet has
edit handles, allowing it to be moved. See
Editing Objects on page 171.
You can also resize the sheet using its edit
handles; however, for best results, it is
recommended that you instead select an
available sheet size in the Drawing Sheet
Setup dialog. See Drawing Sheet Setup
Dialog on page 1164.
Dimension lines can locate the edges of
the sheet and can be used to position
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1167 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1168
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
other objects relative to it. See Moving
Objects Using Dimensions on page 971.
The drawing sheet cannot be rotated or
copied.
Center Sheet
Select File> Print> Center Sheet to
center the drawing sheet on the
drawing. This moves the sheet relative to the
drawing but does not affect the coordinates
of objects in the drawing. The location of the
drawing sheet is independent for each floor
of the model.
Printing to Scale
Several different print scaling options are
available. The type of view that you are
printing determines which options you may
choose from.
Orthogonal Views
Floor plan views, Orthographic 3D views,
CAD Details, and layout pages are
orthogonal views, which means:
Your line of sight is at a right angle to all
objects in the view.
Objects do not appear to decrease in size
as their distances from the viewer
increase.
Orthogonal views can be printed to scale;
however, Orthographic 3D views can only be
printed to scale when the Vector View
Rendering Technique is used.
The scale set in the Page Setup dialog is
inherited by the Print and Send to Layout
dialogs. This scale can be overridden on an
individual basis in either of these dialogs.
See Print View Dialog on page 1173 and
Sending Views to Layout on page 1188.
Select File> Print> Scale to Fit in an
orthogonal view to select a suitable scale and
re-center the drawing sheet so that
everything fits on the sheet.
Imperial drawing scales are typically noted
in inches per foot. Larger scales, such as 1
inch =50 feet or 1:200m, are often used for
property layouts.
Once a view has been sent to layout, there
are a variety of additional scaling options.
See Rescaling Views on page 1195.
Perspective Views
Camera views and Perspective overviews
display the model much the way the eye
would see it and cannot be scaled.
Objects in the view may be at any angle
relative to your line of sight.
Objects seem to decrease in size as their
distances from the viewer increase.
Perspective views can only be printed using
the Print Image tool. See Print Image
Dialog on page 1176.
While perspective views cannot be scaled,
you can control the printed size of the view.
Note: Specifying a sheet size in the
Drawing Sheet Setup dialog is prefera-
ble to editing the sheet size on-screen.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1168 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Printing to Scale
1169
If Fit to Paper is selected in the Print dialog,
a percent value can be set that defines how
much of the printed page to fill. See Print
View Dialog on page 1173. 50% causes the
print to be 50% of both the height and width
of the paper, including the non-printable
border.
For example, if printing to an 8 x 11 page
with a 1" non-printable border in each
direction:
100% would print an area 8 x 11. This
is not recommended, as part of the output
could fall outside the printable area.
50% would print an area 4 x 5.
Each printer may vary slightly.
Check Plots
A check plot is a test print that allows you to
print at a reduced scale on smaller, less
expensive paper so you can check that the
drawing will print as expected. The drawing
scale is temporarily adjusted to a specified
fraction of its true value. Both drawing scale
and line weights are subject to this scale
adjustment.
For example, if a layout has a border
designed to fit on a Drawing Sheet of 24 x
36, a check plot at 1/2 scale would allow it
to fit on a 12 x 18 page. A view sent to that
layout at a Drawing Scale of 1/4 =1 would
be scaled at 1/8 =1 when printed at 1/2
scale.
To create a check plot
1. Select File> Print> Print View . In
the Print View dialog:
Click the Check Plot at radio button,
then choose the desired scale fraction
from the drop-down list.
The Paper Size will automatically
adjust to fit the selected Check Plot
Scale.
Confirm that the Paper Size is the size
you wish to use, then click Print.
2. The next time you print a view, remem-
ber to choose To Scale or Fit to Paper
again in the Print View dialog.
Printing Text and Dimensions
As with other objects your drawings, text and
dimension numbers are subject to scaling
when views are sent to layout or printed. See
Scaling Text on page 998.
Printed text size is also influenced by the
selected font and the method used to specify
its size. See Character Size on page 982.
Text may not print exactly as it appears on-
screen. To get a better idea of how text and
dimension characters will print, you may
find it helpful to Zoom In on them.
For best printed results, using true-type or
open-type fonts is recommended.
Text may not appear accurately on
screen when the font used by the
printer is different than the font used on
screen. Consult your printer documentation
for more information on font substitution.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1169 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1170
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Printing Across Multiple Pages
When printing directly from a floor plan
view, cross section/elevation view, or layout
it is possible to print at a scale that does not
fit the drawing on one page.
When printing to a paper size that is smaller
than the sheet size, a 2% overlap is used.
Crop marks print where the paper needs to be
cut between pages. A solid line is drawn at
the drawing sheet boundary on the sides that
need to be cut.
To see on-screen what the drawing will look
like when printed, select View> Drawing
Sheet and then Window> Fill
Window . Grey lines across the drawing
sheet indicate where the page breaks will
occur. See Drawing Sheet on page 1167.
Printing to a PDF File
Portable Document Format, or .pdf files, are
one of the most universally compatible and
efficient file formats and can be viewed and
printed on most computer platforms.
You can save any view as a 2D .pdf file by
selecting Save as PDF as the Destination
printer Name in either the Print View or
Print Image dialog. See Print View Dialog
on page 1173 and Print Image Dialog on
page 1176.
If you have a .pdf writer installed on your
system, you can use it to create a 2D .pdf file
instead. To print to .pdf, simply select it as
your printer in the Print View or Print Image
dialog.
When you either save as or print to .pdf, you
will be asked to create a file name and
choose a destination automatically. For more
information, see Saving, Exporting, and
Backing Up Files on page 51.
You can also import .pdf files into Chief
Architect. See Importing PDF Files on
page 1095.
Line Weights
The weight of a line refers to its thickness on
the printed page and is described in absolute
terms as a fraction of a unit, often 1/100th of
a millimeter or 1/1000 of an inch. In Chief
Architect, line weights are assigned to
objects, patterns, and layers using whole
numbers that correspond to the numerator of
this fraction.
You can specify the Line Weight Scale by
defining the denominator and the unit used in
this fraction in the Drawing Sheet Setup
dialog. See Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog
on page 1164.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1170 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Line Weights
1171
Your preferred line weights and line weight
scale can be saved in your template plan and
layout files. See Template Files on page
78.
The method for specifying an objects line
weight depends on the object and the type of
view.
Most objects line weights can be set by
layer. See Layer Display Options Dia-
log on page 144.
Some objects line weights can be set in
their specification dialogs. See Line
Style Panel on page 1035.
The line weights for walls in floor plan
view are defined by wall type in the Wall
Type Definitions dialog. See Wall Type
Definitions Dialog on page 291.
The line weights of material pattern lines,
which are visible in Vector Views, can be
set in the Define Material dialog. See
Define Material Dialog on page 831.
The line weight for fill patterns is set for
individual objects in their specification
dialogs. See Fill Style Panel on page
1048.
The line weight applied to surface edges
in Vector Views can be set in the Print
dialog. See Print View Dialog on page
1173.
The end cap length of dashed lines in
floor plan view is set in the Preferences
dialog. See Line Properties Panel on
page 105.
An assigned line weight of 0 draws a line
weight of 1 pixel, the thinnest line weight
a printer allows. How thick this is varies
from printer to printer. See Printers and
Plotters on page 1161.
Line Weights and Scaling
When a view is sent to layout, line weights
may be affected by the drawing scale
selected for the view. This occurs when the
layout views scale is different from the
drawing scale of the original view.
For example, assume that you have an object
in a view with a line weight of 20, and that
the views drawing scale is 1 mm =50 mm.
If you send the view to layout at 1 mm =
25 mm scale, twice the original scale, the
resulting printed line weight for this
object will increase to 40 instead of 20.
If you send the view to layout at 1 mm =
100 mm scale, half the original scale, the
resulting printed line weight for this
object will decrease to 10 instead of 20.
You can specify the drawing scale for any
orthogonal view by opening the Drawing
Sheet Setup dialog while in that view. See
Printing to Scale on page 1168.
For any layout view, you can specify whether
the original line weight is maintained or not
in the Send to Layout and Change Scale
dialogs. See Send To Layout Dialog on
page 1189 and Rescaling Views on page
1195.
It is extremely important that every view
sent to layout and the layout file share
the same Line Weight Scale. When they do
not, unwanted printed output will result.
Note: Under most circumstances, you should
select Use Layout Line Scaling when sending
views to layout.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1171 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1172
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Line weight scaling affects both line weights
and line styles and can be particularly
noticable with dashed line styles.
In the following image, the same floor plan
view has been sent to layout twice, at two
different scales. The view on the left was sent
at the same scale as the original view,
1/8 =1. The view on the right was sent at
1 =1, or magnified eight times, to show an
area of the plan in greater detail.
Because the view on the right was sent to
layout at a scale other than that of the
original, it is subject to layout line scaling.
The solid lines representing walls, cabinets
and doors are rescaled to be eight times
thicker than in the original view.
Similarly, the dashed lines representing the
door jambs are rescaled so that the dashes
and the spaces between them are eight times
larger than in the original view.
If Use Layout Line Scaling is enabled, line
weights are no longer scaled and the dashed
lines display at the same size as in the
original view.
Because the view in this example is scaled
eight times larger in this case, the dashes and
line weights look relatively small and fine
when Use Layout Line Scaling is enabled.
with Use Layout Line Scaling disabled
with Use Layout Line Scaling enabled
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1172 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Print View Dialog
1173
Were the view rescaled to be smaller instead,
the line weights would look relatively large
and thick.
Printers and Line Weight
Line weight and print scaling are subject to
the limitations of the printer being used. For
example, you will not be able to see the
difference between a line that is 1/150th of
an inch wide and one that is 1/300th of an
inch wide when they are printed using a
printer that prints 150 dots per inch (DPI).
That is, a CAD line with a line weight of 1
will look the same as a CAD line with a line
weight of 4 when the Line Weight Scale is
set at 1 =1/600th of an inch and you print to
a printer capable of 150 DPI.
Setting an objects or group of objects line
weight to zero causes the lines to print as
thinly as possible.
Print View Dialog
To print from floor plan view, 3D
Vector Views, layout, CAD Details,
Time Tracker Logs, and the Materials List,
select File> Print> Print. The Print View,
Print Layout, Print Time Tracker Log or
Print Materials List dialog opens. The
settings that are available will vary
depending on which version of the dialog is
open.
If Remember Print Settings after Printing
is checked in the Drawing Sheet Setup
dialog, the settings in this dialog will be
saved and applied globally to all views of the
same type in all Chief Architect files. See
Print View Settings on page 1162.
The default Line Weight Scale of
1 =1/100 mm makes it easy to meet
many professional drawing standards and in
most cases should not be changed.
Note: 3D views that are not Vector Views can
be printed using Print Image.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1173 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1174
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Select the Name of thePrinter that you
would like to use from the drop-down
list. To print to .pdf, select Save as PDF
from the list, or choose a .pdf writer installed
on your system. See Printing to a PDF File
on page 1170.
Select the DPI,or Dots Per Inch to use
when printing, from the drop-down list.
The available options may vary depend-
ing on the selected printer.
Select the Paper Orientation, Size,
and Source. The available Size and
Source options are controlled by the selected
printers driver. See Printer Drivers on
page 1161.
When possible, the program will auto-
matically set the Size and Orientation to
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1174 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Print View Dialog
1175
match those of the Drawing Sheet. See
Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog on page
1164
In layout files only, specify the Print
Range. Only pages that have views or
objects drawn directly on them and are not
specified as Page Templates will print. Page
Templates and empty pages do not print. See
Layout Page Templates on page 1206.
Select All to print the entire drawing.
Select Current Sheet to print only the
currently active layout page.
Select Sheets to specify which layout
pages to print, then type the page num-
bers you wish to print, separated by com-
mas or by a dash. Not available in plan
files.
Specify the Print Source. Not available
in the Print Materials List dialog.
Select Drawing Sheet to print the entire
sheet even though you may be zoomed in
on a portion of the view.
Select Current Screen to print only that
portion of the active view that is currently
visible on screen. If you are zoomed out,
any blank space outside of the printable
objects in the view is ignored.
Specify the Drawing Scale of the
printed output. Not available in the
Print Materials List dialog or in Vector View
camera views or overviews. See Printing to
Scale on page 1168.
Fit to Paper prints the view on one page.
The program uses whatever scale is nec-
essary to fit the plan on one page.
When Fit to Paper is selected, specify
the percentage of the paper to be used.
The default value is 95%.
Select To Scale to print at the scale speci-
fied in the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.
See Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog on
page 1164.
To print a check plot, select Check Plot
at and choose a scale adjustment from the
drop-down list. See Check Plots on
page 1169.
Options - Only the Copies setting is
available in the Print Materials List
dialog.
Specify the number of Copies you would
like to print.
Check Print in Color to print in color or
clear the checkbox to print in either gray-
scale or black and white.
To print in grayscale, check Obey Color
On/Off Setting in the Preferences dia-
log before printing, then uncheck Print
in Color. See Appearance Panel on
page 86.
To print in black and white, uncheck
Obey Color On/Off Setting in the
Preferences dialog before printing, then
uncheck Print in Color. Lines and fill
colors print as either black or white,
depending on which is closer to the line
or fills actual color.
Note: To produce collated multiple copies,
specify the sheets in the desired order, sepa-
rated by commas.
3
4
5
Note: The Fit to Paper percentage value is
global - affecting all views in all files, and is
retained between sessions.
6
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1175 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1176
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Most black and white printers print a grey
scale approximation of the colors if Print in
Color is selected.
Advanced Options - Click the Open
System Print Dialog button to close
the Print View dialog and print using your
operating systems Print dialog instead. Not
available when No Printer is selected.
Control the appearance of the print job
Preview on the right side of the dialog.
Specify the Page that displays in the Pre-
view area.
Click the buttons to Zoom In, Zoom
Out, or Fit the selected Page to the
extents of the Preview area.
Uncheck Update Automatically to turn
off the print job Preview and prevent it
from updating as changes are made to the
settings in this dialog.
Click the Update button to update the
print job Preview to reflect the current
settings in this dialog. If Update Auto-
matically is unchecked, clicking Update
may force the Preview to be blank.
When Update Automatically is
checked, a preview of the current print
job displays here. The drawing sheet displays
as a white rectangle, and if multiple sheets
are required, you can scroll through them. If
the print job is large, a progress dialog may
display briefly as the preview draws or
updates.
To help prevent unwanted printed
output, information messages regarding
page size, resolution, and scale may display
here, depending on the settings in this dialog.
Print Image Dialog
Any view can be printed by selecting
File> Print Image. This is the only
way to print a Ray Trace or most 3D views.
See Rendering and Ray Tracing on page
895.
The Print Image dialog is similar to thePrint
View dialog; however, the printing process is
different. Print Image prints individual
pixels as opposed to vectors (lines).
7
8
9
10
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1176 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Print Image Dialog
1177
Select the Name of thePrinter you
wish to use from the drop-down list. To
print to .pdf, select Save as PDF from the
list, or choose a .pdf writer installed on your
system. See Printing to a PDF File on page
1170.
Select the DPI,or Dots Per Inch to use
when printing, from the drop-down list.
The available options may vary depend-
ing on the selected printer.
Select the Paper Orientation, Size,
and Source. The available Size and
Source options are controlled by the selected
printers driver. See Printer Drivers on
page 1161.
Specify the number of Copies you
would like to print.
Advanced Options - Click the Open
System Print Dialog button to close
the Print View dialog and print using your
operating systems Print dialog instead. Not
available when No Printer is selected.
Control the appearance of the print job
Preview on the right side of the dialog.
Specify the Page that displays in the Pre-
view area.
Click the buttons to Zoom In, Zoom
Out, or Fit the selected Page to the
extents of the Preview area.
Uncheck Update Automatically to turn
off the the print job Previewand prevent it
from updating as changes are made to the
settings in this dialog.
Click the Update button to update the
print job Preview to reflect the current
settings in this dialog. If Update Auto-
matically is unchecked, clicking Update
may force the Preview to be blank.
1
2
3
4
5
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1177 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1178
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
When Update Automatically is
checked, a preview of the current print
job displays here. If the print job is large, a
progress dialog may display briefly as the
preview draws or updates.
To help prevent unwanted printed
output, information messages regarding
page size and resolution may display here,
depending on the settings in this dialog.
Print Model
The Model Maker allows you to print
scaled drawings of wall and roof
surfaces in your plan that can be assembled
into a 3D model. Three types of prints are
created: walls, roof planes, and a.floor plan
wall layout template.
The system arranges as many wall or roof
sections as possible onto a single sheet. For
larger scale models, a printer with a larger
sheet sizes is helpful. If any wall surface,
roof surface, or floor plan view covers more
than one sheet, it prints by itself on the
number of sheets required. Models with large
surfaces may require a lot of paper.
Printing the Model
To print the model templates, choose File>
Print> Print Model . The Print Model
dialog opens.
A good way to understand which options
best meet your needs is to make a very
simple two story plan and try them out.
6 7
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1178 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Print Model
1179
Print Model Dialog
Select the Name of thePrinter that you
would like to use from the drop-down
list. To print to .pdf, select Save as PDF
from the list, or choose a .pdf writer installed
on your system. See Printing to a PDF File
on page 1170
Select the Paper Orientation, Size,
and Source. The available Size and
Source options are controlled by the selected
printers driver. See Printer Drivers on
page 1161.
1 2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1179 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1180
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Larger page sizes and Landscape orienta-
tion are usually best for Print Model.
Select All to print the entire drawing.
Wall Settings -
Uncheck Walls to prevent walls from
printing. When Walls is unchecked, most
of the other Wall Settings are disabled.
Uncheck Exterior Only to print interior
wall surfaces in addition to exterior sur-
faces. Printing interior wall surfaces
requires a lot more paper and is typically
only desirable when creating a model of
the current floor without a roof.
Check Fold Interior Down to print the
interior surface of each wall directlly
above its corresponding exterior surface
and upside down. This allows both walls
to be cut in one piece and folded over.
Check Combine Floors to print together
the exterior surfaces of walls that are on
top of each other. Interior surfaces of
those walls still print separately.
Allow Offset modifies the outcome of
the Combine Floors option. Normally,
the main layers of stacked walls must be
closely aligned and have the same thick-
ness for walls to combine. Check this box
to allow an offset of up to six inches (15
cm) and allow different thicknesses.
Check Railings to print railings along
with walls.
Check Outdoor Walls to print Fencing,
Retaining Walls, walls that define Exte-
rior type rooms, or that define no room.
Printing Outdoor Walls can require a con-
siderable amount of paper.
Check Foundation Walls to print walls
specified as Foundation Walls. When this
is unchecked, walls on Floor Zero that
are not specified as Foundation Walls
will print. See Foundation Walls on
page 258.
Uncheck Roofs to prevent roof planes
from printing.
Uncheck Plan View to prevent the Plan
View Wall Layout from printing.
Options -
Specify the Floor Thickness, which is
the thickness of the material you plan to
use for the models floor platform.
Specify the Scale to be used when print-
ing the model.
Specify the number of Copies to be
printed.
Check Print in Color to print in color.
Advanced Options - Click the Open
System Print Dialog button to close
the Print Model dialog and print using your
operating systems Print dialog instead. Not
available when No Printer is selected.
Control the appearance of the print job
Preview on the right side of the dialog.
Specify the Page that displays in the Pre-
view area.
Click the buttons to Zoom In, Zoom
Out, or Fit the selected Page to the
extents of the Preview area.
Check Update Automatically to have
the print job Preview display and update
as changes are made to the settings in this
dialog. This is not unchecked by default
3
4
5
6
7
8
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1180 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Print Model
1181
because updating the Preview in the Print
Model dialog can be time-consuming.
Click the Update button to update the
print job Preview to reflect the current
settings in this dialog. If Update Auto-
matically is unchecked, clicking Update
may force the Preview to be blank.
A preview of the current print job
displays here. The drawing sheet for
each page displays as a white rectangle, and
you can scroll through the pages. If the print
job is large, a progress dialog may display
briefly as the preview draws or updates.
To help prevent unwanted printed
output, information messages regarding
page size and resolution may display here,
depending on the settings in this dialog.
Assembling the Model
Once the templates have been printed, they
can be assembled. You need scissors, an
adhesive, and a rigid material like cardboard
or foamboard that can be easily cut and glued
to provide support for the 3D model.
The Model Maker produces templates of
wall and roof surfaces in the model, but does
not include tabs or other means of connecting
them together. If you wish, you can leave
extra paper beyond the template edges as you
cut them out for use assembling the model.
Wall Layout Template
Begin by laying out the Wall Layout
template. If it printed on multiple sheets, they
should be combined into one. Make sure that
exterior and interior wall surfaces line up
where the sheets join together.
Fasten the Wall Layout Template to a sturdy
surface to provide support for your walls.
Walls
Walls should be cut and fixed to a rigid
backing so that they can stand on their own
and support the weight of the roof or floors
above them. How they are cut and assembled
varies depending on the desired final
appearance of the model and how they were
printed.
Roofs
Roof planes are joined together when
possible before printing. For each roof
surface, the fascia and soffit surfaces are
attached at the eave.
All flattened roof/fascia/soffit surfaces are
placed into a CAD detail named Model
Detail. This is overwritten and updated each
time the roof group is printed for a particular
model. If the roof or portions of the roof need
to be reprinted, those pieces can be printed
from the detail.
9
10
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1181 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1182
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1182 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1183
Chapt er 39:
Layout
The Chief Architect layout facility provides a
set of easy to use tools for creating printed
construction documents. You can create your
own title block and border, then arrange
multiple views, details, notes, and more on a
single page for printing. Working drawings
or blueprints can be created in almost any
paper size.
Each layout can contain many pages, and
each page can contain multiple views,
details, images, CAD objects, text, or
contents and revision tables.
For detailed information about printing in
Chief Architect, see Printing and Plotting
on page 1159.
Chapter Contents
Layout Defaults
The Layout Tools
Creating a Layout File
CAD and Text in Layout
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDFs in Layout
Sending Views to Layout
Keeping Layout Views Current
Displaying Layout Views
Editing Layout Views
Editing Layout Lines
Layout Box Specification Dialog
Opening Layout Views
Managing Layout Links
Layout Page Management
Layout Page Information
Layout Page and Revision Tables
Printing Layout Files
Exporting Layout Files
Layout Defaults
To access the layout defaults for the
current layout file, select Edit>
Default Settings. The options in the Default
Settings dialog are similar to those found in
this same dialog in a plan file, although there
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1183 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1184
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
are fewer choices in the list. See Default
Settings on page 68.
Drawing Sheet Setup
The settings in the Drawing Sheet Setup
dialog are file-specific and are particularly
important considerations in layout files. See
Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog on page 1164.
Layout Page Display Options
Select Tools> Display Settings>
Display Options to open the Layout
Page Display Options dialog.
This dialog is similar to the Layers Display
Options dialog, but controls only the display
of objects drawn on the layout page, such as
CAD objects, text, dimensions, and imported
objects. The display of layout view boxes is
also controlled by the Layout Page Display
Options - but not the objects within those
views.
For information about how to use this dialog,
see Layer Display Options Dialog on page
144.
For information about controlling the display
of objects in views sent to layout, see
Displaying Layout Views on page 1193.
Page Templates
In addition to the default settings available in
layout files, you can create one or more Page
Templates. Page Templates let you create
features like a title block and border and then
apply those features to any of the pages of
your layout that you wish. See Layout Page
Templates on page 1206.
Layout File Templates
You can customize layout default settings
and Page Templates for future layouts and
create a template. See Template Files on
page 78.
The Layout Tools
There are a variety of tools available
to send views to layout and edit them,
as well as manage layout pages and links.
Many of the tools available in layout are
described in the Printing chapter. See The
Printing Tools on page 1163.
Sending Views to Layout
Select File> Send to Layout to open
the Send to Layout dialog and send
the current view to the specified layout page.
See Sending Views to Layout on page
1188.
In floor plan view, select a saved cross
section/elevation view symbol and
click the Send Cameras View to Layout
edit button. See Saving and Printing 3D
Views on page 885.
Select Tools> Layout> Layout Files to see a
list of the files that are referenced by the
layout. See Referenced Plan Files Dialog
on page 1202.
Editing Layout Views
A selected layout view can be edited much
like other box-based objects. See Editing
Box-Based Objects on page 198. In
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1184 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
The Layout Tools
1185
addition, a variety of edit tools allow you to
control the appearance of each view.
Select a layout view and click the
Open View edit button to open the
view that was originally sent to layout. This
tool is only available for dynamic views. See
Editing Dynamic Views on page 1195.
Select a layout view and click the
Rescale Layout edit button to open
the Change Scale dialog and apply a
different scale. See Rescaling Views on
page 1195.
Select a layout view and click the
Relink File edit button to open the
Choose Layout File Reference dialog and
relink the selected layout view. See
Relinking Layout Views on page 1203.
Select a layout view and click the
Layout Box Layers edit button to
open the Layer Display Options dialog for
the selected view. See Displaying Layout
Views on page 1193.
Select Tools> Layout> Edit Layout
to allow the lines of a Vector View
sent to layout to be edited individually. See
Editing Layout Lines on page 1196.
Managing Layout Pages
Select Tools> Layout> Edit Page
Information to open the Layout
Page Information dialog. See Layout Page
Information on page 1206.
Select Tools> Layout> Insert Page
Before to add a new layout page,
moving the current page and all following
pages up one page, as long as there is nothing
on page 1000.
Select Tools> Layout> Insert Page
After to add a new layout page,
leaving the current page where it is but
moving all following pages up one page, as
long as there is nothing on page 1000.
Select Tools> Layout> Delete Page
to delete the current layout page,
moving all following pages down one page,
as long as nothing is on the current page.
Select Tools> Layout> Exchange
With Next Page to switch the current
layout page with the following page. Not
available on Layout Page 1000.
Select Tools> Layout> Exchange
With Previous Page to switch the
current layout page with the page preceding
it. Not available on Layout Page 0.
Select Tools> Layout> Layout Page
Table to place a Layout Page Table.
See Layout Page Tables on page 1209.
Select Tools> Layout> Layout
Revision Table to place a Revision
Table. See Revision Tables on page 1209.
Viewing Layout Files
Use Tools> Layout> Page
Note: You can also modify the layers of the
layout file itself. See Layout Page Display
Options on page 1184.
You can also specify the page that an
object or group of objects displays on
in its specification dialog. See Line Style
Panel on page 1035.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1185 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1186
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Up, Page Down, and Change Layout Page
to navigate the layout document. See The
Current Page on page 1204.
Select Window> Swap Views to
switch between the current view and
the view that was current before it. See
Working in Multiple Views on page 849.
Click the Show Layout button to
switch to a layout file that is currently
open.
Creating a Layout File
To open an existing layout file, select
File> Open Layout. Browse to a
directory and select the layout file to open.
See Opening and Importing Files on page
57.
Only one layout can be open at a time. When
a layout file is open, it is listed at the bottom
of the Window menu as an open view.
Layout files are also listed in the Project
Browser. See Project Browser on page
1073.
In order to create a layout file, you must open
a new file and then save it.
Choose File> New Layout to create a
blank layout file. A layout file is
created with the name untitled.layout. New
layout files open to the first regular, non-
Template page and use the default and layer
settings associated with your layout
template. See Template Files on page 78.
If a layout file is not open when you try to
send a view to layout, a warning message
will ask you if you want to create a new
layout file. See Sending Views to Layout
on page 1188.
Select File> Save to save the layout
file. It is important that you save the
layout in the same directory as the plan file
from which views will be or have been sent
to the layout pages. See File Management
on page 47.
Although it is possible to use multiple plan
files with a layout, it is generally best to
associate only one plan file with a layout and
to use the same file name for both. If more
than one plan file is used, all should be saved
in the same directory as the layout file.
When you save your layout, take a moment
to also save the plan file associated with it.
CAD and Text in Layout
CAD objects, Text objects, as well as
dimensions can be incorporated into
your layout by both including them in your
views sent to layout and by drawing them on
the layout page.
When a view is sent to layout, the plan
and layout files become linked. If you
rename or move either file, this link will be
broken and the view will not display. See
Managing Layout Links on page 1201.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1186 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDFs in Layout
1187
On the Layout Page
CAD, text, and dimensions can be drawn
directly on any layout page, allowing you to
create a title block, border, as well as notes
and other annotations.
CAD, text, and dimensions created in layout
can be selected, edited, and deleted just as
they can in other views. See Editing Text
on page 996 and CAD Objects on page
1021.
To move Text or CAD objects to another
page, change the Page number in its
specification dialog. See Line Style Panel
on page 1200.
Any text or CAD objects that you would like
to display on multiple pages of your layout
file - for example, a title block and border -
should be drawn on a page specified as a
Page Template. See Layout Page
Templates on page 1206.
In Views Sent to Layout
CAD, text, and dimensions in views sent to
layout are scaled just like other objects in the
view. If you want text in a layout view to
print at a particular size, specify its size
based on the scaling you will use when you
send the view to layout. See Character Size
on page 982.
If you rotate a view on the layout page, any
text in that view will rotate as well, provided
that its Text Style is using the Rotate with
Plan setting. See Text Styles on page 1011.
If you wish to use Global Text Macros that
provide information about a view, such as its
drawing scale or the plans file name, make
sure that the text object is in the view sent to
layout - not on the layout page. See Text
Macros on page 1014.
A number of macros with information about
the layout view can also be added to a layout
views label as Object Specific Macros. See
Layout Box Borders and Labels on page
1193.
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDFs in Layout
Picture files, metafiles, and PDF files can be
included in views sent to layout or imported
directly onto a layout page. See Displaying
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes on page
1098.
Like CAD and text objects, imported
pictures, metafiles, and PDFs can be
included on Page Templates. See Layout
Page Templates on page 1206.
Views can also be sent to layout as pictures.
In fact, rendered and Ray Trace views sent to
layout are always treated as imported
pictures embedded in the file. See Send To
Layout Dialog on page 1189.
A picture, metafile, or PDF file imported
onto the layout page can be selected and
edited using its edit handles, edit tools and
specification dialog. See Editing Pictures,
Metafiles, and PDF Boxes on page 1098.
Embedded pictures and pdf files
increase layout file size. Limit the
number of large and/or multiple pictures.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1187 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1188
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Sending Views to Layout
Layout files can contain many
different views and details sent to it
from one or more plan files. To send the
active view from a plan file to layout, select
File> Send to Layout.
You can also send one or more saved, closed
cross section/elevation views to layout by
selecting the camera symbol and clicking the
Send Cameras View to Layout edit
button. See Saving and Printing 3D Views
on page 885.
When a view is sent to layout, the program
sends it to the layout file that is currently
open. While more than one plan file can be
open at once, only one layout file can be
open at a time.
If no layout file is open, the program
searches for a layout file with the same file
name as the plan that the view is being sent
from. If it cannot find such a layout file, it
will ask if you want to create a new layout
and send the view to it.
To send a view to layout
1. Prepare the view so that objects that
should be seen are visible and those that
should not are suppressed. See Layer
Display Options Dialog on page 144.
Remember that if the Reference Display
is turned on when a view is sent to lay-
out, it becomes a static part of the view
and cannot be turned off later. See Ref-
erence Floor Display on page 426.
2. Select File> Send to Layout . In the
Send to Layout dialog, the available
options vary depending on the type of
view being sent to layout.
3. Click OK to send the view to the speci-
fied layout page. Depending on the type
of view and size of the model, you may
see a progress indicator in the Status
Bar. See The Status Bar on page 38.
If there are layer settings that you use
often, it may be helpful to define custom
layer sets for your layout files. See Layer
Sets on page 141.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1188 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Sending Views to Layout
1189
Send To Layout Dialog
Specify the desired Send Position for
the view. These options are available
for all types of views.
Send to Layout Page # - Enter a page
number to send the view to.
Check Snap to Active CAD Point to
snap the view you are sending to layout
to the active CAD Point. See Point
Tools on page 1026.
Check Show Layout Page to go to the
selected layout page when you click OK.
Which Send Options are available
depends on the type of view being sent
to layout.
Select Entire Plan/View to send to lay-
out the extent of the plan that is visible
when you click Fill Window . This
option is available for Vector views, wall
details, and cross section/elevation views.
Select Current Screen to send only what
is shown on screen to layout. This option
is available for Vector Views and Wall
Details.
Select Current Screen As Image to send
only what is shown on screen to layout as
an embedded image. See Picture File
Box Specification Dialog on page 1090.
This option is available for all views, and
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1189 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1190
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
is the only option available for rendered
and Ray Trace views.
Uncheck Make Copy of Active Layer
Set to reference the currently active layer
set in the layout view. When this option is
checked, a copy of the currently active
layer set is created for use by the layout
view. You can specify a New Name for a
copied layer set if you wish. The copied
layout set is saved with the plan file that
the view is sent from. Your choice is
maintained between sessions. See Lay-
out Layer Sets on page 150.
Select a radio button to specify the
method of Scaling for the view sent to
layout.
Select Fit to Sheet (No Scale) to send the
view to layout at approximately half the
size of the layout drawing sheet. Once on
the layout page, the view can be resized.
Specify the exact scale for the view in
layout. The view can be rescaled later
from layout if necessary. Both Imperial
and metric units of measurement are
available and can be selected indepen-
dently.
When views are sent to layout at different
scales, line weights and line styles are
subject to the same scaling. See Line
Weights and Scaling on page 1171. In
most cases this is not desirable. When
Use Layout Line Scaling is checked, the
lines in views sent to layout appear the
same as lines drawn directly on layout.
This option is not available for rendered
views.
The Vector View Options are only
available when a 3D view using the
Vector View Rendering Technique is sent to
layout. See Rendered and Vector Views on
page 854. These settings are preserved
between sessions.
Check Use Edge Line Defaults and
specify a Default Line Weight to over-
ride all layer specific and object specific
line weight settings when the view is sent
to layout. If unchecked, the layout view
respects the Surface Edge Lines settings
in the 3D View Defaults dialog. See 3D
View Defaults Dialog on page 859.
Check Use Pattern Line Defaults and
specify a Default Pattern Weight to
override the Line Weight setting in the
Define Material dialog. See General
Panel on page 832.
Uncheck Merge Generated Lines to
prevent the merging of colinear lines.
Horizontal and vertical lines still merge.
If Merge Generated Lines is selected
and a cross section/elevation view is sent
to layout, the program merges any lines
that are superimposed or parallel with
each other so that the layout has only one
line rather than several. This makes the
final view easier to edit in layout if neces-
sary, but may slow down the process of
sending 3D views containing non-vertical
or horizontal lines to layout.
Keeping Layout Views Current
It is not uncommon for changes to be made
to a plan after views have been sent to layout.
Some views will update automatically when
changes are made that are visible in the view.
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1190 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Keeping Layout Views Current
1191
Depending on the type of view, some may
update automatically and other must be
updated manually. If a plan changes after
views of the model are sent to layout, some
of the views may become out of date.
J ust some elements in a view window do not
print, they are not included when a view is
sent to layout: for example, the Reference
Grid and camera symbols in floor plan view.
Dynamic and Static Views
A dynamic view references the view saved
with the original plan. Any changes made to
the original plan update the dynamic layout
view.
For information about controlling the display
of dynamic views in layout, see Displaying
Layout Views on page 1193.
A static view does not reference the original
plan and does not update when the plan
changes. Static views are like a snapshot
taken at a specific time; subsequent changes
do not appear in that snapshot. Changes
made in the original plan must be resent to
layout manually.
Floor Plan Views
and CAD Details
Floor plan views and CAD Details sent to
layout are dynamic: any changes made to
these views in the plan are automatically
reflected in layout.
All editing done in floor plan view or a
CAD Detail is automatically reflected on
the layout page.
The display of all layers in these views is
under your control. See Layout Layer
Sets on page 150.
A few elements are not dynamic. Once a
floor plan view is sent to layout, these are not
affected by changes in the plan:
The default Display in Plan View setting
for pony walls becomes a permanent part
of the layout view. See Pony Walls on
page 260.
The floor level shown in a view sent to
layout does not change if you move to a
different floor in the plan. See Multiple
Floors on page 417.
The Reference Display setting in a
view sent to layout is unaffected if the
Reference Display is turned on or off in
the plan. See Reference Floor Display
on page 426.
The Active Defaults that are in use
when a floor plan view is sent to layout
are retained with the view and are not
affected when you switch to different
defaults in the plan. See Using Active
Defaults on page 75.
Although changes in the plan do not affect a
layout views floor level, its Reference
Display setting, or its Active Defaults, you
can specify all of these in the views Layout
Box Specification dialog. See Plan View
Panel on page 1199.
Camera callouts are included in floor
plan views sent to layout when the
Cameras layer is turned on in the view.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1191 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1192
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Cross Sections/Elevations
Views created using the Cross Section/
Elevation , Wall Elevation , and
Backclipped Cross Section tools are
dynamic, but their behavior in layout is
different from other dynamic views.
CAD objects, text, and dimenions can be
added to cross section/elevation views. If
the view has been sent to layout, they are
automatically shown in the layout view
provided that their layer is set to display
in the views layer set. See Layout
Layer Sets on page 150.
CAD objects added in a cross section/ele-
vation view can only be edited in the
cross section/elevation view.
Double-clicking a cross section/eleva-
tion view in layout using the Select
Objects tool activates the original
view, allowing you to modify the model
or add CAD objects.
The lines that define cross section/eleva-
tion views in layout are automatically
generated copies that are no longer linked
to the 3D model. Once in layout, these
lines can be edited using the Edit
Layout tool. See Editing Layout
Views on page 1194.
Updating Cross Sections/
Elevations
If a cross section/elevation view is sent to
layout,and that camera view is later closed
while the layout sheet is open, you will be
asked to choose whether to update the view
on the layout page.
If the layout view is up-to-date with the
3D model or if you do not want your
changes to be seen in the layout view,
select No.
To update the view on the layout page
choose OK. Any changes that you might
have made to the layout view will be lost.
For this reason, you should only make
changes made to a layout view using the
Edit Layout tool after the model has
been finalized.
Static Views
With the exception of Cross Section/
Elevation , Backclipped Cross Section
, and Wall Elevation views, all
camera views, overviews, and Ray Trace
views sent to layout are static. They are
treated as imported images embedded in the
layout file. See Picture File Box
Specification Dialog on page 1090.
Any changes made to the 3D model have no
effect on static views. To update these views
in layout, delete the old view and send a new
one. See Dynamic and Static Views on
page 1191.
The lines that define Vector Views in layout
are automatically generated copies that are
no longer linked to the 3D model. Once in
layout, these lines can be edited using the
Edit Layout button. See Editing Layout
Lines on page 1196.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1192 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Displaying Layout Views
1193
Displaying Layout Views
Select Window> Show Layout to
make an open layout file the current
view.
Layout View Layers
When a view is sent to layout, the active
layer set is used. Some view types give you
the option of duplicating and renaming the
active layer set before sending the view to
layout. See Sending Views to Layout on
page 1188.
Whether or not the layer settings in a view
can be edited after it has been sent to layout
depends on the views type. See Dynamic
and Static Views on page 1191.
The layer set used by a dynamic or semi-
dynamic view can be modified using the
Layout Box Layers edit tool.
A different layer set can also be selected
for dynamic and semi-dynamic views
using theLayout Box Layers edit
tool.
In addition, dynamic and semi-dynamic
views layer settings can be modified by
opening the original view. See Opening
Layout Views on page 1200.
Static views cannot be changed. Simi-
larly, even in dynamic views, some fea-
tures are static and cannot be altered.
The layer set referenced by a dynamic layout
view is saved with the plan rather than the
layout file.
To use the Layout Box Layers tool
1. Select a layout view.
2. Click theLayout Box Layers edit
button to open the Layer Display
Options dialog for the selected view.
See Layer Display Options Dialog on
page 144.
If this edit button is not available, the
view is not dynamic.
The layer set for the layout view dis-
plays at the top of the dialog.
The settings for the currently selected
layer display below.
3. You can make changes to settings of the
current layer set.
Changes made to this layer set affect all
other views that use it, not necessarily
the selected layout view alone.
4. Alternatively, you can select a different
layer set for the layout view from the
Layer Set drop-down list.
5. Be sure to Save your changes in the
plan file before closing the layout.
Layout Box Borders and Labels
A border will display around each layout box
when the Layout Box Borders layer is set
to display in the Layout Page Display
Options dialog. See Layout Page Display
Options on page 1184.
Layout boxes can also display labels when
the Layout Box Labels layer is set to
display. See Object Labels on page 1221.
Do not delete layer sets that are used in
layouts.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1193 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1194
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Automatic layout box labels display basic
information about the original view in the
plan. For example, floor plan view sent to
layout from Floor 1 will have an automatic
label that says, 1st Floor. A camera view
sent to layout will have a label that states the
cameras name. Layout box labels have their
own edit handles and can be customized to
include text as well as Object Specific Text
Macros. See Text Macros on page 1014.
Missing Layout Views
If a view on the layout page can be selected
but cannot be seen, its link to the plan from
which it was sent may have been broken. See
Managing Layout Links on page 1201.
Editing Layout Views
To edit a layout view, first select its layout
box using the Select Objects tool. Once
selected, the view box can be edited using its
edit handles, edit toolbar or specification
dialog. See Layout Box Specification
Dialog on page 1197.
Using the Edit Handles
Layout view boxes can be edited like CAD
boxes. See Editing Box-Based Objects on
page 198.
Floor plan views and CAD Details can be
rotated. Both the layout box and the view
inside it rotate. Cross section/elevation and
3D views sent to layout cannot be rotated.
In the Specification Dialog
Layout view boxes can be customized in
their specification dialog. See Layout Box
Specification Dialog on page 1197.
Using the Edit Tools
A selected layout view or views can be
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
on the edit toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar
on page 34.
Using Dimensions
Like other CAD box-based objects, layout
views can be moved and resized using
dimensions. See Moving Objects Using
Dimensions on page 971.
Moving Views to a
Different Page
To move a view from one layout page to
another, select the view, click the Open
Object edit button, and change the Page
on the Line Style panel of the Layout Box
Specification dialog. See Layout Box
Specification Dialog on page 1197.
Copying Views
J ust like many objects, views sent to layout
can be copied and pasted onto different
layout pages or even into different layout
files.
As a general rule, though, if multiple copies
of a view are needed, it is best to send the
view to layout as many times as necessary
because each view can then be controlled
independently.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1194 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Editing Layout Views
1195
Bear in mind, too, that if a layout has views
copied from a different layout file and is later
moved to a different location on your
computer, the link to the original plan file
may be broken. See Keeping Layout Views
Current on page 1190.
Editing Dynamic Views
Select a dynamic view and click the Open
View edit button to open the original
view that was sent to layout. You can also
double-click a dynamic view in layout to
open the original view. See Opening Layout
Views on page 1200.
Resizing Scaled Views
Scaled views retain their scale regardless of
how you resize the border. You can resize the
border proportionally from a corner handle
or select one of the handles on an edge to
change the size in one direction only. The
image may be cropped if the border is resized
small enough.
Resizing Non-Scaled Views
If the view was sent to layout using the Fit to
Sheet setting, or if a view is set to Fit to
Drawing Sheet in the Change Scale dialog,
resizing may have one of several results:
Drag a corner handle in or out to resize
both the border and the image proportion-
ally.
If you drag a side handle in or out, the
image stays the same size, but the border
changes. If you make the border smaller,
it may crop the image; if you make it
larger, you may show more of the image.
Rescaling Views
To change the scale of a floor plan,
CAD Detail, cross section/elevation,
or wall elevation sent to layout, select the
view and click the Rescale Layout View edit
button. The Change Scale dialog opens.
ChooseNo Scale to remove any
specific scale factor associated with the
selected view.
Select the second option to specify a
scale for the view. When its scale is
changed, the layout view will resize.
In most cases, you should specify a scale for
floor plan views, CAD Details, and cross
sections/elevation views. Typical scales are
in =1ft and 1 m =50 m.
When a view is sent to layout at a scale
other than that of the original view, line
weights and line styles are affected. In many
cases, this is not desirable. Check Use
Layout Line Scaling to make lines in the
selected view appear the same as lines of the
same weight drawn on the layout page. See
Line Weights and Scaling on page 1171.
1
2
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1195 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1196
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Editing Layout Lines
Individual edge and pattern lines in
any Vector View sent to layout can be
selected, edited, and drawn using the Edit
Layout Lines tool. Changes made using this
tool have no effect on the 3D model. See
Rendered and Vector Views on page 854.
CAD lines in Vector Views sent to layout
cannot be edited with the Edit Layout
Lines tool. Only lines generated by the
program can be edited using this tool.
Selecting Layout Lines
To select a line in a layout view, click the
Edit Layout Lines button and click on
the line. You can select additional lines in the
same layout view using the marquee select or
group select methods. See Selecting
Objects on page 176.
Adding New Layout Lines
Add a line to a layout Vector View by
clicking the Edit Layout Lines button,
selecting a layout view, and drawing a new
line within the layout box. Once drawn, this
line can be edited like any other layout line
and maintains its position in relation to the
layout view it was drawn in.
Editing Layout Lines
When a layout line is selected, you can use
the edit handles to change its size, angle, and
position, as with standard CAD lines. A
selected layout line can also be deleted like a
standard CAD line; however, many of the
edit tools that are available for standard CAD
objects are not availble for layout lines.
Angle Snaps , Object Snaps , and
Grid Snaps are all available in layout. See
Snap Settings on page 154.
Layout line properties can be changed in the
Layout Line Specification dialog.
Layout Line Specification
Dialog
Use the Edit Layout Lines tool to
select one or more lines in a Vector
View sent to layout, then click the Open
Object edit button to open theLayout Line
Specification dialog.
The dialog lets you to change the properties
of the selected line(s) without changing the
properties of all lines in the view.
The full set of CAD editing tools is not
available when using Edit Layout Lines.
It is often more efficient to edit lines in a Vec-
tor View by sending it to a CAD Detail for edit-
ing first. See CAD Detail from View on page
1066.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1196 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Layout Box Specification Dialog
1197
Specify the selected line or lines Line
Type.
Select Edge Line to specify the selected
line(s) as defining the edges of the sur-
face of 3D objects.
Select Pattern Line to specify the
selected line(s) as patterns lines for mate-
rials such as brick, siding, and shingles.
When multiple lines are selected, No
Change may be available.
Specify the Line Weight of the
Selected Line(s). See Line Weights
on page 1170.
Type the desired Weight, or thickness, of
the selected line(s) in the text field.
Check Use Default to use the default
value for the selected Line Type. The
default can be set in the Layout Box
Specification dialog. See General
Panel on page 1198.
Specify the selected line or lines Line
Style. See Line Styles on page 1056.
Select a line style from the drop-down
list.
Check Use Default Style to use the
default style for the selected Line Type.
The default can be set in the Layout Box
Specification dialog.
Specify the selected line or lines Line
Color.
Click the Color bar to select a line color.
See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog
on page 843.
Check Use Default Color to use the
default color for the selected Line Type.
The default can be set in the Layout Box
Specification dialog.
Layout Box Specification Dialog
Select a layout view and click the
Open Object edit button to open the
Layout Box Specification dialog, which is
very similar to the CAD Box Specification
dialog.
1
2
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1197 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1198
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
General Panel
Specify the Center Point of the
selected views bounding box. See 3D
Drafting on page 29.
X Position - The location of the layout
box relative to the absolute origin.
Y Position - The location of the layout
box relative to the absolute origin.
Specify the Size/Orientation of the
selected views bounding box.
Angle - The current angle of the layout
box relative to a horizontal line pointing
towards the right hand side of the screen.
Specify the Number Height for
Dimensions in the selected view. Type
a (D) to use the default height for the selected
view. See Dynamic Defaults on page 69.
This setting is only available for views sent
to layout from floor plan view and CAD
Details. It affects the size of dimension
numbers in the layout view but not in the
original view in the plan file.
Specify the Edge Line Defaults for the
selected cross section/elevation view.
The initial values are defined in the Send to
Layout dialog. See Send To Layout Dialog
on page 1189.
Specify the default Line Weight, or
thickness, for all edge lines in the view.
1
2
3
The Number Height setting is included
for legacy files and is not the recom-
mended method of specifying dimension
size. See Dimension Labels on page 965.
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1198 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Layout Box Specification Dialog
1199
Specify the default Line Color for all
edge lines in the view.
Specify the Pattern Line Defaults for
the selected cross section/elevation
view. The initial values are defined in the
Send to Layout dialog.
Specify the default Line Weight, or
thickness, for all pattern lines in the view.
Specify the default Line Color for all
pattern lines in the view.
Plan View Panel
The Plan View panel is only available when
the selected view is a floor plan view. See
Floor Plan Views and CAD Details on
page 1191.
Specify the floor and Annotation Set
associated with the selected view.
Select the Current Floor shown in the
layout view from the drop-down list.
Select the Current Annotation Set from
the drop-down list. The options available
are limited to the Annotation Sets saved
in the views plan file; if Active Defaults
were in use when the view was sent to
layout, this will be one of choices.
The Current Annotation Set does not not
affect the layout views appearance, but
will determine what Annotation Set is
active if you use the Open View edit
tool to return to the original view. See
Annotation Sets on page 1200.
Check Show Reference Floor to
include the Reference Floor in the
selected view and enable the settings below.
See Reference Floor Display on page 426.
Select which floor to use as the Refer-
ence Floor from the drop-down list.
Select the Reference Layer Set to use
from the drop-down list.
Check Draw Reference Floor First to
draw the Reference Floor before the
drawing the objects on the floor shown in
the view. When this is unchecked, the
5
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1199 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1200
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Reference Floor draws last and appears in
front of the objects on the current floor.
Line Style Panel
The settings on the Line Style panel let you
to set the properties of the selected layout
boxs border and to specify what layout page
it is located on.
For more information, see Line Style Panel
on page 1035.
Fill Style Panel
For information about the Fill Style panel,
see Fill Style Panel on page 1048.
Label Panel
Layout box labels display in layout when the
Layout Box Labels layer is turned on and
use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See
Layout Box Borders and Labels on page
1193.
For more information about the settings on
this panel, see Label Panel on page 1223.
Opening Layout Views
Dynamic and semi-dynamic views
sent to layout refer to an original view
in a plan. From the layout page, you can
access that original view by selecting a
layout box, then clicking the Open View edit
button. The original view can also be opened
by double-clicking the layout view using the
Select Objects tool.
Changes made in this view update in the
original layout view. Be aware that
depending on the changes you make, other
views may also be affected.
Layer Sets
Notice the name of the current layer set that
displays in the Active Layer Set Control
drop-down list. Changes made to this layer
set affect not only the current view, but also
the associated layout view and any other
views that use this layer set. See Layer
Sets on page 141.
Annotation Sets
Floor plan views, cross section/elevation
views, and CAD Details sent to layout each
have a set of Active Defaults associated with
it. When you send one of these view types to
layout, these defaults become associated
with the layout view; and when you open the
original view of one of these types of layout
views, its defaults will become active
automatically. See Multiple Saved
Defaults on page 70.
You can specify which defaults are
associated with a floor plan view sent to
layout by specifying the views Current
Annotation Set in the Layout Box
Specification dialog See Plan View Panel
on page 1199.
It is important to remember that when a
plan view is accessed by opening a
dynamic layout view, that view uses the same
layer set as the layout view.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1200 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Managing Layout Links
1201
Please note that the Current Annotation Set
associated with a layout view always uses the
layer set assigned to the layout view,
regardless of how the Annotation Set itself
may be defined.
Managing Layout Links
Chief Architect allows you to review plan
files linked to a current layout, change
existing links from one plan file to another,
and reestablish links to plan files that have
been moved or renamed.
Protecting Layout Links
Careful file management is needed to avoid
missing files and disrupted layout links. See
File Management on page 47.
The following guidelines can help prevent
layout links from being broken:
Save plan files in the same folder as the
layout, or in a sub-folder in that folder.
Legacy plan files referenced by a layout
must have the .plan file extension. Plans
from version 9.5 and prior with the .pl
file extension cannot link to .layout files.
Custom graphics included in a plan or
layout should be embedded in the file or
saved in the same folder as the layout.
Plan files used to save CAD details or
other information should be copied and
saved in the same folder as the layout.
Plan files should never be renamed. If a
new name is desired, make a copy of the
file and rename the copy. Changes made
in the copy do not affect views sent to
layout from the original plan.
Avoid sending cross section/elevations to
layout more than once. Changes made to
the view can affect layout views in unin-
tended ways.
Layout files should never be moved. If a
layout file must be moved, the entire
folder it is saved in should be moved or
copied and then moved.
Use File> Backup Entire Plan to
create an independent copy of the origi-
nal layout. Avoid use of Save As. See
Backup Entire Plan on page 64.
Do not delete any layer sets that are used
by a view that was sent to layout. See
Layer Sets on page 141.
If you relink a layout view to a new plan,
be sure to save the plan file so the layer
sets are updated.
Finding Missing Files
When a layout file is opened, the program
performs a breadth-first search for
dynamically linked views. This means that it:
Looks first in the same folder as the lay-
out.
Looks next in the folders located closest
to the layouts folder.
If a missing file is not found, it expands
its search further from the location of the
layout file until the files with the linked
views are located.
If a missing file is not found, a second
breadth-first search will be performed,
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1201 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1202
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
searching all zipped files found in the
first search.
If a file remains missing after the program
performs a search of your system, a Warning
message will indicate that the program could
not successfully open all of the layouts
associated plan files. When you click OK,
the Layout Files dialog will open, allowing
you to relink the layout to its missing
associated files.
Referenced Plan Files Dialog
The Plan Files Present section lists all
files with intact links to the layout.
The Plan Files Not Found section lists
the names of files with disrupted links
to the layout. Any files listed here have been
moved, renamed, or deleted and cannot be
found by the program. Intervention is
required to find these files and reestablish
their links to the layout.
Select a missing file and click the Browse
button just above the Plan Files Not Found
field to open the Browse For Missing File
dialog, which is a typical Open dialog. See
Opening and Importing Files on page 57.
Locate the missing file in your systems
directory structure. When the missing file
is selected, click Open to link it to the
layout.
You can also redirect an intact link to
from a File Present in Layout to a differ-
ent file in the same manner.
Be sure to choose File> Save in the
layout file when the missing files have been
located to save their links to the layout file.
You can access the Layout Files dialog at
any time by selecting Tools> Layout>
Layout Files while a layout file is open.
Results of Missing Files
If all missing files are correctly redefined,
the layout opens when you click OK.
If an error message displays, one or more of
the missing files could not be replaced by the
redefined file. Click OK to continue. The
layout opens, but with the following
characteristics:
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1202 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Managing Layout Links
1203
1. Any floor plan views or CAD Details
associated with the missing file(s) are
blank. Only the border displays if the
Layout Box Borders layer is set to dis-
play. See Layout Page Display
Options on page 1184.
2. Any elevations or cross sections associ-
ated with the missing file(s) show the
automatically generated lines, but any
added CAD objects are absent.
Relinking Layout Views
You can change the file that a dynamic
layout view is linked to by selecting
the view and clicking the Relink File edit
button. The Choose Layout File Reference
dialog opens. This dialog is a typical Open
File dialog: select the file that you want to
link to and click Open. See Opening and
Importing Files on page 57.
If you want to relink all references to this
file, use the Layout Files dialog by choosing
Tools> Layout> Layout Files .
Missing Layer Sets
The layer set associated with each view in a
layout is saved with the plan file from which
the view was sent. J ust as it is important to
not move, rename, or delete the plan file, it is
important that you not rename or delete a
layer set used by a layout view. See
Opening and Importing Files on page 57.
If a layer set used by a layout view cannot be
found when the layout is opened, the
Missing Layer Set dialog will display.
The Layout Box Information
describes the layout view that is
missing a layer set, indicating:
The Layout Page where the view in
question is located;
View Information, which describes the
contents of the view in question,
The Plan Filename of the plan file that
the layer set is missing from.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1203 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1204
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
The Layer Sets options allow you to
replace the missing layer set.
The name of the Missing Layer Set dis-
plays for reference.
Select a replacement layer set from the
Available Layer Sets drop-down list.
Click the Define button to open the
Layout Page Display Options dialog,
where you can make changes to the
selected layer set.
Layout Page Management
There are a variety of tools that let you
navigate and organize the pages of a layout
file.
In the Project Browser
All pages in a layout file that are in use are
listed in the Project Browser, including all
pages with content and Page Templates. See
Project Browser on page 1073.
Typically, blank layout pages are not listed in
the Project Browser; however, if a new page
is inserted using the contextual menu in the
Project Browser, that new, blank page will be
listed..
The three types of pages can be distinguished
by the icon to the left of their names:
The contextual menu for a layout page in the
Project Browser allows you to view it, edit
its Layout Page information, move it relative
to other pages, or delete it. See Contextual
Menus on page 35.
The Current Page
The current layout page is
indicated at the center of the
Layout Page Up/Down buttons. When a
layout file is first created, the current page is
page one.
The current layout page is the default target
of any view sent to layout. If sent to the
wrong page, a view may be moved from one
page to another. To do this, select the view
you want to move, then click the Open
Object edit button to open the Layout
Box Specification dialog. You can change
the page number on the Line Style panel. See
Layout Box Specification Dialog on page
1197.
To navigate between layout pages
Click the arrow buttons on either side of
the Layout Page button.
Click the Current Page number between
the arrows to open the Go To Layout
Page dialog. Enter a page number and
click OK.
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1204 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Layout Page Management
1205
Select Page Up or Page Down from the
Tools> Layout> menu.
Press Shift +N (up one page) or Shift +
M (down one page) on the keyboard.
Double-click on a page in the Project
Browser.
Adding and Deleting Pages
To begin work on a new page, simply send a
view to that page, or navigate to it and begin
drawing.
To insert a layout page in front of
or behind the current page, select
Tools> Layout> Insert Page Before or
Insert Page After. Any pages that follow the
new page move up one, provided that
nothing is located on page 1000.
You can also right-click on a page in the
Project Browser and select either Insert
Page Before or Insert Page After from the
contextual menu.
To remove the current page from the
layout file, select Tools> Layout>
Delete Page. The current page and all
information on it - including any views - will
be completely removed. You can also right-
click on a layout page in the Project Browser
and select Delete Page.
Page Templates assigned to other pages
cannot be deleted, and neither can page zero.
See Layout Page Zero on page 1206.
Exchanging Pages
Select Tools> Layout> Exchange
With Next Page to switch the current
layout page with the following page. Not
available on Layout Page 1000.
Select Tools> Layout> Exchange
With Previous Page to switch the
current layout page with the page preceding
it. Not available on Layout Page 0.
Layout Page Information
The Edit Page Information tool lets
you specify any layout page as a Page
Template or add information about it which
can then be included in layout and revision
tables.
Layout Page Numbering
By default, layout pages begin with zero,
which is the default Page Template, and
proceed in ascending order to page 1000. If
this does not meet your needs, you can create
your own numbering convention using the
Label setting in the Layout Page
Information dialog. See Layout Page
Information on page 1206.
To do this, begin by typing a prefix of your
choice followed by a pound (#) sign in the
Label field - for example, A#. The
program will replace the #with a numeral 1
on the first page with that particular prefix in
its Label, and will increase the number by
one on every page that follows if it too has
the identical prefix in its Label.
Note: Layout pages do not print if they are
blank, even if a border and title block are
present.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1205 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1206
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Custom page numbering can be added to any
page - including Page Templates. Regular
pages do not inherit this information from
their specified Template, however: it must be
added to each page individually.
Layout Page Templates
Layout Page Templates allow you to create a
title block and border in one place and then
assign them for use on any other layout pages
that you wish. Multiple Page Templates can
be created in the same layout file. Note that if
a layout page is specified as a Page Template,
it will not print as part of a print rage. Page
Templates can be printed as the Current
Sheet, however. See Print View Dialog on
page 1173.
Add anything to a Page Template that you
want on some or all of your printed layout
pages, such as:
Title Block. See Text, Callouts, and
Markers on page 979.
Borders. See CAD Objects on page
1021.
Text Macros. SeeText Macros on page
1014.
Imported images. See Images on page
1082.
You can assign a Page Template to any
layout page, or specify any page as a Page
Template, in the Layout Page Information
dialog.
For more information about creating a title
block and border for your layout template,
see Creating a Border and Title Block on
page 204 of the Users Guide.
Layout Page Zero
In version X5 and prior, Layout Page Zero
was the only available Page Template. In
version X6, it functions in much the same
way by default: it is specified as a Page
Template with the title Default Page
Template, and it is assigned to all pages.
Because of its special purpose, page zero
cannot be deleted.
Layout Page Information
The Edit Page Information tool
opens the Layout Page Information
dialog, which you can use to add title,
revision, and other information to the current
layout page. This information can then be
used to create layout and revision tables, as
well as used in text macros.
You can also use this tool to specify the
current page as a Template, or to assign a
Template to the current page.
The Layout Page Information dialog can be
opened in several ways:
Select Tools> Layout> Edit Page Infor-
mation .
Note: The printable area varies from printer to
printer. For best results, inset layout borders
1/2" to 3/4" from the paper edge.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1206 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Layout Page Information
1207
Click the Edit Page Information
toolbar button.
Right-click on a layout page in the Proj-
ect Browser and select Edit Page Infor-
mation from the contextual menu.
Layout Page Information Dialog
The Page Information options let you
add information to layout pages that
can be shown in a Layout Page Table or
added to text using a macro. The Label and
Title will also display in the Project Browser.
Choose the Selected Page, which is the
page selected for editing in this dialog,
from the drop-down list. Not available
when the dialog is opened via the Project
Browser contextual menu.
Specify the selected pages Label. If a
cross section/elevation view is sent to this
layout page, this Label can display in the
cameras callout label in floor plan view.
See Camera Labels and Callouts on
page 872.
Specify the selected pages Title.
Specify the selected pages Description.
1
If you type a pound sign #in the Label
field, it will be replaced by the current
layout page number on the layout sheet. See
Layout Page Numbering on page 1205.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1207 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1208
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Specify the selected pages Comments.
Check Include in Layout Table to
include the above information about the
selected page in a Layout Table. If Use as
Page Template is checked, this box will
be unchecked automatically.
The Page Template Options let you
associate the selected layout page with
a template, or specify it as a template. See
Layout Page Templates on page 1206.
Check Use as Page Template to specify
the selected page as a template that can
be assigned to other pages, but not
printed. This box cannot be unchecked if
the current page is the Page Template
assigned to other pages.
Assign a Page Template to the selected
page by choosing one from the drop-
down list. Not available when Use as
Page Template is checked.
The Page Revisions settings let you
manage the revisions associated with
the selected page. Revisions can be shown in
a Revision Table or added to text using a
macro. See Revision Tables on page 1209.
A table listing any revisions associated
with the selected page displays for refer-
ence. Click on a line item in the table to
select it.
Click the New button to open the Layout
Revision Specification dialog and add a
new revision to the selected page.
Click the Edit button to open the Layout
Revision Specification dialog and edit
the selected revision.
Click the Delete button to remove the
selected revision from the table.
Click the Move Up or Move Down but-
ton to adjust the position of the selected
revision in the table accordingly.
Revision Specification Dialog
Select Tools> Layout> Add Layout
Revision to open the Revision
Specification dialog. You can also click the
New or Edit button in the Layout Page
Information dialog to open this dialog.
Revised Pages - Specify which pages
the selected revision applies to.
Revision Information -
Specify the revisions Label.
Specify the Date that the revision was
made. The program populates this field
with the current date automatically.
Specify who the revision was Revised
By. The program populates this field with
your Designer Information by default.
See Designer Information on page
1075.
Specify a Description of the revision.
2
3
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1208 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Layout Page and Revision Tables
1209
Check Include in Revision Table to
include this revision in a Layout Table for
the selected page.
Layout Page and Revision Tables
Title, revision, and other information can be
added to each layout page and used to create
tables of contents and revision schedules.
Layout Tables are similar to schedules and
can be edited much the same way that
schedules can. See Editing Schedules on
page 1213.
Layout Page Tables
Select Tools> Layout> Layout Page
Table, then click on a layout page to
place a Layout Page Table that that location.
Layout Page Tables list all pages in the
current file that have Layout Page
Information specified, are set to be included
in Layout Page Tables, and have data on
them. See Layout Page Information on
page 1206.
If you place a Layout Page Table on a Page
Template, it will display on every page in the
current layout that uses that template and will
list all pages that have data and are set to be
included in Layout Page Tables.
Revision Tables
Select Tools> Layout> Layout
Revision Table, then click on a layout
page to place a Layout Revision Table that
that location. Layout Revision Tables list all
revisions associated with the current page.
Unlike Layout Page Tables, Layout Revision
Tables are page-specific. If you place a
Layout Revision Table on a Page Template, it
will display on every page that uses that
template, but it will only list revisions
associated with the current page. See
Layout Page Templates on page 1206.
Printing Layout Files
Printing layout files is similar to
printing a view in a plan file. Select
File> Print> Print to open thePrint dialog.
See Print View Dialog on page 1173.
As in plan views, printing options for layouts
are set in the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.
These options apply to all pages of the layout
file. See Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog on
page 1164.
If a page does not have any data on it, it will
not print. Only pages with one or more views
sent to them or Text, CAD, or Dimensions
drawn on them are printed.
Pages specified as Page Templates do not
print unless the template is the current page
and you specifically choose theCurrent
Page Print Range option. See Print View
Dialog.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1209 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1210
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Printing to Scale
A layout files drawing scale is specified in
the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog. While you
can specify any drawing scale that you wish,
in nearly all circumstances, you will want the
scale to be 1 in = 1 in or 1 mm = 1 mm for
all layout files.
The views sent to your layout pages have
already been assigned a scale, and if you
select a scale other than one to one for the
layout, these views will be scaled a second
time when printed.
To see or change the current scale of a layout
view, select the view and click the Rescale
Layout View edit button. See Rescaling
Views on page 1195.
When a view is sent to layout at a scale other
than that used by the original view, line
weights may be affected. See Line Weights
and Scaling on page 1171.
Printing Services
If you plan to use a printing service, you may
want to install a PDF writer. See Printing to
a PDF File on page 1170.
You can also print to file using the driver for
the printer that the service will use. See
Printing to File on page 1161.
Find out what paper size the print service
uses and select it in the Drawing Sheet
Setup dialog. See Drawing Sheet Setup
Dialog on page 1164.
Check Plots
When a large drawing sheet size has been
specified, you can print a check plot at a
reduced scale so that it can be printed on a
smaller printer. This allows you to make final
checks before printing to the larger size. See
Check Plots on page 1169.
Exporting Layout Files
Layout pages can be exported to .dxf/
.dwg files much like any other vector-
based view.
The main difference is in the scale of the
output, which is in scaled paper units rather
than model units. If a 50 line in a plan
would be scaled to 1 inch when printed, it is
exported as a 1 line instead of its length
before prior to scaling. See Exporting 2D
DXF/DWG Files on page 1123.
Layout views will print at their specified
scales only when the drawing scale for
the layout file is 1 in =1 in or 1 mm =1 mm.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1210 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1211
Chapt er 40:
Schedules and Object
Labels
A schedule is similar to a simple Text object
with grid lines separating rows and columns;
however, schedules are dynamically linked
to objects in your plan and update as changes
are made to those objects.
Schedules are available for doors, windows,
cabinets, fixtures, furniture, electrical items,
plants, and rooms. Each schedule can contain
information for one or all floors of your plan.
Schedules update automatically whenever an
object is created, deleted, moved, or altered.
You should check each schedule carefully to
be sure it accurately represents what is in the
model. Never assume it includes what you
expect or need.
A variety of objects in Chief Architect have
labels that display information about them in
floor plan view. Some of those objects also
have schedules associated with them and
may display schedule numbers.
Chapter Contents
Schedule Defaults
The Schedule Tools
Editing Schedules
Schedule Numbering
Columns and Objects to Include
Working with Multiple Schedules
Schedule Specification Dialog
Object Labels
Schedule Defaults
The initial settings for each type of
schedule can be set in its Schedule
Defaults dialog. Default Settings are
accessed by selecting Edit> Default
Settings. Click the + next to Schedules to
display the schedule sub-headings. Select a
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1211 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1212
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
subheading and click the Edit button to open
the Schedule Defaults dialog associated
with your selection. See Default Settings
on page 68.
Schedule defaults can also be accessed by
double-clicking the Schedule Tools
parent button or any of the child tools.
When a schedule is created, its initial
characteristics are determined by the settings
in the Schedule Defaults dialog for its
schedule type. Default settings for callout
schedule labels are also set here.
Each Schedule Defaults dialog looks the
same as its corresponding Schedule
Specification dialog. See Schedule
Specification Dialog on page 1217.
The Schedule Tools
In floor plan view, a cross section/
elevation view, or a CAD Detail
window, select Tools> Schedules to access
the Schedule Tools. Select a Schedule Tool,
then click anywhere in the view to place a
schedule of the selected type at that location.
You can continue clicking to place additional
copies of the schedule. See Click-to-Create
on page 161.
While you can place schedules in floor plan
view, you may find it helpful to place them in
one or more CAD Detail windows instead.
Saving schedules in organized CAD Details
allows you to send them to layout without
including extra data or needing to resize the
layout view box. See CAD Details on page
1065.
Plan Schedules
Select Tools> Schedules> Door, then
click to create a Door Schedule.
Select Tools> Schedules> Window,
then click to create a Window
Schedule.
Select Tools> Schedules> Cabinet,
then click to create a Cabinet
Schedule.
Select Tools> Schedules> Fixture,
then click to create a Fixture
Schedule.
Select Tools> Schedules> Furniture,
then click to create a Furniture
Schedule.
Select Tools> Schedules> Electrical,
then click to create an Electrical
Schedule.
Select Tools> Schedules> Room
Finish, then click to create Room
Finish Schedule.
Select Tools> Schedules> Plant, then
click to create a Plant Schedule.
Layout Schedules
In addition to the Schedule Tools available in
plan files, there are two that can be used in
layout. See Layout Page and Revision
Tables on page 1209.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1212 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Editing Schedules
1213
Select Tools> Layout> Layout Page
Schedule, then click to create a
Layout Page Schedule.
Select Tools> Layout> Layout
Revision Schedule, then click to
create a Layout Revision Schedule.
Editing Schedules
Schedules can be edited using the edit
handles, the edit toolbar buttons, or the
Schedule Specification dialog.
Using the Edit Handles
A selected schedule has edit handles similar
ot those of a CAD box. See Editing Box-
Based Objects on page 198.
In addition, schedules have edit handles that
let you control the order of the rows and
columns, as well as column width:
Resize Column edit handles are located
in the Title row, centered on the grid lines
that divide the columns, and can be
dragged left or right.
Move Column edit handles are located in
the Heading row, centered in each cell,
and can be dragged left or right. See
Adding Custom Columns on page
1215.
Move Row edit handles are located in the
first column, centered in each cell, and
can be dragged up or down. See Editing
Schedule Order on page 1214.
In the Specification Dialog
The appearance and other attributes of
schedules can be modified in the
Schedule Specification dialog. See
Schedule Specification Dialog on page
1217.
You can control how objects are listed by
specifying which Columns to Include. For
example, if you were to uncheck Common
Names and Scientific Names in the Plant
Schedule Specification dialog, and then
check Flower Color, the resulting schedule
would list all red flowers in one line item,
regardless of their species. See Columns
and Objects to Include on page 1215.
Using the Edit Tools
A selected schedule or schedules can be
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
on the edit toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar
on page 34.
Converting Schedules to Text
Click the Schedule to Text edit button
to convert the selected schedule to a
tabbed text object. You can then edit the
schedule as text.
Move Row
Resize Column Move Column
The behavior of edit handles may
depend on the currently active Edit
Behavior. See Edit Behaviors on page 172.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1213 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1214
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
When a schedule is converted to text, it no
longer updates automatically. In addition,
shaped labels displaying as specified in the
schedules specification dialog will no longer
be present.
Schedule Numbering
By default, schedule numbering is dependent
on the order in which objects are placed in
the plan, as well as the floor they are on.
Any objects present in your plan before a
schedule is created will be listed first in
ascending alphanumeric order, according
to their Label information.
A new, unique objects placed in the plan
after the schedule is created will be added
to the bottom of the schedule in the order
that they are placed, regardless of its
Label information.
When an object is edited, its schedule
number may or may not change:
If an object with a Quantity of 1 in the
schedule is edited, its position in the
schedule will not change.
If a group of objects listed on the same
row in a schedule are edited simultane-
ously, their position will not change.
If an object listed on the same row in a
schedule with other similar objects is
edited so that it is no longer similar
enough to share the same row, it will
move to the bottom of the schedule. See
Columns and Quantity on page 1215.
Editing Schedule Order
If a schedules order does not meet your
needs, you can change it in either of two
ways:
Using the schedules Move Row edit han-
dles. See Using the Edit Handles on
page 1213.
Using an objects Move Up in Schedule
and Move Down in Schedule edit tools.
When an item in a schedule is moved to a
different row, its schedule Number will
change, as will that of any other item whose
position is affected by that move.
When a given object is included
in only one schedule, its position
in that schedule can be modified using the
Move Up in Schedule and Move Down in
Schedule edit tools.
Renumber Schedule
To remove any gaps in numbering that
might have been created when objects
were edited or deleted, select the schedule
and click the Renumber Schedule edit
button.
You can copy the text from the Text
Specification dialog and paste it into
other applications.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1214 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Columns and Objects to Include
1215
Columns and Objects to Include
Every schedule has a selection of Columns
to Include and Objects to Include on the
Schedule panel of its Schedule Defaults and
Specification dialogs. The columns that are
available depend on the type of schedule
selected. See General Panel on page 1217.
Information in the Description, Code,
Manufacturer, and Comments columns is
drawn from an objects Components dialog.
See Components Dialog on page 1243.
Some objects have several components, but
the schedule refers to only one. To find the
correct row, look at the Description column.
Often but not always, the first item in the ID
column is the one the schedule refers to; for
doors, this is D1, for windows, W1, for
cabinets, C1, and so on.
Most schedules also have a selection of
Objects to Include, as well. For example,
you can specify whether to include
Plumbing, Appliances, and HVAC in a
Fixture Schedule. Objects to include can be
used to create a variety of special purpose
schedules. See Working with Multiple
Schedules on page 1216.
Columns and Quantity
It is important to remember that by default,
the number of columns you choose to include
in a schedule influences the number of
separate line items that will be listed in the
schedule.
For example, if you have three 30 wide
doors, and do not include the Size and
Description columns, the three doors will be
listed in the same line item - even if one is a
hinged door, one a slider and one a pocket
door.
If you prefer, you can uncheck Group
Similar Objects in the Schedule
Specification dialog to place every object in
its own row, regardless of any shared
attributes. See General Panel on page
1217.
Area Totals
If a Door, Window, or Room Finish Schedule
includes an Area column, an additional row
will display at the bottom of the schedule for
total area calculations.
Adding Custom Columns
With the exception of Room Finish
Schedules, schedules can be customized by
adding user-defined columns.
For example, you could create a column for
locksets to be included in door schedules.
The information in this column can also be
included in Materials Lists. See Materials
Lists on page 1225.
In this example, a custom column for lock
sets is created for a door schedule; however,
the same steps apply to any object that can be
included in a schedule with the exception of
rooms.
To create a custom schedule column
1. Select a door in your plan and click the
Components edit button.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1215 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1216
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
2. In lower left corner of the Components
dialog, click the Edit Sub Categories
button. See Components Dialog on
page 1243.
3. In the Preferences dialog, select the
Doors category and create a new
LKS Materials List subcategory. See
Categories Panel on page 116.
4. Click OK to return to the Components
dialog, then click the Add button to add
a new accessory to the list.
5. Select the new accessory and click in the
Sub Category column. Choose the new
subcategory from the drop-down list,
then replace Accessory with a brief
description in the Description column.
Click OK.
6. Next, include the new subcategory in the
Door Defaults dialog. See Schedule
Defaults on page 1211.
7. Create a schedule and note that the cus-
tom column is present and includes the
Components information for the door
that you edited.
If a door schedule is already present, the new
column is available but will not display. You
can include this new column in the
schedules specification dialog. See General
Panel on page 1217.
If you would like to use your door with
custom Components information in other
plans, you can add it to the library. See
Adding Library Content on page 799.
Working with Multiple Schedules
You can create multiple versions of any type
of schedule for a variety of purposes. For
example:
Multiple Fixture Schedules can be set up
for use as Plumbing, Appliance or HVAC
schedules.
Separate Electrical Schedules can be cre-
ated for light fixtures and other electrical
items.
Separate Cabinet Schedules can be set up
for each floor of a plan.
Special Door or Window Schedules can
be prepared for Energy Ratings, Fire
Doors or other information.
If you intend to use schedule callout labels, it
is best to avoid including a given object in
more than one schedule. If you choose to do
so, the object will display a separate callout
label for each schedule it is included in.
If you create multiple schedules of the same
type, bear in mind that it is possible for
different objects in those schedules to be
assigned the same callout number. To avoid
this, consider specifying different callout
prefixes and/or callout shapes.
For more information about customizing
schedules, refer to the Chief Architect
Knowledge Base at www.chiefarchitect.com.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1216 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Schedule Specification Dialog
1217
Schedule Specification Dialog
Schedules and the object labels
associated with them can be edited in
the Schedule Specification dialog. To open
this dialog, either select a schedule and click
the Open Object edit button or double-click
the schedule using the Select Objects
tool.
The options in these dialogs are similar to
those found in their corresponding Schedule
Defaults dialogs.
General Panel
Specify a Title for the selected schedule.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1217 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1218
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Check Show Title to display the title at
the top of the schedule.
Include Objects From Floor - To create
a schedule of objects from a single floor,
uncheck Include Objects from All
Floors and then specify the floor. The
default for all schedules except for room
and plant schedules is to Include Objects
from All Floors.
If uncheck Include Objects on All Floors
in the Schedule Defaults dialog, sched-
ules will be set to include objects on the
floor that the schedule is created on by
default..
Uncheck Display Column Headings to
hide the selected schedules Heading row.
When this is checked, each column has a
heading at the top.
Uncheck Display All Text in Uppercase
to capitalize only the first letters of words
and to use the capitalization specified for
custom Labels and Room Names. When
this is checked, all letters are capitalized.
Uncheck Group Similar Objects to list
all objects in their own row, even when
they share all attributes. When this is
unchecked, objects that share the same
attributes are counted in a single row. See
Columns and Quantity on page 1215.
Specify which Columns are included in
the selected schedule. The columns that
are available will vary depending on the type
of schedule selected. See Columns and
Objects to Include on page 1215.
An alphabetical list of all Available Col-
umns for the selected schedule type dis-
plays on the left.
Select one or more names in the list, then
click the Add button to add them to the
Columns to Include list on the right. See
Shift and Ctrl Select on page 179.
You can also double-click on an item in
the list to add it to the Columns to Include
list on the right.
A list of the Columns to Include in the
selected schedule displays on the right.
The top-to bottom order in this list corre-
sponds to the columns left-to-right order
in the schedule. At least one column must
be included to create a schedule.
Select or double-click on an item in the
list and click the Rename button to spec-
ify a new name.
Click the Reset button to restore the
default names for all Columns to Include
in the current schedule.
Select one or more items in the list, then
click the Remove button to remove those
items from the list.
Select one item in the list and click the
Move Up button to adjust its position
upward in the list.
Select one item in the list and click the
Move Down button to adjust its position
downward in the list.
Objects to Include - Check the box
beside each type of object you want to
include in the selected schedule. For a
description of these options, see Columns
and Objects to Include on page 1215.
2
You can create multiple unique sched-
ules using the Columns to Include and
Objects to Include as filters. See Working
with Multiple Schedules on page 1216.
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1218 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Schedule Specification Dialog
1219
Attributes Panel
Specify the appearance of the selected
schedules Box/Grid.
Check Display Border to display lines
around the outside of the schedule.
Check Display Grid Lines to display
lines around the rows and columns of
schedule, forming boxes around each
item, or cell.
Specify the Alignment of the selected
schedules text within its columns by
choosing an option from the drop-down list.
Define the Position of the selected
schedule. Not available in the
Schedule Defaults dialogs.
Specify the X and Y Positions of the
schedules center point.
Specify the schedules Angle.
Line Style Panel
The Line Style panel lis found in the
specification dialogs for many different
objects. For more information, see Line
Style Panel on page 1035.
Fill Style Panel
For information about the settings on this
panel, see Fill Style Panel on page 1048.
Text Style Panel
The settings on this panel control the
appearance of the selected schedules text.
For more information, see Text Style Panel
on page 1012.
Label Panel
The Label panel of theSchedule
Specification dialog controls the type, size
and appearance of the labels that display in
floor plan view.
1
2
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1219 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1220
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
This panel is not available in the Room
Finish Schedule Specification dialog.
General - Check Show Labels to
display object labels in floor plan view.
This also turns on the appropriate layer for
the objects labels in the Layer Display
Options dialog. See Layer Display Options
Dialog on page 144.
You can suppress the label for an individual
door or window by checking Suppress
Label in the specification dialog for that
object. See Label Panel on page 1223.
Additional Label Text options are
available here.
Label Prefix - Specify the leading char-
acters used in callout labels or when
Include Schedule #is checked.
The Height/Width Display options control
the format of Automatic Labels as well as the
Labels and Size columns of the schedule, and
are only available for Door and Window
Schedules.
Select Width/Height for automatic
labels that use a numeric format in which
the width in inches (mm) is followed by
the height.
Select Height/Width for automatic
labels that use a numeric format in which
the height in inches (mm) is followed by
the width.
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1220 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Object Labels
1221
Select Width Only for automatic labels
that use a numeric format in which only
the width in inches (mm) is indicated.
The Additional Text options affect the
format of Automatic Labels only.
Check Include Schedule Number to
include the objects schedule number at
the beginning of its Automatic Label text
and in the Label and Size columns of the
schedule.
In a window schedule, check Include
Type to include the abbreviation for each
windows type in its Automatic Label.
For example, 3050DH describes a 3050
double hung window. Also affects the
Label column of the schedule.
In a door schedule, check Include Type
to include the hinge side and whether
each door is interior or exterior in the
Size column of the Door Schedule. Also
affects the Label column of the schedule,
but does not affect door labels.
In an electrical schedule, check Include
Type to include abbreviations indicating
how light are used at the end of Auto-
matic Labels. See Displaying Lights on
page 900.
When Use Callout For Label is
checked, the callout shape and size can
be specified below. When this option is
unchecked, Automatic or user specified
labels are used. See Label Panel on page
1223.
Select a Callout Shape. There are six
shapes to choose from.
When callout labels are used, the schedule
numbers are included in the labels. Like
other object labels, callout labels use the Text
Style assigned to the layer they are on. See
Text Styles on page 1011.
Specify the label Callout Size:
Select Calculate from Text for callout
labels that are sized to accomodate the
text within them.
Select Size and then type the radius in
inches (mm). This radius will be used
regardless of the size of the label text.
Object Labels
Object labels can display in floor plan and
cross section/elevation views for a variety of
different object types based on one of several
parameters:
Include Type
Include Type and Include Schedule #
An alternative to displaying Type infor-
mation in the Label and/or Size col-
umns is to include the Type column in a
schedule. See Columns and Objects to
Include on page 1215.
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1221 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1222
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Automatic Labels provide basic informa-
tion about the object, such as its type,
size, or name.
You can create a custom label for an
object in its specification dialog using
text and/or a Text Macro. See Label
Panel on page 1223.
Objects associated with a schedule can
display a shaped callout label with each
objects schedule number. See Schedule
Specification Dialog on page 1217.
The Automatic and custom labels for a
variety of objects have their own edit handles
that display when their object is selected, and
can be both moved and rotated. Schedule
callout labels can be moved but not rotated.
See Edit Handles on page 32.
Automatic Labels
Most objects that can display labels have an
Automatic Label created by the program that
states basic information about it. When
Automatic Labels is selected in the objects
specification dialog, this is usually the label
that will be used; however:
If a user-defined label is specified in the
objects defaults dialog, that label will be
used instead of the Automatic Label.
If the object is included in a schedule and
callout labels are specified in that sched-
ule, a callout label will be used.
Fixtures and appliances inserted into cab-
inets do not have labels of their own
unless they are associated with a schedule
set to use shaped callout labels.
Displaying Labels
The display of object labels in floor
plan and cross section/elevation views
can be controlled by layer in the Layer
Display Options dialog. Label layer names
begin with the object type, followed by the
word Label: for example, cabinet labels are
located on the Cabinets, Labels layer. See
Layer Display Options Dialog on page
144.
You can choose to suppress the label for an
individual object on the Label panel of its
specification dialog.
You can also turn the display of labels for a
particular object type on or off in the
Schedule Specification dialog for that
object type. See Label Panel on page 1219.
Object labels use the Text Style assigned to
each labels layer. For example, cabinet
labels use the Cabinets, Labels layers Text
Style. See Text Styles on page 1011.
The minimum on screen display size of
labels can be specified in thePreferences
dialog. See Appearance Panel on page 86.
With the exception of those for rooms, roofs,
and cameras, labels can also be included in
the Materials List, Master List and in the
Components dialog. Items in the Labels
column of the Materials List are editable;
however, any changes will not be applied to
the objects labels. See Materials List
Columns on page 1236.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1222 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Object Labels
1223
Label Panel
The Label panel is found in the specification
and defaults dialogs for a variety of different
objects.
Most objects have a Suppress Label
option. Check this box to suppress the
selected objects label in floor plan view.
Bay, Box and Bow Windows and Mulled
Window units have several settings for
controlling Multiple Component labels. See
Window Labels on page 386.
Select Suppress All Labels to display no
label in floor plan view. Individual com-
ponents are counted in schedules and in
the Materials List.
Select Show Component Labels to pro-
duce labels for each component in floor
plan view. Individual components are
counted in schedules and in the Materials
List.
Select Show Single Label for Entire
Unit to produce one label for the unit and
suppress component labels. When this
option is selected, the settings that follow
on the Label panel become enabled.
These settings also affect how Bay, Box and
Bow Windows and Mulled Window units are
counted in schedules and the materials list.
See Window Labels on page 386 and
Displaying Mulled Units on page 382.
Note: If you choose a callout shape in the
Schedule Specification dialog, the settings
here are overridden and the schedule label is
used instead. See Label Panel on page
1219.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1223 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1224
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Specify the desired Label Options,
which control what information is
contained in the label. Not available for
cameras. See Displaying 3D Views on
page 871.
Select Automatic Labels to use the
default label for the selected object. See
Automatic Labels on page 1222.
Select Specify Label to replace the
selected objects Automatic Label with
whatever you type in the text field below.
When Specify Label is chosen, the
selected objects Automatic Label ini-
tially populates the text field
Click the Insert arrow to insert a Global,
User Defined or Object Specific Text
Macro into the custom label. See Text
Macros on page 1014.
To use the selected objects Component
Code as its label, type
%component_code%. See Components
Dialog on page 1243.
Specify the Plan View Position and
Orientation, relative to the object it
describes, in floor plan view or in the
currently active cross section/elevation view.
The defaults for these settings only affect
floor plan view - in cross section/elevation
views, labels are always initially placed at 0,
0, 0. See Default Settings on page 68.
Specify the X Offset value, moves the
label side to side relative to the midpoint
of the objects front face.
Specify the Y Offset value, which moves
the label forward or backward relative to
the objects front face .
Specify the Angle, which rotates the
label either relative to the angle of its
objects front face or to an absolute angle.
Select Relative Angle to measure the
labels Angle relative to its objects front
face.
Select Absolute Angle to measure the
labels Angle relative to an imaginary
horizontal line drawn in the positive X
direction from the origin. See 3D Draft-
ing on page 29.
Regardless of which way the selected object
is facing, in floor plan view the X Offset will
move the label parallel with the objects front
face. The Y Offset value will move the label
perpendicular to the objects front.
In cross section/elevation views, the Offset
X will move the label side to side and the
Offset Y will move it up or down.
The Camera View Display settings are
only active if you open an objects
specification dialog in a cross section/
elevation view, and only affect the display of
the selected objects label in the current view.
Not available for selected cameras.
Select Automatic to display the objects
label when the surface at its center point
is visible in the view.
Select Show in this View to display the
objects label regardless of whether its
center point is visible.
Select Hide in this View to suppress the
objects label regardless of whether its
center point is visible.
2
3
4
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1224 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1225
Chapt er 41:
Mat er i al s Li sts
Chief Architect can calculate a Materials List
in three ways: From All Floors, From Area,
or From Room. In addition, a polyline or
multiple polylines can be used to define areas
in a plan a Materials List can be generated
from.
Materials Lists can be created, edited, and
printed directly from the program. They can
also be exported as text, html or xls
(Microsoft Excel) format files for use in
other programs.
Chapter Contents
The Materials List Tools
Creating an Accurate Materials List
Structural Member Reporting
Organizing Materials Lists
Materials List Display Options Dialog
Materials List Columns
Editing Materials Lists
Materials Polylines
Saving and Managing Materials Lists
Printing and Exporting the Materials List
Conditioned Area Totals
The Master List
Components Dialog
The Materials List is based on certain
assumptions that may not match your
building style. Chief Architect makes no repre-
sentation as to the accuracy or reliability of the
Materials List generated by Chief Architect.
Always compare the Materials List with a man-
ual take-off before providing a quote or ordering
materials for a job.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1225 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1226
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
The Materials List Tools
Select Tools> Materials List to
access the Materials List tools.
A Materials List is like a snapshot of the
current plan at the time that the list is made.
Any changes made to the model after a
Materials List is generated are not included
in that list. Create a new Materials List if you
would like it to include these changes.
It is not necessary to wait until the plan is
complete to generate a Materials List. In fact,
you can create a series of Materials Lists
reflecting costs at various stages of a project.
When you close a Materials List window, the
program will ask if you want to save the
Materials List. Type a name and click Yes to
save the list or click No to close the list
without saving it. See Saving and Managing
Materials Lists on page 1238.
Calculate from All Floors
Select Tools> Materials List>
Calculate From All Floors to
generate a Materials List for the entire
model.
Materials lists calculated from all floors can
be lengthy, and only a portion of the list may
display on your screen at one time. Use the
scroll bars to scroll through the complete list.
Move the pointer to cells in the list and click
to make changes.
Calculate From Area
In floor plan view only, select Tools>
Materials List> Calculate from
Area to produce a Materials List for the
portion of a plan on a single floor that is
included within a temporary rectangular
Materials Polyline.
Calculate From Room
To create the Materials List for a
room, select the room, then select
Tools> Materials List> Calculate From
Room.
Calculate From Room is also available
on a selected rooms edit toolbar. See
Editing Rooms on page 319.
A Materials List calculated from a room is
created for only the contents of that room:
wall materials are not included.
Materials Polyline
You can also produce a Materials List
for a defined area of a plan using a
Materials Polyline. Materials Polylines are
advantageous because they can be edited to
any shape, saved, and used as many times as
needed. There are also several ways to create
them in floor plan view only. See Materials
Polylines on page 1237.
Master List
Select Tools> Materials List> Mas-
ter List to open the Master List, a list
of previously used materials and any added
For comparison, generate Materials Lists
with and without a proposed plan modifi-
cation.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1226 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Creating an Accurate Materials List
1227
information such as price or manufacturer.
See The Master List on page 1241.
Materials List Management
Select Tools> Materials List>
Materials List Management to open
a list of saved Materials Lists associated with
the current plan. See Saving and Managing
Materials Lists on page 1238.
Materials List Preferences
A number of settings that affect the
appearance and contents of Materials
Lists are found in the Preferences dialog.
See Preferences Dialog on page 85.
The Materials List panel lets you specify
which Categories are initially included in
new Materials Lists.
The Report Style panel lets you specify
which columns are initially included in
new Materials Lists, as well as modify the
appearance of all Materials Lists.
The Master List panel lets you specify the
current Master List file and the columns
used in it.
The Categories panel lets you create Sub-
Categories for all of the main Categories.
Creating an Accurate Materials List
In order to take full advantage of Chief
Architects Materials List capabilities, there
are several things to keep in mind.
The accuracy of your Materials List is
directly related to the accuracy of your
model. Floor and ceiling heights, wall
lengths, and structural settings all directly
affect Materials List calculations.
It takes more than just making your draw-
ing look right to generate an accurate
Materials List. If, for example, you use
CAD lines to draw an item on a floor
plan, that item will not be included in the
Materials List. A better way would be to
use a symbol or structural element. See
Architectural vs CAD Objects on page
154.
If you use custom materials, make sure
their material definitions are set up cor-
rectly. See Creating Materials on page
823.
Bear in mind that using generic objects
like geometric shapes from the library to
represent objects that arent available in
Chief Architect can result in items being
calculated in the Materials List in a man-
ner that you might not expect.
Framing in the Materials List
You can specify whether framing materials
are calculated by lineal foot, as a cut list, or
as a buy list in the Structural Member
Reporting dialog.
For more information about how framing
appears in the Materials List, see Framing
and the Materials List on page 584.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1227 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1228
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Structural Member Reporting
The Structural Member Reporting
dialog allows you to specify the
method used to calculate framing members
in the Materials List.
To open the Structural Member Reporting
dialog, select Edit> Default Settings ,
then select Structural Member Reporting
from the tree list and click the Edit button.
See Default Settings vs Preferences on
page 68.
You can also open this dialog by clicking the
Structural Member Reporting button,
which can be added to your toolbars. See To
add a button to a toolbar on page 128.
You can create a list of the framing member
sizes that you wish to purchase, and if an
item in The Materials List is the same length
as or shorter than one of these defined
lengths, it will be described using the defined
length rather than its actual length. An
effective Buy List will include all types of
framing materials that you typically use, as
well as each of the different lengths that you
expect to purchase. An example is installed
with the program, which you can use as-is or
copy and modify to suit your needs.
Structural Member Reporting can support
multiple saved defaults. In order to open this
dialog, you must first open its Saved
Defaults dialog and choose an available
saved defaults setup. When the dialog is
open, the name of the Saved Default being
edited will display in the title bar at the top of
the dialog box. See Multiple Saved
Defaults on page 70.
The saved default that is currently in use is
also specified in the Saved Structural
Member Reporting Defaults dialog. When a
materials list is created, the Current Default
listed in the drop-down will be used. To use a
different saved default, simply select it from
the drop-down list, click OK, and generate a
new materials list.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1228 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Structural Member Reporting
1229
Structural Member Reporting Dialog
Choose a Materials List Report
Method. The selected method will
affect subsequently created Materials Lists,
but not any that may already exist.
Select Mixed Reporting to calculate
framing materials using a combination of
lineal lengths and piece counts.
Select Total Lineal Length to calculate
the framing materials of the different
structural components of the plan in linear
feet.
Select Cut List to calculate the framing
materials of the different structural com-
ponents of the plan by counting the indi-
vidual pieces present in the model.
Select Buy List to calculate the framing
materials of the different structural com-
ponents of the plan by counting individual
pieces and matching them to items in the
list of Boards to buy, below.
Check Consolidate Unhandled Boards
to handle short board segments by com-
bining them so they can be cut from
lengths found in the Buy List Board
Sizes list.
1
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1229 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1230
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Specify which Length Units you want to
use from the drop-down list. The selected
unit(s) are used in the Structural Member
Reporting dialog as well as in the Materi-
als List when either Cut List or Buy List
is the selected method of reporting. Not
available when Mixed Reporting or
Total Lineal Length is selected.
The Buy List Board Sizes table is only
active when Buy List is selected above.
Click on a line item to select it.
Double-click on a line item to open its
Board Specification dialog.
Click the Edit button to open the Board
Specification dialog for the selected line
item in the table. Only available when a
line item in the table is selected.
Click the New button to open the Board
Specification dialog for a new line item
in the table.
Click the Delete button to remove the
selected line item from the table. Only
available when a line item is selected.
Items in the Boards to buy table are listed in
order of priority. If an item in a Materials
List could be cut out of more than one item in
this table, the program will select the item
with the highest priority. Specify the Priority
of the selected line item in the table.
Click the Increase Priority button to
move the selected item one line up in the
table. Only available when a line item is
selected and it is not first in the list.
Click the Decrease Priority button to
move the selected item one line down in
the table. Only available when a line item
is selected and it is not last in the list.
Buy List tables can be saved as .json files
and shared between plans.
Click the Import button to import a saved
Buy List table into the currently active
Structural Member Reporting saved
default.
Click the Export button to save the Buy
List table as a .json file which can be
imported into other plans.
Specify the Kerf Width, which is the
width of the material lost to the saw
blade when a framing member is cut.
Board Specification Dialog
Click either the New or the Edit button in the
Structural Member Reporting dialog to
open the Board Specification dialog, where
you can define a line item for the Boards to
buy table. You also double-click on a line
item in the table to modify it.
2
3
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1230 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Organizing Materials Lists
1231
Specify the Actual Thickness - as
opposed to the nominal thickness - of the
selected item in the Buy List table.
Specify the Actual Depth - as opposed to
the nominal depth - of the selected item in
the Buy List table.
Specify the Length of the selected item in
the Buy List table.
Select the Type of structural member
from the drop-down list. See Framing
Member Types on page 585.
Check Treated if the selected item is a
treated lumber product.
Click OK to close the dialog and add the
information specified here to a line item
in the Buy List table.
Organizing Materials Lists
There are two basic ways to control what
items are calculated in the Materials List:
By specifying which layers in the plan are
included in the list.
By specifying which categories and sub-
categories are used.
In addition, you can control how much
information about each item is included by
specifying which columns to display.
There are some parts of a model that cannot
be excluded from the Materials List. Floor
and ceiling platforms are prime examples. If
you need to generate a Materials List for only
part of a plan, such as an addition, consider
making a copy of the plan file. In the copy,
delete the as-built portion of the plan and
then generate a Materials List.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1231 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1232
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Materials Lists and Layers
You can control which objects are included
in the Materials List by layer in the Layer
Display Options dialog. The inclusion of
objects in the Materials List is controlled
using the Mat column: an M in this
column indicates that objects in a layer are
included in the Materials List. Click in the
cell to add or remove the M. See Layer
Display Options Dialog on page 144.
Categories
The line items in the Materials and Master
Lists are organized into a set of predefined
categories, such as Electrical and Framing,
which display in the ID column.
You can specify which category each item
belongs to in the Materials List and Master
List. In addition, many objects can be
assigned to a category prior to generating a
Materials List in the Components dialog.
See Components Dialog on page 1243.
To specify a line items category
1. Create a Materials List, open the Master
List, or open the Components dialog
for a particular object.
2. Click in the cell in the ID column for a
line item.
3. Select the desired category from the
drop-down list that becomes available.
The categories that are available cannot be
altered; however, you can specify which
Categories
Columns
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1232 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Materials List Display Options Dialog
1233
categories are included in the Materials List
in either of two ways:
Globally, in the Preferences dialog. See
Materials List Panel on page 112.
For individual lists in the Materials List
Display Options dialog. See Materials
List Display Options Dialog on page
1233.
Subcategories
You can create any number of subcategories
for each Materials List category in the
Preferences dialog. See Categories Panel
on page 116.
Items can be assigned to a subcategory in the
Materials List and, for many items, in their
objects Components dialog in the same
manner that they can be assigned to a
category.
Subcategories can be useful when creating
schedules. See Adding Custom Columns
on page 1215.
Materials List Columns
There are two ways to specify which
columns are included in the Materials List as
well as the order in which they display:
Globally, in the Preferences dialog. See
Report Style Panel on page 114.
For individual lists in the Materials List
Display Options dialog.
Materials List Display Options Dialog
When a Materials List or the Master
List is open, select Tools> Display
Options to open the Materials List Display
Options dialog for the current list.
The Master List Display Options dialog is
similar to this dialog, but only the Columns
panel is available. See The Master List on
page 1241.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1233 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1234
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Categories Panel
The Categories listed here appear in the ID
column of the Materials List in the order they
are presented here.
Check the box beside the name of each
category that you want to display in the
currently active Materials List.
Click the Select All button to display all
categories in the active Materials List.
Click the Clear All button to suppress the
display of all categories in the active
Materials List.
Note: The information in a suppressed category
is still part of the Materials List. If the Materials
List is exported, suppressed categories are
exported, as well.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1234 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Materials List Display Options Dialog
1235
Columns Panel
Check the box beside each column you
want to include in the Materials List. To
suppress a columns display, remove the
checkmark next to its name. Columns
appear in the Materials List in the order
that they display in this list.
Move Up - Click on a column name, then
click this button to move that item up one
place in the list.
Move Down - Click this button to move
the selected column down in the list.
Options Panel
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1235 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1236
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Check Restrict to Floor to limit the cur-
rent Materials List to objects on a single
floor, then select that floor number from
the drop-down list. When unchecked, the
Materials List includes all floors.
If you plan to buy materials from multiple
suppliers, you can create a Materials List
for each. Check Restrict to Supplier,
then choose a supplier from the drop-
down list. The resulting materials list will
include only materials to be purchased
from that supplier.
Suppliers can be added to this list in the
Components dialog for various objects. See
Components Dialog on page 1243.
Materials List Columns
The columns in the Materials List, the
Components dialog, and the Master List are
very similar, but not all columns appear in all
places.
A table of all of thes e columns and their
capabilities is available in the programs
Help. See Online Help Menu on page 35.
Editing Materials Lists
Materials lists can be edited in a variety of
ways. You can adjust the width of a column
by clicking and dragging the bar on the right
side of the column name.
Adding Information
You can enter information in the Price,
Supplier, Code, Comment and Manufacturer
columns for each item.
Adding price or other information for any
item is straightforward. Simply click in the
cell and type the desired information. When
the information is correct, you can add it to
the Master List. See Adding to the Master
List on page 1242.
You can switch between several existing
suppliers or manufacturers for a given item
by double-clicking on the right side of the
cell in an appropriate column. A drop-down
arrow displays to the left of the cell. Click it
to view a list of suppliers or manufacturers
for that item and select one.
When a Materials List is calculated, you can
have the program search the Master List for
Price, Supplier, and Code information for
each item by selecting Tools> Update From
Master. The information used is marked as
Default in the Master List. See Materials
List Columns on page 1236.
Changing Information
Although the information in some columns
cannot be saved to the Master List, you can
change the information in any column in an
individual Materials List. As with added
information, click in a cell to select the
existing text, then type in the desired text.
To move an item in a Materials List to a new
category, select the cell in the ID column and
choose a new category from the drop-down
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1236 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Materials Polylines
1237
list that becomes available. You can also
select a subcategory by clicking in the cell in
the Sub Category column. See Categories
on page 1232.
Total Cost
Total Cost is calculated using the Count,
Unit, Price, %Markup, Labor and Equipment
columns to calculate the cost. The formula
used is:
(Count +Extra) * Price * (1 +(%
Markup/100)) +((Count +Extra) * Labor)
+((Count +Extra) * Equipment)
If a column does not appear, 0 is used for the
value of that column with the exception of
Count and Price, which are always used in
the calculation even if they are not shown.
Copying Information
Portions of a Materials List can be copied
and then pasted into a Text object or into
a word processing program or spreadsheet
program using the standard Windows Copy
(Ctrl +C), Cut (Ctrl +X), and Paste
(Ctrl +V) commands. See Copying and
Pasting Text on page 1000.
Changing the Font
The font used for Materials Lists, the Master
List and the Components dialog can be
specified in the Preferences dialog. See
Font Panel on page 89.
The size of this font can also be specified in
thePreferences dialog. See Report Style
Panel on page 114.
Materials Polylines
A Materials Polyline lets you create a
Materials List that only includes
objects within its area on the current floor.
To create a Materials Polyline
1. In floor plan view, select Tools> Mate-
rials List> Materials Polyline and draw
a rectangular polyline.
2. Select the Materials Polyline and edit its
position and shape as needed. Materials
Polylines can be edited like other closed
polylines. See Editing Closed-Polyline
Based Objects on page 194.
3. With the Materials Polyline selected,
click the Calculate Materials List
edit button. A Materials List is created
for objects within the polyline on the
current floor.
Objects such as cabinets, windows,
doors, and studs are included in the
Materials List only if their center point
is within the Material Polyline.
Larger objects such as walls, floor and
ceiling platforms, and joists can be par-
tially selected by a Materials Polyline,
so that only portions of them are
included in the Materials List.
A few objects, such as joists, are
counted as pieces in a full Materials
List but must be counted in linear
lengths when partially selected by a
Materials Polyline. For example, if a
16-foot joist crosses a 4 foot square
Materials Polyline, the Materials List
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1237 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1238
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
will count 4 linear feet of joist material.
This can be useful for additions and/or
remodels.
You can also convert a closed CAD polyline
into a Materials Polyline using the Convert
Polyline edit tool. See Convert
Polyline on page 230.
Categories
The categories included in a Materials List
created using a Materials Polyline can be
specified prior to the generation of the list in
the Materials List Polyline Specification
dialog.
To specify Materials List polyline categories
1. Select the Materials Polyline and click
the Open Object edit button.
2. On the Categories panel of the Materials
List Polyline Specification dialog,
specify which categories you want to
include in the materials calculation. This
panel is identical to the panel of the
same name in the Materials List Display
Options dialog. See Categories Panel
on page 1234.
Saving and Managing Materials Lists
To save an open Materials List, select File>
Close. The Save Materials List dialog will
open, giving you the option to name the list
and save it or to close it without saving.
Once a Materials List has been saved, it is
listed in the Materials List Management
dialog.
Saved Materials Lists can also be
accessed, renamed, and deleted in the
Project Browser. See Project Browser on
page 1073.
Materials List Management
Dialog
Select Tools> Materials List>
Materials List Management to open
the Materials List Management dialog,.
Click on the name of a saved Materials List
in the list on the left to select it.
Edit - Open the selected Materials List.
You can also double-click an item in the
list.
Rename - Open the Rename Materials
List dialog and type a new name for the
list.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1238 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Printing and Exporting the Materials List
1239
Delete - Delete the selected Materials
List.
Printing and Exporting the Materials List
To print a Materials List, select File>
Print while the Materials List window
is active. See Print View Dialog on page
1173.
A Materials List can also be exported
into a one of several different file
formats that can be opened by various
programs. In a Materials List window, or in
the Master List, select File> Export Materi-
als List to open theMaterials List Export
dialog.
Materials List Export Dialog
Specify the File Type that you would
like to export to.
Select Tab Delimited (TXT) to create a
text file with a tab between each field
entry in the Materials List, and a carriage
return between each row.
Select Comma Delimited (CSV) to cre-
ate a text file with a comma between each
field entry in the Materials List and a car-
riage return between each row.
Select Excel (XML) to create a file that
can be opened by Microsoft Excel.
Select HTML to create an html file that
you can view with a web browser.
Additional export options are available
here.
Uncheck Include Column Headers to
prevent column headings from appearing
in the first row of the text file.
Check Run Default Spreadsheet or Edi-
tor to open the exported file with the pro-
gram specified on your computer when
you finish exporting.
When you click OK, the Write Materials
Export File dialog will open. This is a typical
File Save dialog. See Exporting Files on
page 54.
Estimating Software
You can export a Materials List to a word
processor or spreadsheet program to arrange
it in your estimating format. You can also
export the Materials List to a number of
commercial estimating programs in whose
databases you can keep your current pricing,
labor costs, and markups and generate
reports based on this data.
Before purchasing an estimating software
program, be sure that the program supports
1
2
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1239 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1240
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
the direct import of Chief Architect Materials
Lists.
Any questions regarding estimating software
packages and how they interact with Chief
Architect should be directed toward the
company providing the estimating software.
Chief Architect is unable to provide any
technical support for third party programs.
Conditioned Area Totals
Conditioned Area is the space within a
building that is heated and/or air conditioned,
and a Thermal Envelope is a three
dimensional boundary built around the
Conditioned Space that separates it from the
unconditioned space around it. Thermal
Envelopes are composed of floor platforms,
ceiling platforms, walls, doors, and windows.
When a Materials List is created, Chief
Architect calculates the total areas of the
components that make up a structures
Thermal Envelope and lists them in the
General category of the Materials List. See
Categories on page 1232.
Doors are always categorized as doors rather
than as windows. This is the case even when
a door is specified as a Glass Door or when it
is part of a mulled unit.
Chief Architect does not check plans for
compliance with building or energy codes;
however, you can export relevant thermal
envelope data from a plan file for use in
REScheck
Associations Kitchen and Bath Planning
Guidelines and Access Standards is available
on our web site to participants in the Support
and Software Assurance program.
Select Tools> Checks> View the NKBA
Kitchen & Bathroom Guidelines to launch
your internet browser to
www.chiefarchitect.com.
Chief Talk Online User Forum
The Chief Talk Bulletin Board offers several
ongoing discussions about a variety of topics
related to the use of Chief Architect. It's rich
with useful tips and available free of charge
to all registered Chief Architect users.
Discussions are initiated and carried out
by users.
The tone is professional and friendly.
Experienced users share knowledge with
each other and beginners.
Chief Architect Staff members post
announcements, advice and technical
information.
To visit the Chief Talk forum, select Help>
Chief Talk or go to: www.chieftalk.com.
Technical Support
Chief Architect takes pride in offering world
class technical support services that can be
accessed by telephone or on our web site.
Select Help>Technical Support from the
program menu to visit:
www.chiefarchitect.com.
Before contacting Technical Support, take a
moment to see if the answer to your question
is found in the Reference Manual, tutorial
videos, or in our on-line Knowledge Base at
www.chiefarchitect.com.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1253 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1254
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
When you contact us, Technical Support will
refer you to these resources if the answer can
be found there.
So that our Technical Support specialists can
assist you as efficiently as possible, please
refer to Technical Support Services on
page 1255 for additional trouble-shooting
suggestions and information that will be
needed before placing your call.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1254 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1255
Appendi x B
Techni cal Suppor t
Ser vi ces
Chief Architect is committed to providing
world-class technical support to complement
our professional products.
The primary function of technical support is
to make sure our software is functioning
correctly and to help you quickly resolve
problems that prevent its normal use. Our
technical support professionals are eager to
work with you to make certain our software
is functioning as designed.
We have also assembled a team of certified
trainers offering instruction in the use of our
software. Training is available via online
seminars, online personal training, and on-
site classroom seminars.
Reference and Training Resources
Chief Architect offers a variety of reference
and training options in addition to the
resources that come standard with the
program. Many of these resources are
available for free or at a significant discount
to Support and Software Assurance program
members.
Online Knowledge Base
The Chief Architect online Knowledge Base
contains a variety of articles describing how
to resolve common technical problems and
achieve specific design goals.
The Knowledge Base is found in the
Technical Support section of the Web site
and can be referred to again and again at your
convenience at
www.chiefarchitect.com .
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1255 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1256
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Video Training
Chief Architect has developed a collection of
training videos that contain in-depth training
on a wide range of topics from beginning to
advanced experience levels. These videos are
available on our Web site,
www.chiefarchitect.com for users who
participate in the Support and Software
Assurance program.
Live Seminars
Chief Architect regularly conducts live,
online training seminars on a variety of
topics. Learn the basics of using Chief
Architect the right way by joining a J ump
Start class, then progress through topics of
interest, such as Construction Documents,
Kitchens and Baths, and Terrain. A list of
upcoming seminars is available online at
www.chiefarchitect.com.
Throughout the year, Chief Architect also
conducts training seminars in various
locations around the United States and
Canada. Information about these seminars is
also posted at www.chiefarchitect.com.
Interactive Training
If you have questions about how to use Chief
Architect, consider contacting our Training
Department for a Personal Training session.
Personal Training is an excellent way to
learn how to use the program, providing one-
on-one interaction with a certified Chief
Architect trainer via the internet. Discuss
topics that interest you and learn how to
accomplish your specific design goals.
User Forum
Our Chief Talk User Forum is a great place
to discuss and exchange ideas with other
Chief Architect users. Here you can post
questions, read discussions from other users,
and post suggestions to improve our product.
In addition to our regular users, from time to
time our support and engineering teams
monitor the forum and provide input and
discussion on current topics. This resource is
available free of charge at
www.chieftalk.com.
Troubleshooting Common Technical Issues
Chief Architect strives to make certain our
software works correctly; however, from
time to time issues arise that prevent its
normal operation.
Installation Issues
The following are common reasons for
installation failure of Chief Architect and
other software:
Anti-virus software is enabled and inter-
fering with installation. Anti-virus soft-
ware is the most common cause of
installation failures for any type of soft-
ware. Refer to your anti-virus softwares
documentation for details on how to dis-
able the software and re-enable it once
installation is complete.
The recommended minimum system
requirements are not met. See System
Requirements on page 7.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1256 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Troubleshooting Printing Problems
1257
The computer has a CD drive but not a
DVD drive. A standard CD drive will not
read DVD discs.
The DVD has fingerprints, scratches, or
other defects. Sometimes a small finger-
print can prevent the program from
installing. Clean the disk with soft cotton
cloth. Be sure to use soft cotton rather
than paper products on disks to avoid
scratching.
You do not have sufficient rights to install
the software. Verify that you have admin-
istrative rights and the administrative
password during the installation process.
If you are on a corporate network, consult
your network administrator for assis-
tance.
Refer to the on-line Knowledge Base for
solutions to common installation problems.
If the answer to your question is not found
there, contact our Technical Support
department for assistance.
Hardware Lock Not Recognized
If you are using Hardware Lock Security and
your hardware lock is not recognized on
startup, launch the Hardware Lock
Troubleshooter. The Troubleshooter can
diagnose and provide solutions to most
common problems with hardware locks.
The Hardware Lock Troubleshooter can also
be launched manually by selecting Help >
Hardware Lock Troubleshooter.
Troubleshooting Printing Problems
Printing problems fall into two main
categories: those that prevent the printer
from working in any program and problems
printing from Chief Architect. To determine
if the problem is specific to Chief Architect,
try the following:
1. Begin by clicking on the Windows Start
button, and select Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that is not func-
tioning properly in the Printers folder.
3. Click Properties from the menu that
appears.
4. On the General tab, click the Print Test
Page button.
If the printer does not produce a test page,
the problem is not one that Chief Architect
Technical Support can solve. Follow these
suggestions:
Check the connection between the com-
puter and the printer.
Check your printer documentation for
troubleshooting printer problems.
Contact your printer's manufacturer or
check their Web site for support informa-
tion.
Your printer manufacturer is the best
resource for solving problems of this type.
Chief Architect Technical Support is not able
If you see visible cracking on a CD or
DVD, do not insert it in your CD/DVD
drive. Cracked disks can fly apart and cause
damage to your drive.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1257 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1258
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
to help diagnose and solve problems that
prevent printing from any program.
Printers and plotters vary widely in how they
function. Sometimes a faulty cable can be a
problem. Other times, a plotter may require
that the paper be loaded in a different
orientation. Often, solving a printing
problem is as simple as downloading and
installing an updated printer driver. See
Printer Drivers on page 1161.
If you can print from Chief Architect but are
not satisfied with the output, refer to
Printing and Plotting on page 1159 for
information on how to set up and use the
printing functions in the program. Legacy
users should bear in mind that each release
has new features and enhancements, so
techniques that were used in prior versions
may not work in the current version.
Make sure that you use Print Preview
before printing. Print Preview displays the
printed paper, or drawing sheet, as a white
rectangle on screen, and shows how the sheet
is scaled and positioned relative to your
drawing. If the drawing is not on the drawing
sheet on-screen, it will not be on the sheet
when you print. See Print Preview on page
1166.
Make sure that your scaling is correct for the
paper size. If the plan is much smaller or
much larger than the drawing sheet, you may
need to change your Scale. See Printing to
Scale on page 1168.
64 Bit Versions of Windows
Some printers may not function correctly on
64 bit Windows operating systems. If you are
experiencing a printing problem while using
a 64 bit version of Windows, please contact
the printers manufacturer to verify that you
have the correct driver installed.
Printing to a legacy parallel printer port on a
Windows 64 bit machine may not work
correctly when using a hardware lock. USB
printers should not be affected. If you run
into difficulty with this type of setup, you
may want to consider Software Lock
Security.
Clearing Printer Information
Some information specific to individual
printers and plotters, such as available printer
paper sizes, is saved with each plan and
layout file.
If you are encountering problems when
printing, or unexpected options in the Page
Setup dialog, select File> Print> Clear
Printer Info to clear the printer-specific
information stored with the plan or layout
file.
After using Clear Printer Info, select File>
Print> Page Setup . Make sure the
settings in the Page Setup dialog are correct,
and then click OK and Save the file.
Slow Printing from Layout
The most common reason for unusually slow
printing from layout is the presence of a
It is a good idea to keep the Owners
Manual for your printer or plotter close
at hand. Write inside the Owners Manual the
various phone numbers for technical support
for that printer or plotter for the original
manufacturer and for your local dealer.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1258 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Error Messages
1259
rotated view. To avoid this issue, rotate the
view prior to sending it to layout, or change
the orientation of the paper in layout so you
do not need to rotate the view. See Layout
on page 1183.
Online Knowledge Base
For answers to frequently asked questions
regarding printing and other topics, select
Help> Visit Chief Architect Web Site
and browse the Technical Support section of
our Web site,
www.chiefarchitect.com. Our Technical
Support specialists post new articles
periodically to help resolve problems you
may encounter.
Error Messages
Most common error messages have a known
cause and simple resolution. When you
encounter an error or warning message in
Chief Architect, you can click the Check
Knowledge Base button in the message box
to launch your default internet browser to the
Chief Architect Knowledge Base on our Web
site,
www.chiefarchitect.com.
If an article discussing the message is
available it will display, providing
information about the message and how best
to avoid it.
It is important that abnormal errors be
reported to Chief Architect Technical
Support so that we can identify and resolve
any problems.
The content of an error message is useful in
diagnosing its cause. If you encounter an
error message, read it carefully and write
down the error number and the exact text of
the error message.
If you encounter the error more than once,
make a note of your steps prior to receiving
the message.
Before you report an error, check the
Knowledge Base to see if the error is already
documented by typing the error message or
part of the error message into the search
form.
Finally, check to see if there are program
updates available. These updates are
provided free for the current version of Chief
Architect and contain enhancements and
other changes that allow the program to
perform at an optimum level. Select Help>
Download Program Updates from the
Chief Architect menu and follow the
instructions on our Web site,
www.chiefarchitect.com.
Press the Print Screen key on your key-
board to capture a picture of the error
message. Open a new word processing doc-
ument or e-mail message and choose Edit>
Paste to paste a copy of the error message
into the document for later reference.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1259 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1260
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Error Reporting
When an error occurs, you may have the
option in the message box to send the report
to Chief Architect.
No personal information is sent. When you
click Send, your default internet browser
launches and a Web page appears on screen
This message confirms that the report was
sent successfully and may give you further
instructions on how to proceed.
Contacting Technical Support
Chief Architect provides free online and tele-
phone support to users participating in the
Support and Software Assurance program.
Users who have not purchased SSA receive
installation support for 30 days after pur-
chase. If you would like to sign up for Sup-
port and Software Assurance, please contact
the Chief Architect Sales Department.
Before contacting Technical Support, take a
moment to see if the answer to your question
is found in the Reference Manual, Help
index, or in our on-line Knowledge Base.
When you contact us, Technical Support will
refer you to these resources if the answer can
be found there.
Chief Architect's world-class technical
support is available Monday through Friday
from 6 AM to 5 PM Pacific Standard Time
and can be reached at (208) 292-3399 or via
our Web site,
www.chiefarchitect.com.
There are several things you can do to ensure
a speedy answer to your question when you
contact Technical Support.
Before contacting Technical Support,
select Help> About Chief Architect and
make a note of the first characters of your
Product Key and the exact version of
Chief Architect you are using. Technical
support is available to the owners of soft-
ware licenses. When you contact Techni-
cal Support, be prepared to verify that
you are the owner of the software license.
Before contacting Technical Support,
check to see if there are program updates
available for download. Our engineering
team periodically creates updates to the
program to resolve functionality or pro-
gram issues that were unknown at the
time of release. These updates are pro-
vided free of charge for the current
released version and can be accessed by
selecting Help> Download Program
Updates from the menu.
When you first encounter a problem or
error message, copy the exact wording of
the message or a detailed description of
the problem. This helps us isolate the
problem and provide you with a solution
as quickly as possible.
When placing a call to Technical Support,
be at the computer or work station that is
experiencing the problem and have Chief
Architect running. If you do not have
access to the problem computer at the
time of the call, the technician may be
unable to reproduce the issue and/or sug-
gest a remedy that can be implemented
and verified immediately.
Be prepared to reproduce the problem
when you contact us. If the problem can-
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1260 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Program Paths Dialog
1261
not be reproduced, there is a reduced
chance that we will be able to resolve the
problem on your first phone call.
Priority Support
Chief Architect X6 users who participate in
the Support and Software Assurance
program should use the Priority Support
telephone number provided in their SSA
documentation. The Priority Support number
bypasses the regular phone queues to give
you the fastest possible answers to your
questions.
Online Information
Chief Architect has a variety of support
resources available on our Web site. These
include our Technical Support Knowledge
Base, the How do I? Solution Finder,
downloadable program updates, and ways to
contact our Technical Support department.
To access these resources, visit: www.chief-
architect.com .
Our support team is happy to assist you in
finding the best resource to answer your
questions, and can resolve most issues in just
a few minutes. In order to allow us to quickly
answer your calls, we ask that you limit
yourself to one question per support call.
Online Support
Questions can be answered online by the
Technical Support department. To submit a
technical inquiry online, visit the Technical
Support section of our Web site and use the
Online Support Center.
This route ensures that your question is
delivered to the first available support
professional. Requesting assistance of an
individual specialist is not recommended,
since that person may not be available to
answer your question in a timely manner.
Telephone Support
Our Technical Support team is committed to
answering your questions as quickly as
possible and in the order received. Your call
is important to us; however, there are times
when we get more calls than expected and
you may have to wait a few minutes before
speaking to a technician.
Program Paths Dialog
Some technical issues can be caused by
problems with support files used by Chief
Architect. In the event of such an issue, Chief
Architect Technical Support may direct you
to the Program Paths dialog. This dialog
displays a list of files utilized by the software
along with the pathname of each.
To avoid unintended problems that could
prevent you from using the software, it is
strongly recommended that you make no
changes to any of the files in this list except
with the direct assistance of Technical
Support.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1261 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1262
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1262 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1263
Appendi x C
What s New i n
Chief Architect X6
Welcome to Chief Architect X6. This
appendix has been written to help our
upgrading customers make a smooth
transition from earlier versions of Chief
Architect to Chief Architect X6.
Chapter Contents
Before You Begin
New and Improved Features by Chapter
Before You Begin
There are many new features in Chief Architect X6, and many existing features have changed.
These changes affect the way Chief Architect functions, so it is very important to be familiar
with them.
Getting Started Check List on page 1264
For Files Created in Version X4 and Prior on page 1267
For Files Created in Version X3 and Prior on page 1268
For Files Created in Version X2 and Prior on page 1269
Chief Architect X6 can open the .plan, .layout, .PL1, and .LA1 files from prior versions.
Before opening any files created in earlier versions of Chief Architect, it is important to be
aware of changes made in the newest version and the effect they may have on your legacy plan
Be sure to read this section before opening any plans created in earlier versions
of Chief Architect.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1263 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1264
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
and layout files. For details, see For Files Created in Version X3 and Prior on page 1268,
For Files Created in Version X2 and Prior on page 1269.
As in all software, every new program version introduces changes to its functionality as well as
to the user interface. If you choose to bring a project forward, be sure to take a few moments to
look it over in the new version and confirm that the new functionality does not require you to
make any modifications. Particularly if you have an approaching deadline, you may find it best
to finish the current project in the version of the software in which you began it.
Getting Started Check List
The following checklist suggests steps you should take before migrating your files to Chief
Architect X6. More information about each of these steps can be found after the checklist.
1. Check for and Install Program Updates
2. Migrate Legacy Library Files
3. Migrate Custom Graphics Files
4. Review the New Features List
5. Review Your Preferences Settings
6. Create new custom Template Plan and Layout files
7. Set up Custom Toolbar Configurations
8. Backup Entire Plan
9. Check www.chiefarchitect.com for more information
1. Check for and Install Program Updates
Program updates contain improvements to the original release version and we recommend
using the most current version available. By default, Chief Architect checks for program
updates every day when you launch the program. For information about changing this, see
General Panel on page 92. Please note that program updates are available for download,
which means that you need internet access to acquire them.
You can check for updates at any time:
Select Help> Download Program Updates from the menu.
Visit the Program Updates page on the Chief Architect Web site at www.chiefarchitect.com.
2. Migrate Legacy Library Files
Library content from previous program versions cannot be installed or copied into the Chief
Architect X6 library. If you upgraded from version X1 or later and have custom library content
on your computer from that program version, the program installer will locate it and ask if you
want to migrate it into the Chief Architect X6 library. See Migrating Library Catalogs on
page 15.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1264 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Before You Begin
1265
You can import library files from versions X1 through X4 at any time by selecting Library>
Import Library (.calib, .calibz) from the program menu. In addition, library files from
versions 10 and prior can be imported by selecting Library> Convert Legacy (.alb) Library
Files from the program menu. See Importing Library Catalogs on page 798.
3. Migrate Custom Graphics Files
If you have custom graphics files, including textures, images or backdrops, that you were using
in a previous program version, you can copy them manually using Windows Explorer for use in
Chief Architect X6. See Chief Architect Data on page 49.
Copy custom texture files to the Chief Architect X6 Textures folder located in the Chief
Architect X6 Data folder.
Copy custom image files to your Chief Architect X6 Images folder located in the Chief
Architect X6 Data folder.
Copy custom backdrop files to your Chief Architect X6 Backdrops folder located in the
Chief Architect X6 Data folder.
In Chief Architect X5 through X1, custom graphics were saved in the Chief Architect Data
folder, as they are in version X6. In version 10 and prior, they were located in the programs
installation directory, in folders that began with My. Custom backdrops, for example, were
saved in My Backdrops.
Texture and image files are not listed in the Library Browser. These files can be assigned to
material and image objects, however, which are stored in the library so it is important to retain
them. There are several tools available for adding materials and images to the library. For more
information, see Images on page 1082 and Creating Materials on page 823.
4. Review the New Features List
There are a number of important reasons why you should familiarize yourself with the new and
improved features in Chief Architect X6:
New and improved features allow you to produce drawings more efficiently, so it is to your
advantage to use them.
Some changes to existing functionality may affect your accustomed drawing style and thus
your productivity if you are not aware of them.
New features may affect your choice of settings in your template files, as well as your pre-
ferred Preferences settings.
See New and Improved Features by Chapter on page 1270.
5. Review Your Preferences Settings
Any changes that you made to the Preferences settings in your previous version do not migrate
into Chief Architect X6. You should review all the settings in the Preferences dialog to make
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1265 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1266
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
sure that they are set to suit your drawing needs. For more information, see Preferences
Dialog on page 85.
6. Create new custom Template Plan and Layout files
Chief Architect X6 installs a selection of template plan and layout files that have been set up to
take advantage of the programs updated tools and features. See Template Files on page 78.
For best results, it is recommended that you either:
Use the installed templates when creating new plans and layout files in Chief Architect X6
Use the installed templates as the basis for creating new custom templates.
If you choose to continue using custom template files that you created in a previous program
version, it is very important that you take the time to carefully review all the default settings in
the file, making sure that they will continue to suit your needs in X6. First, make copies of your
custom templates in the Chief Architect X6 The Templates directory is located in the Chief
Architect X6 Data folder in Windows Explorer. Next, open each template as you would a
regular plan or layout file, by selecting File> Open, and then save any changes you make by
selecting File> Save.
If you do choose to continue using a legacy template plan, it is best to also use a legacy layout
template from the same program version, as well. As with a template plan, take the time to go
through the layout templates defaults and make sure they are suited for use in X6 and that their
line weight scales do not conflict with those in your template plans. See Line Weights and
Scaling on page 1171.
7. Set up Custom Toolbar Configurations
It is possible to migrate toolbar configuration files from previous versions to Chief Architect
X6; however, it is not recommended because it is likely that you will be missing new tools
available in version X6.
Instead, we recommend that you set up your custom toolbars the way you would like them in
Chief Architect X6. You may find it most effective to customize your toolbars as you get used
to working in the new program version, rather than beforehand. See Toolbar Configurations
on page 126.
8. Backup Entire Plan
Before migrating a legacy file created in Chief Architect X5 or prior, it is a good idea to open
the plan in the program version in which is was created and use the Backup Entire Plan tool
(Export Entire Plan in version X3 and prior) to export the plan with all associated support files,
including textures, backdrops and images. See Backup Entire Plan on page 64.
9. Check www.chiefarchitect.com for more information
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1266 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Before You Begin
1267
If you have additional questions about the changes in Chief Architect, up to date information is
available in the Support section of our web site. You can also post questions on the Chief Talk
web forum at www.chieftalk.com.
For Files Created in Version X5 and Prior
In addition to the above recommendations, if you wish to open files created in Chief Architect
Version X5 or prior, bear in mind the following before you open legacy files in Chief Architect
X6.
1. Named Values for Doors and Windows
In Version X6, the Named Values door_style_name, door_type_name, and window_type_name
were shortened to style_name and type_name. Any object labels or text macros using these
Named Values in legacy plans opened in Version X6 will need to be replaced. See Working
with Named Values on page 1249.
For Files Created in Version X4 and Prior
In addition to the above recommendations, if you wish to open files created in Chief Architect
Version X4 or prior, bear in mind the following before you open legacy files in Chief Architect
X6.
1. Roof Overhangs and Framing
In Chief Architect X4 and prior, roof overhangs were measured to the outside of the subfascia,
whereas in Version X5, they are measured to the outside of the fascia or shadow boards, if
present. In legacy plans opened in Version X5, this will not affect the appearance of roof planes
in floor plan view because in X4 and prior, roof plane polylines represented the projected
framing area whereas in Version X5 they represent the total projected area. But, the position of
the fascia and subfascia will shift, as will the length of the rafters. See Eave and Gable
Overhangs on page 470.
2. Door Swing Direction and Materials
In Chief Architect X4 and prior, exterior doors that swing outward display interior material on
exterior side of door. This was corrected in Version X6. Doors modified to work around the old
behavior could be affected in legacy plans opened in Version X5. See Changing Door Swings
on page 355.
3. Door Swing Direction and Louvers
Improvements to door louver direction may affect louvers in all doors with the exception of
bifold doors. See Changing Door Swings on page 355.
4. Wrapped Door/Window Lintels and Window Sills
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1267 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1268
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
In Chief Architect X4 and prior, wrapped lintels and sills extended out further than those that
were not wrapped. In legacy plans opened in Version X6, the extents of wrapped lintels and
sills will be adjusted so that they equal their Extend setting. See Door Casing on page 354
and Window Casing and Sills on page 388.
5. Cabinet Feet
The offsets for cabinet foot millwork symbols in Version X4 and prior were set per millwork
symbol to insert into cabinets effectively. In Version X6, the offset is set in the Cabinet
Specification dialogs. When legacy plans are opened in Version X5, cabinet foot offsets are set
to 0 and transferred to their containing cabinet, if one exists. Any customized or independently
placed cabinet feet will be affected. See Pilasters, Feet, and Moldings on page 664.
6. Object Labels in Cross Section/Elevation Views
If a Label layer is turned on in a cross section/elevation view and objects of that type are
visible in the view, then those objects labels will display in that view when the plan is opened
in Version X6. See Object Labels on page 1221.
7. Transparent Materials
In Chief Architect X4, materials assigned to the Transparent Material Class for ray tracing were
visible in rendered views even when their Index of Refraction was set to 1.0. When legacy
plans are opened in Version X6, Transparent materials with an Index of Refraction of 1.0 are
transferred to the General Material class and assigned a Transparency value of 100%. This will
not affect these materials appearance in ray trace views, but will make them completely
invisible in rendered views. See Properties Panel on page 838.
8. Invisible Beams
The legacy Invisible Beam checkbox was removed from the Wall Specification dialog. When
legacy plans are opened in Version X6, any Invisible Beam walls will be converted to Invisible
Walls. See General Panel on page 296.
For Files Created in Version X3 and Prior
In addition to the above recommendations, if you wish to open files created in Chief Architect
Version X3 or prior, bear in mind the following before you open legacy files in Chief Architect
X6.
1. Text Styles
The appearance of a number of objects that include text - including object labels, the North
Pointer, Sun Angles, J oist Direction Lines, the Up/Down arrows for stairs and ramps - can now
be controlled using Text Style. Their appearance may be altered somewhat in legacy plans
opened in Chief Architect X6. See Text Styles on page 1011.
2. Light Sources
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1268 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
Before You Begin
1269
The illumination created by light fixtures and Added Lights was improved in Chief Architect
X6. Lighting in legacy plans may appear noticeably brighter when viewed in version X6. See
Light Data Panel on page 622.
For Files Created in Version X2 and Prior
If you wish to open files created in Chief Architect Version X2 or prior, bear in mind the
following file management changes and structural enhancements before you open legacy files
in Chief Architect X6.
1. Material textures, images, and backdrops
Chief Architect X2 and prior installed with a catalog of library content, including a selection of
material textures, images, and backdrops. This library catalog is no longer installed with the
program because it is now available for download on-demand, so it will be possible to open a
legacy plan in version X6 and encounter numerous missing file warnings. To avoid this, we
recommend using the Export Entire Plan feature in the original program version to create a
folder that includes the plan and all associated textures, images, and backdrops before opening
this file in X6. This tool is renamed Backup Entire Plan in version X6. See Backup Entire
Plan on page 64.
2. Floor and ceiling finish thicknesses
In Chief Architect X2 and prior, floor and ceiling finish layers were not modeled in 3D, and
objects such as railings, stairs, landings, cabinets, fixtures, and furnishings measured their
Floor to Bottom height from the subfloor. These objects now measure their Floor to Bottom
height from the floor finish surface by default, so it is possible that you may notice height
changes for these objects - particularly in saved, annotated cross section/elevation views. See
Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions on page 330.
3. Riser heights and landing thicknesses
The default Best Fit Riser Height for stairs that do not reach the next level has been updated
from 9 (225 mm) in version X2 and prior to 6 3/4 (169 mm) in Chief Architect X6. This may
affect the riser heights of stairs, as well as the thicknesses of landings attached to those stairs.
See Staircase Specification Dialog on page 539.
4. Auto Adjust Height
The Follow Terrain option in some specification dialogs was replaced by the Auto Adjust
Height checkbox. If a cabinet, fireplace, fixture, furniture, or other library symbol had Follow
Terrain unchecked in version X2 or prior and was located in a room with a floor height other
than the default for the current floor, then the objects Floor to Bottom Height will change to
equal that rooms floor height. The objects position in the model will not change, however. See
Terrain Height vs Floor Height on page 689 of the Reference Manual.
5. Adjustable Thickness Walls
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1269 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1270
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
In Chief Architect X2 and prior, generic, single-layer wall types were available for use. When a
legacy plan file is opened in version X6 and these wall types are detected, they are replaced by
an updated, non-generic wall type. Framed walls and Railings will also acquire 1/2 (13 mm)
thick layers of sheetrock on each side. Railings that define a Deck room with Advanced Deck
Framing Built will not acquire sheetrock layers. See Legacy Wall Types on page 291.
6. Stairwells defined by railings
Interior railings that used a generic, single-layer wall type drawn in older program versions will
acquire layers of sheetrock when the plan is opened in version X6. This can affect the
appearance of staircases where they join to a floor platform. To address this issue, select the
railing and move it 1/2 (13 mm) away from the top edge of the staircase. See Creating a
Stairwell Manually on page 537.
7. Deck rooms
In legacy plans opened in Chief Architect X6, Deck rooms with Advanced Deck Framing built
retain the framing but have Automatic Deck Framing turned off by default. Decks with no
Advanced Deck Framing built are converted to Balcony rooms. See Decks on page 326.
8. Material definitions and light sources
Settings in the Define Material dialog that affect materials appearance of brightness have been
modified. The Ambient setting was removed, and the Diffuse setting for materials in legacy
plans will be set to 100% when opened in version X6.
The Quality setting for light sources set to use Soft Shadows in ray tracing was also modified.
Lights using Soft Shadows in legacy plans will be set to use Medium quality. The Light
Diameter of light sources in legacy plans is capped at 4 (100 mm). See Texture Panel on
page 836 and Light Data Panel on page 622.
9. Structural Member Reporting
When a plan created in Chief Architect X2 or prior is opened in Chief Architect X6, Materials
Lists are set to calculate Total Lineal Length. For a combination of lineal length and piece
count, select Mixed Reporting in the Structural Member Reporting dialog. See Structural
Member Reporting on page 1228.
10. Fill New Framing Members
In Chief Architect X2 and prior, Fill New Framing Members was view-specific; in Chief
Architect X6 it applies to the entire plan. As a result, it is turned off by default in legacy plans
opened in version X6. See CAD Defaults Dialog on page 1022.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1270 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
New and Improved Features by Chapter
1271
New and Improved Features by Chapter
The following is a list of new and improved
features in Chief Architect Version X6.
Where possible, cross-references to
additional information has been provided.
Installation
License deactivation can now be accom-
plished online.
Program Overview
Tabbed dialogs have been replaced with
dialogs with panels. See Dialogs on
page 36.
Redesigned dialog panels feature verti-
cally columns of settings divided by hori-
zontal headings for greater ease of use.
See Dialogs on page 36.
Object previews in specification dialogs
can now be resized, rotated, and zoomed.
Multiple Rendering Techniques can be
used, as well. See Dialog Preview
Panes on page 38.
Scroll bars can be turned on/off in any
view. See View and Side Windows on
page 33.
New View menu. See View Tools on
page 846.
The programs Help is now always con-
textual: it will try to launch the page asso-
ciated with the active tool. See Getting
Help on page 45.
File Management
The recent file list was moved to the
File> Open Recent File submenu. See
Recently Opened Files on page 59.
Preferences and
Default Settings
New Active Defaults dialog allows you
to view and modify your currently active
Saved Defaults. See Using Active
Defaults on page 75.
The Active Annotation Set drop-down
was removed from the Annotation Sets
dialog. See Annotation Sets Dialog on
page 75.
Modified Annotation Sets are no lon-
ger described as such to avoid confusion.
See Using Active Defaults on page 75.
Annotation Sets and their Saved Defaults
are now view-specific and retained with
saved views. See Using Multiple Saved
Defaults on page 71.
New Open Dialogs to the Last Panel
Visited setting in the Preferences dia-
log. See General Panel on page 92.
All settings in the General Plan Defaults
dialog are now applied file-wide rather
than being view-specific. See General
Plan Defaults Dialog on page 82.
The Living Area To settings were moved
from the Floor 1 Defaults dialog to the
General Plan Defaults dialog. See Gen-
eral Plan Defaults Dialog on page 82.
New 2D Zoom and Panning Optimiza-
tions option in the Preferences dialog.
See General Panel on page 92.
All Reset options are now found on the
Reset Options panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Reset Options Panel on
page 121.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1271 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1272
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
The Text and Page Setup panel of the
Preferences dialog was renamed the
Text panel. See Text Panel on page 91.
Legacy Plan and Layout Page Setup
options were removed from the
Preferences dialog. See Text Panel on
page 91.
The Fixture/Furniture Resize Enable
setting was removed from the General
Plan Defaults dialog. See General Plan
Defaults Dialog on page 82.
Obsolete Double Buffer Drawing set-
tings was removed from the Preferences
dialog. See Appearance Panel on page
86.
Obsolete Hardware Culling, OpenGL
Vector View and Surface Backdrop set-
tings were removed from the
Preferences dialog. See Render Panel
on page 117.
Toolbars and Hotkeys
Improved Toolbar Customization dia-
log includes a searchable button list and
table showing toolbar names and the
views in which each is active. See Tool-
bar Customization Dialog on page 130.
The Lock Toolbars setting has been
moved from the Toolbar Customization
dialog to the Tools menu and also has a
toolbar button that can be added to the
toolbars. See Locking Toolbars on page
129.
Undocked toolbars can no longer be
resized. See Moving Toolbars on page
128.
Can now create custom keyboard hotkey
sequences to activate tools. See Custom-
ize Hotkeys Dialog on page 134.
Layers
New Name Filter in theLayer Display
Options dialog. See Layer Display
Options Dialog on page 144.
Removed the Current CAD Layer set-
ting from theLayer Display Options dia-
log to reduce confusion. See Layer
Display Options Dialog on page 144.
Improved feedback in the Layer Display
Options dialog shows which column is
being used to sort the table and in which
order it is sorted. See Layer Display
Options Dialog on page 144.
Creating Objects
Editing Objects
Removed the obsolete Accurate Move
edit tool. See Moving Objects on page
212.
The Center Object edit tool is now
available for use in layout See Aligning
Objects on page 215.
Walls, Railings, and Fencing
Invisible Wall tool replaced by the new
Room Divider tool. See Room
Dividers and Invisible Walls on page
261.
New Edit Wall Layer Intersections
edit tool provides control of how individ-
ual wall layers build at intersections. See
Edit Handles for Walls on page 276.
Can now specify multiple Main Layers
for a single wall type. See Multiple
Main Layers on page 289.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1272 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
New and Improved Features by Chapter
1273
Add to Library tool can now be
used to add walls to the library for future
use in other plans. See Library Walls
on page 254.
New Energy Values settings for wall
types, which are used when exporting to
REScheck. See Wall Type Definitions
Dialog on page 291.
New Hang Floor Platform Above on
Wall specifications. See Structure
Panel on page 298.
New Bearing Wall specification pro-
duces joists that either lap or butt over the
selected wall. See Structure Panel on
page 298.
Improved feedback when a wall connec-
tion problem is present in a plan. See
Fix Wall Connections on page 267.
Increased flexibility displaying upper and
lower pony walls in views sent to layout.
See Displaying Pony Walls on page
260.
Automatically generated Attic Walls now
become Invisible if deleted while Auto
Rebuild Attic Walls is on. See Remov-
ing Attic Walls on page 284.
New Wall Material Regions let you
replace finish layers of walls with custom
material layers. See Floor and Wall
Material Regions on page 759.
Rooms
New Conditioned Area settings for
rooms which are used when exporting to
REScheck. See General Panel on page
339.
New Energy Values settings for floor
and ceiling platform definitions, which
are used when exporting to REScheck.
See Floor and Ceiling Platform Defini-
tions on page 330.
New Floor Material Regions let you
replace finish layers of floors with cus-
tom material layers. See Floor and Wall
Material Regions on page 759.
New Display as Uppercase checkbox for
room labels. See General Panel on
page 339.
Doors and Windows
Door and doorway jambs are now drawn
in floor plan view. See In Floor Plan
View on page 351.
New J amb panel in the Door
Specification dialog. See J amb Panel
on page 367.
New Frame panel in the Window
Specification dialog. See Frame Panel
on page 398.
New Has Frame checkbox and increased
maximum window Frame Depth. See
Frame Panel on page 398.
New Framing panel in the Door and
Window Specification dialogs with new
Headers, Trimmers, and Sill settings.
See Framing Panel on page 371.
New Include Header option lets you
omit headers for individual doors - such
as interior doors. See Framing Panel on
page 371.
New Energy Values panel and settings
settings for doors and windows, which
are used when exporting to REScheck.
See Energy Values Panel on page 373.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1273 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1274
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Can now specify a windows Floor to
Bottom height as well as its Floor to Top.
See General Panel on page 390.
New Options and Materials panels in the
Bay/Box and Bow Window
Specification dialogs. See Bay/Box and
Bow Window SpecificationDialogs on
page 412.
New Size, Ceiling, and Floor settings for
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows. See Gen-
eral Panel on page 413.
Inproved usability of settings controlling
movable window components. See Gen-
eral Panel on page 390.
Inproved usability of settings controlling
number of lites. See Lites Panel on
page 399.
New Separate Trim and Materials on
Each Side option lets you specify the
appearance of each side of interior doors
and Pass-Throughs differently. See
General Panel on page 360 and Gen-
eral Panel on page 390.
Door and window louvers are now two-
sided and can have separate interior and
exterior materials. See Door Sides on
page 354.
New Glass Louver, or jalousie, Type
for doors and windows. See General
Panel on page 360 and General Panel
on page 390.
New Hardware on Fixed Section option
for Doors. See Hardware Panel on page
369.
New Fire Door setting and Column to
Include in Door Schedules. See Options
Panel on page 362.
Tempered Glass setting is now available
for all door types except doorways. See
Options Panel on page 362.
Can now specify the Number of Hinges
assigned to a selected door. See Hard-
ware Panel on page 369.
Can now select a shutter style from the
library and specify custom shutter Offset
values. See Shutters Panel on page 406.
Can now specify shutters for doors. See
Shutters Panel on page 371.
New Custom window type for window
symbols. See Window Symbols on
page 379.
Can now specify custom CAD block to
represent window symbols in floor plan
view. See Window Symbols on page
379.
To reduce confusion, the settings for edit-
ing panel and glass door frames were
moved to the General panel of the Door
Specification dialog. See General
Panel on page 360.
Sliding glass doors included in Window
Schedules are now listed as Egress. See
Sliding Doors on page 349.
Multiple Floors
New Step floor/ceiling elevations to
match existing floor checkbox maintains
the floor and ceiling heights on the exist-
ing floors when a new floor is created.
See Adding Floors on page 419.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1274 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
New and Improved Features by Chapter
1275
Foundations
Roofs
Can now specify roof Pitch in Degrees
from -89 to 89. See General Panel on
page 479.
When a roof plane is deleted, any roof
framing associated with it is also deleted.
See Deleting Roof Planes on page 478.
New Retain Roof Framing checkbox in
the Roof Plane Specification dialog pre-
vents a roof planes framing from being
replaced when framing is regenerated.
See Framing Panel on page 482.
Can now choose whether to Include
Ridge Caps on Auto Roof Returns. See
Roof Returns on page 506.
Stairs, Ramps, and Landings
Decreased the minimum Width for stairs
and ramps to 2 (50 mm). See General
Panel on page 539.
Framing
Twelve new default layers for framing
objects, including Framing, Posts and
Framing, Sill Plates. See Displaying
Framing on page 580.
New Build Framing for Selected
Object(s) edit tool for walls, roof
planes, and ceiling planes. See Build
Framing for Selected Object on page
584.
Settings on Headers panel of the Build
Framing dialog were moved to the Open-
ings panel of the dialog and to the Door
and Window Specification dialogs.
Header size and count can now be speci-
fied per door or window, and maximum
header count was increased to 10. See
Framing Panel on page 371.
The default Header Depth based on
opening width now includes the Rough
Opening value. See Openings Panel on
page 566.
The specified Header Type is now used
when wall framing is generated as well as
in the Materials List. See Rough Open-
ings on page 555.
The framing for Railings specified as
Solid can now display in floor plan view.
See Displaying Framing on page 580.
Can now specify the width and framing
type for rim joists in the Build Framing
dialog. See Floor Panels on page 562.
Can now specify the default framing for
Fireplaces in the Build Framing dia-
log. See Fireplaces Panel on page 568.
Floor/Ceiling Beams specified as
Bearing Beam no longer need a Bearing
Line in order to split a platform. See
Floor/Ceiling Beam on page 560.
Trusses
Can no longer delete the Truss Detail if
there are trusses present in the current
plan. See Truss Details on page 597.
Trim and Moldings
New Repeat Distance lets you modify
the width of a symbol molding assigned
to an object. See Symbol Moldings on
page 637.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1275 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1276
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Cabinets
Can now specify the material assigned to
cabinet shelves. See Cabinet Shelves
on page 665.
The width of Clipped and Rounded cabi-
net and countertop corners is now mea-
sured along the front of the cabinet rather
than along the clipped edge. See Gen-
eral Panel on page 669.
Increased the minimum distance between
cabinets in which automatic fillers will
generate in metric plans. See Cabinet
Fillers on page 654.
New Custom Backsplash tool. See
Custom Backsplashes on page 653.
Other Objects
New floor and wall Material Regions let
you replace finish layers of walls and
floors with custom material layers. See
Floor and Wall Material Regions on
page 759.
The individual edges of Face objects
can be aligned using the Make Parallel/
Perpendicular edit tool. See Face
Objects on page 741 of the Reference
Manual.
Architectural Blocks
New Display and Size/Position settings
in the Architectural Block Specification
dialog. See General Panel on page 785.
Display of sub-objects in plan view is no
longer tied to their inclusion in schedules
and the materials list. See General
Panel on page 785.
The Library
New Retain Aspect Ratio option for fix-
tures, furnishings, and other symbol
objects. See General Panel on page
814.
View and Window Tools
Multiple view windows are now tabbed
at the top. See Working in Multiple
Views on page 849.
View windows can now be torn out of the
main program window. See Working in
Multiple Views on page 849.
The Cascade and Arrange Icons options
for displaying view windows were
removed. See Working in Multiple
Views on page 849.
3D Views
The Color toggle is now available in
all Rendering Techniques. See In Ren-
dered Views on page 873.
New Position options for camera call-
outs. See Plan Display Panel on page
889.
If a cross section/elevation view has been
sent to layout, the new Automatic option
populates the views callout with the
name of the layout page. See Plan Dis-
play Panel on page 889.
Rendering and Ray Tracing
New panel in the Ray Trace Options dia-
log lets you set the initial values for
Image Properties. See Image Properties
Panel on page 930.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1276 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
New and Improved Features by Chapter
1277
Shadows in 3D views now generate sig-
nificantly more quickly. See Shadows
on page 896.
Text, Callouts, and Markers
Can now specify a Prefix and Suffix for
the number or letter at the beginning of
list paragraphs in Rich Text . See
Paragraph Options Dialog on page 988.
The Numbering Start at setting was
removed from the Paragraph Options
dialog. See Paragraph Options Dialog
on page 988.
Undo and Redo are now available in the
contextual menu in the Rich Text Speci-
fication dialog. See Text Panel on page
986.
Text macros can now be inserted into
Callouts and Markers . See
Callout Panel on page 1006 and
Marker Panel on page 1010.
Can no longer specify the size of bullets
in Rich Text. See Paragraph Options
Dialog on page 988.
The Printed Size Input dialog was
renamed Print Size Calculator. See
Scaling Text on page 998.
New Replace Fonts dialog. See Miss-
ing Fonts on page 983.
CAD Objects
Enhanced settings in New CAD Arc dia-
log. See Input Arc on page 1040.
Project Management
New Clear Form buttons in the
Designer Information and Client
Information dialogs. See Project Infor-
mation on page 1075.
Pictures, Images, and
Walkthroughs
Screen Capture tool is now easier to
use: simply click and drag a marquee.
See Creating Screen Captures on page
1101.
The Screen Capture Setup dialognow
remains open after you click Capture,
allowing you to create multiple captures
more easily. See Creating Screen Cap-
tures on page 1101.
Imported pictures, metafiles, and PDF
files can now be cropped using the edit
handles. See Using the Mouse on page
1098.
Importing and Exporting
New Export to REScheck tool
exports information about a plans ther-
mal envelope to REScheck (.rxl) file for-
mat. See Export to REScheck on page
1136.
Can now import and export 3D symbols
from and to the COLLADA (.dae) file
format. See Importing and Exporting
on page 1113.
Can now import and export 3D symbols
from and to the stereolithography (.StL)
file format. See Importing and Export-
ing on page 1113.
The Import Drawing Wizard was
renamed Import Drawing Assistant. See
Import Drawing Assistant on page
1116.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1277 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1278
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Printing and Plotting
Can now save any view as a PDF, even if
no PDF writer is installed. See Print
View Dialog on page 1173.
The Page Setup and Print dialogs were
renamed Drawing Sheet Setup and Print
View, respectively. See Printing and
Plotting on page 1159.
Can now specify the Margins of the
drawing sheet. See Drawing Sheet Setup
Dialog on page 1164.
Redesigned Print View dialog includes a
scrollable, zoomable print preview and
DPI setting. See Print View Dialog on
page 1173.
Improved ability to include and exclude
specific layout pages as the Print Range.
See Print View Dialog on page 1173.
Page breaks no longer display in either
the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog or when
Print Preview or Drawing Sheet
are enabled. See Print Preview on page
1166.
Line Styles assigned to object surface
edges and patterns are now maintained
when Vector Views are printed. See
Printing and Plotting on page 1159.
Obsolete Double Buffered Printing,
Line Weight, and Height and Width
Correction settings removed fromPrint
View dialog. See Print View Dialog on
page 1173.
Use These Settings When Converting
Old Files settings removed from the
Drawing Sheet View dialog. See Draw-
ing Sheet Setup Dialog on page 1164.
Print to File option removed from the
Print View dialog. See Printing to File
on page 1161.
Layout
New Layout Page Table tool lets
you create layout tables of contents. See
Layout Page Tables on page 1209.
New Layout Revison Table tool lets
you create revision tables. See Revision
Tables on page 1209.
Can now create multiple layout Page
Templates and assign them to the pages
of your choice. See Layout Page Tem-
plates on page 1206.
Can now create custom layout page num-
bering conventions. See Layout Page
Numbering on page 1205.
Can now delete pages from a layout when
they have content on them. See Adding
and Deleting Pages on page 1205.
Can now insert layout pages both before
and after the current page. See Adding
and Deleting Pages on page 1205.
Can now insert pages into and delete
them from a layout using the contextual
menu in the Project Browser. See In the
Project Browser on page 1204.
Can now specify the floor number shown
and the Annotation Set used in a floor
plan view sent to layout in the Layout
Box Specification dialog. See Plan
View Panel on page 1199.
Line Styles are now maintained when
Vector Views are sent to layout. See
Sending Views to Layout on page
1188.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1278 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
New and Improved Features by Chapter
1279
Improved Edit Layout Lines tool.
See Editing Layout Lines on page
1196.
Removed Highlight Weight settings
from the Layout Line Specification dia-
log. See Layout Line Specification Dia-
log on page 1196.
If a cross section/elevation view has been
sent to layout, the new Automatic Text
Below Line option populates the views
callout with the layout pages Label. See
Plan Display Panel on page 889.
Can now specify the drawing order for
the Reference Plan Display in views sent
to layout. See Plan View Panel on page
1199.
Schedules and Object
Labels
New Move Row and Move Column edit
handles let you change the order of
objects and the columns in schedules .
See Using the Edit Handles on page
1213.
New Move Down in Schedule and
Move Up in Schedule edit tools let
you move a selected objects position in a
schedule. See Editing Schedule Order
on page 1214.
Schedule columns can now be renamed
in the Schedule Specification and
Defaults dialogs. See General Panel on
page 1217.
Can now choose whether to display a
schedules column headings as well as
whether to use uppercase text. See Gen-
eral Panel on page 1217.
New Group Similar Objects option lets
you choose whether to display similar
objects as one line item or separately. See
General Panel on page 1217.
Fixtures and appliances set into cabinets
can now display callout labels associated
with a Fixture Schedule. See Object
Labels on page 1221.
New Custom Window Type for garden
windows and other window symbols. See
Columns and Objects to Include on
page 1215.
Can now create separate schedules for
Interior and Exterior Doors. See Col-
umns and Objects to Include on page
1215.
New Columns to Include for door, win-
dow, cabinet, and electrical schedules.
See Columns and Objects to Include on
page 1215.
Objects included in more than one sched-
ule can now display multiple callout
labels. See Working with Multiple
Schedules on page 1216.
All objects now derive their schedule
Descriptions from the Components dia-
log. See Components Dialog on page
1243.
New Totals row at the bottom of Door
and Window Schedules that include an
Area column. See Area Totals on page
1215.
Hinge Side and Swing can now be
included in Door Schedules. See In
Door Schedules on page 357.
Materials Lists
The ability to export Materials Lists to
.xls file format was replaced by export to
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1279 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1280
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
more flexible .xml format. See Printing
and Exporting the Materials List on
page 1239.
Column headings are now included when
a Materials List is printed. See Printing
and Exporting the Materials List on
page 1239.
Heated Area descriptions were replaced
by Thermal Envelope, and are calculated
with greater accuracy. See Conditioned
Area Totals on page 1240.
Can now generate a Materials List while
a camera view is active. See The Materi-
als List Tools on page 1226.
Obsolete Export Version 8 Columns
Only was removed from the Materials
List Export dialog. See Materials List
Export Dialog.
Ruby Console
Some named values were shortened. See
For Files Created in Version X5 and
Prior on page 1267.
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1280 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1281
Index
Numerics
3D
Backdrops .........................................861
Box ...................................................740
Close all 3D Views .............................874
Data Import...................................... 1127
Delete Surface...................................874
Face..................................................740
Molding Polyline.................................639
Origin.............................................. 1142
Remove 3D Data................................874
Symbols, Importing .......................... 1128
3D Box
Specification Dialog ...........................745
3D Mol di ng Pol yl i ne
Specification Dialog ...........................642
3D Roof Desi gner ..............................472
3D Vi ew Def aul t s Di al og ...................859
3D Vi ews
Display..............................................871
Editing...............................................883
Floor Overview...................................866
Framing Overview..............................867
Full Overview.....................................866
Generation, Speed up ........................921
Line Weights.................................... 1171
Overviews .........................................863
Panels...............................................860
Save .................................................885
Working in.........................................883
3D Wal l Desi gner ...............................264
3DS Fi l es
Export ............................................. 1134
A
Absol ut e Locat i on
New point ....................................... 1027
Act i ve Layer Set Cont r ol ................. 144
Added Li ght s ..................................... 899
Addi ng
Floor Between Existing Floors............ 420
to the Library..................................... 799
Toolbar Buttons................................. 131
Adj ust
Effects .............................................. 936
Image Properties............................... 936
Material Definition ............................. 823
Wall Angle ........................................ 103
Adj ust Li ght s Di al og ........................ 901
Advanced
Deck Framing.................................... 326
Splines ............................................. 205
Aer i al Vi ew ........................................ 851
Layer Set.......................................... 852
Al cove Roof s ..................................... 496
Al i gn
Curved Stairs Between Floors............ 220
Curved Walls Between Floors ............ 280
Objects ............................................. 215
Pony Walls Between Floors ............... 280
Roof Edges....................................... 473
Stem Walls and Footings ................... 439
Text.................................................. 999
Walls ................................................ 279
Al i gn/Di st r i but e
Along Line ........................................ 217
Objects ............................................. 215
Al l owed
Angles Dialog.................................... 243
Al pha Channel ................................... 836
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1281 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1282
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Al phabet s
International...................................... 982
Unicode............................................ 982
Ambi ent Li ght
Daytime............................................ 898
Interior.............................................. 898
Nighttime.......................................... 899
Angl e Snap Gr i d ............................... 159
Angl e Snaps ...................................... 158
Angl ed Fr ont Cabi net s ..................... 667
Angl es
Entered as bearings ........................ 1032
Angul ar Di mensi ons..........227, 960, 973
Annot at i on Set s .................................. 74
Appear ance Pr ef er ences ................... 86
Appl i ances
Built into cabinets.............................. 653
Ar c
Creation Modes............................... 1038
Panel.............................................. 1042
Specification Dialog......................... 1042
Tools .............................................. 1040
with Arrow....................................... 1041
Ar chi t ect ur al Bl ock
Specification Dialog........................... 784
Ar chi t ect ur al Bl ocks ........................ 781
Components...................................... 787
Displaying......................................... 783
Edit Sub-Objects ............................... 784
Explode ............................................ 784
Sub-objects....................................... 786
Ar chi t ect ur al Pr ef er ences ............... 103
Ar chi ve Fi l es ....................................... 55
Manage Auto Archives......................... 56
Ar cs
Aligning Centers................................ 220
Arc About Center............................. 1039
Arc Creation Modes......................... 1038
Lock Center ...................................... 188
Make Arc Tangent............................. 220
Show Arc Centers ............................. 188
Start and End Points.......................... 107
Tangent, make.................................. 281
Ar ea
Living Area calculation....................... 322
of a Polyline .................................... 1047
of Roof Planes................................... 483
of Rooms .......................................... 324
Ar r ow
Auto Positioning .............................. 1003
Panel .............................................. 1037
Special use ..................................... 1004
Text Line With................................. 1003
Ar t wor k
Creating textures ............................... 826
At t enuat i on ........................................ 625
At t i c
Floor................................................. 426
Rooms .............................................. 321
Trusses............................................. 605
Walls ................................................ 284
Aut o
Archive ......................................... 55, 95
Check for Program Updates ................. 92
Connect Island Rooms....................... 249
Detail ................................................ 870
Dormer Tool ...................................... 501
Dormers, Editing................................ 502
Elevation Dimensions ........................ 964
Exterior Elevations............................. 869
Floating Dormer................................. 500
Floating Dormer Tool ......................... 500
Interior Dimensions............................ 963
NKBA Dimensions ............................. 963
NKBA Elevation Dimensions .............. 964
Place Corner Boards.......................... 628
Place Outlets............................. 322, 616
Place Quoins..................................... 630
Roof Returns..................................... 506
Save Files..................................... 56, 94
Stairwell ............................................ 537
Aut o Di mensi on
Defaults ............................................ 955
Aut o Rebui l d
Attic Walls......................................... 249
Framing ............................................ 557
Roofs................................................ 459
Terrain.............................................. 702
Walls/Floors/Ceilings ......................... 423
Aut omat i c
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1282 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1283
Framing.............................................556
Roofs ................................................454
Roofs vs. Manual Roofs......................454
Walls.................................................249
B
Backcl i pped Cr oss Sect i on..............868
Backdr ops ........................................ 1102
3D.....................................................861
Definition......................................... 1102
Generated Sky...................................863
in Rendering Techniques....................863
Panoramic ....................................... 1103
Backgr ound Col or .............................. 88
Backup
Entire Plan.......................................... 64
Files................................................... 54
Bal l oon Thr ough Cei l i ng ..................299
Bal ust er s ............................................309
Definition...........................................515
Base
Cabinets............................................652
Basel i ne
Dimensions........................................961
Polylines (Roofs)................................484
Roofs ................................................470
Basement s
Daylight.............................................442
Walkout.............................................442
Bay Wi ndows .....................................377
Bay/Box Wi ndow
Specification Dialog ...........................412
Beams
Bearing..............................................587
Floor/Ceiling......................................560
Roof ..................................................559
Roof, exposed ...................................754
Bear i ng
Beam................................................587
Line...................................................579
Wall...................................................300
Bear i ngs ........................................... 1032
Behavi or s Pr ef er ences .................... 108
Bi r dsmout h
Cut ................................................... 478
Bl end Col or s wi t h Mat er i al s ............ 819
Bl i nd Cabi net s .................................. 668
Automatic ......................................... 651
Bl ocki ng
J oist ................................................. 560
Roof ................................................. 559
Wall.................................................. 566
Bl ocks
Architectural...................................... 781
Architectural vs CAD ......................... 782
CAD ............................................... 1059
Mulled Doors and Windows................ 358
Bonus
Library Catalogs................................ 795
Rooms.............................................. 426
Bor der s (Layout )............................. 1206
Boundi ng Box ................................. 1155
Bow
Front Cabinets .................................. 667
Window Specification ........................ 412
Bow Wi ndows.................................... 377
Box
Tools .............................................. 1049
Windows........................................... 377
Br eak
Line.................................................. 222
Line, complete................................... 223
Line, partial....................................... 223
Terrain Breaks .................................. 694
Wall.................................................. 264
Br i ck Ledges ..................................... 259
Bui l d
Foundation................................ 421, 434
Framing Dialog.................................. 561
House............................................. 1077
New Floor ......................................... 419
Roof Dialog....................................... 460
Terrain.............................................. 702
Bump Map
Use .................................................. 841
Bump Maps ........................................ 938
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1283 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1284
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Bumpi ng/Pushi ng ............................. 213
C
Cabi net
Defaults ............................................ 650
Designer........................................... 649
Modules Library ................................ 653
Shelf Specification Dialog.................. 680
Specification Dialog........................... 668
Tools ................................................ 651
Cabi net s
Angled front ...................................... 665
Backsplash ....................................... 670
Base................................................. 652
Bevel ................................................ 676
Blind................................................. 668
Blind Corners, automatic.................... 651
Built-in appliances ............................. 653
Corner .............................................. 665
Countertop, custom................... 653, 657
Countertops ...................................... 657
Delete face items .............................. 673
Dimension to corners/sides................ 952
Door/Drawer Overlay......................... 674
Door/drawer style.............................. 653
Doors, diagonal ................................. 674
Doors, glass...................................... 676
Editing.............................................. 661
End cabinets ..................................... 665
Exposed End..................................... 666
Fillers ............................................... 654
Fillers, automatic............................... 651
Frameless......................................... 674
Front Indicators................................. 658
Front Panel ....................................... 671
Full Height ........................................ 652
General Defaults ............................... 651
Glass doors ...................................... 676
Island ............................................... 668
Labels .............................................. 659
Lazy Susan....................................... 674
Minimum Width ................................. 651
Module Lines .................................... 658
Module lines, partial .......................... 651
Moving, with Wall .............................. 663
Normal .............................................. 665
Opening Indicators ............................ 658
Panels .............................................. 676
Peninsula radius................................ 665
Pilasters............................................ 678
Radius end........................................ 665
Resize Increment............................... 651
Reverse Appliance............................. 674
Separation ........................................ 674
Shaped............................................. 665
Shelves............................................. 680
Special shapes.......................... 665, 669
Stile.................................................. 674
Toe kick............................................ 671
Wall .................................................. 652
CAD
Angle Snaps...................................... 158
Angles in Degrees/Bearings ............. 1023
Blocks............................................. 1059
Box................................................. 1050
Circle about center .......................... 1044
Circle Tools..................................... 1044
Convert to Terrain.............................. 725
Cross box........................................ 1050
Current CAD Layer .......................... 1055
Current Point................................... 1028
Delete Current Point ........................ 1029
Drawing Tools ................................. 1025
Ellipses ........................................... 1044
Extend Object(s)................................ 237
Fillet ................................................. 224
In Layout......................................... 1186
Line Length Format.......................... 1023
Lines............................................... 1030
Move to Front of Group...................... 211
Ovals .............................................. 1044
Points, moving................................. 1029
Polylines ......................................... 1046
Preferences....................................... 104
Rectangular Polyline Tool ................ 1049
Resize .............................................. 108
Rotate around ................................... 109
Rotate items...................................... 108
Rotate J ump...................................... 109
Temporary Points ............................ 1028
to Walls..................................... 229, 287
Trim Object(s) ................................... 236
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1284 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1285
CAD Bl ock ........................................ 1059
Add to library................................... 1061
Explode........................................... 1060
Insert............................................... 1062
Insertion Point ................................. 1064
Make CAD Block.............................. 1060
Management.................................... 1061
Nested ............................................ 1059
Purge unused .................................. 1062
Select Insertion Point ....................... 1060
Specification Dialog ......................... 1063
CAD Box
Specification Dialog ......................... 1051
CAD Def aul t s ................................... 1022
CAD Det ai l ........................................ 1065
from View........................................ 1066
Management Dialog......................... 1065
Sent to Layout ................................. 1191
Truss Detail .......................................597
CAD Obj ect s
Converting.........................................229
Dimensions to....................................953
Displaying........................................ 1055
Cal cul at e
From All Floors ................................ 1226
From Room...................................... 1226
Loan................................................ 1079
Materials on soffits.............................755
Cal l out
Arrows............................................. 1005
Defaults.............................................981
Shape ............................................. 1006
Size................................................. 1006
Specification Dialog ......................... 1006
Cal l out s ............................................ 1005
Camer a
Activating ..........................................885
Change Settings ................................886
Clip Surfaces Within...................857, 892
Create Views .....................................865
Defaults.............................................855
Field of View..............................856, 881
Height above floor..............................856
Move Increments ...............................856
Move Tools........................................876
Move Up/Down One Floor...................881
Orbit Tools........................................ 877
Plan Display Tab............................... 889
Remove Wall within................... 857, 888
Restrict to room................................. 859
Rotate Increments ............................. 856
Specification Dialog........................... 886
Tilt Angle .......................................... 856
Tilt Tools........................................... 878
Casi ng
Door ......................................... 354, 364
Window............................................. 388
Cat hedr al Cei l i ngs ............................ 335
Cei l i ng
Break Lines....................................... 336
Framing............................................ 562
Heights ............................................. 327
Plane........................................ 456, 490
Trusses ............................................ 592
Cei l i ng Fi ni sh Di al og........................ 333
Cei l i ng Pl ane
Specification Dialog........................... 492
Cei l i ng St r uct ur e Def i ni t i on ............ 331
Cei l i ngs
Automatic ......................................... 562
Basement ......................................... 432
Cathedral.......................................... 335
Coffered ........................................... 336
Dropped............................................ 328
Hole in Platform................................ 330
Lowered............................................ 334
Over this room.................................. 342
Special ............................................. 334
Stepped Trusses ............................... 606
Tray.................................................. 335
Vaulted............................................. 335
Cent er
Doors ............................................... 354
Object edit tool.................................. 219
Sheet.............................................. 1168
Snapping to ...................................... 111
Text.................................................. 999
Cent er l i ne Di mensi ons .................... 961
Chamf er
Footings ........................................... 304
Two Lines ......................................... 224
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1285 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1286
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Change
Door Swings ..................................... 355
Floor/Reference ........................ 425, 427
Line to arc......................................... 522
Roof Pitch or Height Dialog................ 476
Scale.............................................. 1195
View Panel Factors ........................... 923
Wall Types for Pony Walls ................. 261
Check
Plots...................................... 1160, 1169
Spelling .......................................... 1002
Chi ef Ar chi t ect
Premier vs Interiors vs Lite .................. 27
Product Key........................................ 46
Version Number .................................. 46
Viewer ................................................ 45
Chi mneys ........................................... 450
Ci r cl e
Specification Dialog......................... 1045
Tools .............................................. 1044
Ci r cl es
Aligning Centers................................ 220
Circle about center .......................... 1044
Draw using center and radius........... 1044
Ovals.............................................. 1044
Cl ear Ter r ai n ..................................... 690
Cl ear t he Ter r ai n ............................... 690
Cl i ck St ai r s ........................................ 515
Cl i ent Inf or mat i on........................... 1075
Cl ose
Plans and Views.................................. 65
Program.............................................. 66
Views ............................................... 852
Col or
Displaying images and pictures............ 87
Off/On .............................................. 210
Col or Chooser ................................... 843
Create Material Using................ 843844
Eyedropper ....................................... 843
Col or Chooser Di al og ...................... 843
Col or Pal et t e ..................................... 127
Col or s
Selecting .......................................... 843
Compat i bi l i t y
with other programs ............................. 48
Component s ...................................... 813
Dialog............................................. 1243
Compound Raked Wal l s ................... 286
Concent r i c
Resizing............................................ 174
Cone ................................................... 740
Specification Dialog........................... 748
Conf i gur at i ons Panel ....................... 133
Connect
Electrical ........................................... 617
Walls ................................................ 267
Cont ext ual Menus ............................... 86
In Render views................................. 880
Cont our Li nes.................................... 701
Conver t
Arc/Circle to Polyline ......................... 225
CAD Lines to Terrain Data ................. 725
CAD Objects ..................................... 229
Polyline............................................. 230
Polyline Solid to Solid........................ 752
Polyline to Spline............................... 232
Room Molding................................... 640
Special Polylines into Polylines .......... 232
Spline to Polyline............................... 232
Textures to Materials ......................... 824
To Polyline Object ............................. 733
to Solid ............................................. 232
to Symbol........................................ 1152
Coor di nat es ....................................... 162
Copy
Floors ............................................... 422
Folders and Library Objects ............... 802
Library List........................................ 796
Multiple Copy .................................... 167
Region as Picture............................ 1100
Trusses............................................. 594
Views.............................................. 1194
Copy/Past e
Main Edit Mode ................................. 166
Sticky Mode ...................................... 166
Cor ner
Boards .............................................. 628
Windows ........................................... 378
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1286 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1287
Cor ner Boar d
Specification Dialog ...........................629
Count er t ops
Custom......................................652, 657
Edge Profiles .....................................657
Edit Custom.......................................657
Holes in.............................................653
Cr eat e
Line Style .............................. 1033, 1057
Plan Database File.............................. 59
Plan Materials Library ........................825
Plant Image .......................................773
Cr oss Hai r s ........................................106
Mouse...............................................218
Turn On/Off .......................................106
Cr oss Sect i on Li nes
Callouts........................................... 1007
In Camera Views................................884
Cr oss Sect i on Sl i der .........................882
Cr oss Sect i on/El evat i on Camer a
Specification Dialog ...........................890
Cr oss Sect i on/El evat i ons .................864
Create...............................................868
Detailing............................................870
Sent to Layout ................................. 1192
Cr own Mol di ng
Cabinets............................................664
Cul s-de-sac ........................................730
Cur bs ..................................................735
Cur r ent
CAD Layer....................................... 1055
CAD Point ....................................... 1028
Floor .................................................425
Floor, Delete......................................423
Layout Page .................................... 1204
Cur ved
Deck Edge.........................................255
Deck Railing......................................255
Roof Planes.......................................487
Stairs ................................................515
Walls, Draw.......................................266
Cust om
Counterholes .....................................653
Countertops...............................652, 657
Countertops, Editing...........................657
Cust om Backspl ash
Specification Dialog........................... 761
Cust om Count er t op
Specification Dialog........................... 683
Cust om Li ght Int ensi t y Di al og ........ 625
Cust omi ze
Hotkeys Dialog.................................. 134
Sheet Sizes Dialog.......................... 1166
Toolbars ........................................... 130
Cyl i nder ............................................. 740
Specification Dialog........................... 747
D
Deck ................................................... 326
Advanced Deck Framing.................... 326
Designer........................................... 255
Edges............................................... 255
Framing.................................... 326, 343
Planking ........................................... 343
Railing.............................................. 255
Railing Defaults................................. 252
Roof Over ......................................... 326
Decks ................................................. 326
Def aul t
Lights ............................................... 899
Set as................................................. 70
Wall Heights...................................... 298
Def aul t Sun Li ght
Specification Dialog........................... 911
Def aul t s
Auto Dimensions ............................... 955
Cabinet............................................. 650
Camera............................................. 855
DeckRailing ...................................... 252
Defined............................................... 68
Dimension......................................... 944
Door ................................................. 347
Dormer ............................................. 455
Dynamic ............................................. 69
Electrical........................................... 614
Fencing ............................................ 252
Floor......................................... 316, 418
Foundation........................................ 430
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1287 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1288
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Framing.................................... 554, 561
General Plan....................................... 82
Importing ............................................ 80
Layer Set.......................................... 152
Layout ............................................ 1183
Material ............................................ 842
Object Labels.................................. 1211
Railing.............................................. 252
Reset.................................................. 81
Road and Sidewalk............................ 727
Roofs................................................ 455
Room................................................ 316
Schedule ........................................ 1211
Settings .............................................. 68
Structural Member Reporting ........... 1228
Wall.................................................. 249
Window............................................. 376
Def i ne Mat er i al Di al og...................... 831
Del et e
3D Surface........................................ 874
Built-in Fixtures and Appliances ......... 812
Current Floor..................................... 423
Current Point................................... 1029
Floors ............................................... 423
Foundation........................................ 440
Framing............................................ 583
Gable Over Opening.......................... 496
Library Content ................................. 803
Objects ............................................. 244
Objects, warning before....................... 83
Roof Planes .............................. 457, 478
Temporary Points............................ 1028
Tools from Toolbars .......................... 128
Wall Hatching.................................... 263
Desi gner Inf or mat i on ..................... 1075
Det ai l s
Auto Detailing ................................... 870
CAD ............................................... 1065
Cross section/elevations.................... 870
Truss ................................................ 597
Di al og Number /Angl e St yl e ............. 122
Di al ogs
Select Layer...................................... 147
Di mensi on
Defaults ............................................ 945
Tab................................................... 974
Tools ................................................ 959
Di mensi on Def aul t s .......................... 944
Dialog............................................... 945
Di mensi on Li ne
Specification Dialog........................... 973
Di mensi ons
Add Text ........................................... 971
Angular ............................. 227, 960, 973
Auto Elevation................................... 964
Auto Interior ...................................... 963
Auto NKBA........................................ 963
Auto NKBA Elevation......................... 964
Centerline ......................................... 961
Display size......................................... 87
Editing .............................................. 966
To electrical items ............................. 952
End to end ........................................ 959
Interior .............................................. 960
Interior, minimum area....................... 956
Locate Objects .................................. 950
Locating railings ................................ 297
Minimum Interior Area........................ 956
Move Objects Using........................... 971
Moving Labels ................................... 967
Number Height .................................. 974
Overall .............................................. 956
Point to point..................................... 960
Printing........................................... 1169
Rounding Method .............................. 947
Running............................................ 961
Tape Measure................................... 962
Temporary......................................... 962
Wall Layers ....................................... 290
Wall Widths....................................... 974
Zeroes in........................................... 948
Di spl ay
3D Views........................................... 871
Arc Centers and Ends...................... 1023
CAD Objects ................................... 1055
Drawing Groups................................. 210
Drawing Sheet................................. 1167
Electrical ........................................... 618
Foundations ...................................... 436
Images............................................ 1084
Line Angles ....................................... 105
Line Length....................................... 105
Line Weights ................................... 1167
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1288 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1289
Objects..............................................140
Options, Layout................................ 1184
Pointer CAD Coordinates .................... 87
Pony Walls in Floor Plan View............260
Roof Planes.......................................471
Room labels ......................................324
Terrain ..............................................701
Walls, Railings, and Fences................268
Di spl ayed Li ne Lengt h
Dialog.............................................. 1024
Di st r i but ed Obj ect Tab .....................763
Di st r i but ed Obj ect s ...........................761
Di st r i but i on Pat h
Specification Dialog ...........................762
Di st r i but i on Regi on
Specification Dialog ...........................762
Door
Casing...............................................354
Defaults.............................................347
Specification Dialog ...........................359
Swing Angle ......................................361
Tools.................................................348
Trim..................................................354
Door s
Arched ..............................................368
Bifold Doors...............................349, 357
Blocked Units.....................................358
Casing...............................................364
Center...............................................354
Change Opening/Hinge Side...............356
Change Swing Side............................356
Custom Symbols................................359
Doorways ..........................................349
Double-swing.....................................363
Frame ...............................................367
Framing.............................................566
Gables Over ......................................494
Garage..............................................350
Garage, opening direction ..................357
Garage, panels ..................................363
Handles.............................................369
Hardware...........................................369
Hinged Doors.............................349, 355
Hinges...............................................369
Ignore Casing when Resizing............... 83
Labels ...............................................352
Library...................................... 350, 360
Lites ................................................. 367
Locks................................................ 369
Opening Indicators ............................ 351
Openings in railings........................... 358
Plinth Blocks ..................................... 364
Pocket Doors ............................ 349, 356
Recessed.................................. 358, 363
Rough opening.................................. 360
Size.................................................. 360
Sliding Doors .................................... 356
Style................................................. 360
Swing from Center............................. 363
Swing, change .................................. 355
Threshold lines.................................. 351
Transoms.......................................... 358
Type................................................. 360
Wrapped Openings............................ 357
Door ways
Adding a Door................................... 350
with Railing....................................... 358
Dor mer
Defaults ............................................ 455
Specification Dialog........................... 503
Dor mer s ............................................. 500
Auto Dormer ..................................... 501
Auto Floating..................................... 500
Explode ............................................ 503
Framing............................................ 572
Gable Over Door/Window.................. 495
Manually drawn................................. 502
Windows in ....................................... 503
Doubl e
Trusses ............................................ 604
Walls ................................................ 286
Dr aw
Arc About Center............................. 1039
Circle About Center ......................... 1044
Curved Railing .................................. 266
Curved wall ....................................... 266
Lines .............................................. 1030
Roof Planes ...................................... 469
Dr awi ng Gr oups ................................ 210
Dr awi ng Sheet
Center ............................................ 1168
Select............................................. 1167
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1289 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1290
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Show.............................................. 1167
Dr i veway
Polyline............................................. 731
Specification Dialog........................... 736
Dr i veway Tool s ................................. 729
Dr i veways .................................. 731732
DWG
File Format ..................................... 1114
DXF
File Format ..................................... 1114
DXF/DWG
Advanced Layer Mapping ................ 1119
DXF Code....................................... 1136
DXF vs. DWG ................................. 1114
Elevation Data, Import....................... 724
Export 3D ....................................... 1134
Files, Import 2D............................... 1116
Layer mapping................................ 1118
Layers, exporting............................. 1135
Line Type........................................ 1126
Dynami c
Defaults ........................................ 41, 69
Print Preview................................... 1166
Views ............................................. 1191
E
Ear t h Dat a Panel ............................... 908
Eaves
Boxed............................................... 465
Fascia .............................................. 571
Framing............................................ 571
Plumb Cut......................................... 465
Square cut ........................................ 465
Edi t
All Roof Planes ................................. 457
Files in Home Designer ....................... 83
Handles .............................................. 32
Layout Lines ................................... 1196
Layout Lines Dialog......................... 1196
Paper Size Dialog ........................... 1166
Polyline Parts.................................... 178
Preferences ...................................... 106
Text in Place..................................... 998
Toolbar ............................................... 34
Edi t Ar ea
(All Floors) ........................................ 242
(All Floors) Visible ............................. 242
Polyline as marquee .......................... 242
Tools ................................................ 241
Visible............................................... 242
Edi t Behavi or s ................................... 172
Alternate........................................... 173
Concentric......................................... 174
Default.............................................. 172
Edit Indicators ................................... 109
Fillet ................................................. 176
Move................................................. 173
Resize .............................................. 174
Edi t Handl es
Size.................................................. 107
Tolerance.......................................... 107
Edi t Text Macr o Di al og ................... 1018
Egr ess Wi ndows ............................... 392
El ect r i cal
Auto Place Outlets............................. 616
Connections ...................................... 617
Defaults ............................................ 614
Deleting ............................................ 620
Dimension to..................................... 952
Dimensions to ................................... 953
Displaying......................................... 618
Editing Objects .................................. 619
General............................................. 613
Labels............................................... 618
Library .............................................. 618
Lights................................................ 615
Outlets .............................................. 615
Switches ........................................... 616
Tools ................................................ 615
Wiring............................................... 617
El ect r i cal Ser vi ce
Specification Dialog........................... 620
El evat i on
Auto Dimensions ............................... 964
Data Tools ........................................ 690
Points ............................................... 691
Regions ............................................ 693
Splines.............................................. 693
Tab................................................... 709
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1290 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1291
El evat i on Dat a
Import DXF/DWG...............................724
Importing from DXF/DWG...................724
Tools.................................................690
El evat i on Li ne
Specification Dialog ...........................709
El evat i on Poi nt
Specification Dialog ...........................708
El evat i on Regi on
Specification Dialog ...........................709
El evat i ons
Create...............................................868
Interior ..............................................864
El l i pse............................................... 1044
Specification Dialog ......................... 1045
End
Cabinets............................................666
Caps .................................................105
To-End Dimensions............................959
Trusses .............................................609
Ener gy Heel ........................................605
Enhanced Met af i l es ......................... 1092
Ent er
Coordinates ..................................... 1033
Coordinates Dialog.............................162
Er r or Messages ............................... 1259
Est i mat i ng Sof t war e........................ 1239
Exi t Pr ogr am ....................................... 66
Expand Room Pol yl i ne .....................337
Expand/Col l apse Al l ..........................793
Expl ode
Architectural Blocks ...........................784
CAD Block....................................... 1060
Distributed Objects.............................762
Dormers ............................................503
Shape ...............................................743
Expor t
2D Drawings .................................... 1123
3D DXF, Material Code .................... 1136
3D DXF/DWG Model ........................ 1134
3D Files........................................... 1134
All Floors ......................................... 1123
Current View.................................... 1123
Drawing File Dialog.......................... 1124
EMF ............................................... 1093
From the Library................................ 805
Layers Sets....................................... 151
Layout Files .................................... 1210
Materials List .................................. 1239
Picture Files.................................... 1089
REScheck....................................... 1136
Text Macros .................................... 1019
to POV-Ray....................................... 940
VRML ............................................. 1111
Wall Definitions ................................. 295
Windows Metafiles .......................... 1093
Windows Metafiles Dialog................ 1093
WMF............................................... 1093
Ext end
Object(s)........................................... 237
Slope Downward............................... 282
Ext ensi on Li nes
Adding.............................................. 968
Centerline......................................... 961
Deleting............................................ 970
Edit Extensions tool........................... 967
Editing.............................................. 968
Ext ensi on Snaps ....................... 112, 157
Ext ensi ons Tab ................................. 954
Ext er i or
Room types....................................... 321
The Exterior Room............................ 318
Walls ................................................ 257
Ext r ude
Object............................................... 743
F
F6 Key
Fill Window....................................... 848
Faces
3D.................................................... 740
Fast er Render i ng .............................. 922
Fence Desi gner ................................. 257
Fence Sel ect ...................................... 180
Fenci ng
Defaults ............................................ 252
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1291 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1292
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Fi el d of Vi ew..................... 856, 881, 1111
Fi l e
Backing Up Your Files ......................... 54
Create New......................................... 50
Management....................................... 47
Open.................................................. 57
Organization ....................................... 49
Recent File List................................... 94
Fi l e Management Pr ef er ences........... 93
Fi l l
Patterns.......................................... 1048
Window............................................. 848
Window Building Only........................ 848
Fi l l St yl e Panel ................................ 1048
Fi l l et ................................................... 176
Two Lines ......................................... 224
Fi l l et /Chamf er Di al og ....................... 224
Fi l t er
Imported Terrain Data........................ 720
Library Search .................................. 794
Library Tree View.............................. 803
Fi nal Vi ew .......................................... 897
with Shadows.................................... 897
Fi nd Pl an Wi zar d................................. 62
Fi r e Box Panel ................................... 449
Fi r epl ace
Direction facing................................. 447
Interior wall ....................................... 447
Library.............................................. 450
Masonry............................................ 446
No Fire Box....................................... 449
Prefabricated .................................... 450
Specification Dialog........................... 447
Symbol ............................................. 450
Fi r epl aces .......................................... 446
Chimneys.......................................... 450
Foundations...................................... 447
Freestanding..................................... 447
In walls ............................................. 446
Types ............................................... 446
Fi x
Roofs................................................ 457
Wall Connections .............................. 267
Fi xt ur es
Lights................................................ 615
Fl ar e/Cur ve St ai r s ............................. 527
Fl at Regi on ........................................ 696
Specification Dialog........................... 710
Fl oat i ng Aut o Dor mer ....................... 500
Fl oor
3D Overview...................................... 864
Build New Floor................................. 419
Camera............................................. 863
Defaults .................................... 316, 418
Framing ............................................ 562
Heights ............................................. 327
Overview................................... 864, 866
Tools ................................................ 418
Trusses............................................. 592
Fl oor Pl an
Drawing .............................................. 41
View................................................... 43
Fl oor St r uct ur e Def i ni t i on................ 331
Fl oor /Cei l i ng
Beam................................................ 560
Fl oor /Cei l i ng Tr uss
Specification Dialog........................... 610
Fl oor s
Adding.............................................. 419
Attic.................................................. 426
Change Floor/Reference............ 425, 427
Copying ............................................ 422
Current Floor..................................... 425
Deleting ............................................ 423
Exchange With Floor Above ............... 422
Exchange With Floor Below................ 422
Floor Up/ Floor Down......................... 425
FloorTabs.......................................... 562
Hole in Platform................................. 330
Insert New Floor................................ 420
Maximum number .............................. 419
Raised.............................................. 328
Reference Floor................................. 426
Swap Floor/Reference ....................... 428
Fol der s Pr ef er ences ........................... 95
Fol l ow Ter r ai n ................................... 704
Font
Materials List....................................... 89
Preferences......................................... 89
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1292 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1293
Font s ...................................................982
and Alphabets....................................982
Blueprint............................................982
Foot i ngs
Alignment ..........................................440
Chamfer ............................................304
Editing...............................................438
Monolithic Slab ..................................304
Offset From Walls ..............................304
Size...................................................304
Stem wall...........................................440
Stepped.............................................285
Foot pr i nt , Pl an ................................. 1067
Foundat i on
Defaults.............................................430
Panel.................................................303
Thickness ..........................................303
Walls.................................................258
Foundat i ons
Alignment ..........................................440
Build..................................................434
Daylight Basement.............................442
Delete ...............................................440
Display..............................................436
Footing Offset....................................304
Footing size.......................................304
Garage..............................................440
Mixed Types ......................................435
Piers .................................................433
Rebar................................................433
Room supplies floor ...........................342
Slab at top of stem wall ......................432
Slab thickness ...................................432
Slab Tools .........................................443
Stem Wall..........................................432
Step markers .....................................432
Stepped.............................................443
Types ................................................431
Use Mesh..........................................434
Walkout Basement.............................442
Fr ami ng
3D Overview......................................867
Auto Rebuild......................................557
Automatic ..........................................556
Barge Rafter ......................................573
Beams.......................................568, 570
Bearing Line...................................... 579
Build Framing Dialog......................... 561
Butt J oints......................................... 562
Ceiling.............................................. 562
Cross Box....................................... 1050
Deck......................................... 326, 343
Defaults ............................................ 554
Defaults Dialog.................................. 561
Deleting............................................ 583
Dimensions to................................... 953
Displaying......................................... 580
Doors ............................................... 566
Dormer Holes.................................... 572
Editing.............................................. 582
Floor................................................. 562
Furring.............................................. 287
J oist Spacing .................................... 564
J oists................................................ 560
Keeping current................................. 583
Lap J oints ......................................... 562
Layer................................................ 289
Lookouts........................................... 571
Manual vs. Automatic ........................ 555
Materials List .................................... 584
Mitered J oints ................................... 583
Mixing Trusses with Rafters ............... 598
Plates ............................................... 566
Platforms .......................................... 562
Posts ................................................ 570
Reference Marker.............................. 575
Represented by single line............... 1023
Rim J oist........................................... 562
Roof ................................................. 571
Rough Openings ............................... 566
Sill Plates ......................................... 555
Specification Dialog........................... 585
Steel......................................... 583, 585
Structural Member Reporting ........... 1228
Stud Spacing ............................ 565, 833
Stud Thickness ................................. 565
Tools ................................................ 558
Trimmers .......................................... 567
Truss Spacing................................... 575
Trusses ............................................ 573
Types ............................................... 585
Wall Blocking.................................... 566
Walls ................................................ 565
Windows........................................... 566
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1293 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1294
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Fr i eze
Molding............................................. 647
Tab................................................... 468
Ful l
Height Cabinets ................................ 652
Overview.................................. 864, 866
Fur r i ng ............................................... 287
G
Gabl e
Gable/Roof Line Tool......................... 494
Over Door/Window............................ 495
Gar age
Door panels ...................................... 363
Door Tool.......................................... 350
Gar ages
Foundation........................................ 440
Gar den Bed
Kidney Shaped.................................. 698
Polyline............................................. 698
Round............................................... 698
Tools ................................................ 698
Gener al
Cabinet Defaults................................ 651
Framing Tool..................................... 558
Preferences ........................................ 92
Wall Defaults..................................... 248
Get Last Symbol ............................. 1152
Get t i ng Hel p ........................................ 45
GFCI Out l et ........................................ 615
Gi r der Tr usses .................................. 607
Gl ass, St ai ned ................................... 380
GPS
Importing .......................................... 721
Gr ade beams ..................................... 431
Gr ayscal e
On Screen .......................................... 87
Printed............................................ 1175
Gr i d
Materials list reports .......................... 114
Snaps......................................... 84, 160
Gr ound Faul t Ci r cui t Int er r upt ........ 615
Gut t er s ............................................... 468
H
Hal f
Walls ................................................ 309
Hal f -Wal l s........................................... 253
Handr ai l Tab
Railings............................................. 312
Stairs ................................................ 547
Har di ness Zone Maps ....................... 772
Har dwar e
for Doors........................................... 369
Lock Issues..................................... 1257
Hat ch
Fill Patterns..................................... 1048
Wall .................................................. 263
Hei ght
Basement ceiling............................... 432
Railings............................................. 311
Hel p
Tool Tips............................................. 45
Hi l l / Val l ey
Specification Dialog........................... 711
Hi l l /Val l ey ........................................... 696
Hi p
Truss ................................................ 603
Hol es
In ceiling platforms ............................ 330
In floor platform................................. 330
In Slabs ............................................ 443
In terrain........................................... 697
Home Desi gner
Allow editing in.................................... 83
Software Compatibility......................... 48
Hot keys ........................................ 34, 134
Create List ........................................ 136
Customize......................................... 134
Snap Behaviors ................................. 156
House Wi zar d
Editing Rooms................................. 1076
Multiple Floors................................. 1077
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1294 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1295
Placing Rooms................................. 1076
I
IDC_SOLID_PYRAMID.......................740
Image
Specification Dialog ......................... 1085
Images ................................................897
Adding to Library.............................. 1083
Convert Folder................................. 1083
Creating .......................................... 1083
Displaying........................................ 1084
Displaying in color............................... 87
Editing............................................. 1084
Place............................................... 1082
Printing............................................ 1176
Transparency Color.......................... 1088
Impor t
2D DXF/DWG Files .......................... 1116
3D Data........................................... 1127
3D Symbols ..................................... 1128
Defaults.............................................. 80
Drawing Wizard ............................... 1116
DXF/DWG Elevation Data...................724
GPS Data..........................................721
Layer Sets .........................................151
Line Styles....................................... 1056
PDF ................................................ 1095
Terrain Assistant................................718
Terrain Data ......................................717
Text Macros..................................... 1019
Wall Definitions..................................295
Inf or mat i on
Client .............................................. 1075
Designer.......................................... 1075
Project............................................. 1075
Input
Arc.................................................. 1040
Line................................................. 1031
Point ............................................... 1027
Inser t
Floor Dialog.......................................420
Layout Page .................................... 1205
Insul at i on ......................................... 1050
Auto Detailing....................................870
Show in Elevation.............................. 870
Int er i or
Dimension Tool ................................. 960
Dimensions, Auto.............................. 963
Fireplace, wall................................... 447
Room types....................................... 321
Invi si bl e Wal l s................................... 261
Isomet r i c Over vi ews ........................ 867
J
Joi n Roof Pl anes .............................. 474
Joi st
Direction Line.................................... 577
Joi st Di r ect i on
Specification Dialog........................... 578
Joi st s ................................................. 560
Bearing Line...................................... 579
Blocking............................................ 560
Spacing ............................................ 564
Use Framing Reference..................... 563
see also Framing
K
Key Fr ames...................................... 1105
Keyboar d
Commands ......................... 34, 134, 793
Commands, customize ...................... 134
Ki dney Shaped
Garden Bed ...................................... 698
Pond................................................. 698
Terrain Features................................ 697
Ki ngpost ............................................ 608
Ki t chen Isl and ................................... 668
Knee Wal l s................................. 284, 301
L
Label Panel ...................................... 1223
Label s
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1295 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1296
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Cabinet............................................. 659
Display size ........................................ 87
Displaying....................................... 1222
Door ................................................. 352
Electrical........................................... 618
Plant................................................. 777
Roof Plane........................................ 471
Room................................................ 323
Trusses ............................................ 597
Window............................................. 386
Landi ng .............................................. 523
Unlocked .......................................... 524
Landi ngs
Custom Shapes................................. 524
Height............................................... 524
Locked.............................................. 525
Layer
Display Options Dialog ...................... 144
Eyedropper Tool................................ 149
Hider ................................................ 150
Layer Sets ........................................ 141
Painter Tool ...................................... 149
Panel................................................ 148
Layer Set
Control, Active .................................. 144
Defaults Dialog.................................. 152
Management Dialog........................... 143
Layer Set s
Exporting.................................. 151, 295
Importing .......................................... 151
Layout Views .................................... 150
Missing in Layout ............................ 1203
Modify all .......................................... 142
Layer ed Mat er i al Pol yl i ne
Specification Dialog........................... 761
Layer s
3D DWG/DXF Models...................... 1135
Adding new layers ............................. 146
Colors............................................... 147
DXF/DWG files................................ 1118
Locking............................................. 141
Mapping.......................................... 1118
Materials Lists................................... 140
Preferences ........................................ 99
Primary and Secondary ..................... 140
Rename............................................ 146
Reset Names .................................... 146
Turn off to speed up 3D views ............ 922
Layout
Adding Lines ................................... 1196
Borders........................................... 1206
CAD................................................ 1186
CAD Details .................................... 1191
Change Pages................................. 1204
Change Scale.................................. 1195
Create............................................. 1186
Create Template.................................. 80
Cross Section/Elevations ................. 1192
Current Page................................... 1204
Defaults .......................................... 1183
Edit Layout Lines............................. 1196
Edit Vector Views ............................ 1196
Editing Views .................................. 1194
Exchange Page............................... 1205
Exporting ........................................ 1210
Files, Opening..................................... 57
Floor plan view................................ 1191
Insert Page ..................................... 1205
Layer Sets......................................... 150
Layout Box Layers........................... 1193
Links, Managing.............................. 1201
Managing Pages.............................. 1185
Missing Files ................................... 1201
Missing Layer Sets .......................... 1203
Moving Views .................................. 1194
Open View............................ 1185, 1195
Page Display Options ...................... 1184
Page Information............................. 1206
Page Numbering.............................. 1205
Page Up/Down ................................ 1204
Page Zero....................................... 1206
Pictures in....................................... 1187
Printing........................................... 1209
Relink File....................................... 1203
Rescale Layout View....................... 1195
Resizing, Non-Scaled Views............. 1195
Resizing, Scaled Views.................... 1195
Saving ................................................ 52
Sending views to ............................. 1188
Templates ........................................... 78
Text................................................ 1186
Title Blocks ..................................... 1206
Layout Box
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1296 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1297
Labels ............................................. 1193
Layers ............................................. 1193
Specification Dialog ......................... 1197
Layout Vi ews
Copy ............................................... 1194
Keeping views current...................... 1190
Leader Li nes .................................... 1003
Lef t Mouse But t on
Definition............................................ 31
Legacy Pl ans
Text Conversion.................................. 89
Legends ..............................................985
Li br ar y
Adding Folders...................................801
Bonus Catalogs .................................795
Content .............................................795
Deleting Content................................803
Export ...............................................805
Filter Tree View.................................803
Manage Library Filters Dialog.............804
Manufacturer Libraries .......................795
Renaming Libraries ............................802
Search ..............................................794
Shortcuts...........................................803
Third Party Libraries...........................799
Trash.................................................803
Li br ar y Br owser .................................790
Adding Items......................................799
Docking.............................................793
Panes................................................790
Preferences ........................................ 90
Li br ar y Obj ect
Specification Dialog ...........................813
Li br ar y Obj ect But t on
Specification Dialog ...........................809
Li br ar y Obj ect s
and the Materials List.........................811
Editing...............................................811
Placing..............................................805
Li ght
Ambient.............................................898
Specification Dialog ...........................903
Li ght Sour ces ....................................898
Added Lights......................................899
Default Lights ....................................899
Default Sun Light............................... 900
Fixtures ............................................ 899
Parallel Lights ................................... 902
Point Lights....................................... 902
Spot Lights........................................ 903
Sun Angles ....................................... 904
Li ght s
Added............................................... 899
Adjust............................................... 901
Attenuation ....................................... 625
Casts Shadows ................................. 625
Color ................................................ 624
Connect to switch.............................. 617
Custom Intensity ............................... 625
Cut Off Angle .................................... 624
Direction........................................... 624
Drop Off Rate.................................... 624
Fixtures .................................... 615, 899
Floor Number.................................... 904
Height............................................... 904
Intensity............................................ 623
Light Data Tab .................................. 622
Show Position in 3D .......................... 625
Turn On/Off....................................... 901
Types of sources............................... 902
Li ne
Angle Format .................................. 1023
CAD Drawing Tools ......................... 1030
Endcaps ........................................... 105
Length Format................................. 1023
Panel.............................................. 1034
Properties Panel................................ 105
Specification Dialog......................... 1034
Start and End Points.......................... 107
Styles, Importing ............................. 1056
Styles, Library................................. 1056
Weight................................... 1160, 1170
Weight Scaling................................ 1171
Weights, Show.......................... 87, 1167
with Arrow....................................... 1033
Li ne St yl e
Creating.......................................... 1033
Panel.............................................. 1035
Reverse direction.............................. 229
Specification Dialog......................... 1057
Li ne St yl es, Cr eat i ng...................... 1057
Li nes
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1297 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1298
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Reverse direction.............................. 229
Li t es
Craftsman......................................... 400
Diamond........................................... 400
Doors ............................................... 367
Normal.............................................. 400
Prairie............................................... 400
Li vi ng Ar ea ........................................ 325
and Room Types ............................... 322
Calculation........................................ 325
Delete label....................................... 325
Label ................................................ 325
Restore label..................................... 325
Show.................................................. 84
vs. Footprint...................................... 325
Load
Custom Muntins ................................ 388
to Make Same Value ......................... 240
Loan Cal cul at or .............................. 1079
Locat e
Roof Plane Intersections.................... 474
Lock
Arc Center ........................................ 188
Center .............................................. 188
Control Handle Angle ........................ 206
Layers .............................................. 141
Roof planes ...................................... 478
Tread Depth...................................... 527
Lock Tool bar s ................................... 129
Lookout s ............................................ 571
M
Macr os ............................................. 1014
Mai n
Edit Mode ......................................... 166
Layer................................................ 289
Make
Arc Tangent.............................. 220, 281
CAD Block ...................................... 1060
Mulled Unit........................................ 381
Parallel Dialog................................... 227
Parallel/Perpendicular ............... 218, 227
Room Molding Polyline Dialog............ 337
Manage
Auto Archives...................................... 56
CAD Blocks..................................... 1061
CAD Details .................................... 1065
Layout Links.................................... 1201
Library Filters .................................... 804
Materials Lists ................................. 1238
Manual
Dimensions ....................................... 959
Roofs........................................ 454, 469
Manuf act ur er Li br ar i es..................... 795
Mar ker .............................................. 1009
Defaults ............................................ 981
Editing ............................................ 1011
Framing Reference............................ 575
Specification Dialog......................... 1009
Types.............................................. 1010
Mar quee Sel ect .................................. 179
Mar r i age Wal l s .................................. 286
Masonr y
Fireplace........................................... 446
Stairs ................................................ 536
Mast er Li st ....................................... 1241
Columns to display ............................ 115
File Location...................................... 115
Materials List..................................... 115
Name of file....................................... 115
see also Materials List
Update to Master............................. 1242
Mat er i al
Defaults ............................................ 842
Eyedropper ....................................... 821
Mat er i al Pai nt er ................................. 818
and Walls.......................................... 820
Blending............................................ 819
Modes............................................... 819
Using................................................ 819
Mat er i al s
Add to Library.................................... 800
Artwork ............................................. 826
Blending............................................ 824
Calculating amounts .......................... 755
Classes............................................. 839
Creating............................................ 823
Define Material Dialog........................ 831
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1298 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1299
Editing...............................................822
On Soffits ..........................................755
Panel.................................................821
Plan Materials Dialog .........................829
Polyline ........................................... 1237
Render properties ..............................838
Stained glass.....................................380
Textures ....................................836, 897
Types ................................................827
Walls.................................................269
Mat er i al s Li st ................................... 1225
Calculate from All Floors .................. 1226
Calculate from Room........................ 1226
Categories.........................................112
Columns, editing.............................. 1236
Conditioned Areas............................ 1240
Display Options Dialog..................... 1233
Editing............................................. 1236
Estimating software.......................... 1239
Export ............................................. 1239
Font ................................................... 89
Framing.............................................584
Grid display on reports .......................114
Library Objects ..................................811
Manage........................................... 1238
Master List Preferences......................115
Preferences .......................................112
Report Style Preferences....................114
Restrict to Floor ............................... 1236
Restrict to Supplier........................... 1236
Save ............................................... 1238
Saving............................................. 1226
Subcategories....................................116
Max Tr ead Cont r act i on .....................534
Medi an ................................................729
Menus .................................................. 35
Mesh, Speci f y f or f oundat i on ..........434
Message Boxes
Reset ................................................. 39
Met af i l e Si ze Di al og ........................ 1093
Met af i l es ........................................... 1092
Mi ddl e Mouse But t on ..................31, 847
Mi ssi ng Layer Set s Di al og ............. 1203
Mi t r e Ends of Angl e Wal l s ................566
Model Maker
Printing........................................... 1178
Wall Layout Template...................... 1181
Modi f y
All Layer Sets.................................... 142
Name In All Layer Sets ........................ 99
Plan Database File.............................. 60
Mol di ng
3D Molding Line tool.......................... 639
3D Molding Polyline........................... 639
Frieze............................................... 647
in Rooms .......................................... 345
Molding Line tool ............................... 639
Molding Polyline tool ......................... 638
Place Molding Profile......................... 636
Polyline Specification Dialog.............. 641
Polylines........................................... 632
Profiles ............................................. 635
Profiles, changing.............................. 640
Profiles, custom................................ 636
Symbol ............................................. 637
Mol di ng Pol yl i ne
Specification Dialog........................... 641
Mol di ngs
Built Up............................................. 636
Library.............................................. 639
Mol di ngs Panel ................................. 633
Mol di ngs Tab
for Rooms......................................... 345
Mouse But t ons
Using.................................................. 31
Move
Along Rails ....................................... 273
CAD Points ..................................... 1029
Folders and Library Objects ............... 802
Nudging............................................ 214
Object Using Dimensions................... 971
Objects ............................................. 212
Restrictions....................................... 213
to be Coplanar .................................. 475
to Framing Reference........................ 215
to Front of Group............................... 211
Views to a Different Page ................ 1194
Walls with Cabinets Attached............. 663
Move Poi nt Di al og .......................... 1029
Mul l ed Uni t
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1299 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1300
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Specification Dialog........................... 390
Mul l ed Uni t s
Framing............................................ 393
Labels ............................................ 1223
Mullion Depth.................................... 393
Treat as Door.................................... 392
Mul l i ons
Window............................................. 399
Mul t i pl e
Copy................................................. 167
Select............................................... 179
Mul t i pl e Copy Di al og ........................ 168
Munt i ns
Custom............................................. 388
Load Custom..................................... 388
Window............................................. 399
N
Named Val ues ................................. 1249
New
CAD Arc Dialog............................... 1040
CAD Line Dialog.............................. 1032
CAD Point Dialog ............................ 1027
Layer Name Dialog............................ 146
Plans Preferences ............................... 98
Polygon Shaped Room...................... 262
Newel s
Definition.......................................... 515
Newel s/Bal ust er s Tab ...................... 311
NKBA
Auto Dimensions ............................... 963
Auto Elevation Dimensions ................ 964
Guidelines ...................................... 1253
No Locat e Wal l .................................. 297
Nor t h Poi nt er ..................................... 905
Nudgi ng ............................................. 214
Number St yl e/Angl e St yl e
Dialog............................................... 122
O
Obj ect
Based Design...................................... 29
Layer Properties ................................ 148
Obj ect Snaps ..................................... 156
Extension Snaps........................ 112, 157
Object locations................................. 157
Preferences....................................... 109
Obj ect s
Distributed ........................................ 761
One-Cl i ck St ai r s ................................ 515
Open
Below................................................ 321
Layout................................................. 57
Object................................................. 37
Plan Files............................................ 57
Symbol.................................... 812, 1139
Template Files..................................... 79
View................................................. 885
OpenGL .............................................. 854
Openi ngs
Dimensions to ................................... 953
Opt i mi zat i ons On .............................. 120
Or gani zi ng
your Files ............................................ 49
Or t hogonal Vi ews ........................... 1168
Out l et s ................................................ 615
Above cabinet ................................... 615
Automatic.......................................... 616
Dishwasher ....................................... 615
GFCI................................................. 615
Manually placed ................................ 615
Place ................................................ 616
Sink.................................................. 615
WP ................................................... 615
Oval .................................................. 1044
Specification Dialog......................... 1045
Over al l Di mensi on ............................ 956
Over hang ........................................... 469
Over vi ew .............................................. 27
Floor................................................. 866
Full ................................................... 866
Isometric........................................... 867
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1300 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1301
P
Page
Down............................................... 1204
Up................................................... 1204
Page Set up Di al og........................... 1164
Pai nt i ng
Over Materials ...................................824
Pan
Pan Window Tool ...............................849
the Display ........................................848
Using the Keyboard............................848
Using the Mouse................................849
Using the Scroll Bars..........................848
Panel s
Cabinets............................................676
Par agr aph Opt i ons Di al og................988
Par al l el Li ght ......................................902
Par t i t i on Tool .....................................652
Pass-Thr ough ....................................378
Past e ...................................................164
Hold Position.....................................166
in Place.............................................166
Special ..............................................167
Pat t er n Panel .....................................834
Pat t er ns and Text ur es ......................825
PDF.................................................... 1095
Importing......................................... 1095
Print to ............................................ 1170
Peni nsul a Radi us Cabi net s ..............667
Per sonal Tut or ....................... 1252, 1256
Pi ct ur e
Copy Region as ............................... 1100
Displaying in color............................... 87
Pi ct ur e Fi l e Box
Specification Dialog ......................... 1090
Pi ct ur e Fi l es
Export ............................................. 1089
Import.............................................. 1089
Scale............................................... 1098
Pi er s
and Pads ...........................................443
Foundation ........................................433
Pi er s and Pads
Editing.............................................. 444
Pi t ch
Above Wall ....................................... 282
Show as degrees................................. 84
Pl ace
Gable Over Window(s)....................... 379
Images ........................................... 1082
Library Object Button......................... 808
Library Objects.................................. 805
Outlets...................................... 322, 616
Pl an
Create New......................................... 50
Database File...................................... 59
Drawing.............................................. 41
Files, Opening..................................... 57
Find Plan Wizard................................. 62
Footprint......................................... 1067
General Defaults ................................. 82
Materials Dialog................................ 829
Saving................................................ 51
Templates........................................... 78
Trace.............................................. 1100
View................................................... 43
Pl an Check ...................................... 1077
and room labels ................................ 323
Dialog............................................. 1078
Hold ............................................... 1078
Restart............................................ 1078
Pl an Foot pr i nt
Specification Dialog......................... 1068
Pl ant
2D Symbols ...................................... 774
Chooser Dialog ................................. 770
Encyclopedia .................................... 770
Labels .............................................. 777
Specification Dialog........................... 777
Tools ................................................ 769
Pl ant Image
Create .............................................. 773
Specification Dialog........................... 773
Pl i nt h Bl ocks ..................................... 364
Pl ot Pl an
North pointer..................................... 905
Pl ot t er s ............................................ 1161
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1301 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1302
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Poi nt
Light................................................. 902
Markers .......................................... 1028
Poi nt t o Poi nt
Dimensions....................................... 960
Move ................................................ 214
Resize............................................ 1099
Poi nt er
Coordinates .................................. 39, 87
Cross Hairs....................................... 106
Pol ygon
Shaped Deck .................................... 256
Pol yl i ne
3D Molding Polyline........................... 639
Area ............................................... 1047
Definition........................................ 1046
Edit Area .......................................... 242
Garden Bed ...................................... 698
Molding Polylines .............................. 638
Panel.............................................. 1047
Rectangular Polyline Tool ................ 1049
Room Polyline................................... 337
Specification Dialog......................... 1047
Pol yl i ne Int er sect i on ........................ 239
Pol yl i ne Sol i d
Convert to Solid ................................ 752
Create .............................................. 751
Specification Dialog........................... 752
Pol yl i ne Subt r act .............................. 239
Pol yl i ne Uni on................................... 238
Ponds ................................................. 698
Round............................................... 698
Pony Wal l s......................................... 260
Align upper and lower........................ 252
Change wall types ............................. 261
Default height.................................... 251
Dimensioning.................................... 274
Display ............................................. 260
Display Openings in .......................... 252
Show lower wall ................................ 252
Post .................................................... 559
Specification Dialog........................... 588
POV-Ray............................................. 940
Pr ef er ences
Appearance Panel ............................... 86
Architectural Panel ............................ 103
Behaviors Panel ................................ 108
CAD Panel ........................................ 104
Categories Panel ............................... 116
Colors Panel ....................................... 88
Definition of......................................... 69
Dialog................................................. 85
Edit Panel ......................................... 106
File Management Panel ....................... 93
Folders Panel ...................................... 95
Font Panel .......................................... 89
General Panel ..................................... 92
Global settings .................................... 85
Layers Panel ....................................... 99
Library Browser Panel.......................... 90
Line Properties Panel ........................ 105
Master List Panel............................... 115
Materials List Panel ........................... 112
New Plans Panel ................................. 98
Render Panel .................................... 117
Report Style Panel............................. 114
Reset preferences ............................. 121
Ruby Panel ......................................... 97
Snap Properties Panel ....................... 109
Sun Angle Panel................................ 105
Text Panel........................................... 91
Time Tracker Panel ........................... 102
Unit Coversion Panel ........................... 99
Pr i mi t i ve Tool s .................................. 739
Box................................................... 740
Cone................................................. 740
Pyramid ............................................ 740
Sphere.............................................. 740
Pr i mi t i ves
Convert to Solid................................. 752
Editing .............................................. 741
Face ................................................. 740
Pr i mi t i veTool s
Cylinder ............................................ 740
Pr i nt .................................................. 1159
3D Views......................................... 1168
Across Multiple Pages ..................... 1170
Center Sheet................................... 1168
Check Plots........................... 1160, 1169
Clear Printer Info.......... 1161, 1163, 1258
Color or Black and White ................. 1175
Custom Sheet Size.......................... 1166
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1302 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1303
Dialog.............................................. 1173
Dimensions...................................... 1169
Drawing Scale ................................. 1160
Drivers ............................................ 1161
Layout............................................. 1209
Line Weights.................................... 1170
Line Weights and Scaling................. 1171
Model .............................................. 1178
Options............................................ 1163
Paper Size....................................... 1160
Perspective Views............................ 1168
Plotters............................................ 1161
Preview........................................... 1166
Printable Area.................................. 1167
Scale to Fit ...................................... 1168
Services .......................................... 1210
Sheet Size............................. 1160, 1166
Terminology..................................... 1160
Text................................................. 1169
Tiled................................................ 1170
To File............................................. 1161
to PDF File ...................................... 1170
To Scale.......................................... 1168
Troubleshooting............................... 1256
Pr i nt Image.........................................886
Dialog.............................................. 1176
Pr i nt Model
Wall Layout Template....................... 1181
Pr i nt Si ze Cal cul at or .........................998
Pr i nt er s ............................................. 1161
Select Printer......................... 1174, 1179
Pr i or i t y Suppor t ............................... 1261
Pr of i l e Pl ans ....................................... 78
Pr ogr am Updat es
Auto Check......................................... 92
Pr oj ect
Browser........................................... 1073
Information...................................... 1075
Pr oper t y l i nes .................................. 1031
North pointer......................................905
Pyr ami d ..............................................740
Specification Dialog ...........................749
Q
Quoi n
Specification Dialog........................... 631
Quoi ns................................................ 630
R
Radi us
End Cabinets .................................... 667
of Tangent Curved Wall Dialog........... 278
Raf t er Tai l s ........................................ 509
Decorative Profiles ............................ 467
Raf t er s ............................................... 559
Barge ............................................... 573
Bearing Line...................................... 579
Blocking............................................ 559
Depth ............................................... 480
Mixing with Trusses........................... 598
Use Framing Reference..................... 572
Rai l St yl e Tab .................................... 309
Rai l i ng
Defaults ............................................ 252
Rai l i ngs .............................................. 255
Balusters .......................................... 309
Bottom Rail ....................................... 310
Cable................................................ 256
Decks ............................................... 255
Glass................................................ 256
Half Walls ......................................... 253
in a Doorway..................................... 358
Locate with dimensions ..................... 297
Middle Rail........................................ 309
Newels ............................................. 311
No Rail ............................................. 309
Open................................................ 309
Openings .......................................... 358
Solid................................................. 309
Stairs................................................ 533
Type................................................. 309
Rai sed / Lower ed Regi on
Specification Dialog........................... 712
Ramp
Slope................................................ 549
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1303 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1304
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Specification Dialog........................... 547
Ray Tr ace
Adjust Effects.................................... 936
Adjust Image Properties..................... 936
Aspect Ratio ..................................... 927
Assistant........................................... 932
Bump Maps....................................... 938
Configurations................................... 925
CPU Usage....................................... 120
Create .............................................. 923
Export to POV-Ray............................ 940
Image Size........................................ 927
Multiple Views................................... 939
Options Dialog .................................. 926
Saving Images .................................. 924
Speed, increasing ............................. 939
Window............................................. 924
Rebar
In Foundations .................................. 433
Rebui l d............................................... 459
3D.................................................... 884
Roof Framing.................................... 487
Roofs................................................ 459
Walls/Floors/Ceilings......................... 423
Recent Fi l e Li st ................................... 94
Recessed
Doors ....................................... 358, 363
Windows................................... 379, 393
Rect angul ar Pol yl i ne...................... 1049
Redo ................................................... 246
Reduce Gabl e.................................... 609
Ref er ence
Display Options................................. 426
Grid.................................................... 84
Ref er enced Pl an Fi l es Di al og........ 1202
Ref l ect
About Object..................................... 228
Objects ............................................. 228
Regul ar Pol ygon ............................. 1050
Rel at i ve
to Current Point, new point .............. 1027
Remove
3D.................................................... 874
Backdrop.......................................... 862
Manufacturer Lock............................. 812
Render
Added Lights ..................................... 899
Daytime Ambient ............................... 898
Graphics card.................................... 854
Interior Ambient................................. 898
Light Fixtures .................................... 899
Light Sources .................................... 898
Nighttime Ambient ............................. 899
Preferences....................................... 117
Status ............................................... 121
Tips .................................................. 896
Render i ng Techni ques ..................... 911
Backdrops in..................................... 863
Defaults ............................................ 914
Options ............................................. 914
Painting Styles .................................. 918
Repl ace f r om Li br ar y
Button............................................... 809
Dialog............................................... 809
Repor t St yl e Pr ef er ences ................. 114
REScheck
Export............................................. 1136
Reset
Defaults .............................................. 81
Message Boxes................................... 39
Preferences....................................... 121
Reshape obj ect s ............................... 222
Resi ze
Factor ............................................. 1100
House using Dimensions.................... 973
Objects ............................................. 221
Point to Point................................... 1099
Rest or e
Toolbars............................................ 129
Rest r i ct i ons
Moving objects .................................. 213
Ret ai n
Wall Framing..................................... 300
Ret ai ni ng Wal l ................................... 700
Rever se
Plan.................................................. 229
Rever se Di r ect i on ............................. 229
Revi si on Cl oud
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1304 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1305
Specification Dialog ......................... 1052
Revi si on Cl ouds .............................. 1052
Revi si on Speci f i cat i on Di al og ....... 1208
Revol ve Obj ect ..................................744
Ri ch Text
Border Color ......................................990
Defaults.............................................980
Specification Dialog ...........................986
Text Color..........................................987
Ri ght But t on Def i ni t i on ..................... 31
Ri m Joi st ............................................562
Road
Defaults.............................................727
Marking.............................................730
Median..............................................729
Polyline .............................................729
Specification Dialog ...........................734
Stripe ................................................730
Road Mar ki ng
Specification Dialog ...........................736
Road Obj ect s
Different Types ..................................729
Roads ..................................................729
Convert to Polyline Object ..................733
Curbs ................................................735
Displaying..........................................732
Roof .....................................................453
Automatic ..........................................454
Baseline Polyline ...............................484
Baseline Polyline, Example Using.......485
Baseline, Angled................................481
Baselines...........................................470
Beams...............................................559
Birdsmouth Cut..................................478
Birdsmouth Depth ..............................480
Extend Slope Downward.....................301
Full Gable Wall ..................................301
Groups ..............................................457
Over this room...................................342
Panel.................................................300
Pitches in Degrees.............................511
Second pitch......................................302
Styles, Automatic ...............................457
Tools.................................................456
Truss.................................................592
Truss Details..................................... 597
Truss Specification Dialog ................. 607
Roof Basel i ne
Specification Dialog........................... 485
Roof Beams ....................................... 754
Roof Desi gner ................................... 456
Roof Hol e/Skyl i ght
Specification Dialog........................... 498
Roof Pl ane
Labels .............................................. 471
Specification Dialog........................... 479
Roof Pl anes ............................... 456, 469
Aligning ............................................ 473
Area ................................................. 483
Curved.............................................. 487
Delete............................................... 478
Display ............................................. 471
Edit................................................... 472
Intersections, Locate ......................... 474
J oin.................................................. 474
Low roof planes................................. 464
Move to be Coplanar ......................... 475
Raising/Lowering............................... 475
Roof Tr uss
Specification Dialog........................... 607
Roof s .......................................... 453, 459
Auto Rebuild............................. 459, 461
Auto Roof Return .............................. 302
Automatic vs. Manual ........................ 454
Boxed Eaves..................................... 465
Build Roof Dialog .............................. 460
Crickets ............................................ 502
Defaults ............................................ 455
Dormers............................................ 500
Eaves, aligning.................................. 475
Edit All Roof Planes........................... 457
Energy Heel ...................................... 605
Fix Roofs Tool................................... 457
Framing............................................ 571
Gutters ..................................... 468, 508
Heights ............................................. 479
Hip Trusses ...................................... 603
Hole for skylights............................... 497
Ignore Top Floor................................ 463
Knee walls ........................................ 284
Lock roof planes........................ 464, 478
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1305 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1306
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Manual ............................................. 469
Minimum Alcove Size ........................ 464
Over Alcoves .................................... 496
Over curved walls.............................. 458
Overhang.................................. 462, 469
Pitch......................................... 282, 479
Plumb Cut Eaves............................... 465
Rafter Tails ....................................... 509
Raise off plate................................... 464
Retain edits....................................... 481
Returns............................................. 506
Roof Group....................................... 340
Roof Plane........................................ 456
Sheathing ......................................... 466
Show pitch as degrees ................ 84, 480
Skylights........................................... 497
Soffits............................................... 466
Square Cut Eaves ............................. 465
Step Down Hip.................................. 603
Story-and-a-half ................................ 284
Subgirders ........................................ 604
Trusses ............................................ 462
Upslope Mark.................................... 469
Vertical Rafter Depth......................... 481
Room.................................................. 316
Defaults ............................................ 316
Molding Polylines .............................. 337
Polylines........................................... 337
Specification Dialog........................... 338
Room Label s ..................................... 323
Custom............................................. 323
Defaults ............................................ 316
Dimension Format............................. 996
Display ............................................. 324
Edit................................................... 324
Interior room area.............................. 324
Interior room dimensions ................... 324
Room area........................................ 324
Standard room area........................... 324
Rooms
Area ................................................. 324
Attic.................................................. 321
Auto Place Outlets............................. 322
Below Stairs...................................... 538
Ceiling over....................................... 342
Editing.............................................. 319
Exterior types.................................... 321
Foundation floor definition.................. 342
Interior .............................................. 321
Interior area ...................................... 324
Interior dimensions ............................ 324
Living Area........................................ 322
Name for PlanCheck........................ 1078
Open Below ...................................... 321
Polygon Shaped................................ 262
Roof over .......................................... 342
Room Definition................................. 317
Room Types...................................... 321
Selecting........................................... 317
Standard area ................................... 324
The Exterior Room............................. 318
Types................................................ 321
Rot at e
CAD items......................................... 109
J ump................................................. 109
Plan View.......................................... 228
Rot at e obj ect s ................................... 226
Rough Openi ngs ............................... 566
Round
Garden bed....................................... 698
Pond................................................. 698
Window............................................. 404
Ruby
Console .......................................... 1248
Named Values................................. 1249
Ruby Pr ef er ences ............................... 97
Runni ng Di mensi ons ........................ 961
S
Same
Height Eaves..................................... 463
Roof Height at External Wall .............. 463
Sampl e Pl ans
Download........................................ 1253
Save
3D Views........................................... 885
and Save As........................................ 51
Layout................................................. 52
Materials Lists ................................. 1238
Plan.................................................... 51
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1306 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1307
Plan as Template................................ 79
Plan Thumbnail................................... 55
Saved Def aul t s Di al og ....................... 71
Scal e
Picture Files .................................... 1098
Printing to........................................ 1168
Terrain Data ......................................721
Text Size...........................................998
to Fit ............................................... 1168
Schedul e
Defaults........................................... 1211
Specification Dialog ......................... 1217
Schedul es
Creating .......................................... 1212
Schemat i cs, Wi r i ng ...........................617
Sci ssor s Tr usses...............................607
Scr een Capt ur e Set up Di al og ........ 1101
Scr ol l Bar s .........................................848
Seat
in Bay Window...................................410
Sect i on Vi ews
Create...............................................868
Segment Angl e at Cur ved Wal l ........464
Sel ect
All .....................................................180
Backdrop...........................................862
Components of Blocked Units .............382
Ctrl+Click...........................................179
Fence Select......................................180
Insertion Point ................................. 1060
Library Object Dialog..........................807
Marquee............................................179
Multiple Objects .................................179
Next Object........................................179
Object Parts.......................................178
Objects button ...................................177
Objects in 3D Views ...........................883
Room................................................317
Same Type........................................240
Selected Edge ...................................177
Shift+Click.........................................179
Similar Objects ..................................177
Similar Objects Dialog........................240
Sel ect Col or Di al og ...........................843
Sel ect Layer Di al og .......................... 147
Sel ect i on Fi l l Col or ............................. 88
Send
to Layout Dialog.............................. 1189
Views to layout................................ 1188
Ser vi ce Dat a Tab............................... 620
Set Angul ar Di mensi on Di al og 227, 973
Set as Def aul t ...................................... 70
Set Basel i ne Hei ght Di al og.............. 477
Set up
Screen Capture............................... 1101
Shadows ............................................ 906
Shel f ................................................... 652
Shel f Tool .......................................... 652
Shel f /Par t i t i on
Specification Dialog........................... 681
Shel ves i n Cabi net s ......................... 680
Shi f t Key
Marquee selection............................. 179
Select multiple objects....................... 179
Shor t Ext ensi ons .............................. 955
Shor t cut Keys ............................. 34, 134
Show
Arc Centers....................................... 188
Line Weights ............................. 87, 1167
Living Area.......................................... 84
Pitch as degrees ................................. 84
Sheet.............................................. 1167
Short extensions ............................... 955
Shut t er s ............................................. 407
Si dewal k ............................................ 731
Defaults ............................................ 727
Si dewal kTool s ................................... 729
Si l l Pl at es .......................................... 555
Skyl i ght s .................................... 456, 497
Sl ab
At top of stem wall............................. 432
Foundation........................................ 432
Monolithic,Footings ........................... 304
Specification Dialog........................... 445
Sl abs
and the Materials List ........................ 444
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1307 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1308
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Holes................................................ 443
Interior Footings................................ 439
Slab Tool .......................................... 443
Tools ................................................ 443
Sl i di ng Door s .................................... 349
Sl oped Sof f i t s ................................... 758
Snap Behavi or s................................. 156
Angle Snaps ..................................... 158
Extension Snaps ....................... 112, 157
Grid Snaps.................................. 84, 160
Hotkeys ............................................ 156
Object locations ................................ 157
Object Snaps .................................... 156
Wall Intersections.............................. 158
Snap Pr oper t i es
Preferences ...................................... 109
Sof f i t
Defaults ............................................ 753
Specification Dialog........................... 756
Sof f i t s......................................... 652, 753
Calculating Materials ......................... 755
Corner .............................................. 754
Place under ceiling............................ 758
Place under Roof .............................. 758
Roof ................................................. 466
Sloped.............................................. 758
Special applications........................... 754
Sol i d
Definition.......................................... 743
Specification Dialog........................... 750
Tools ................................................ 739
Space Pl anner
Toolbar Configuration........................ 127
Space Pl anni ng ............................... 1075
Spaci ng
J oists................................................ 564
Wall Framing............................. 565, 833
Speci al
Shaped Cabinets............................... 665
Speci f i cat i on Di al ogs
3D Box ............................................. 745
3D Molding Polyline........................... 642
Arc ................................................. 1042
Architectural Block ............................ 784
Bay/Box Window............................... 412
Board.............................................. 1230
Bow Window..................................... 412
Cabinet............................................. 668
Cabinet Shelf .................................... 680
CAD Block....................................... 1063
CAD Box......................................... 1051
CAD Circle...................................... 1045
CAD Ellipse..................................... 1045
CAD Oval........................................ 1045
Callout ............................................ 1006
Camera............................................. 886
Ceiling Plane..................................... 492
Cone................................................. 748
Corner Boards................................... 629
Cross Section/Elevation Camera ........ 890
Custom Backsplash........................... 761
Custom Countertop............................ 683
Cylinder ............................................ 747
Default Sun Light............................... 911
Dimension Line.................................. 973
Distribution Path................................ 762
Distribution Region............................ 762
Door ................................................. 359
Dormer.............................................. 503
Driveway........................................... 736
Electrical Service............................... 620
Elevation Line ................................... 709
Elevation Point .................................. 708
Elevation Region ............................... 709
Fireplace........................................... 447
Flat Region ....................................... 710
Framing ............................................ 585
Hill / Valley........................................ 711
Image ............................................. 1085
J oist Direction ................................... 578
Layered Material Polyline................... 761
Layout Box...................................... 1197
Library Object.................................... 813
Library Object Button......................... 809
Light ................................................. 903
Line ................................................ 1034
Line Style........................................ 1057
Marker ............................................ 1009
Molding Polyline................................ 641
Plan Footprint.................................. 1068
Plant................................................. 777
Plant Image....................................... 773
Polyline........................................... 1047
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1308 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1309
Polyline Solid.....................................752
Post ..................................................588
Pyramid.............................................749
Quoins ..............................................631
Raised/Lowered Region .....................712
Ramp ................................................547
Revision.......................................... 1208
Revision Cloud................................. 1052
Rich Text...........................................986
Road.................................................734
Road Marking ....................................736
Roof Baseline ....................................485
Roof Hole/Skylight .............................498
Roof Plane.........................................479
Room................................................338
Schedule ......................................... 1217
Shelf/Partition....................................681
Slab ..................................................445
Soffit .................................................756
Solid..................................................750
Sphere ..............................................746
Sprinkler............................................778
Stair Landing.....................................550
Staircase...........................................539
Sun Angle..........................................907
Symbol ............................................ 1139
Terrain ..............................................703
Terrain Break.....................................715
Terrain Feature..................................713
Terrain Path.......................................716
Text...................................................992
Truss Base........................................602
Wall...................................................295
Wall Hatch.........................................314
Window.............................................390
Speed
3D View Generation...........................921
3D views............................................860
Spel l Check ...................................... 1001
Spher e ................................................740
Specification Dialog ...........................746
Spl i nes .............................................. 1054
Advanced Splines ..............................205
Control Handles .................................205
Lock Control Handle Angle .................206
Spl i t
Level Entries......................................424
Level Floor Plans .............................. 424
Walls ................................................ 264
Spot Li ght .......................................... 903
Spr i nkl er
Designer........................................... 777
Specification Dialog........................... 778
Tools ................................................ 777
St acked Wi ndows ............................. 380
St ai r
Landing Specification Dialog.............. 550
Sections Move Independently ............ 103
Tools ................................................ 515
St ai r Desi gner ................................... 515
St ai r Landi ng
Specification Dialog........................... 550
St ai r Landi ngs
Custom Shapes................................. 524
Height............................................... 524
Locked.............................................. 525
St ai r Rai l i ng
Middle Rail........................................ 535
Panels .............................................. 535
Partial............................................... 533
Solid................................................. 534
St ai r Tr eads
Automatic ......................................... 540
Depth ............................................... 541
Lock Number..................................... 540
Lock Tread Depth.............................. 540
Number............................................. 541
Overhang.......................................... 544
Thickness ......................................... 544
St ai r case
Specification Dialog........................... 539
St ai r s
Align Curved Stairs............................ 220
Auto Stairwell.................................... 537
Balusters .......................................... 544
Change Line/Arc ............................... 522
Click................................................. 515
Concrete........................................... 536
Curved...................................... 515, 517
Curved Treads .................................. 530
Deck to ground.................................. 518
Direction........................................... 517
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1309 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1310
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Down................................................ 518
Edit Handles ..................................... 520
Editing.............................................. 520
Flare Radius ..................................... 528
Flared............................................... 527
Handrails .......................................... 547
Landings........................................... 523
Landings, unlocked ........................... 524
Large Stringer Base .......................... 543
Lock Tread Depth.............................. 527
Make Reach...................................... 539
Masonry............................................ 536
Merge Sections ................................. 521
Newels ............................................. 544
Railings ............................................ 533
Reach Next Floor .............................. 539
Rooms Below.................................... 538
Section Width.................................... 541
Stairwell............................................ 536
Starter Treads................................... 530
Straight............................................. 515
Stringers........................................... 542
Stringers, steel.................................. 536
Subsections .............................. 527, 539
Symmetrically Flared......................... 528
Terminology...................................... 515
Tread Depth...................................... 526
Treads.............................................. 539
Walk Line.......................................... 526
Winders .................................... 531, 542
Wrapped........................................... 532
St ai r wel l
Automatic ......................................... 537
St ar t up Opt i ons .................................. 28
St at i c Vi ews..................................... 1191
St at us Bar ...................................... 38, 86
Angle style........................................ 122
St eel
Framing............................................ 583
St em Wal l s......................................... 432
Align................................................. 439
and Footings, Align............................ 439
St epped Foundat i ons ....................... 443
St eppi ng St ones ............................... 699
St i ck Fr ami ng
Mixing with Trusses ........................... 598
St i cky Mode ....................................... 166
St or y-and-a-hal f ................................ 284
St r ai ght
Deck Edge ........................................ 255
Stairs ................................................ 515
St r eams .............................................. 699
St r uct ur al Member Repor t i ng ........ 1228
St ud
Spacing..................................... 565, 833
Thickness.......................................... 565
Subgi r der s ......................................... 604
Sun
Shadows ........................................... 700
Sun Angl e .......................................... 904
Create............................................... 906
Render Data...................................... 909
Specification Dialog........................... 907
Swap
Views................................................ 849
Work-Reference ................................ 428
Swi t ch
Three way......................................... 617
Symbol
Bounding Box.................................. 1155
Bounding box size ........................... 1148
Convert to....................................... 1152
Custom 2D...................................... 1061
Editing Custom................................ 1153
Faces.............................................. 1142
Get Last Symbol .............................. 1152
Insertion point ................................. 1142
Moldings ........................................... 637
Open Symbol .................................. 1139
Options ........................................... 1144
Origin.............................................. 1142
Reset origin..................................... 1142
Resizing.......................................... 1148
Setback space................................. 1155
Smoothing Angle ............................. 1141
Specification Dialog......................... 1139
Surface Normals.............................. 1128
vs. Native Objects.............................. 812
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1310 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1311
T
Tab Key ...............................................179
Tabs
Columns in Text.................................994
Text...................................................994
Tangent
Curved walls......................................281
Make arc, edit button..........................281
Tape Measur e.....................................962
Techni cal Suppor t ................. 1255, 1263
Contact............................................ 1260
Error Messages ............................... 1259
Hardware Lock Issues ...................... 1257
Installation Issues ............................ 1256
Online ............................................. 1261
Online Articles ................................. 1261
Priority ............................................ 1261
Telephone ....................................... 1261
Templ at e Fi l es .................................... 78
Templ at e Layout
Creating ............................................. 80
Templ at e Pl an
Creating ............................................. 79
Tempor ar y
CAD Points...................................... 1026
Dimension Defaults ............................957
Dimensions........................................962
File Directories.................................... 96
Tempor ar y Di mensi ons ....................962
Ter r ai n
and 3D Draw Time .............................702
Auto Rebuild......................................702
Breaks...............................................694
Build..................................................702
Clear .................................................690
Contour Lines ....................................701
Contour Smoothing ............................706
Contours Panel ..................................705
Displaying..........................................701
Editing...............................................702
Elevation Data Tools ..........................690
Feature Tools ....................................696
Flat Region........................................696
Grow All Plants Dialog........................770
Hill.................................................... 696
Holes................................................ 697
Modifier Tools ................................... 695
Specification Dialog........................... 703
Sprinkler Tools.................................. 777
Sun Shadows.................................... 700
Toolbar Configuration................ 126, 688
Valley............................................... 696
Wall and Curb Tools .......................... 699
Ter r ai n Br eak
Specification Dialog........................... 715
Ter r ai n Dat a
Convert CAD Lines to........................ 725
Import............................................... 717
Ter r ai n Feat ur e
Specification Dialog........................... 713
Ter r ai n Feat ur es
Clip................................................... 713
Height............................................... 713
Ter r ai n Model er
3D Views .......................................... 702
Clear Terrain..................................... 690
Ter r ai n Pat h
Specification Dialog........................... 716
Ter r ai n Per i met er .............................. 688
Text
Add to Dimension Label..................... 971
Aligning ............................................ 999
Arrows ............................................ 1002
Bullets .............................................. 988
Character Size .................................. 982
Convert Simple to Rich...................... 998
Copy, Cut and Paste ......................... 999
Creating............................................ 984
Defaults ............................................ 981
Displaying......................................... 985
Edit in Place...................................... 998
Editing.............................................. 996
Layer................................................ 985
Layout ............................................ 1186
Leader Lines ................................... 1003
Line Spacing..................................... 988
Lists ................................................. 988
Macros ........................................... 1014
Maximum Characters......................... 985
Move ................................................ 997
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1311 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1312
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Numbering........................................ 988
Paragraph Options ............................ 988
Printed Size ...................................... 998
Printing........................................... 1169
Reshape........................................... 997
Resize.............................................. 998
Rotate .............................................. 997
Scaling ............................................. 998
Special Characters .......................... 1016
Specification Dialog........................... 992
Spell Check .................................... 1001
Tab Spacing.............................994, 1000
Tabbed Objects............................... 1000
Tables ............................................ 1000
Text Macr o Management ................ 1016
Text Macr os
Contact Info .................................... 1014
Edit User Defined............................ 1018
Exporting........................................ 1019
File Info .......................................... 1015
Importing ........................................ 1019
Plan Info......................................... 1015
Special Characters .......................... 1016
Time and Date ................................ 1016
User Defined................................... 1016
Text St yl e Def aul t s Di al og ............. 1011
Text St yl es....................................... 1011
Text ur e
Filename Conflict Dialog.................. 1133
Panel................................................ 836
Text ur es ............................................. 897
Convert to Materials .......................... 824
Mapping............................................ 825
View................................................. 836
Thumbnai l s .......................................... 55
Creating.............................................. 55
Enable................................................ 95
Size.................................................... 95
Ti l i ng Vi ews ....................................... 850
Ti me Log Di al og.............................. 1072
Ti me Tr acker ................................... 1071
Preferences ...................................... 102
Time Log Dialog.............................. 1072
Ti t l e Bl ocks ..................................... 1206
Tool bar s............................................... 34
Add Tools.......................................... 131
Configurations ................................... 126
Customize......................................... 130
Delete Tools...................................... 128
Drop-Down........................................ 125
Edit..................................................... 34
Hide.................................................. 125
Lock.................................................. 129
Parent-Child...................................... 125
Restore............................................. 129
Tr ansf or m/Repl i cat e Obj ect Di al og 234
Tr ansom Wi ndows ............................ 358
Tr anspar ency
Color............................................... 1088
Tr eat ed
Lumber ............................................. 587
Sill Plates.......................................... 555
Tr i m
Door ................................................. 354
Window............................................. 388
Tr i m Obj ect s ...................................... 236
Tr i mmer s ............................................ 567
Tr uss
Base................................................. 599
Details .............................................. 597
Envelope........................................... 596
Spacing............................................. 575
Tr uss Base
Specification Dialog........................... 602
Tr usses ...................................... 462, 573
Attic trusses ...................................... 605
Ceiling Steps..................................... 606
Copy......................................... 592, 594
Create............................................... 592
Details .............................................. 597
Double.............................................. 604
Drop Hip truss ................................... 609
Edit................................................... 595
End truss .......................................... 609
Energy Heel ...................................... 605
Floor and Ceiling............................... 592
Force Truss Rebuild .......................... 609
Force truss rebuild............................. 611
Girder ............................................... 607
Hip.................................................... 603
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1312 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1313
Hip jack.............................................604
J ack..................................................604
Kingpost............................................608
Labels ...............................................597
Laying out..........................................592
Lock Envelope...................................610
Member Depth...........................608, 611
Mixing with Rafters.............................598
Reduce gable ....................................609
Roof ..................................................592
Scissors ............................................607
Shape, editing....................................596
Spacing.............................................575
Special Snapping...............................610
Step Down Hip...................................603
Subgirders.........................................604
Truss Base........................................599
Webbing....................................608, 611
U
Undo....................................................246
Files................................................... 57
Preferences ........................................ 92
Undo Zoom........................................847
Uni t Conver si ons................................ 99
Unr est r i ct ed Movement ....................213
Updat es
Auto Check......................................... 92
Use Layout Li ne Scal i ng ................ 1190
V
Val l ey ..................................................696
Vaul t ed Cei l i ngs ................................335
Vent s ...................................................380
Vi deo Car d
Memory.............................................854
OpenGL.............................................854
Status................................................121
Vi deos
View Online Help Videos .................. 1252
Vi ew
to CAD............................................ 1066
Vi ews
Static and Dynamic ......................... 1191
Tiling................................................ 850
Vi r t ual Gr aph Paper ............................ 82
Vi r t ual Real i t y Model i ng Language ......
1111
Vi sual CAD Snaps............................... 82
Vol ume
Of a Polyline ................................... 1047
VRML ................................................ 1111
Export............................................. 1111
Textures and Images....................... 1112
W
Wal k Li ne ........................................... 526
Wal kt hr oughs .................................. 1104
Along a Path................................... 1104
Codecs ........................................... 1108
Create Path .................................... 1104
Key Frames .................................... 1105
Pause Recording............................. 1107
Playing ........................................... 1108
Recording....................................... 1107
Save Frame .................................... 1107
Stop Recording ............................... 1107
VRML ............................................. 1111
Wal l
Assemblies ....................................... 288
Blocking............................................ 566
Cabinets ........................................... 652
Defaults ............................................ 249
Detail Views...................................... 581
Elevation........................................... 864
Layer Fill Style.................................. 294
Specification Dialog........................... 295
Tools ................................................ 253
Type Definitions Dialog...................... 291
Types Tab......................................... 305
Wal l Hat ch
Specification Dialog........................... 314
Wal l Type Def i ni t i ons Di al og........... 291
Wal l s
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1313 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1314
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
Align between floors .......................... 280
Align colinear .................................... 279
Align pony walls ................................ 252
and Material Painter .......................... 820
Attic Walls......................................... 284
CAD to Walls .................................... 287
Compound Raked.............................. 286
Connecting ....................................... 267
Curved.............................................. 266
Curved, align between floors.............. 280
Delete hatching................................. 263
Dimensioning to ................................ 290
Display surfaces only......................... 268
Double walls ..................................... 286
Drawing............................................ 264
Editing.............................................. 272
Exporting Definitions ......................... 295
Exterior and Interior........................... 257
Fill styles .......................................... 294
Fix Connections ................................ 267
Flip layers......................................... 265
Footing size ...................................... 304
Foundation........................................ 258
Foundation thickness......................... 303
Framing............................................ 565
Framing Detail Views......................... 581
Framing Layer................................... 289
Full Gable Wall.................................. 301
Furred Walls ..................................... 287
Grid snapping ................................... 265
Half .................................................. 309
Half Walls ......................................... 253
Hatching........................................... 263
Heated Area...................................... 270
Heights ............................................. 275
Importing Definitions.......................... 295
Interior, fireplace in ........................... 447
Invisible............................................ 261
Knee Wall ......................................... 301
Layer fill style.................................... 294
Layers .............................................. 289
Layers, Resize About ........................ 249
Length.............................................. 275
Main Layer........................................ 289
Make Arc Tangent............................. 281
Marriage walls................................... 286
Materials........................................... 269
Move Along Rails .............................. 273
No Locate ......................................... 297
No Room Def .................................... 297
Opening with Railing.......................... 358
Openings in....................................... 265
Pony Wall.......................................... 260
Pony wall height ................................ 251
Raked............................................... 285
Removing Breaks .............................. 268
Resizing Using Dimensions................ 973
Retain wall framing............................ 300
Retaining Wall ................................... 700
Reverse Layers ................................. 265
Roofs over curved ............................. 458
Same Wall Type handles ................... 277
Show length when editing .................. 249
Show lower pony wall ........................ 252
Solid Railings .................................... 309
Split.................................................. 260
Stepped............................................ 285
Thickness.......................................... 274
Wall Coverings .................................. 306
Widths, Dimensioning........................ 974
Wat er Feat ur es .................................. 698
Wat er Pr oof Out l et ............................ 615
Webbi ng
Thickness.......................................... 611
Wi nder s ...................................... 531, 542
Definition........................................... 515
Wi ndow
Casing.............................................. 388
Casing, reveal ................................... 395
Defaults ............................................ 376
Seat.................................................. 410
Specification Dialog........................... 390
Trim.................................................. 388
Wi ndows
Bay and Bow dimensions ................... 408
Bay, Box, Bow................................... 408
Bench Seat ....................................... 410
Component ............................... 377, 409
Corner .............................................. 378
Custom Muntins................................. 388
Custom Symbols ............................... 379
Egress .............................................. 392
Framing ............................................ 566
Gables Over...................................... 494
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1314 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1315
Labels ...............................................386
Levels ...............................................383
Library...............................................378
Load Muntins .....................................388
Make Mulled Unit ...............................381
Match roof .........................................402
Minimum Separation ..........................376
Mulled Units.......................................380
Mullions.............................................399
Muntins .............................................399
Opening Indicators.............................386
Pass-Through....................................378
Recessed ..................................379, 393
Shape ...............................................401
Shutters.............................................407
Special Shapes..................................379
Stacked.............................................380
Stained glass material ........................380
Standard ...........................................377
Transom............................................358
Trapezoid..........................................401
Treatments ........................................405
Types ................................................376
Vents.................................................380
Wi ndows Met af i l es .......................... 1092
Wi r i ng Schemat i cs, Cr eat i ng ...........617
Wr apped
Openings...........................................357
Stairs ................................................532
Z
Zer o
in Dimensions ....................................948
Zoom ...................................................847
Fill Window........................................848
Mouse Wheel...............................31, 847
Tools.................................................847
Undo Zoom........................................847
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1315 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1316
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1316 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1317
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1317 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM
1318
Chief Architect X6 Reference Manual
chief-architect-x6-reference-manual.book Page 1318 Monday, December 16, 2013 3:09 PM